Technical Manual, Bay Control REC670 Version 2.2 IEC

Relion® 670 SERIES
Bay control REC670

Version 2.2 IEC
Technical manual
Document ID: 1MRK 511 402-UEN
Issued: June 2021
Revision: N
Product version: 2.2
© 2017 - 2021 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from
Hitachi Power Grids, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any
unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used
or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(https://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric
Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Trademarks
ABB is a registered trademark of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Manufactured by/for a Hitachi Power
Grids company. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest Hitachi Power Grids representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each
intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other
operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system
failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not
limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying
the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken
to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by Hitachi Power Grids but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall Hitachi Power
Grids be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits
(Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by Hitachi Power
Grids in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the
product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
1MRK 511 402-UEN Rev. N Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction..................................................................................................41
1.1 This manual.........................................................................................................................41
1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data.......................................................................................41
1.2 Intended audience...............................................................................................................41
1.3 Product documentation....................................................................................................... 42
1.3.1 Product documentation set................................................................................................42
1.3.2 Document revision history................................................................................................. 43
1.3.3 Related documents........................................................................................................... 44
1.4 Document symbols and conventions...................................................................................44
1.4.1 Symbols.............................................................................................................................44
1.4.2 Document conventions......................................................................................................45
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping............................................................................. 47
Section 2 Available functions...................................................................................... 53

2.1 Main protection functions.................................................................................................... 53
2.2 Back-up protection functions............................................................................................... 53
2.3 Control and monitoring functions.........................................................................................55
2.4 Communication................................................................................................................... 63
2.5 Basic IED functions............................................................................................................. 66
Section 3 Analog inputs...............................................................................................69

3.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................69
3.2 Function block..................................................................................................................... 69
3.3 Signals.................................................................................................................................69
3.4 Settings............................................................................................................................... 71
3.5 Monitored data.................................................................................................................... 78
3.6 Operation principle.............................................................................................................. 78
3.7 Technical data..................................................................................................................... 79
Section 4 Binary input and output modules.............................................................. 81

4.1 Binary input......................................................................................................................... 81
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter...............................................................................................81
4.1.2 Oscillation filter.................................................................................................................. 81
4.1.3 Settings............................................................................................................................. 81
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules............................................................... 81
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module...................................................... 82
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ......................................................83

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour................................................................................................83
5.1.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 83
5.1.2 Settings............................................................................................................................. 83
5.2 Local HMI signals................................................................................................................ 83
Bay control REC670 1

Technical manual
Table of contents 1MRK 511 402-UEN Rev. N
5.2.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 83
5.2.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 83
5.2.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................84
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module.................................................................................. 84
5.3.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 84
5.3.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 84
5.3.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................85
5.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................................. 85
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module ..................................................................86
5.4.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 86
5.4.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 86
5.4.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................86
5.4.4 Settings............................................................................................................................. 87
5.5 Operation principle.............................................................................................................. 88
5.5.1 Local HMI.......................................................................................................................... 88
5.5.1.1 Keypad......................................................................................................................... 89
5.5.1.2 Display......................................................................................................................... 91
5.5.1.3 LEDs............................................................................................................................ 93
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives.......................................................................................... 94
5.5.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 94
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs................................................................................................................. 94
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs............................................................................................................ 95
5.5.3 Function keys.................................................................................................................. 102
5.5.3.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 102
5.5.3.2 Operation principle .................................................................................................... 102
5.5.3.3 Enabling and Disabling Authority on Function keys................................................... 103
Section 6 Wide area measurement system.............................................................. 105

6.1 IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol
Configuration PMUCONF..................................................................................................105
6.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 105
6.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 105
6.1.3 Operation principle.......................................................................................................... 105
6.1.3.1 IEEE C37.118 Message Framework.......................................................................... 106
6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of TCP...................................................................................106
6.1.3.3 Short guidance for use of UDP.................................................................................. 107
6.1.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 109
6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) PMUREPORT..... 111
6.2.1 Identification.....................................................................................................................111
6.2.2 Functionality ....................................................................................................................111
6.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 113
6.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................115
6.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................................118
6.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 129
6.2.7.1 Frequency reporting................................................................................................... 134
6.2.7.2 Reporting filters.......................................................................................................... 135
2 Bay control REC670

Technical manual
6.2.7.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels.......................................................136

6.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 137
Section 7 Differential protection............................................................................... 139

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF .........................................139
7.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 139
7.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 139
7.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 139
7.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................139
7.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 140
7.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 140
7.1.7.1 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................142
7.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 142
Section 8 Impedance protection............................................................................... 145

8.1 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF .................................................................... 145
8.1.1 Function revision history..................................................................................................145
8.1.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 145
8.1.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 145
8.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 146
8.1.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................146
8.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 146
8.1.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 147
8.1.8 Operation principle ......................................................................................................... 147
8.1.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 148
Section 9 Current protection..................................................................................... 149

9.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC ..................................................... 149
9.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 149
9.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 149
9.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 149
9.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................149
9.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 150
9.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 150
9.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 151
9.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC ..................................... 151
9.2.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 152
9.2.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 152
9.2.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 153
9.2.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................153
9.2.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 155
9.2.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 160
9.2.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 166

Technical manual
9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ...................................................167

9.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 167
9.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 167
9.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 167
9.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................167
9.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 168
9.3.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 168
9.3.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 169
9.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC ................................... 170
9.4.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 170
9.4.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 170
9.4.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 171
9.4.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................171
9.4.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 172
9.4.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 178
9.4.8.1 Operating quantity within the function........................................................................ 179
9.4.8.2 Internal polarizing.......................................................................................................179
9.4.8.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function..................................................................181
9.4.8.4 Directional detection for earth fault function ..............................................................181
9.4.8.5 Base quantities within the protection..........................................................................181
9.4.8.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure...................................................................... 182
9.4.8.7 Four residual overcurrent steps................................................................................. 182
9.4.8.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function...... 183
9.4.8.9 Second harmonic blocking element........................................................................... 185
9.4.8.10 Switch on to fault feature............................................................................................187
9.4.8.11 Phase selection element............................................................................................ 189
9.4.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 190
9.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC .........190
9.5.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 191
9.5.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 191
9.5.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 192
9.5.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................192
9.5.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 193
9.5.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 197
9.5.8.1 Operating quantity within the function........................................................................ 198
9.5.8.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function.................................................................... 198
9.5.8.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function....................................................199
9.5.8.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure........................................................ 199
9.5.8.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages..............................................................199
9.5.8.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function...... 200
9.5.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 202

Technical manual
9.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE ....................203
9.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 203
9.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 203
9.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 205
9.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................205
9.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 206
9.6.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 208
9.6.7.1 Function inputs...........................................................................................................208
9.6.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 214
9.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR..215
9.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 215
9.7.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 215
9.7.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 216
9.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................216
9.7.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 217
9.7.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 218
9.7.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 222
9.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ..............................................222
9.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 222
9.8.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 222
9.8.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 223
9.8.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................223
9.8.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 223
9.8.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 225
9.8.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 229
9.9 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF ................................................................................. 229
9.9.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 230
9.9.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 230
9.9.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 230
9.9.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................231
9.9.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 231
9.9.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 233
9.9.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 238
9.10 Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................................................... 238
9.10.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 239
9.10.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 239
9.10.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 239
9.10.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................239
9.10.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 240
9.10.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 240

Technical manual

9.10.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 241
9.11 Overcurrent protection with binary release BRPTOC........................................................241
9.11.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 242
9.11.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 242
9.11.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 242
9.11.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................242
9.11.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 243
9.11.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 243
9.11.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 244
9.12 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC..............................................................................245
9.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 245
9.12.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 246
9.12.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 246
9.12.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................246
9.12.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 247
9.12.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 247
9.12.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker ........................................................249
9.12.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection................................................................................250
9.12.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 250
9.13 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP..................................................................250
9.13.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 250
9.13.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 250
9.13.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 251
9.13.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................252
9.13.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 252
9.13.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 253
9.13.7.1 Low pass filtering....................................................................................................... 255
9.13.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs........................................................................................256
9.13.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 257
9.14 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ...................................................................257
9.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 257
9.14.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 257
9.14.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 258
9.14.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................258
9.14.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 259
9.14.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 260
9.14.7.1 Low pass filtering....................................................................................................... 262
9.14.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs........................................................................................262
9.14.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 263
9.15 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ................................................................................ 263

Technical manual

9.15.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 264
9.15.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 264
9.15.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 264
9.15.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................264
9.15.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 265
9.15.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 265
9.15.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 266
9.16 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC...............................................................................267
9.16.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 267
9.16.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 267
9.16.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 267
9.16.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................268
9.16.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 269
9.16.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 270
9.16.7.1 Measured quantities...................................................................................................270
9.16.7.2 Reconnection inhibit feature.......................................................................................272
9.16.7.3 Overcurrent feature.................................................................................................... 273
9.16.7.4 Undercurrent feature.................................................................................................. 274
9.16.7.5 Capacitor harmonic overload feature......................................................................... 274
9.16.7.6 Capacitor reactive power overload feature................................................................ 276
9.16.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 276
9.17 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC ................................................ 277
9.17.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 277
9.17.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 277
9.17.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 277
9.17.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................278
9.17.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 278
9.17.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 279
9.17.7.1 Measured quantities...................................................................................................279
9.17.7.2 Base quantities...........................................................................................................279
9.17.7.3 Overcurrent protection............................................................................................... 280
9.17.7.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................281
9.17.7.5 Undervoltage protection............................................................................................. 282
9.17.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 282
9.18 Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection, APPTEF.............................................. 283
9.18.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 283
9.18.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 283
9.18.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 284
9.18.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................284
9.18.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 285
9.18.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 286

Technical manual
9.18.7.1 Fundamental frequency signals behavior during an EF in a high-impedance

grounded system........................................................................................................288
9.18.7.2 Higher harmonic signals behavior during an EF in a high-impedance grounded
system........................................................................................................................292
9.18.7.3 Summary of the measurement principle for transient EF protection.......................... 294
9.18.7.4 Simplified Boolean logic diagrams ............................................................................ 295
Section 10 Voltage protection..................................................................................... 299

10.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ...................................................................299
10.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 299
10.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 299
10.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 299
10.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................300
10.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 301
10.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 303
10.1.7.1 Measurement principle...............................................................................................303
10.1.7.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................304
10.1.7.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................309
10.1.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 310
10.1.8 Technical data..................................................................................................................311
10.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV .....................................................................311
10.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 311
10.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV ................................................................................................. 311
10.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 312
10.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................312
10.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 313
10.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 315
10.2.7.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................316
10.2.7.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................321
10.2.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 321
10.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 322
10.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................................................... 323
10.3.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 323
10.3.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 323
10.3.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 324
10.3.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................324
10.3.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 324
10.3.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 326
10.3.8.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................327
10.3.8.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................332
10.3.8.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 332

Technical manual
10.3.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 333

10.4 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV .........................................................................333
10.4.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 334
10.4.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 334
10.4.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 334
10.4.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................334
10.4.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 335
10.4.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 335
10.4.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 337
10.5 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................................................... 337
10.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 337
10.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 337
10.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 337
10.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................338
10.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 338
10.5.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 340
Section 11 Unbalance protection................................................................................ 341

11.1 Shunt capacitor cascading failure protection SCCFPVOC ...............................................341
11.1.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 341
11.1.3 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 341
11.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 342
11.1.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................342
11.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 343
11.1.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 344
11.1.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 348
11.2 Current unbalance protection of SCB, SCUCPTOC......................................................... 349
11.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 349
11.2.2 Functionality Functionality............................................................................................... 349
11.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 352
11.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................352
11.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 354
11.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 355
11.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 364
11.3 Phase voltage differential based capacitor bank unbalanced protection, SCPDPTOV.....364
11.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 364
11.3.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 364
11.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 365
11.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................366
11.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 367

Technical manual
11.3.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 368

11.3.7.1 Voltage ratio calculation and trigger update............................................................... 370
11.3.7.2 Differential voltage calculation................................................................................... 371
11.3.7.3 Minimum voltage check..............................................................................................374
11.3.7.4 Warning, Alarm, and Trip logic................................................................................... 374
11.3.7.5 Blocking logic............................................................................................................. 377
11.3.7.6 IEC 61850 reporting................................................................................................... 377
11.3.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 379
11.4 Voltage unbalance protection of shunt capacitor bank, SCUVPTOV................................ 380
11.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 380
11.4.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 380
11.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 381
11.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................381
11.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 382
11.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 383
11.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 391
Section 12 Frequency protection................................................................................ 393

12.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF ................................................................................393
12.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 393
12.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 393
12.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 393
12.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................393
12.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 394
12.1.6.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................395
12.1.6.3 Voltage dependent time delay....................................................................................395
12.1.6.4 Blocking......................................................................................................................396
12.1.6.5 Design........................................................................................................................ 397
12.1.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 398
12.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ..................................................................................398
12.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 399
12.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 399
12.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 399
12.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................399
12.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 400
12.2.6.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................400
12.2.6.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................401
12.2.6.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 401
12.2.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 402
12.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC ........................................................... 402

Technical manual
12.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 402

12.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 403
12.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 403
12.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................403
12.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 404
12.3.6.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................404
12.3.6.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................405
12.3.6.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 405
12.3.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 406
12.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR .......................................... 408
12.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 408
12.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 408
12.4.3 Function block ................................................................................................................ 408
12.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................409
12.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 409
12.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 410
Section 13 Multipurpose protection............................................................................415

13.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC.............................................................415
13.1.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 415
13.1.3 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 415
13.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 416
13.1.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................416
13.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 417
13.1.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 424
13.1.8.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC........................................................................ 425
13.1.8.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................................................426
13.1.8.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps...........................................................................427
13.1.8.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps........................................................................ 431
13.1.8.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps.......................................................................... 431
13.1.8.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps........................................................................ 432
13.1.8.7 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................432
13.1.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 436
Section 14 System protection and control.................................................................439

14.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC.......................................................................................... 439
14.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 439
14.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 439
14.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 439
14.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................439
14.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 440

Technical manual
14.1.7 Filter calculation example................................................................................................443
Section 15 Secondary system supervision................................................................445

15.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC ............................................................................. 445
15.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 445
15.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 445
15.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 445
15.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................445
15.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 446
15.1.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 447
15.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................................................448
15.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 448
15.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 448
15.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 448
15.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................449
15.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 449
15.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 450
15.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection...................................................................... 450
15.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection...................................................................452
15.2.7.3 Dead line detection.................................................................................................... 455
15.2.7.4 Main logic................................................................................................................... 456
15.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 459
15.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC.....................................................................................459
15.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 459
15.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 459
15.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 460
15.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................460
15.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 460
15.3.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 461
15.3.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 462
15.4 Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC....................................................................463
15.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 463
15.4.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 463
15.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 463
15.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................463
15.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 464
15.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 465
15.4.7.1 Minimum signal level check....................................................................................... 465
15.4.7.2 Mode of operation...................................................................................................... 465
15.4.7.3 Instantaneous 1 cycle / 2 cycle ................................................................................. 466
15.4.7.4 RMS/DFT based supervision..................................................................................... 466
15.4.7.5 Angle based supervision or vector shift supervision.................................................. 467

Technical manual
15.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 468

15.5 Current based delta supervision DELISPVC.....................................................................468
15.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 468
15.5.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 468
15.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 469
15.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................469
15.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 470
15.5.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 470
15.5.7.1 Minimum signal level check....................................................................................... 471
15.5.7.2 Mode of operation...................................................................................................... 471
15.5.7.3 Instantaneous 1 cycle / 2 cycle ................................................................................. 471
15.5.7.4 RMS/DFT based supervision..................................................................................... 472
15.5.7.5 2nd Harmonic blocking................................................................................................472
15.5.7.6 3rd Harmonic based adaption.....................................................................................473
15.5.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 474
15.6 Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC......................................................................... 474
15.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 474
15.6.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 474
15.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 474
15.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................475
15.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 475
Section 16 Control........................................................................................................ 477

16.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN......................................477
16.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 477
16.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 477
16.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 478
16.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................478
16.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 480
16.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 482
16.1.7.1 Basic functionality...................................................................................................... 483
16.1.7.2 Logic diagrams...........................................................................................................483
16.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 493
16.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation SMBRREC ....................... 494
16.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 495
16.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 495
16.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 495
16.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................496
16.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 497
16.2.6.1 Terminology explanation............................................................................................ 498
16.2.6.2 Status descriptions.....................................................................................................498
16.2.6.3 Description of the status transition............................................................................. 499

Technical manual
16.2.6.4 Functional sequence description................................................................................500

16.2.6.5 Time sequence diagrams........................................................................................... 510
16.2.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 513
16.3 Interlocking ....................................................................................................................... 513
16.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 513
16.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO ...............................................................................516
16.3.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 516
16.3.3.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 516
16.3.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 516
16.3.3.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 516
16.3.3.5 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................517
16.3.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .............................................................. 517
16.3.4.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 517
16.3.4.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 517
16.3.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 518
16.3.4.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................518
16.3.4.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 518
16.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS................................................................519
16.3.5.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 519
16.3.5.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 519
16.3.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 520
16.3.5.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................520
16.3.5.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 521
16.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ...................................................... 522
16.3.6.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 522
16.3.6.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 523
16.3.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 523
16.3.6.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................524
16.3.6.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 524
16.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ......................................................................525
16.3.7.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 525
16.3.7.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 525
16.3.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 526
16.3.7.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................527
16.3.7.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 529
16.3.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ...........................................................................................531
16.3.8.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 531
16.3.8.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 531
16.3.8.3 Function blocks.......................................................................................................... 533
16.3.8.4 Logic diagrams...........................................................................................................535
16.3.8.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 538
16.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB ................................................................................. 542
16.3.9.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 543
16.3.9.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 543
16.3.9.3 Logic diagrams...........................................................................................................544

Technical manual
16.3.9.4 Function block............................................................................................................ 547

16.3.9.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 548
16.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ................................................................................ 551
16.3.10.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 551
16.3.10.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 551
16.3.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 552
16.3.10.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................553
16.3.10.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 558
16.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ..................................................................560
16.3.11.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 560
16.3.11.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 560
16.3.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 561
16.3.11.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................562
16.3.11.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 563
16.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL.......................................................................................565
16.3.12.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 565
16.3.12.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 565
16.3.12.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 565
16.3.12.4 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................565
16.3.12.5 Signals....................................................................................................................... 566
16.4 Apparatus control.............................................................................................................. 566
16.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 566
16.4.4 Error handling..................................................................................................................567
16.4.5 Bay control QCBAY......................................................................................................... 570
16.4.5.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 571
16.4.5.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 571
16.4.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 571
16.4.5.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 571
16.4.5.5 Operation principle..................................................................................................... 572
16.4.6 Local/Remote switch LOCREM.......................................................................................573
16.4.6.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 574
16.4.6.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 574
16.4.6.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 575
16.4.7 Switch controller SCSWI................................................................................................. 576
16.4.7.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 576
16.4.7.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 577
16.4.7.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 577
16.4.7.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 579
16.4.8 Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................................................584
16.4.8.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 584
16.4.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 584
16.4.8.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 585

Technical manual
16.4.8.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 586

16.4.9 Circuit switch SXSWI.......................................................................................................589
16.4.9.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 590
16.4.9.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 590
16.4.9.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 590
16.4.9.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 591
16.4.10 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY ................................. 595
16.4.10.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 595
16.4.10.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 595
16.4.10.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 595
16.4.10.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 596
16.4.10.6 Position supervision................................................................................................... 597
16.4.10.7 Command response evaluation................................................................................. 597
16.4.11 Bay reserve QCRSV....................................................................................................... 598
16.4.11.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 598
16.4.11.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 599
16.4.11.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 599
16.4.11.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 600
16.4.12 Reservation input RESIN................................................................................................ 602
16.4.12.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 602
16.4.12.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 602
16.4.12.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 602
16.4.12.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 603
16.5 Voltage control...................................................................................................................605
16.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 605
16.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 606
16.5.3 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC ........................... 606
16.5.4 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC ........... 615
16.5.5 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC.................... 618
16.5.6 Function block................................................................................................................. 621
16.5.7 Signals.............................................................................................................................623
16.5.8 Settings........................................................................................................................... 629
16.5.9 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 636
16.5.11 Technical data................................................................................................................. 638
16.6 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC...................639
16.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 639
16.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 639
16.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 640

Technical manual
16.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................640
16.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 641
16.6.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 642
16.6.7.1 Graphical display........................................................................................................642
16.7 Selector mini switch VSGAPC...........................................................................................643
16.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 643
16.7.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 643
16.7.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 644
16.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................644
16.7.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 644
16.8 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC............................645
16.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 645
16.8.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 645
16.8.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 646
16.8.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................646
16.8.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 646
16.9 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................................................... 647
16.9.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 647
16.9.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 647
16.9.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 647
16.9.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................647
16.9.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 648
16.10 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS............................................. 649
16.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 649
16.10.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 649
16.10.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 649
16.10.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................650
16.10.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 651
16.11 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................................................... 651
16.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 651
16.11.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 651
16.11.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 652
16.11.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................652
16.11.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 653
Section 17 Scheme communication........................................................................... 655

17.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH ............... 655
17.1.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 655
17.1.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 655

Technical manual
17.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 656

17.1.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................656
17.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 657
17.1.7.1 Blocking scheme........................................................................................................ 657
17.1.7.2 Delta blocking scheme............................................................................................... 658
17.1.7.3 Permissive underreaching scheme............................................................................ 659
17.1.7.4 Permissive overreaching scheme.............................................................................. 659
17.1.7.5 Unblocking scheme....................................................................................................659
17.1.7.6 Intertrip scheme......................................................................................................... 660
17.1.7.7 Simplified logic diagram............................................................................................. 660
17.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 661
17.2 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance protection 3-phase
ZCRWPSCH .....................................................................................................................662
17.2.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 662
17.2.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 662
17.2.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 663
17.2.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................663
17.2.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 664
17.2.7.1 Current reversal logic................................................................................................. 664
17.2.7.2 Weak-end infeed logic................................................................................................665
17.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 666
17.3 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH.................................................................................666
17.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 666
17.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 667
17.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 667
17.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................667
17.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 668
17.3.6.1 Zone extension...........................................................................................................668
17.3.6.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration..........................................................................................669
17.4 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH ....................670
17.4.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 670
17.4.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 670
17.4.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 671
17.4.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................671
17.4.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 672
17.4.7.1 Blocking scheme........................................................................................................ 672
17.4.7.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme.................................................................... 673
17.4.7.3 Unblocking scheme....................................................................................................674
17.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 675

Technical manual
17.5 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH..................................................................................................................... 675
17.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 675
17.5.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 675
17.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 676
17.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................676
17.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 677
17.5.6.1 Directional comparison logic function.........................................................................677
17.5.6.2 Fault current reversal logic.........................................................................................677
17.5.6.3 Weak-end infeed logic................................................................................................678
17.5.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 679
Section 18 Logic........................................................................................................... 681

18.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC ..................................................................................................681
18.1.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 681
18.1.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 681
18.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 682
18.1.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................682
18.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 683
18.1.7.1 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................687
18.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 690
18.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC.............................................................................. 691
18.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 691
18.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 691
18.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 691
18.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................691
18.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 692
18.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC.............................................................................................. 696
18.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 696
18.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 696
18.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 697
18.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................697
18.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 698
18.3.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 700
18.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH...................................................................................... 700
18.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 700
18.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 700
18.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 701
18.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................701
18.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 702
18.4.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 702

Technical manual
18.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................................................702

18.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 702
18.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 702
18.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 703
18.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................703
18.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 704
18.5.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 704
18.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH................................................................................. 704
18.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 704
18.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 704
18.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 705
18.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................705
18.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 706
18.6.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 706
18.7 Basic configurable logic blocks......................................................................................... 706
18.7.1 AND function block AND................................................................................................. 707
18.7.1.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 707
18.7.1.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 707
18.7.1.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 708
18.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE............................................................................708
18.7.2.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 708
18.7.2.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 708
18.7.2.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 708
18.7.2.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 709
18.7.3 Inverter function block INV.............................................................................................. 709
18.7.3.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 709
18.7.3.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 709
18.7.3.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 709
18.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD........................................................................................ 709
18.7.4.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 709
18.7.4.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 710
18.7.4.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 710
18.7.5 OR function block............................................................................................................710
18.7.5.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 710
18.7.5.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 710
18.7.5.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 711
18.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER........................................................................711
18.7.6.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 711
18.7.6.2 Signals........................................................................................................................711
18.7.6.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 711
18.7.6.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 712
18.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY...................................................... 712
18.7.7.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 712
18.7.7.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 712

Technical manual
18.7.7.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 713

18.7.7.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 713
18.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY....................................................... 713
18.7.8.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 713
18.7.8.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 713
18.7.8.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 714
18.7.8.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 714
18.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET........................................................................ 714
18.7.9.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 714
18.7.9.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 715
18.7.9.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 715
18.7.9.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 715
18.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR................................................................................... 715
18.7.10.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 715
18.7.10.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 716
18.7.10.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 716
18.8 Configurable logic blocks Q/T .......................................................................................... 716
18.8.1 ANDQT function block.....................................................................................................717
18.8.1.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 717
18.8.1.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 717
18.8.1.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 718
18.8.2 Single point indication related signals combining function block INDCOMBSPQT......... 718
18.8.2.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 718
18.8.2.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 718
18.8.2.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 719
18.8.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block INDEXTSPQT.................. 719
18.8.3.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 719
18.8.3.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 719
18.8.3.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 720
18.8.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT...........................................................................720
18.8.4.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 720
18.8.4.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 720
18.8.4.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 721
18.8.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT............................................................................. 721
18.8.5.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 722
18.8.5.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 722
18.8.5.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 722
18.8.6 ORQT function block....................................................................................................... 722
18.8.6.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 722
18.8.6.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 722
18.8.6.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 723
18.8.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.................................................................. 723
18.8.7.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 723
18.8.7.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 723
18.8.7.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 724
18.8.7.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 724

Technical manual
18.8.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT...................................................................... 724

18.8.8.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 724
18.8.8.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 725
18.8.8.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 725
18.8.8.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 725
18.8.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT...................................................................... 725
18.8.9.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 726
18.8.9.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 726
18.8.9.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 726
18.8.9.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 726
18.8.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT................................................................... 726
18.8.10.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 727
18.8.10.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 727
18.8.10.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 727
18.8.10.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 727
18.8.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT.............................................................................. 727
18.8.11.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 728
18.8.11.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 728
18.8.11.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 728
18.9 Extension logic package....................................................................................................728
18.10 Fixed signals FXDSIGN.................................................................................................... 729
18.10.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 729
18.10.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 729
18.10.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................730
18.10.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 730
18.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I............................................................................. 730
18.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 730
18.11.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 730
18.11.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 731
18.11.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................731
18.11.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 732
18.11.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 732
18.11.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 733
18.12 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC............733
18.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 733
18.12.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 733
18.12.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 733
18.12.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................734
18.12.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 734
18.12.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 734
18.12.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 735
18.13 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16..............................................................................735
18.13.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 735

Technical manual
18.13.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 735

18.13.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 736
18.13.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................736
18.13.5 Setting parameters .........................................................................................................737
18.13.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 738
18.14 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC.................... 738
18.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 738
18.14.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 738
18.14.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 738
18.14.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................739
18.14.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 739
18.14.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 740
18.15 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC.......741
18.15.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 741
18.15.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 741
18.15.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 741
18.15.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................742
18.15.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 742
18.15.6.1 Operation accuracy.................................................................................................... 743
18.15.6.2 Memory storage......................................................................................................... 744
18.15.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 744
18.16 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP.......................................................................... 744
18.16.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 744
18.16.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 744
18.16.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 744
18.16.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................745
18.16.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 745
18.16.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 745
18.17 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP........................................................................... 746
18.17.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 746
18.17.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 746
18.17.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 746
18.17.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................747
18.17.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 747
18.17.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 748
18.18 Hold maximum and minimum of input HOLDMINMAX......................................................748
18.18.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 748
18.18.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 748
18.18.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 749
18.18.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................749

Technical manual
18.19 Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL...........................................................................749

18.19.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 749
18.19.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 749
18.19.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 749
18.19.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................750
18.20 Definable constant for logic function CONST_INT............................................................ 750
18.20.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 750
18.20.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 750
18.20.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 750
18.20.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................750
18.20.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 750
18.21 Analog input selector for integer values INTSEL...............................................................751
18.21.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 751
18.21.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 751
18.21.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 751
18.21.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................751
18.22 Definable limiter LIMITER................................................................................................. 752
18.22.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 752
18.22.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 752
18.22.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 752
18.22.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................753
18.22.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 753
18.23 Absolute value ABS...........................................................................................................753
18.23.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 753
18.23.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 753
18.23.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 753
18.23.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................754
18.24 Polar to rectangular converter POL_REC......................................................................... 754
18.24.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 754
18.24.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 754
18.24.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 754
18.24.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................754
18.25 Radians to degree angle converter RAD_DEG.................................................................755
18.25.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 755
18.25.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 755
18.25.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 755
18.25.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................755
18.25.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 755
18.26 Definable constant for logic function CONST_REAL........................................................ 756
18.26.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 756
18.26.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 756
18.26.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 756
18.26.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................756
18.26.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................756
18.27 Analog input selector for real values REALSEL................................................................ 756
18.27.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 756

Technical manual
18.27.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 757

18.27.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 757
18.27.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................757
18.28 Store value for integer inputs STOREINT......................................................................... 758
18.28.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 758
18.28.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 758
18.28.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 758
18.28.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................758
18.29 Store value for real inputs STOREREAL...........................................................................759
18.29.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 759
18.29.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 759
18.29.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 759
18.29.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................759
18.30 Degree to radians angle converter DEG_RAD..................................................................759
18.30.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 759
18.30.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 760
18.30.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 760
18.30.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................760
18.30.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 760
Section 19 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 761

19.1 Measurements...................................................................................................................761
19.1.3 Identification.................................................................................................................... 761
19.1.4 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 762
19.1.5 Function block................................................................................................................. 763
19.1.6 Signals.............................................................................................................................764
19.1.7 Settings........................................................................................................................... 767
19.1.8 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 778
19.1.9.1 Measurement supervision.......................................................................................... 780
19.1.9.2 Measurements CVMMXN.......................................................................................... 784
19.1.9.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU....................................................................... 788
19.1.9.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU.......... 789
19.1.9.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI................................ 789
19.1.10 Technical data................................................................................................................. 789
19.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG...................................................................................... 791
19.2.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 791
19.2.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 791
19.2.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 791
19.2.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................792
19.2.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 792
19.2.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 793

Technical manual
19.2.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 794

19.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML ................................................................................... 795
19.3.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 795
19.3.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 795
19.3.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 795
19.3.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................796
19.3.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 796
19.3.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 797
19.3.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 798
19.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR...............................................................................................798
19.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 798
19.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 799
19.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 799
19.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................799
19.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 800
19.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 801
19.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time..............................................................................804
19.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status................................................................................................. 805
19.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker ................................................................................805
19.4.7.4 Accumulated energy ................................................................................................. 806
19.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles ................................................................................807
19.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring.......................................................................... 808
19.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring .................................................................. 809
19.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication .....................................................................809
19.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 810
19.5 Event function EVENT.......................................................................................................810
19.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 810
19.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 810
19.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 811
19.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................811
19.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 812
19.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE.......................................................................................... 815
19.6.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 815
19.6.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 815
19.6.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 816
19.6.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................817
19.6.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 819
19.6.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 828
19.6.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 837
19.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP........................................................................ 837

Technical manual
19.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 837

19.7.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 837
19.7.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 838
19.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................838
19.7.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 839
19.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP...................................................................839
19.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 840
19.8.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 840
19.8.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 840
19.8.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................840
19.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT.....................................................................................................841
19.9.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 841
19.9.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 841
19.9.3.1 Design........................................................................................................................ 841
19.9.3.2 Reporting....................................................................................................................842
19.9.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 843
19.9.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................843
19.9.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 843
19.9.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 844
19.9.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 844
19.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC .......................................................................................844
19.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 844
19.10.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 844
19.10.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 845
19.10.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................845
19.10.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 846
19.10.6.1 Operation accuracy.................................................................................................... 847
19.10.6.2 Memory storage......................................................................................................... 847
19.10.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 848
19.11 Estimation of transformer insulation life LOLSPTR .......................................................... 848
19.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 848
19.11.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 848
19.11.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 849
19.11.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................849
19.11.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 850
19.11.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 853
19.11.7.1 Hot spot temperature calculation............................................................................... 853
19.11.7.2 Top oil temperature calculation.................................................................................. 855
19.11.7.3 Transformer parameters selection............................................................................. 856
19.11.7.4 Calculation of constants and losses...........................................................................857
19.11.7.5 Load factor calculation............................................................................................... 858

Technical manual
19.11.7.6 Function handling with less CT’s................................................................................859

19.11.7.7 Temperature unit selection......................................................................................... 859
19.11.7.8 Insulation loss of life calculation.................................................................................859
19.11.7.9 Warning and alarm..................................................................................................... 860
19.11.7.10 Blocking the function.................................................................................................. 861
19.11.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 861
19.12 Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR ................................................................................ 861
19.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 861
19.12.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 862
19.12.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 862
19.12.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................862
19.12.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 863
19.12.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 866
19.12.7.1 Transformer winding currents calculation...................................................................867
19.12.7.2 Through fault detection.............................................................................................. 869
19.12.7.3 Through fault duration and count of occurrence calculation...................................... 869
19.12.7.4 Through fault withstand capability calculation............................................................870
19.12.7.5 Preparation of data for reporting................................................................................ 872
19.12.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 875
19.13 Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI...........................................................................875
19.13.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 875
19.13.3 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 876
19.13.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 876
19.13.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................877
19.13.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 878
19.13.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 879
19.13.8 Graphical display configurable data................................................................................ 880
19.13.9.1 Total harmonic distortion (THD)................................................................................. 882
19.13.9.2 Individual harmonic distortion (IHD)........................................................................... 883
19.13.9.3 Total demand distortion (TDD)................................................................................... 884
19.13.9.4 Crest factor (CF)........................................................................................................ 884
19.13.9.5 Blocking and alarm logic............................................................................................ 885
19.13.10 Technical data................................................................................................................. 886
19.14 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI...........................................................................886
19.14.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 886
19.14.3 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 887
19.14.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 887
19.14.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................888
19.14.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 889
19.14.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 890
19.14.8 Graphical display configurable data................................................................................ 892

Technical manual
19.14.9.1 Total harmonic distortion (THD)................................................................................. 894

19.14.9.2 Individual harmonic distortion (IHD)........................................................................... 895
19.14.9.3 Crest factor (CF)........................................................................................................ 896
19.14.9.4 Blocking and alarm logic............................................................................................ 896
19.14.10 Technical data................................................................................................................. 897
19.15 Fault current and voltage monitoring function FLTMMXU ................................................ 898
19.15.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 898
19.15.3 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 898
19.15.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 899
19.15.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................899
19.15.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 900
19.15.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 901
19.15.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 905
19.16 Fault locator LMBRFLO.....................................................................................................906
19.16.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 906
19.16.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 906
19.16.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 907
19.16.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................907
19.16.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 908
19.16.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 909
19.16.8.1 Measuring Principle....................................................................................................910
19.16.8.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault...........................................910
19.16.8.3 The non-compensated impedance model..................................................................913
19.16.8.4 Exception handling.....................................................................................................913
19.16.8.5 IEC 60870-5-103........................................................................................................913
19.16.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 914
Section 20 Metering......................................................................................................915
20.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT............................................................................................ 915
20.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 915
20.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 915
20.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 915
20.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................915
20.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 916
20.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 916
20.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 918
20.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR................................... 918
20.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 918
20.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 918
20.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 919
20.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................919

Technical manual
20.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 920

20.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 921
20.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 924
Section 21 Ethernet...................................................................................................... 925

21.1 Access point...................................................................................................................... 925
21.1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................925
21.1.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 925
21.2 Access point diagnostics................................................................................................... 927
21.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 927
21.2.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 928
21.2.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................928
21.2.4 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 929
21.3 Redundant communication................................................................................................929
21.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 929
21.3.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 929
21.4 Merging unit.......................................................................................................................931
21.4.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................931
21.4.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 931
21.4.3 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 932
21.5 Routes............................................................................................................................... 937
21.5.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................937
21.5.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 937
21.5.3 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 937
Section 22 Station communication............................................................................. 939

22.1 Communication protocols..................................................................................................939
22.2 Communication protocol diagnostics.................................................................................939
22.3 DNP3 protocol................................................................................................................... 940
22.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol............................................................................ 940
22.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 940
22.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols ....................................................................... 941
22.4.3 Settings........................................................................................................................... 941
22.4.4 Technical data................................................................................................................. 941
22.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC, SP16GAPC...... 942
22.4.5.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 942
22.4.5.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 942
22.4.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 942
22.4.5.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 943
22.4.5.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 943
22.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC.................................... 944
22.4.6.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 944
22.4.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 944
22.4.6.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 945

Technical manual
22.4.6.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 945

22.4.6.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 946
22.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV....................... 946
22.4.7.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 946
22.4.7.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 946
22.4.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 946
22.4.7.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 947
22.4.7.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 947
22.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV............................. 948
22.4.8.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 948
22.4.8.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 948
22.4.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 948
22.4.8.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 949
22.4.8.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 949
22.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV.........................950
22.4.9.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 950
22.4.9.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 950
22.4.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 950
22.4.9.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 951
22.4.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 951
22.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV......................... 952
22.4.10.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 952
22.4.10.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 952
22.4.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 952
22.4.10.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 953
22.4.10.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 953
22.4.11 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive GOOSEVCTRCONF....................... 954
22.4.11.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 954
22.4.11.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 954
22.4.11.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 955
22.4.12 GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV.......................................... 955
22.4.12.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 955
22.4.12.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 955
22.4.12.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 956
22.4.12.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 956
22.4.13 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV...................956
22.4.13.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 956
22.4.13.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 957
22.4.13.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 957
22.4.13.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 959

Technical manual
22.4.14 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV........................................................................ 961

22.4.14.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 961
22.4.14.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 961
22.4.14.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 963
22.4.15 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device GOOSEXLNRCV ........................964
22.4.15.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 964
22.4.15.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 964
22.4.15.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 964
22.4.15.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 964
22.4.15.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 966
22.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol............................................................... 966
22.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................966
22.5.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 966
22.5.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................967
22.5.3.1 Output signals............................................................................................................ 967
22.5.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 968
22.5.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 968
22.5.6.1 Conditional blocking................................................................................................... 975
22.5.6.2 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP.....................................................................979
22.5.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 980
22.6 LON communication protocol............................................................................................ 980
22.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 980
22.6.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 980
22.6.4 Technical data................................................................................................................. 997
22.7 SPA communication protocol............................................................................................ 997
22.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 997
22.7.2 Design............................................................................................................................. 997
22.7.3 Settings........................................................................................................................... 998
22.7.4.1 Communication ports............................................................................................... 1005
22.7.5 Technical data............................................................................................................... 1006
22.8 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...................................................................... 1006
22.8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................1006
22.8.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS...............................................................1006
22.8.2.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1006
22.8.2.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1007
22.8.2.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1007
22.8.2.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1007
22.8.2.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1008
22.8.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR...................... 1008
22.8.3.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1008
22.8.3.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1008

Technical manual
22.8.3.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1008

22.8.3.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1009
22.8.3.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1009
22.8.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR......................................... 1009
22.8.4.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1009
22.8.4.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1010
22.8.4.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1010
22.8.4.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1010
22.8.4.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1010
22.8.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.............................................. 1010
22.8.5.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1010
22.8.5.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1010
22.8.5.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1011
22.8.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................1011
22.8.5.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1011
22.8.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT............................1011
22.8.6.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1011
22.8.6.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1011
22.8.6.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1012
22.8.6.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1012
22.8.6.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1013
22.8.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED...................................................................... 1013
22.8.7.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1013
22.8.7.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1013
22.8.7.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1014
22.8.7.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1014
22.8.7.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1014
22.8.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV................................................. 1014
22.8.8.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1014
22.8.8.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1014
22.8.8.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1015
22.8.8.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1015
22.8.8.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1015
22.8.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF............................. 1015
22.8.9.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1015
22.8.9.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1016
22.8.9.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1016
22.8.9.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1016
22.8.9.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1017
22.8.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD.................................................... 1018
22.8.10.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1018
22.8.10.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1018
22.8.10.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1018
22.8.10.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1018
22.8.10.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1019
22.8.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD...................................................... 1019

Technical manual
22.8.11.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1019

22.8.11.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1019
22.8.11.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1019
22.8.11.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1019
22.8.11.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1020
22.8.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRCMD........................1020
22.8.12.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1020
22.8.12.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1020
22.8.12.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1020
22.8.12.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1021
22.8.12.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1021
22.8.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD................................1021
22.8.13.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1021
22.8.13.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1022
22.8.13.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1022
22.8.13.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1022
22.8.13.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1022
22.8.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMD.............. 1022
22.8.14.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1022
22.8.14.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1023
22.8.14.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1023
22.8.14.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1023
22.8.14.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1023
22.8.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMDV............................. 1024
22.8.15.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1024
22.8.15.2 Identification............................................................................................................. 1024
22.8.15.3 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1024
22.8.15.4 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1024
22.8.15.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1024
22.8.16 Operation principle ....................................................................................................... 1025
22.8.16.1 General ................................................................................................................... 1025
22.8.16.2 Communication ports............................................................................................... 1033
22.8.17 Technical data............................................................................................................... 1033
22.9 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND............................................................................1034
22.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1034
22.9.2 Design........................................................................................................................... 1034
22.9.2.1 General.................................................................................................................... 1034
22.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................... 1034
22.9.4 Signals...........................................................................................................................1035
22.9.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1036
22.9.6 Operation principle........................................................................................................ 1037
22.10 Security events on protocols SECALARM...................................................................... 1037
22.10.1 Security alarm SECALARM...........................................................................................1037
22.10.1.1 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1037
22.10.1.2 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1037
22.11 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.......................................................................... 1037

Technical manual
22.11.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG........................................................................................... 1037

22.11.2 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1038
22.12 IEC61850SIM.................................................................................................................. 1039
22.12.1 IEC61850 simulation mode........................................................................................... 1039
22.12.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1039
22.12.1.2 Function block.......................................................................................................... 1039
22.12.1.3 Signals..................................................................................................................... 1039
22.12.1.4 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1039
22.12.1.5 Monitored Data.........................................................................................................1039
Section 23 Remote communication.......................................................................... 1041

23.1 Binary signal transfer.......................................................................................................1041
23.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................. 1041
23.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1041
23.1.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1041
23.1.4 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1048
23.1.5 Monitored data.............................................................................................................. 1055
23.2 Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote end, function block
LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit................................................................................... 1065
23.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................. 1065
23.2.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1065
23.2.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1067
Section 24 Security.....................................................................................................1071
24.1 Authority check ATHCHCK..............................................................................................1071
24.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................. 1071
24.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1071
24.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED............................... 1073
24.2 Authority management AUTHMAN................................................................................. 1075
24.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................. 1075
24.2.2 AUTHMAN.....................................................................................................................1075
24.2.3 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1075
24.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS............................................................................ 1076
24.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................. 1076
24.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS..................................................................................1076
24.3.3 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1076
24.4 Authority status ATHSTAT............................................................................................... 1076
24.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................. 1076
24.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1076
24.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................... 1077
24.4.4 Signals...........................................................................................................................1077
24.4.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1077
24.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG....................................................... 1077
24.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1077

Technical manual
24.5.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1077

24.5.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1078
24.5.4 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1078
24.5.5.1 Internal signals......................................................................................................... 1079
24.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs.................................................................................... 1081
24.5.6 Technical data............................................................................................................... 1082
24.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK.................................................................................... 1082
24.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1082
24.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1082
24.6.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1082
24.7 Denial of service DOS..................................................................................................... 1083
24.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1083
Section 25 Basic IED functions................................................................................. 1085

25.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN.........................................................................1085
25.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1085
25.1.2 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1085
25.1.3 Description of SyncLostMode........................................................................................1089
25.1.4.1 General concepts..................................................................................................... 1090
25.1.4.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation..............................................................................1092
25.1.4.3 Synchronization alternatives.................................................................................... 1093
25.1.4.4 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization.............................................. 1096
25.1.4.5 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) ................................................................................ 1096
25.1.5 Technical data............................................................................................................... 1098
25.2 Parameter setting groups................................................................................................ 1098
25.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1098
25.2.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1098
25.2.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1099
25.2.4 Settings......................................................................................................................... 1099
25.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE............................................................................... 1100
25.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1100
25.3.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1101
25.3.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1101
25.3.4 Settings..........................................................................................................................1101
25.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID........................................................................................... 1102
25.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1102
25.4.2 Settings .........................................................................................................................1102
25.5 Product information PRODINF........................................................................................ 1103
25.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1103
25.5.2 Settings .........................................................................................................................1103

Technical manual
25.5.3 Factory defined settings................................................................................................ 1103

25.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................................................... 1104
25.6.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................. 1104
25.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1104
25.6.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1105
25.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO .......................................................................... 1105
25.7.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................. 1105
25.7.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1106
25.7.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1106
25.8 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI................................................................................... 1106
25.8.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................. 1106
25.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1107
25.8.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1107
25.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI.............................................................................. 1107
25.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................. 1107
25.9.2 Function block............................................................................................................... 1108
25.9.3 Signals...........................................................................................................................1109
25.9.4 Settings..........................................................................................................................1110
25.9.5 Operation principle ........................................................................................................1111
25.9.5.1 Frequency values......................................................................................................1111
25.9.6 SMAI incorrect calculated phase-earth..........................................................................1112
25.10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................................................... 1113
25.10.1 Functionality ..................................................................................................................1113
25.10.2 Function block................................................................................................................1113
25.10.3 Signals........................................................................................................................... 1113
25.10.4 Settings..........................................................................................................................1113
25.10.5 Operation principle ........................................................................................................1114
25.11 Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................................................... 1114
25.11.1 Identification...................................................................................................................1114
25.11.2 Functionality ..................................................................................................................1114
25.11.3 Settings..........................................................................................................................1114
Section 26 IED hardware............................................................................................ 1115

26.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................1115
26.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display.................................................................. 1115
26.1.2 Case from the front and rear sides................................................................................ 1116
26.2 Hardware modules.......................................................................................................... 1120
26.2.1 Overview........................................................................................................................1120
26.2.2 Numeric module (NUM).................................................................................................1121
26.2.2.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1121
26.2.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1122
26.2.2.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1122
26.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)......................................................................................... 1123

Technical manual
26.2.3.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1123

26.2.3.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1123
26.2.3.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1123
26.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI).................................................................1124
26.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM).................................................................................. 1124
26.2.5.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1124
26.2.5.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1124
26.2.5.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1126
26.2.6 Analog digital conversion module (ADM)...................................................................... 1127
26.2.6.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................1127
26.2.6.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1127
26.2.7 Binary input module (BIM)............................................................................................. 1128
26.2.7.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1128
26.2.7.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1129
26.2.7.3 Signals......................................................................................................................1131
26.2.7.4 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1132
26.2.7.5 Monitored data......................................................................................................... 1132
26.2.7.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1132
26.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)....................................................................................... 1134
26.2.8.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1134
26.2.8.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1134
26.2.8.3 Signals......................................................................................................................1135
26.2.8.4 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1136
26.2.8.5 Monitored data......................................................................................................... 1136
26.2.8.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1139
26.2.9 Static binary output module (SOM)............................................................................... 1140
26.2.9.1 Function revision history...........................................................................................1140
26.2.9.2 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1141
26.2.9.3 Design...................................................................................................................... 1141
26.2.9.4 Signals......................................................................................................................1143
26.2.9.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1143
26.2.9.6 Monitored data......................................................................................................... 1143
26.2.9.7 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1145
26.2.10 Binary input/output module (IOM)..................................................................................1147
26.2.10.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1147
26.2.10.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1147
26.2.10.3 Signals......................................................................................................................1149
26.2.10.4 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1149
26.2.10.5 Monitored data......................................................................................................... 1150
26.2.10.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1152
26.2.11 mA input module (MIM)................................................................................................. 1154
26.2.11.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1154
26.2.11.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1154
26.2.11.3 Signals......................................................................................................................1155
26.2.11.4 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1156
26.2.11.5 Monitored data......................................................................................................... 1157

Technical manual
26.2.11.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1158

26.2.12 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ............................................................ 1158
26.2.12.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1158
26.2.12.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1158
26.2.12.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1160
26.2.13 Galvanic RS485 communication module.......................................................................1160
26.2.13.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1160
26.2.13.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1160
26.2.13.3 Serial optical and RS485 communication channel settings......................................1161
26.2.13.4 Parameter list for optical and RS485 communication channel.................................1163
26.2.13.5 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1163
26.2.14 Optical Ethernet module................................................................................................ 1163
26.2.14.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1163
26.2.14.2 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1163
26.2.14.3 Design...................................................................................................................... 1163
26.2.14.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1164
26.2.15 Line data communication module (LDCM).................................................................... 1164
26.2.15.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................1164
26.2.15.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1164
26.2.15.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1165
26.2.16 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM).................................................. 1166
26.2.16.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1166
26.2.16.2 Design ..................................................................................................................... 1166
26.2.16.3 Functionality............................................................................................................. 1168
26.2.16.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1169
26.2.17 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)..................................................................... 1169
26.2.17.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1169
26.2.17.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1169
26.2.17.3 Monitored data......................................................................................................... 1170
26.2.17.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1170
26.2.18 GPS antenna................................................................................................................. 1170
26.2.18.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................1170
26.2.18.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1170
26.2.18.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1172
26.2.19 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B................................................................. 1172
26.2.19.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................1172
26.2.19.2 Design...................................................................................................................... 1172
26.2.19.3 Encoding.................................................................................................................. 1173
26.2.19.4 TimeZoneAs1344..................................................................................................... 1173
26.2.19.5 Settings.................................................................................................................... 1173
26.2.19.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 1173
26.3 Dimensions......................................................................................................................1174
26.3.1 Case with protective cover............................................................................................ 1174
26.3.2 Case without protective cover....................................................................................... 1177
26.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions...........................................................................................1179
26.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions....................................................................... 1179

Technical manual
26.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions.............................................................................................1180

26.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection....................................1181
26.4 Mounting alternatives...................................................................................................... 1182
26.4.1 Flush mounting.............................................................................................................. 1182
26.4.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 1182
26.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting....................................................................1182
26.4.2 Wall mounting................................................................................................................1183
26.4.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 1183
26.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting..................................................................... 1184
26.4.2.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED...................................................................... 1184
26.4.3 19” panel rack mounting................................................................................................ 1185
26.4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 1185
26.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.....................................................1186
26.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting.....................................................................................1187
26.4.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 1187
26.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting................................................ 1187
26.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case............................................................................ 1187
26.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting.......................................................................................... 1188
26.4.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 1188
26.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting............................................... 1189
26.5 Technical data..................................................................................................................1189
26.5.1 Enclosure.......................................................................................................................1189
26.5.2 Electrical safety............................................................................................................. 1190
26.5.3 Connection system........................................................................................................ 1190
26.5.4 Influencing factors......................................................................................................... 1190
26.5.5 Type tests according to standard...................................................................................1191
Section 27 Labels........................................................................................................1195
27.1 Labels on IED.................................................................................................................. 1195
Section 28 Connection diagrams ............................................................................. 1197
Section 29 Inverse time characteristics....................................................................1199

29.1 Application....................................................................................................................... 1199
29.2 Principle of operation ......................................................................................................1201
29.2.1 Mode of operation......................................................................................................... 1201
29.3 Inverse characteristics ....................................................................................................1205
Section 30 Glossary................................................................................................... 1233

Technical manual
1MRK 511 402-UEN Rev. N Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v20
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per function. The
manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v3
The technical data stated in this document are only valid under the following circumstances:
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT
inputs.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main instrument
transformers. Note that for functions which measure an analogue signal which do not have
corresponding primary quantity the 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs on the
IED. Example of such functions are: HZPDIF, ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT primary current.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary phase-to-phase
voltage.
6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal to:
• √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following values:
• Rated secondary phase current Ir is either 1 A or 5 A depending on selected TRM.
• Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Ur is within the range from 100 V to 120 V.
• Rated secondary power for three-phase system Sr = √3 × Ur × Ir
8. For operate and reset time testing, the default setting values of the function and BOM module
are used if not explicitly stated otherwise.
All reset times are measured using BOM output contacts if not explicitly stated otherwise. The
operate/reset times are determined by characteristics of the output module used.
9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have been injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
10. All declared operate times are with BOM module unless specified. All the declared operate (trip)
times can be reduced by 3-4 ms when using SOM module.
1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who use
technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment,
protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The installation and
commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 402-UEN Rev. N
Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v16
Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase
Decommissioning
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US
Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various tools
available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600
project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the
engineering of protection and control functions, as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the chronological
order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual can
also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the testing
phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and energizing the IED,
parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual
describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of the
IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated and
measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

Technical manual
Introduction
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per function.
The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function can be
used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per function. The
manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by the IED.
The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the IED. The
manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security when
communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control, and product
engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by function. The guideline can
be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning
phase, and during normal service.
1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-34B323E4-1319-4D42-80CE-29B0F2D36E2C v5
Document Date Product version History

revision
- 2017-05 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2
A 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added. enhancements/
updates made to ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS.
B 2018-03 2.2.1 Document enhancements and corrections
C Document not released
D 2018-06 2.2.2 LDCM galvanic X.21 added. Function PTRSTHR added.
Technical data updated for PSM and EF4PTOC. Corrections/
enhancements made to OC4PTOC, TRPTTR, UV2PTUV and
OV2PTOV. Case dimensions updated.
E 2018-09 2.2.2 Updated KEMA test values
F 2018–11 2.2.3 Functions CHMMHAI, VHMMHAI, DELVSPVC, DELSPVC
and DELISPVC added. Updates/enhancements made to
HZPDIF, CCRBRF, REALCOMP, PTRSTHR and FNKEYMDx.
Ordering section updated.
G 2019-05 2.2.3 PTP enhancements and corrections
H 2019-10 2.2.3 Heavy duty SOM added
J Document not released
K Document not released
Table continues on next page

Technical manual
Introduction
Document Date Product version History

revision
L Document not released
M 2020-09 2.2.4 Functions APPTEF, SCCFPVOC, SCUCPTOC, SCPDPTOV,
SCUVPTOV, IEC 61850SIM and ALGOS added. Updates/
enhancements made to functions ZCVPSOF, EF4PTOC,
ROV2PTOV, SAPTUF, SAPTOF, CCSSPVC, FUFSPVC,
SESRSYN, SMPPTRC, SSIMG, and SSIML. Previous
revisions of SOM removed, heavy duty SOM only alternative.
N 2021-06 2.2.5 Functions FLTMMXU, BRPTOC, LMBRFLO, HOLDMINMAX,
INT_REAL, CONST_INT, INTSEL, LIMITER, ABS, POL_REC,
RAD_DEG, CONST_REAL, REALSEL, STOREINT,
STOREREAL, DEG_RAD and RSTP added. Updates/
enhancements made to functions STBPTOC, EF4PTOC,
CHMMHAI, VHMMHAI, OC4PTOC, NS4PTOC, CVGAPC,
DRPRDRE, SXSWI and SXCBR.
1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v8
Documents related to REC670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 511 401-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 511 403-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 511 404-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 511 402-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 511 404-TEN
670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 127-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 398-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 026-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 392-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 395-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 396-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 399-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, Communication set-up 1MRK 505 382-UEN
1.4 Document symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v13
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.

Technical manual
Introduction
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
injury.
The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about the
temperature of product surfaces.
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not view
directly with optical instruments.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept
discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in
corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that under
certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in degraded process
performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all
warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v9
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal name may
be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be connected to
another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned then
the dimension is in millimeters.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic of the function block and are bordered by dashed lines.
In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as lines that touch the outer border
of the diagram. Input signals are always on the left-hand side and output signals are on the
right-hand side.
Input and output signals can be configured using PCM600. They can be connected to the inputs
and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are
BLKTR, BLOCK, and VTSZ. Examples of output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, and
STL3.

Technical manual
Introduction
• Frames with a shaded area on the right-hand side represent setting parameters. These
parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the
corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame.
Example is the signal Timer tPP=On. Their logical values correspond automatically to the
selected setting value.
• Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the frame
edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the same signal
name is used where the signal should continue, see figure 2 and figure 3. Example of the
internal signal is BLK.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram will be
approximately 2 mm from the frame edge, see figure 3 and figure 4. Examples are
STNDL1N, STNDL2N, STNDL3N, STNDL1L2, STNDL2L3, and STNDL3L1.
STZMPP
OR
STCND
AND STNDL1L2
L1L2
STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND
L3L1 AND STNDL3L1
AND STNDL1N
L1N
AND STNDL2N
L2N
STNDL3N
L3N AND
OR STPE
OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK
99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US
Figure 2: Logic diagram example with intermediate output signals

Technical manual
Introduction
IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN-US
Figure 3: Logic diagram example with intermediate input signals
Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t
BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR
STL1 AND TRL1
STL2 AND TRL2
STL3 AND TRL3
IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx
Figure 4: Logic diagram example with a parameter input
Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products than the one the
manual describes. The example that is illustrated is still valid.
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v9
Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective function block
names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown in the table below.

Technical manual
Introduction
Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

- - ALSVS
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
APPTEF
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CHMMHAI
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FLTMMXU
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR

Technical manual
Introduction

FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PTRSTHR PTRSTHR PTRSTHR
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCFPVOC
SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCUCPTOC
SCPDPTOV

Technical manual
Introduction

SCUVPTOV
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VHMMHAI
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC

Technical manual
Introduction

WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF

Technical manual
52
Available functions
Section 2 Available functions

GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1
The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those functions that
are not exposed to the user or do not need to be configured are not described in this
manual.
2.1 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v17
Table 2: Example of quantities
2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
C30 =1/2 CB application. For the pre-configured variants
IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential 0-12 3-A02 3-A02 6-A07 3-A02
protection, single phase
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, 0-6 1-B33 2-B34 2-B34 1-B33
voltage and current based
2.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v17

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53 1-C51
protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53 1-C51
protection, four steps

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53 1-C51

overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC 51N_67N Directional residual overcurrent 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53 1-C51
NS4PTOC 46I2 Directional negative phase 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53 1-C51
sequence overcurrent protection,
four steps
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual 0-6 1-C16 1–C16 1-C16 1-C16
overcurrent and power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one 0-6 1-C51 1-C52 2-C53 1-C51
time constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one 0-6 1-C51 1-C52 2-C53 1-C51
time constant, Fahrenheit
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two 0-6 1-C51 1-C52 2-C53 1-C51
time constants
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 3-C53 1-C51
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-6 1-B27 2-B25 2-B25 1-B27
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-6 1 2 3 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-4 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-4 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 0-1 1 1 1 1
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank protection 0-3
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent 0-3 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
protection
APPTEF 67NT Average power transient earth 0-6
fault protection
BRPTOC 50 Overcurrent protection with binary 0-6 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53 1-C51
release
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-4 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-4 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
ROV2PTOV 59N Residual overvoltage protection, 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
two steps
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-6 2 2 2 2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0-2 1 1 2 1
Unbalance protection
SCCFPVOC 51V Cascading failure protection for 0-3
shunt capacitor bank
SCUCPTOC 60N Current unbalance protection for 0-3

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
SCPDPTOV 87V Phase voltage differential based 0-3

capacitor bank unbalanced
protection
SCUVPTOV 60V Voltage unbalance protection for 0-3
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-10 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time accumulation 0-12
protection
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage 0-9 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
protection
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage
2.3 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v21

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and 0-6 1 2 3 1
synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-6 1-H04 2-H05 3-H06 1-H04
APC10 3 Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 0-1 1 1
objects (1CB), including interlocking (see Table 4)
APC15 3 Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 0-1 1
objects (2CB), including interlocking (see Table 5)
APC30 3 Control functionality for up to 6 bays, max 30 0-1 1
objects (6CBs), including interlocking (see Table
6)

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
QCBAY Bay control 1+5/APC30 1 1 1+5/ 1

APC3
0
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1+5/APC30 1 1 1+5/ 1
APC3
0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 18 3 6 18 3
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single 0-4 1-H11 1-H11 2-H16 1-H11
control
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel 0-4 1-H15 1-H15 2-H18 1-H15
control
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary 0-4 4 4 4 4
inputs
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary 0-4 4 4 4 4
inputs
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and 15 15 15 15 15
LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30 30 30 30 30
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point 32 32 32 32 32
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control function, 8 signals 5 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 3 3 3 3 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 8 8 8 8 8
I103CMD Function commands for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for 50 50 50 50 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50 50 50 50 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for 50 50 50 50 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for 4 4 4 4 4
IEC 60870-5-103
Secondary
system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-6 1 2 3 1
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-4 3 3 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
difference
DELVSPVC 7V_78V Voltage delta supervision, 2 phase 4 4 4 4 4

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
DELISPVC 71 Current delta supervision, 2 phase 4 4 4 4 4

DELSPVC 78 Real delta supervision, real 4 4 4 4 4
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12 12
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 12 12 12 12 12
STARTCOMB Start combinator 32 32 32 32 32
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3) 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 7) 0-1 1 1 1 1
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see Table 8) 0-1
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit 18 18 18 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node 16 16 16 16 16
representation, 16 bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 24 24 24 24 24
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic 16 16 16 16 16
Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression 12 12 12 12 12
and overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30 30 30 30 30
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30 30 30 30 30
HOLDMINMAX Hold minimum and maximum of input 20 20 20 20 20

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
INT_REAL Converter integer to real 20 20 20 20 20

CONST_INT Definable constant for logic functions 10 10 10 10 10
INTSEL Analog input selector for integer values 5 5 5 5 5
LIMITER Definable limiter 20 20 20 20 20
ABS Absolute value 20 20 20 20 20
POL_REC Polar to rectangular converter 20 20 20 20 20
RAD_DEG Radians to degree angle converter 20 20 20 20 20
CONST_REAL Definable constant for logic functions 10 10 10 10 10
REALSEL Analog input selctor for real values 5 5 5 5 5
STOREINT Store value for integer inputs 10 10 10 10 10
STOREREAL Store value for real inputs 10 10 10 10 10
DEG_RAD Degree to radians angle converter 20 20 20 20 20

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU Current measurement 10 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 6 6 6 6 6
CMSQI Current sequence measurement 6 6 6 6 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6 6 6 6 6
VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-earth 6 6 6 6 6
AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog 1 1 1 1 1
inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1
A1RADR-
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for single point 96 96 96 96 96
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for single point 24 24 24 24 24
indication, 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for measured 60 60 60 60 60
values
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured values expander block 66 66 66 66 66

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas medium 21 21 21 21 21

SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid medium 3 3 3 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0-18 3 6 9 3
LOLSPTR 26/49 Transformer insulation loss of life monitoring 0-4 4-M21 4-M21 4-M21 4-M21
HS
I103MEAS Measurands for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for 3 3 3 3 3
IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison status for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for 20 20 20 20 20
IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30 30 30 30
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6 6 6 6 6
PTRSTHR 51TF Through fault monitoring 0-2 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22
CHMMHAI ITHD Current harmonic monitoring, 3 phase 0-3 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23
VHMMHAI VTHD Voltage harmonic monitoring, 3 phase 0-3 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23
FLTMMXU Fault current and voltage monitoring 6 6 6 6 6
LMBRFLO Fault locator 0-1 1 1 1 1
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand 6 6 6 6 6
handling
Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 298
PULSETIMER 40

Technical manual
Available functions
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40
Table 4: Number of function instances in APC10
Function name Function description Total number of instances

SCILO Interlocking 10
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 10
SXSWI Circuit switch 9
QCRSV Reservation function block for 2
apparatus control
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 12
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 12
switching device

Technical manual
Available functions

BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
apparatus control
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
device via GOOSE
switching device

BB_ES 6
A1A2_BS 4
A1A2_DC 6
ABC_BC 2
BH_CONN 2
BH_LINE_A 2
BH_LINE_B 2
DB_BUS_A 3
DB_BUS_B 3
DB_LINE 3
ABC_LINE 6
AB_TRAFO 4

Technical manual
Available functions

apparatus control
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
QCBAY Bay control 5
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 5
device via GOOSE
switching device
Table 7: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T
Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances

ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40
Table 8: Total number of instances for extended logic package
Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 220
GATE 49
INV 220
LLD 49
OR 220
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 113
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

Technical manual
Available functions
2.4 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v19
IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Bay control

name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
Station communication
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA 1 1 1 1 1
and IEC60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1 1 1 1 1
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and 1 1 1 1 1
EIA-485 communication protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via 59 59 59 59 59
GOOSE for interlocking
IEC 61850SIM IEC 61850 simulation mode 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 64 64 64 64 64
double point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an 32 32 32 32 32
integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 60 60 60 60 60
measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 64 64 64 64 64
single point value
VCTRSEND Horizontal communication via 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTRRCV Horizontal communication via 7 7 7 7 7
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTRCONF GOOSE VCTR configuration for 1 1 1 1 1
send and receive
ALGOS Supervision of GOOSE subscription 100 100 100 100 100
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND

Technical manual
Available functions

name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
AGSAL Generic security application 1 1 1 1 1

component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security 1 1 1 1 1
events on protocols such as DNP3
and IEC103
FSTACCSNA Field service tool access via SPA 1 1 1 1 1
protocol over Ethernet
communication
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30
communication, 8 merging units
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23
protocol
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24
seamless redundancy
RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol 0-1 1-P25 1-P25 1-P25 1-P25
PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 0-1 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32 1
PMUREPORT, (see Table 9)
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
AP_1-AP_6 AccessPoint_ABS 1 1 1 1 1
AP_FRONT Access point front 1 1 1 1 1
PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1
ROUTE_1-ROUTE_6 Route_ABS 1 1 1 1 1
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front 1 1 1 1 1
Ethernet port
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non- 6 6 6 6 6
redundant Ethernet port
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for 3 3 3 3 3
redundant Ethernet ports
DHCP DHCP configuration for front access 1 1 1 1 1
point
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96
Remote communication

Technical manual
Available functions

name
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (D30)
REC670
(Customized)
BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer, receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2
BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer, transmit 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2
BSR2M_305 Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit receive 1 1 1 1 1
BSR2M_312
BSR2M_322
BSR2M_306
BSR2M_313
BSR2M_323
BST2M_305 Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit transmit 1 1 1 1 1
BST2M_312
BST2M_322
BST2M_306
BST2M_313
BST2M_323
LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from 1 1 1 1 1
LDCM
LDCMTRN_2M_305 Transmission of analog data from 1 1 1 1 1
LDCMTRN_2M_306 LDCM, 2Mbit
LDCMTRN_2M_312
LDCMTRN_2M_313
LDCMTRN_2M_322
LDCMTRN_2M_323
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3
LDCMRecBinStat3 LDCM
LDCMRecBinStat2 Receive binary status from LDCM 3 3 3 3 3
LDCM2M_305 Receive binary status from LDCM, 1 1 1 1 1
LDCM2M_312 2Mbit
LDCM2M_322
LDCM2M_306 Receive binary status from remote 1 1 1 1 1
LDCM2M_313 LDCM, 2Mbit
LDCM2M_323
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for 0-1 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01
distance or overcurrent protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-1 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01
infeed logic for distance protection
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for 0-1 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53 1-C51
residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-1 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53 1-C51
infeed logic for residual overcurrent
protection

Technical manual
Available functions
Table 9: Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors
Function name Function description Total number of

instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) 2011 and 1
IEEE1344 protocol
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 1
(C37.118) , phasors 1-8
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 1
(C37.118) , analogs 1-8
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 1
(C37.118) , binary 1-8
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
2.5 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v15
Table 10: Basic IED functions
IEC 61850 or function Description

name
INTERRSIG
Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
TIMEZONE
DSTBEGIN GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE Enables or disables the use of daylight saving time
DSTEND GPS time synchronization module
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Active parameter setting group
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
TERMINALID IED identifiers
PRODINF Product information
SYSTEMTIME System time
LONGEN LON communication
RUNTIME IED Runtime component
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs

Technical manual
Available functions

name
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
BCSCONF Basic communication system
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration
CAMSTATUS Central account management status
TOOLINF Tools information
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic
Table 11: Local HMI functions

name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1– Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYTY5
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

Technical manual
68
Analog inputs
Section 3 Analog inputs SEMOD55010-1 v3
3.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct measurement
results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all directional and differential
functions, the directions of the input currents must be defined in order to reflect the way the current
transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring
and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage
transformers properly.
An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog channel's
phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service
values reading.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that are
sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2
LE protocol.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module

(TRM) type.
3.2 Function block SEMOD116577-1 v5
The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT when a
TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware configuration tool. In the SMT
or the ACT, they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and
used internally in the configuration.
3.3 Signals
PID-3920-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6
Table 12: TRM_12I Output signals
Name Type Description

STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1

Technical manual
Analog inputs

Table 13: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
Table 14: TRM_6I Output signals



Technical manual
Analog inputs



3.4 Settings
SEMOD129840-4 v2
Dependent on ordered IED type.

Technical manual
Analog inputs
PID-4153-SETTINGS v8
Table 18: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I - L4I presentation
MU1-L1U - L4U
MU2-L1I - L4I
MU2-L1U - L4U
MU3-L1I - L4I
MU3-L1U - L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U
MU7-L1I - L4I
MU7-L1U - L4U
MU8-L1I - L4I
MU8-L1U - L4U
MU9-L1I - L4I
MU9-L1U - L4U
MU10-L1I - L4I
MU10-L1U - L4U
MU11-L1I - L4I
MU11-L1U - L4U
MU12-L1I - L4I
MU12-L1U - L4U
Table 19: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Technical manual
Analog inputs

Table 20: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)


Technical manual
Analog inputs

VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
Table 21: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)


Technical manual
Analog inputs


Technical manual
Analog inputs


Technical manual
Analog inputs


Technical manual
Analog inputs
3.5 Monitored data

PID-6531-MONITOREDDATA v3
Table 25: AISVBAS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated
Table 26: TRM_12I Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error
Table 27: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

1=Error
Table 28: TRM_6I Monitored data

1=Error

1=Error

1=Error

1=Error
3.6 Operation principle SEMOD55028-5 v9
The direction of a measured current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically
star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away from the object.
This information must be set in the IED.
Once the CT direction settings is correctly entered the internal IED convention of the directionality is
defined as follows:

Technical manual
Analog inputs
• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the protected
object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the
protected object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see Figure 5)
• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.
Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object
Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 5: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject
according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object,
and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are,
therefore, basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and
voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu /Hardware /
Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.
3.7 Technical data SEMOD55412-1 v1
M16988-1 v11
Table 32: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously

Technical manual
Analog inputs
Description Value
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
Table 33: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1A 5A
Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir
Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s 65 × Ir for 1 s

25 × Ir for 10 s 20 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min 8 × Ir for 1 min
1.8 × Ir for 30 min 1.6 × Ir for 30 min
1.1 × Ir continuously 1.1 × Ir continuously
Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir
Voltage inputs *)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
*) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
SEMOD53376-2 v6
Table 34: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm 2 (AWG12)

Technical manual
Binary input and output modules
Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter GUID-AE43976C-E966-484C-AF39-89B2B12F56DC v5
The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when a binary
input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced binary input signal is
forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the debounced input
value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default
setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the counter does
not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.
4.1.2 Oscillation filter GUID-41B89E6F-50C3-44BF-9171-3CC82EB5CA15 v5
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for
example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system
when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter value is
greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal is ignored until the
oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.
4.1.3 Settings
GUID-07348953-4A72-444B-A31A-030ABEA8E0C4 v1
OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is not done,
oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the resulting behaviour will be
undefined.
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 35: BIM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

Technical manual
Binary input and output modules
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 36: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

Technical manual
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour
5.1.1 Identification
GUID-84392EFF-4D3F-4A67-A6ED-34C6E98574D6 v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -
5.1.2 Settings
Table 37: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance
On report
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line
Yes diagram
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes
5.2 Local HMI signals
GUID-03AB7AEE-87D3-4F3C-B6B9-B1EB1B538E38 v1

Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -
5.2.2 Function block GUID-A8AC51E9-5BD7-4A80-9576-4816F14DD08D v2

Technical manual
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
Figure 6: LHMICTRL function block
5.2.3 Signals
PID-3992-INPUTSIGNALS v6
Table 38: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description

CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
Table 39: LHMICTRL Output signals

HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module
GUID-6E36C0BC-F284-4C88-A4A8-9535D3BE8B14 v2

Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15
5.3.2 Function block GUID-BDB5797F-F27E-4FEE-9FDB-1C9E2F572BB6 v3
LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
Figure 7: LEDGEN function block

Technical manual
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
Figure 8: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups have a
similar function block.
5.3.3 Signals
Table 40: LEDGEN Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs
Table 41: LEDGEN Output signals

NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
Table 42: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
5.3.4 Settings
Table 43: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Technical manual
Table 44: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module GUID-EECAE7FA-7078-472C-A429-F7607DB884EB v2
GUID-E6611022-5EA3-420D-ADCD-9D1E7604EFEB v1

LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5
5.4.2 Function block

GUID-A803A728-5CFC-4606-98E4-793E873B99D4 v3
FNKEYMD1
ENABLE ^FKEYOUT1
^LEDCTL1
Figure 9: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for every function
key button.
5.4.3 Signals
Table 45: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

ENABLE BOOLEAN 1 Enable input for function key
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key
Table 46: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

Technical manual
5.4.4 Settings
Table 47: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state
ReqAuthority Off - - On User authorization needed for function
On key operation
Table 48: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key
GUID-BCE87D54-C836-40EE-8DA7-779B767059AB v2
For setting ReqAuthority, when users are configured through local or central account
management, the default behavior of the function keys are to only operate if a user is
logged in, and the user have the required rights. This authentication check can be
configured to be bypassed per function key by changing the ReqAuthority from ON
to OFF. To be able to change this, the user changing it have to have the Security
advanced right.
MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the product
main menu.

Technical manual
5.5 Operation principle
5.5.1 Local HMI AMU0600442 v15
Figure 10: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements
• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

Technical manual
5.5.1.1 Keypad AMU0600428 v19
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus. The
push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch
between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

Technical manual
24
1
23
2
18
3
19
4
6 20
21
7 22
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 11: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and
RJ-45 communication port
1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help

Technical manual
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs
5.5.1.2 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v13
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a resolution of 320 x
240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends
on the character size and the view that is shown.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
Figure 12: Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be shown, it
is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the object
identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the right.
The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display
horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

Technical manual
Figure 13: Truncated path

The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in SMAI1:1,
indicates the number of that function instance.
The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons.
Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function
button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US
Figure 14: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs. Three
indication LED pages are available.

Technical manual
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US
Figure 15: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is shown
by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button clears the
panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on the label string length.
5.5.1.3 LEDs AMU0600427 v15
The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip.
There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate three
states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-color LED are divided
into three panels.
There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED group
can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are three LED
groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being the highest and green the lowest priority.
For example, if on one panel there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on
another panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and
is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the
LHMI or PCM600.
Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button. Pressing that
button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is indicated with a highlight.
Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows
details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as
from the LED panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit. If there are
un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press the
Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . These LEDs can
indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the OPENCLOSE_LED function
block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be connected to a circuit breaker to indicate the breaker
open/close status on the LEDs.

Technical manual
Figure 16: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives
5.5.2.1 Functionality GUID-1A03E0EF-C10F-4797-9D9F-5CCA86CA29EB v5
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) controls
and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually
using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls
the color and the operating mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences; two as
follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a
protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other
two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment
functionality.
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs GUID-4822DF9C-E343-442B-B3F1-3FA8CD8DF234 v4
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow and red
LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is
triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a
trip command.
Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:
• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in service);
steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not in normal
service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow LED on has been
active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write from PCM600;
steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on has been active
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE, by
connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function block
using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular signal.

Technical manual
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes GUID-B67F1ED3-900B-4D34-8EEB-A3005999CE50 v4
Collecting mode
• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the
unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified
alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are connected to different sources
of events for the same function block, collecting mode shows the highest priority LED color that
was activated since the latest acknowledgment was made. If a number of different indications
were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get a clear view of what
triggered the latest event without looking at the sequence of events list. A condition for getting
the sequence of events is that the signals have been engineered in the disturbance recorder.
Re-starting mode
• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates
only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with
the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new
disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input
signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset
mode means that upon occurrence of any new event, all previous indications will be reset. This
facilitates that only the LED indications related to the latest event is shown.
Acknowledgment/reset GUID-E6727E8F-C28B-4295-AE21-BC5643363805 v3
• From local HMI

• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all
the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level
triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the button and menus on the
LHMI.
• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input, CLRLEDS, to
the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example be configured to a binary input
operated from an external push button or a function button. The function is positive edge
triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed,
the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is
first pressed.
• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for re-starting
mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of
the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady
light.
Operating sequence GUID-DFCA880B-308C-4334-94DF-97C7765E8C13 v5

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the input
signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is
reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. The
following 6 sequences are available:

Technical manual
• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S
For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset function is not
applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input signal. Sequence 3 and 4,
which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only working in collecting (Coll) mode.
Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working
according to Latched type and re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names
have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED obtains a
color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams shown below.
In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following symbols:
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
Figure 17: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) SEMOD56072-39 v4

This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It does not
react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
Figure 18: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

GUID-107FE952-3B4C-4C01-831A-3147E652327C v4
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority color it
shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the operation when two colors
are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in figure19.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R G
Figure 19: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Technical manual
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) SEMOD56072-47 v2

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing
steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S SEMOD56072-50 v2

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After
acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still
present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Figure 20: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

GUID-CC607709-5344-4C88-AA97-6395FD335E55 v5
The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is used for all
three colour LEDs.
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with higher
priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority indication appeared
before or after acknowledgment. In figure 21 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority
becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low
priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R R G
LED
Acknow
Figure 21: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

GUID-A652A49D-F016-472D-8D38-6D3E75DAB1DB v3
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of indications
with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are not visible according to
figure 22.

Technical manual
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G Y R R Y
Acknow.
Figure 22: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

GUID-071B9EB5-A1D2-49C5-9458-4D21B7E068BE v3
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority indication the
high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to figure 23.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R R Y
Acknow.
Figure 23: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) SEMOD56072-64 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been
alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S SEMOD56072-67 v4

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input
signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that
indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately after the
positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is
performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Technical manual
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
Figure 24: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

GUID-4D52D221-F54F-4966-95B1-6ED6C536CEC9 v3
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower priority still is
active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to figure25.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R G
LED
Reset
Figure 25: Operating sequence 5, two colors
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S SEMOD56072-75 v4

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically
reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to Sequence 6
LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual
reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely
independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072-86 v4

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Technical manual
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
Figure 27 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance Disturbance
tRestart tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 27: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 28 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but
before tRestart has elapsed.

Technical manual
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 28: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 29 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 29: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

Technical manual
5.5.3 Function keys
5.5.3.1 Functionality GUID-BED38E9A-C90D-4B7F-AA20-42821C4F6A1C v3
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of the LCD, that
can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an indication LED that
can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default
nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.
5.5.3.2 Operation principle GUID-977C3829-B19B-457E-8A4D-45317226EF22 v3
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI
function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of the actual function
block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control other function blocks, for
example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that control
the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally set using the PST.
Operating sequence GUID-84CA7C61-4F83-4F86-A07F-BF9EC4E309BF v5

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).
Input value
Output value
Figure 30: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than 500ms.
Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The function block
execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms
Output value
Figure 31: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

Technical manual
In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than 500ms
and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back to 0. The input
attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is no output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the edge was
applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero; else the trigger
edge is lost.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms
pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value
Figure 32: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED
Input function GUID-8EA4AE21-7A74-403A-84AE-D5CEF9292A63 v2

All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is
of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block becomes active, and will light
the yellow function button LED when high. This functionality is active even if the function block
operation setting is set to off. It has been implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that
the function key LEDs should always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by
these LEDs.
5.5.3.3 Enabling and Disabling Authority on Function keys GUID-27413370-00F4-477D-886F-30359C788B55 v1
When users are configured through local or central account management, the default behavior of the
function keys are to only operate if a user is logged in, and the user have the required rights. This
authentication check can be configured to be bypassed per function key by changing the
ReqAuthority from ON to OFF. To be able to change this, the user changing it have to have the
Security advanced right.
Authority can be disabled using parameter Authority. Each function key has the parameter Authority,
which can be enabled or disabled using LHMI or PCM 600. User must have Security Advanced rights
to configure the Authority parameter of the function key.
The possible values for the Authority parameter are as below:
• Enabled: Requires authentication

• Disabled: No user authentication
If there is no User Account Management or Central Account Management configured

in the IED then this parameter has no effect and the function key can be operated
without any authentication.

Technical manual
104
Wide area measurement system
Section 6 Wide area measurement system

6.1 IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) Phasor Measurement
Data Streaming Protocol Configuration PMUCONF GUID-747C6AD7-E6A1-466E-92D1-68865681F92F v2
GUID-1E140EA0-D198-443A-B445-47CEFD2E6134 v2

Configuration parameters for IEEE PMUCONF - -
1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118.1–2011
protocol
6.1.2 Functionality GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v5
The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor standards:
• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data communication)

• IEEE Std IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118).1a-2014
(Measurements)
• IEEE Std IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) (Data communication)
PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for both IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) and
IEEE 1344 protocols. This means all the required settings and parameters in order to establish and
define a number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or more PDC clients (synchrophasor
client). This includes port numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings for IEC/IEEE
60255-118 (C37.118) as well as IEEE 1344 protocols.
6.1.3 Operation principle GUID-2608FBC4-9036-476A-942B-13452019BC11 v2
The Figure 33 demonstrates the communication configuration diagram. As can be seen, the IED can
support communication with maximum 8 TCP clients and 6 UDP client groups, simultaneously. Every
client can communicate with only one instance of the two available PMUREPORT function block
instances at a time. It means that one client cannot communicate with both PMUREPORT:1 and
PMUREPORT:2 at the same time. However, multiple clients can communicate with the same
instance of PMUREPORT function block at the same time. For TCP clients, each client can decide to
communicate with an existing instance of PMUREPORT by knowing the corresponding PMU ID for
that PMUREPORT instance. Whereas, for UDP clients, the PMUREPORT instance for each UDP
channel is defined by the user in the PMU and the client has to know the PMU ID corresponding to
that instance in order to be able to communicate. More information is available in the sections Short
guidance for the use of TCP and Short guidance for the use of UDP.

Technical manual
IED
PMU ID
1344/C37.118
PMUREPORT: 1 PMUREPORT: 2 TCP Client_1
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_2
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_3
PMU ID: X
1344/C37.118
TCP IP TCP Client_4
PMU ID: Y 1344/C37.118
TCP Port TCP Client_5
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_6
PMU ID
PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 1 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_1

UDP Client Group_2

UDP Client Group_3

UDP Client Group_4

UDP Client Group_5

UDP Client Group_6
IEC140000117-1.en.vsd
IEC140000117 V2 EN-US
Figure 33: The communication configuration (PMUCONF) structure in the IED
6.1.3.1 IEEE C37.118 Message Framework GUID-B8CC9D53-1CC5-43CC-9AF0-9B4D8CDC1922 v2
Four message types are defined in IEEE C37.118 standard: data, configuration, header, and
command frames. The first three message types are transmitted from the PMU/PDC that serves as
the data source, and the last one (command frame) is received by the PMU/PDC.
These four message types are defined in IEEE C37.118 standard as follows:
• Data messages are the measurements made by a PMU.

• Configuration is a machine-readable message describing the data types, calibration factors, and
other metadata for the data that the PMU/PDC sends.
• Header information is human readable descriptive information sent from the PMU/PDC but
provided by the user.
There is a default header file, named "ieee1344header.txt", located in the "tools" folder in the IED.
The user is allowed to access and update this text file and write it back to the IED using a FTP client
(e.g. Filezilla).
If the user-defined (updated) header file is larger than 1400 bytes, then it will be truncated to 1400
bytes in both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE1344 protocols.
Both PMU reporting instances are using the same header file (ieee1344header.txt) and this header
file is used for both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE1344 protocols.
• Commands are machine-readable codes sent to the PMU/PDC for control or configuration.
6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of TCP GUID-700B2618-3719-4C17-A1F8-3B8F5834FE95 v3
Port 7001 is used by the SPA on TCP/IP (field service tool). If the port is used for any
other protocol, for example C37.118, the SPA on TCP/IP stops working.

Technical manual
The IED supports 8 concurrent TCP connections using IEEE1344 and/or C37.118 protocol. The
following parameters are used to define the TCP connection between the IED and the TCP clients:
1. 1344TCPport– TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients
2. C37.118TCPport – TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118 data for TCP clients
As can be seen, there are two separate parameters in the IED for selecting port numbers for TCP
connections; one for IEEE1344 protocol (1344TCPport) and another one for C37.118 protocol
(C37.118 TCPport). Client can communicate with the IED over IEEE1344 protocol using the selected
TCP port defined in 1344TCPport, and can communicate with the IED over IEEE C37.118 protocol
using the selected TCP port number in C37.118TCPport.
All the frames (the header frame, configuration frame, command frame and data frame) are
communicated over the same TCP port. The client can request (by sending a command frame) a
configuration and/or header via the TCP channel and the requested configuration and/or header will
be sent back to the client (as Configuration frame/Header frame) over the same TCP channel.
Once the TCP client connects to the IED, the client has to necessarily send a command frame to
start a communication. As shown in Figure 33, the IED can support 2 PMUREPORT instances and
the client has to specify the PMU ID Code in order to know which PMUREPORT data needs to be
sent out to that client. In this figure, X and Y are referring to the user-defined PMU ID Codes for
PMUREPORT instances 1 or 2, respectively. It is up to the TCP client to decide which PMUREPORT
function block shall communicate with that client. Upon successful reception of the first command by
the IED, the PMU ID will be extracted out of the command; if there is a PMUREPORT instance
configured in the IED with matching PMU ID, then the client connection over TCP with the IED will be
established and further communication will take place. Otherwise, the connection will be terminated
and the TCPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in the PMU Diagnostics on the Local HMI under Main
menu /Diagnostics /Communication /PMU diagnostics /PMUSTATUS:1
It is possible to turn off/on the TCP data communication by sending a IEEE1344 or C37.118
command frame remotely from the client to the PMU containing RTDOFF/RTDON command.
At any given point of time maximum of 8 TCP clients can be connected to the IED for IEEE1344/
C37.118 protocol. If there is an attempt made by the 9th client, the connection to the new client will
be terminated without influencing the connection of the other clients already connected. A list of
active clients can be seen on the Local HMI in the diagnostics menu under Main menu /
Diagnostics /Communication /PMU diagnostics /PMUSTATUS:1
6.1.3.3 Short guidance for use of UDP GUID-F5BCBBF7-4EED-4E79-9E86-AF046D201BB1 v3
The IED supports maximum of 6 concurrent UDP streams. They can be individually configured to
send IEEE1344 or C37.118 data frames as unicast / multicast. Note that [x] at the end of each
parameter is referring to the UDP stream number (UDP client group) and is a number between 1 and
6. Each of the 6 UDP groups in the IED has the following settings:
1. SendDataUDP[x] – Enable / disable UDP data stream

2. ProtocolOnUDP[x] – Send IEEE1344 or C37.118 on UDP
3. PMUReportUDP[x] – Instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send data on
this UDP stream (UDP client group[x])
4. UDPDestAddres[x] – UDP destination address for UDP client group[x] (unicast / multicast
address range)
5. UDPDestPort[x] – UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x]
6. TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] – TCP port to control of data sent over UDP client group[x], i.e. to
receive commands and send configuration frames
7. SendCfgOnUDP[x] – Send configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) on UDP for client group[x]
It is possible to turn off/on the UDP data communication either by setting the parameter
SendDataUDP[x] to Off/On locally in the PMU or by sending a C37.118 or IEEE1344 command
frame (RTDOFF/RTDON) remotely from the client to the PMU as defined in IEEE 1344/C37.118
standard.

Technical manual
However, such a remote control to stop the streams from the client is only possible when the
parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to SetByProtocol. The command RTDOFF/RTDON sent by the
client is stored in the IED, i.e. if the IED is rebooted for some reason, the state of the stream will
remain the same.
If the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set toOn the RTDOFF/RTDON commands received from the
clients are ignored in the IED.
It is recommended not to set the parameter SendDataUDP[x] to SetByProtocol in case of a multicast.

This is because if one of the clients sends the RTDOFF command, all the clients will stop receiving
the frames.
The UDP implementation in the IED is a UDP_TCP. This means that by default, only the data frames
are sent out on UDP stream and the header frame, configuration frame and command frame are sent
over TCP. This makes the communication more reliable especially since commands are sent over
TCP which performs request/acknowledgment exchange to ensure that no data (command in this
case) is lost.
However, by setting the parameter SendCfgOnUDP[x] to On, the configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) of
IEEEC37.118 data stream is cyclically sent on the corresponding UDP stream (UDP client group[x])
once per minute. This is useful in case of multicast UDP data stream when a lot of PMU clients are
receiving the same UDP stream from the same UDP group (UDP client group[x]).
As shown in Figure 33, there are maximum 2 instances of PMUREPORT function blocks available in
the IED. Each UDP client group[x] can only connect to one of the PMUREPORT instances at the
same time. This is defined in the PMU by the parameter PMUReportUDP[x] which is used to define
the instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send data on this UDP stream (UDP
client group[x]).
The data streams in the IED can be sent as unicast or as multicast. The user-defined IP address set
in the parameter UDPDestAddress[x] for each UDP stream defines if it is a Unicast or Multicast. The
address range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Class D IP addresses) is treated as multicast. Any
other IP address outside this range is treated as unicast and the UDP data will be only sent to that
specific unicast IP address. In addition to UDPDestAddress[x] parameter, UDPDestPort[x] parameter
is used to define the UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x].
In case of multicast IP, it will be the network switches and routers that take care of replicating the
packet to reach multiple receivers. Multicast mechanism uses network infrastructure efficiently by
requiring the IED to send a packet only once, even if it needs to be delivered to a large number of
receivers.
If there are more than one UDP client group defined as multicast, the user shall set different multicast
IP addresses for each UDP group.
The PMU clients receiving the UDP frames can also connect to the IED to request (command frame)
config frame 1, config frame 2, config frame 3, or header frame, and to disable/enable real time data.
This can be done by connecting to the TCP port selected in TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] for each UDP
group. This connection is done using TCP. The IED allows 4 concurrent client connections for every
TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port (for each UDP client group[x]).
If the client tries to connect on TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port using a PMU-ID other than what is
configured for that PMUREPORT instance (PMUReportUDP[x]), then that client is immediately
disconnected and the UDPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in PMU Diagnostics on LHMI at Main
menu /Diagnostics /Communication /PMU diagnostics /PMUSTATUS:1
Even if the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to Off it is still possible for the clients to connect on the
TCP port and request the configuration frames.

Technical manual
6.1.4 Settings SEMOD119927-1 v2
Table 49: PMUCONF Non group settings (basic)

1344TCPport 1024 - 65534 - 1 4711 TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data
for TCP clients
C37.118TCPport 1024 - 65534 - 1 4712 TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118
data for TCP clients
TCPportUDPdataCtrl1 1024 - 65534 - 1 4713 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group1
SendDataUDP1 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group1
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP1 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group1
C37.118
PMUReportUDP1 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group1
UDPDestAddres1 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.7 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group1
UDPDestPort1 1024 - 65534 - 1 8910 UDP destination port for UDP client
group1
SendCfgOnUDP1 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group1
On
UDP client group2
On
SetByProtocol
C37.118
client group2
Address group2
group2
On
UDP client group3
On
SetByProtocol
C37.118
client group3
Address group3
group3

Technical manual

On
UDP client group4
On
SetByProtocol
C37.118
client group4
Address group4
group4
On
UDP client group5
On
SetByProtocol
C37.118
client group5
Address group5
group5
On
UDP client group6
On
SetByProtocol
C37.118
client group6
Address group6
group6
On

Technical manual
6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE

60255-118 (C37.118) PMUREPORT GUID-0C45D2FA-1B95-4FCA-B23B-A28C2770B817 v2
GUID-0090956B-48F1-4E8B-9A40-90044C71DF20 v1

Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and PMUREPORT - -
C37.118
6.2.2 Functionality GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v5
The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor calculations into an IEC/IEEE
60255-118 (C37.118) and/or IEEE 1344 synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT block
contains parameters for PMU performance class and reporting rate, the IDCODE and Global PMU
ID, format of the data streamed through the protocol, the type of reported synchrophasors, as well as
settings for reporting analog and digital signals.
The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block is set in accordance with the IEC/IEEE
60255-118 (C37.118) and/or IEEE 1344 standards.
There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence, negative sequence or zero sequence in case
of 3-phase phasor and L1, L2 or L3 in case of single phase phasor), PMU's Service class (Protection
or Measurement), Phasor representation (polar or rectangular) and the data types for phasor data,
analog data and frequency data.
Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for
multicast or unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. More information regarding
synchrophasor communication structure and TCP/UDP configuration is available in section IEC/IEEE
60255-118 (C37.118) Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration.
Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, which can stream out same or different data
at different reporting rates or different performance (service) classes. There are 2 instances of PMU
functionality available in the IED. Each instance of PMU functionality includes a set of PMU reporting
function blocks tagged by the same instance number (1 or 2). As shown in the following figures, each
set of PMU reporting function blocks includes PMUREPORT, PHASORREPORT1-4,
ANALOGREPORT1-3, and BINARYREPORT1-3 function blocks. In general, each instance of PMU
functionality has 32 configurable phasor channels (PHASORREPORT1–4 blocks), 24 analog
channels (ANALOGREPORT1-3 blocks), and 28 digital channels (24 digital-report channels in
BINARYREPORT1-3 and 4 trigger-report channels in PMUREPORT function block). Special rules
shall be taken into account in PCM600 for Application Configuration and Parameter Settings of
multiple PMUREPORT blocks. These rules are explained in the Application Manual in section PMU
Report Function Blocks Connection Rules.
Figure 34 shows both instances of the PMUREPORT function block. As seen, each PMUREPORT
instance has 4 predefined binary input signals corresponding to the Bits 03-00: Trigger Reason
defined in STAT field of the Data frame in IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) standard. These are
predefined inputs for Frequency Trigger, Rate of Change of Frequency trigger, Magnitude High and
Magnitude Low triggers.

Technical manual
IEC140000118-2-en.vsd
IEC140000118 V2 EN-US
Figure 34: Multiple instances of PMUREPORT function block

Figure 35 shows both instances of the PHASORREPORT function blocks. The instance number is
visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are four separate
PHASORREPORT blocks including 32 configurable phasor channels (8 phasor channels in each
PHASORREPORT block). Each phasor channel can be configured as a 3-phase (symmetrical
components positive/negative/zero) or single-phase phasor (L1/L2/L3).
IEC140000119-2-en.vsd
IEC140000119 V2 EN-US
Figure 35: Multiple instances of PHASORREPORT blocks

Figure 36 shows both instances of ANALOGREPORT function blocks. The instance number is visible
in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are three separate ANALOGREPORT
blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Analog signals (8 Analog signals in each ANALOGREPORT
block). These can include for example transfer of active and reactive power or reporting the
milliampere input signals to the PDC clients as defined in IEEE IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) data
frame format.
IEC140000120-2-en.vsd
IEC140000120 V2 EN-US
Figure 36: Multiple instances of ANALOGREPORT blocks

Figure 37 shows both instances of BINARYREPORT function blocks. The instance number is visible
in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are three separate BINARYREPORT
blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Binary signals (8 Binary signals in each BINARYREPORT

Technical manual
block). These binary signals can be for example dis-connector or breaker position indications or
internal/external protection alarm signals.
IEC140000121-2-en.vsd
IEC140000121 V2 EN-US
Figure 37: Multiple instances of BINARYREPORT blocks
6.2.3 Function block GUID-45150D7E-3231-4661-A8B4-17364AF25035 v2
PMUREPORT
BLOCK TIMESTAT
^FREQTRIG
^DFDTTRIG
^MAGHIGHTRIG
^MAGLOWTRIG
IEC140000102-1_en.vsd
IEC140000102 V1 EN-US
ANALOGREPORT1
ÂNALOG1
ÂNALOG2
ÂNALOG3
ÂNALOG4
ÂNALOG5
ÂNALOG6
ÂNALOG7
ÂNALOG8
IEC140000107-1_en.vsd
IEC140000107 V1 EN-US
ANALOGREPORT2
ÂNALOG9
ÂNALOG10
ÂNALOG11
ÂNALOG12
ÂNALOG13
ÂNALOG14
ÂNALOG15
ÂNALOG16
IEC140000108-1_en.vsd
IEC140000108 V1 EN-US
ANALOGREPORT3
ÂNALOG17
ÂNALOG18
ÂNALOG19
ÂNALOG20
ÂNALOG21
ÂNALOG22
ÂNALOG23
ÂNALOG24
IEC140000109-1_en.vsd
IEC140000109 V1 EN-US

Technical manual
BINARYREPORT1
^BINARY1
^BINARY2
^BINARY3
^BINARY4
^BINARY5
^BINARY6
^BINARY7
^BINARY8
IEC140000110-1_en.vsd
IEC140000110 V1 EN-US
BINARYREPORT2
^BINARY9
^BINARY10
^BINARY11
^BINARY12
^BINARY13
^BINARY14
^BINARY15
^BINARY16
IEC140000111-1_en.vsd
IEC140000111 V1 EN-US
BINARYREPORT3
^BINARY17
^BINARY18
^BINARY19
^BINARY20
^BINARY21
^BINARY22
^BINARY23
^BINARY24
IEC140000112-1_en.vsd
IEC140000112 V1 EN-US
PHASORREPORT1
^PHASOR1
^PHASOR2
^PHASOR3
^PHASOR4
^PHASOR5
^PHASOR6
^PHASOR7
^PHASOR8
IEC140000103-1_en.vsd
IEC140000103 V1 EN-US
PHASORREPORT2
^PHASOR9
^PHASOR10
^PHASOR11
^PHASOR12
^PHASOR13
^PHASOR14
^PHASOR15
^PHASOR16
IEC140000104-1_en.vsd
IEC140000104 V1 EN-US
PHASORREPORT3
^PHASOR17
^PHASOR18
^PHASOR19
^PHASOR20
^PHASOR21
^PHASOR22
^PHASOR23
^PHASOR24
IEC140000105-1_en.vsd
IEC140000105 V1 EN-US

Technical manual
PHASORREPORT4
^PHASOR25
^PHASOR26
^PHASOR27
^PHASOR28
^PHASOR29
^PHASOR30
^PHASOR31
^PHASOR32
IEC140000106-1_en.vsd
IEC140000106 V1 EN-US
6.2.4 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2
Table 50: PMUREPORT Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Rate of change of frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude low trigger
Table 51: PMUREPORT Output signals

TIMESTAT BOOLEAN Time synchronization status
Table 52: ANALOGREPORT1 Input signals

ANALOG1 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 1


Technical manual

Table 55: BINARYREPORT1 Input signals

BINARY1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel1

BINARY9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 9


Technical manual
Table 58: PHASORREPORT1 Input signals

PHASOR1 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PHASOR5 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor 5
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 62: PMUREPORT Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Operation mode off/on
On
SvcClass P class - - P class Service class
M class
Global_PMU_ID 0 - 16 - 1 0 Global PMU Identifier (G_PMU_ID)
PMUdataStreamIDCOD 1 - 65534 - 1 1 PMU Data Stream ID Number (IDCODE)
E
PhasorFormat Rectangular - - Rectangular Select phasor format
Polar
PhasorDataType Float - - Float Select phasor datatype
Integer
FrequencyDataType Float - - Float Select frequency datatype
Integer
AnalogDataType Float - - Float Select analog data type
Integer

Technical manual

SendFreqInfo Off - - On Send frequency and rate of change of
On frequency information
ReportRate 10/10 fr/s - - 10/10 fr/s Phasor data report rate
(60/50Hz) (60/50Hz)
12/10 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
15/10 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
20/25 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
30/25 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
60/50 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
RptTimetag FirstSample - - MiddleSample Method of phasor timetag
MiddleSample
LastSample
Table 63: ANALOGREPORT1 Non group settings (basic)

Analog1Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 1 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog1UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 1
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

Technical manual

wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

Technical manual

wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

Technical manual

wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

Technical manual
Table 66: PHASORREPORT1 Non group settings (basic)

Phasor2 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor2
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor5 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for phasor5
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor8 L1 - - POSSEQ Group selector for phasor8
L2
L3
POSSEQ
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
Phasor1Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 1
On
Phasor1UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 1 for automatic frequency
On source selection
On
On source selection
On
On source selection
On

Technical manual

On source selection
On
On source selection
On
On source selection
On
On source selection
On
On source selection
Phasor1 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group Selector for Phasor1
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3

NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor11 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor 11
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3

Technical manual

NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
On
On source selection
On
Phasor10UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 10 for automatic
On frequency source selection
On
On
On
On
On
On

Technical manual

NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
On
On

Technical manual

On
On
On
On
On
On

NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3

Technical manual

NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

Technical manual
6.2.6 Monitored data

Table 70: PMUREPORT Monitored data

TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization status
0=Fail
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of frequency
FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference channel number
selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference channel error
available
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger
Table 71: ANALOGREPORT1 Monitored data

ANALOG1 REAL - - Analog input channel 1


Technical manual

Table 74: BINARYREPORT1 Monitored data

BINARY1 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 1



Technical manual
Table 77: PHASORREPORT1 Monitored data

PHASOR1 REAL - - Phasor 1 amplitude
PHASOR1 REAL - deg Phasor 1 angle


Technical manual


6.2.7 Operation principle GUID-EB2B9096-2F9D-4264-B2D2-8D9DC65697E8 v3
The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) features three main functional principles:

Technical manual
• To measure the power system related AC quantities (voltage, current) and to calculate the
phasor representation of these quantities.
• To synchronize the calculated phasors with the UTC by time-tagging, in order to make
synchrophasors (time is reference).
• To publish all phasor-related data by means of TCP/IP or UDP/IP, following the standard IEEE
C37.118 protocol.
The C37.118 standard imposes requirements on the devices and describes the communication
message structure and data. The PMU complies with all the standard requirements with a specific
attention to the Total Vector Error (TVE) requirement. The TVE is calculated using the following
equation:
2
( X r ( n ) - X r )2 + ( X i ( n ) - X i )
TVE =
X r2 + X i2
GUID-80D9B1EA-A770-4F50-9530-61644B4DEBBE V1 EN-US (Equation 1)
where,
Xr(n) and Xi(n) are the measured values
Xr and Xi are the theoretical values
In order to comply with TVE requirements, special calibration is done in the factory on the analog
input channels of the PMU, resulting in increased accuracy of the measurements. The IEEE C37.118
standard also imposes a variety of steady state and dynamic requirements which are fulfilled in the
IED with the help of high accuracy measurements and advanced filtering techniques.
Figure 38 shows an overview of the PMU functionality and operation. In this figure, only one instance
of PMUREPORT (PMUREPORT1) is shown. Note that connection of different signals to the
PMUREPORT, in this figure, is only an example and the actual connections and reported signals on
the IEEEC37.118/1344 can be defined by the user.

Technical manual
U/I samples
PMUREPORT1
MU PHASOR1
PHASOR2 8 TCP
U IEEEC37.118 / 1344
TRM SMAI messages NUM
I
U 6 UDC
TRM PHASOR32
I
ANALOG1
I/P MIM SMMI ANALOG2
MEAS. ANALOG24
BINARY1
BINARY2
BIM
OR
BINARY24
PROTECTION
GPS / OP
IRIG-B FREQTRIG
UP
DFDTTRIG
OC
PPS time data MAGHIGHTRIG
MAGLOWTRIG
UV
IEC140000146-1-en.vsd
IEC140000146 V2 EN-US
Figure 38: Overview of reporting functionality (PMUREPORT)
The TRM modules are individually AC-calibrated in the factory. The calibration data is stored in the
prepared area of the TRM EEProm. The pre-processor block is extended with calibration
compensation and a new angle reference method based on timestamps. The AI3P output of the
preprocessor block is used to provide the required information for each respective PMUREPORT
phasor channel. More information about preprocessor block is available in the section Signal matrix
for analog inputs SMAI.
6.2.7.1 Frequency reporting GUID-4F3BA7C7-8C9B-4266-9F72-AFB139E9DC21 v2
By using patented algorithm the IED can track the power system frequency in quite wide range from
9 Hz to 95 Hz. In order to do that, the three-phase voltage signal shall be connected to the IED. Then
IED can adapt its filtering algorithm in order to properly measure phasors of all current and voltage
signals connected to the IED. This feature is essential for proper operation of the PMUREPORT
function or for protection during generator start-up and shut-down procedure.
This adaptive filtering is ensured by proper configuration and settings of all relevant pre-processing
blocks, see Signal matrix for analog inputs in the Application manual. Note that in all preconfigured
IEDs such configuration and settings are already made and the three-phase voltage are used as
master for frequency tracking. With such settings the IED will be able to properly estimate the
magnitude and the phase angle of measured current and voltage phasors in this wide frequency
range.
One of the important functions of a PMU is reporting a very accurate system frequency to the PDC
client. In the IED, each of the PMUREPORT instances is able to report an accurate frequency. Each
voltage-connected preprocessor block (SMAI block) delivers the frequency data, derived from the
analog input AC voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor channel. Every phasor channel has
a user-settable parameter (PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source of frequency data for

Technical manual
reporting to the PDC client. It is very important to set this parameter to On for the voltage-connected
phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency source selection logic to ensure an uninterrupted
reporting of the system frequency to the PDC client. In this frequency source selection logic, the
following general rules are applied:
• Only the voltage phasor channels are used

• The phasor channel with a lower channel number is prioritized to the one with a higher channel
number
As a result, the first voltage phasor is always the one delivering the system frequency to the PDC
client and if, by any reason, this voltage gets disconnected then the next available voltage phasor is
automatically used as the frequency source and so on. If the first voltage phasor comes back, since it
has a higher priority compare to the currently selected phasor channel, after 500 ms it will be
automatically selected again as the frequency source. There is also an output available on the
component which shows if the reference frequency is good, error or reference channel unavailable.
It is possible to monitor the status of the frequency reference channel (frequency source) for the
respective PMUREPORT instance on Local HMI under Test /Function status /Communication /
Station Communication /PMU Report /PMUREPORT:1 /Outputs , where the FREQREFCHSEL
output shows the selected channel as the reference for frequency and FREQREFCHERR output
states if the reference frequency is good, or if there is an error or if the reference channel is
unavailable. For more information refer to the table PMUREPORT monitored data.
Table 81: PMUREPORT Monitored data

TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization status
0=Fail
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of frequency
FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference channel number
selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference channel error
available
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger
6.2.7.2 Reporting filters GUID-D39153B5-81CE-4C1F-A816-C7A4C3407048 v2
The PMUREPORT function block implements the reporting filters designed to avoid aliasing as the
reporting frequency is lower than the sample/calculation frequency. This means, the synchrophasor
and frequency data which are included in the C37.118 synchrophasor streaming data are filtered in
order to suppress aliasing effects, as the rate of the C37.118 data is slower than the data rate for
internal processing. For this purpose, there is an anti-aliasing filter designed for each reporting rate.
The correct anti-aliasing filter will be automatically selected based on the reporting rate and the
performance class (P/M) settings. The filters are designed to attenuate all aliasing frequencies to at
least -40 dB (a gain of 0.01) at M class.
The synchrophasor measurement is adaptive as it follows the fundamental

frequency over a wide range despite the reporting rate.

Technical manual
For example, when the synchrophasor measurement follows the fundamental frequency beyond the
fixed Nyquist limits in C37.118 standard, the anti-aliasing filter stopband moves with the measured
fundamental frequency. This has to be considered in connection with C37.118, where the passband
is defined relative to a fixed nominal frequency as shown in the equation 2.
Fs
f0 ±
2
IECEQUATION2418 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)
where,
f0 is the nominal frequency
Fs is the reporting rate
6.2.7.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels GUID-0DDAF6A9-8643-4FDD-97CF-9E35EF40AF7E v2
The internal calculation of analog values in the IED is based on 32 bit floating point. Therefore, if the
user selects to report the analog data (AnalogDataType) as Integer, there will be a down-conversion
of a 32 bit floating value to a new 16 bit integer value. In such a case, in order to optimize the
resolution of the reported analog data, the user-defined analog scaling is implemented in the IED.
The analog scaling in the IED is automatically calculated by use of the user-defined parameters
AnalogXRange for the respective analog channel X. The analog data value on the input X will have a
range between -AnalogXRange and +AnalogXRange. The resulting scale factor will be applied to the
reported analog data where applicable.
If the AnalogDataType is selected as Float, then these settings are ignored.
The analog scaling in the IED is calculated using the equation:
AnalogXRange ´ 2
S calefactor =
65535.0
offset = 0.0
65535.0 = 16 bit integer range
IECEQUATION2443 V1 EN-US
According to the IEEE C37.118.2 standard, the scale factors (conversion factor) for analog channels
are defined in configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) and configuration frame 3 (CFG-3) frames as follows:
• CFG-2 frame: The field ANUNIT (4 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as a signed 24 bit
word for user defined scaling. Since it is a 24 bit integer, in order to support the floating point
scale factor, the scale factor itself is multiplied in 10, so that a minimum of 0.1 scale factor can
be sent over the CFG-2 frame. The resulting scale factor is rounded to the nearest decimal
value. The clients receiving the Analog scale factor over CFG-2 should divide the received scale
factor by 10 and then apply it to the corresponding analog data value.
• CFG-3 frame: The field ANSCALE (8 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as X’ = M * X + B
where; M is magnitude scaling in 32 bit floating point (first 4 bytes) and B is the offset in 32 bit
floating point (last 4 bytes).
The server uses CFG-3 scale factor to scale the analog data values. As a result, the clients which
use scale factors in CFG-3 in order to recalculate analog values, will get a better resolution than
using the scale factors in CFG-2.
The following examples show how the scale factor is calculated.
Example 1:
AnalogXRange = 3277.0

Technical manual
The scale factor is calculated as follows:
(3277.0 ´ 2.0 )
sc alefac tor = = 0.1 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.1 on configuration frame 3. The
range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.1 to -3276.8 and +0.1 to +3276.7.
Example 2:
AnalogXRange = 4915.5
(4915.5 ´ 2.0 )
s c alefac tor = = 0.15 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.15 on configuration frame 3. The
range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.15 to -4915.5 and +0.15 to +4915.5.
Example 3:
Analo gXRange = 10000000000

(10000000000 ´ 2.0)
sc alefac tor = = 305180.43 and offse t = 0.0
65535.5
The scale factor will be sent as 3051804 on configuration frame 2, and 305180.43 on configuration
frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -305181 to -10000000000
and +305181 to +10000000000.
6.2.8 Technical data SEMOD172233-1 v1
GUID-F0BAEBD8-E361-4D50-9737-7DF8B043D66A v5
Table 82: PMUREPORT technical data
Influencing quantity Range Accuracy

Signal frequency ± 0.1 x fr ≤ 1.0% TVE
Signal magnitude:
Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x Ur
Current phasor (0.5–2.0) x Ir
Phase angle ± 180°

Harmonic distortion 10% from 2nd – 50th
Interfering signal:
Magnitude 10% of fundamental signal
Minimum frequency 0.1 x fr
Maximum frequency 1000 Hz

Technical manual
138
Section 7 Differential protection

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase
HZPDIF IP14239-1 v4
7.1.1 Identification M14813-1 v4
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
High impedance differential protection,

HZPDIF Id 87
single phase
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US
7.1.2 Functionality M13071-3 v13
High impedance differential protection, single phase (HZPDIF) functions can be used when the
involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It utilizes an
external CT secondary current summation by wiring. Actually all CT secondary circuits which are
involved in the differential scheme are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage
dependent resistor which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-transformers,

capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-impedance restricted earth
fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated
differential protection.
7.1.3 Function block M13737-3 v3
HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT
Figure 39: HZPDIF function block
7.1.4 Signals IP14244-1 v2
Table 83: HZPDIF Input signals

ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Technical manual
Table 84: HZPDIF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
7.1.5 Settings IP14245-1 v2
Table 85: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms

Table 86: HZPDIF Monitored data

MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage on CT
secondary side
7.1.7 Operation principle IP14242-1 v2
M13075-3 v11
High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs, used in the
protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar magnetizing characteristic and the
same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of the protected object. In order to make a scheme all
CT secondary circuits belonging to one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points
a measuring branch is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable
setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current element. Thus, the
high impedance differential protection responds to the current flowing through the measuring branch.
However, this current is result of a differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across
the measuring branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire scheme
from high peak voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical high impedance differential
scheme is shown in Figure 40. Note that only one phase is shown in this figure.

Technical manual
RS
3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5
2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN-US
Figure 40: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:
1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs, from the same
phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.
It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exists in such
protection scheme.
3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.
4. shows the over-current measuring element.
The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current element is

designated as measuring branch.
5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).
6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.
U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following formula U=RS × I.
Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only measure one
current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is no any stabilizing quantity
(that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the
stability of the differential relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set
pickup value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay set pickup
value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the
saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false differential
current than the measuring branch. In case of an external fault causing current transformer
saturation, the non-saturated current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through
the secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the measuring brunch of
the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current transformer secondary winding appears also
across the measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value
of the relay has to be set above this false operating voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

Technical manual
7.1.7.1 Logic diagram M13075-9 v5
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential protection
function HZPDIF, see Figure 41.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to it. Thus the
twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the HZPDIF function. These
current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get
voltage waveform across the measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get
its RMS value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete removal of
the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault current. The voltage RMS value
is then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally
delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a
service value from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.
Figure 41: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
7.1.8 Technical data IP14246-1 v1
M13081-1 v13
Table 87: HZPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum continuous power See1) -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms
Max. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

Technical manual

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 ms
Max. = 70 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -
1) The value U2Trip/ R should always be lower than Stabilizing resistor thermal rating to allow continuous activation
during testing. If this value is exceeded, testing should be done with a transient faults. Typical value for the thermal
rating of the resistor is 100W.

Technical manual
144
Impedance protection
Section 8 Impedance protection

8.1 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF SEMOD153633-1 v3
8.1.1 Function revision history GUID-A7F84AD6-F164-491B-B25E-D3BB002E1BDA v3
Document Product History

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 Updated technical data for setting parameters tDuration, tDLD and tOperate.
L 2.2.5 -
SEMOD155890-2 v4

Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF - -
8.1.3 Functionality SEMOD153644-5 v9
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF is a function that gives an instantaneous trip when
closing the breaker onto a fault. A dead-line detection check is provided to activate ZCVPSOF when
the line is de-energized.
Mho distance protections cannot operate for switch onto fault conditions when the phase voltages
are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for this purpose.
ZCVPSOF is a complementary function to the distance protection function. It is enabled for operation
either by the closing command to the circuit breaker (normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit
breaker) to the BC input or automatically by the dead-line detection. Once enabled, it remains active
for tSOTF duration after the enabling signal is reset. The protection function can be enabled for
tripping during the activated time by connecting the functions included in the terminal to the ZACC
input. Therefore, the start of the selected protection functions connected to ZACC during the enabled
condition results in an immediate TRIP output from the function.

Technical manual
8.1.4 Function block SEMOD156265-4 v6
Figure 42: ZCVPSOF function block
Table 88: ZCVPSOF Input signals

I3P GROUP - Current DFT
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage DFT
SIGNAL
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated with delay by SOTF
BC BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF
ZACC BOOLEAN 0 Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF
Table 89: ZCVPSOF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
Table 90: ZCVPSOF Non group settings (basic)

GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Table 91: ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)

On
AutoInitMode DLD disabled - - DLD disabled Automatic switch onto fault initialization
Voltage
Current
Current & Voltage
Mode Impedance - - UILevel Mode of operation of SOTF Function
UILevel
UILvl&Imp
IPh< 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Current level for detection of dead line in
% of IBase

Technical manual

UPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Voltage level for detection of dead line in
% of UBase
tDuration 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay for UI detection (s)
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Drop off delay time of switch onto fault
function
tDLD 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for activation of dead line
detection
tOperate 0.03 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.03 Time delay to operate of switch onto fault
function

Table 92: ZCVPSOF Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
8.1.8 Operation principle SEMOD153665-4 v8
The automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF can be activated externally (by the breaker-closed
input) or internally (automatically) with the dead-line detection using the UI level-based logic. When
the setting AutoInitMode is DLD disabled, ZCVPSOF is activated by an external binary input BC.
When the setting AutoInitMode is set to Voltage, Current or Current & Voltage modes, ZCVPSOF is
activated by the dead-line detection.
The activation from the dead-line detection function is released if the internal signal DeadLine from
the UILevel Detector function is activated at the same time as the inputs ZACC and START_DLYD
are not activated at least for the duration of tDLD. The internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel
Detector function is activated under any of the following conditions:
• If all three-phase currents are below the setting IPh< and the AutoInitMode setting is set to
Current
• If all three-phase voltages are below the setting UPh< and the AutoInitMode setting is set to
Voltage
• If all three-phase currents and voltages are below the settings IPh< and UPh< and the
AutoInitMode setting is set to Current & Voltage
Once the dead line drops off after energization or once BC drops off, the activated signal is extended
for the duration of tSOTF.
The internal signal SOTFUILevel is activated if the phase voltage is below the set UPh< and the
corresponding phase current is above the set IPh< for a time longer than the duration set by
tDuration.
To get the TRIP signal, one of the different operate modes must also be selected with the Mode
parameter:

Technical manual
• Mode = Impedance; TRIP is released if either the ZACC input (connected normally to a
nondirectional distance protection start zone) or the START_DLYD input is activated. If
START_DLD is activated, TRIP is released after a delay of tOperate.
• Mode = UILevel; TRIP is released if UILevel detector is activated
• Mode = UILvl&Imp; TRIP is released based either on the impedance-measured criteria or
UILevel detection
The ZCVPSOF function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
The measured phase voltages and currents are provided as service values.
BLOCK
15ms
BC TRIP
& t
ZACC tSOTF
tDLD t
START_DLYD ≥1
& t
≥1
tOperate
t
I3P
U3P
DeadLine
IPh< UILevel tDuration
Detector t
UPh<
AutoInitMode
&
Mode = Impedance
SOTFUILevel
& ≥1
Mode = UILevel
≥1
&
Mode = UILvl&Imp
Figure 43: Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic
M16043-1 v14
Table 93: ZCVPSOF technical data
Parameter Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Time delay to operate for the switch (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
onto fault function
Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
detection
Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
function

Technical manual
Current protection
Section 9 Current protection

9.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC IP14506-1 v6
M14880-1 v5

Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent (PHPIOC) function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3
Figure 44: PHPIOC function block
9.1.4 Signals IP11433-1 v2
Table 94: PHPIOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier
Table 95: PHPIOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 96: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out
1 out of 3 of 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase
Table 97: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

IP>>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operate phase current
level in % of IBase, if IP>> is less than
IP>>Min then IP>> is set to IP>>Min
IP>>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate phase current
level in % of IBase, if IP>> is greater
than IP>>Max then IP>> is set to
IP>>Max
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
Table 98: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 99: PHPIOC Monitored data

9.1.7 Operation principle M12913-3 v8
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. The
RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency components, as well as
sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>).
If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase
is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase
and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out
of 3, any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3, at least two phase
signals must be activated for trip.

Technical manual
Current protection
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult) via a
binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example,
due to transformer inrush currents.
The operation current value IP>>, is limited to be between IP>>Max and IP>>Min. The default values
of the limits are the same as the setting limits for IP>>, and the limits can only be used for reducing
the allowed range of IP>>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is
allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If IP>> is set
outside IP>>Max and IP>>Min, the closest of the limits to IP>> is used by the function. If IP>>Max is
smaller then IP>>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 45.
IP>>Max
MAX hi
u y
IP>>_used
IP>>
MIN lo
IP>>Min
Figure 45: Logic for limitation of used operation current value
PHPIOC can be blocked using the binary input BLOCK.
M12336-1 v14
Table 100: PHPIOC technical data

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 40 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
9.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps

OC4PTOC SEMOD129998-1 v8

Technical manual
Current protection
9.2.1 Function revision history GUID-154CAE8E-8FD4-460C-852D-6E5C93545F0D v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 • The harmonic restraint function changed to freeze the definite and IDMT timers.
• The maximum value of the settings IMin1, IMin2, IMin3 and IMin4 has been
decreased to 1000.0 % of IBase.
M14885-1 v6

Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
TOC-REVA V2 EN-US
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps (OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay
for each step.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined
time characteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set
to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each step
individually.

Technical manual
Current protection
OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
STDI RCND
Figure 46: OC4PTOC function block
9.2.5 Signals
Table 101: OC4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1

Technical manual
Current protection

ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
Table 102: OC4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1

Technical manual
Current protection

ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded start and directional information
9.2.6 Settings
Table 103: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
Value groups
Table 104: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time delay / additional time delay
for IDMT characteristics of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 1000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
for step 2

Technical manual
Current protection

of IBase
for step 2
step 2
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
for step 3
of IBase
for step 3
step 3
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
for step 4
of IBase
for step 4
step 4
Table 105: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in
% of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
I1>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if I1> is
greater than I1>Max then I1> is set to
I1>Max
I1>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current
less than I1>Min then I1> is set to
I1>Min
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
I2>Max
I2>Min
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
On restrain
I3>Max
I3>Min
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3

Technical manual
Current protection

On restrain
I4>Max
I4>Min
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
On restrain

Table 106: OC4PTOC Monitored data

DIRL1 INTEGER 0=No direction - Direction for phase1
1=Forward
2=Reverse
1=Forward
2=Reverse
1=Forward
2=Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC is divided into four different sub-
functions. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/
Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be divided into four parts:
• The direction element

• The harmonic restraint blocking function
• The four step overcurrent function
• The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModex shall be
left to default value, Non-directional.
4 step overcurrent
Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START
U3P
TRIP
Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 47: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

M12883-16 v13
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be
high to enable operation. These settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the function OC4PTOC, it is
possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. Either discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS) can be selected.
If the DFT option is selected, only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency component of each
phase current is derived. The influence of the DC current component and higher harmonic current
components are almost completely suppressed. If the RMS option is selected, then the true RMS

Technical manual
Current protection
value is used. The true RMS value includes the contribution from the current DC component as well
as from the higher current harmonic in addition to the fundamental frequency component.
In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the
function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>) for each phase current. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3 are activated without delay. Output
signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will
initiate the activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be
noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of
directional part of OC4PTOC.
Service values for individually measured phase currents are available on the local HMI for OC4PTOC
function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the
fundamental current is used.
The function can be directional. The direction of a fault is given as the current angle in relation to the
voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function are dependent on the
fault type. The selection of the measured value (DFT or RMS) does not influence the operation of the
directional part of OC4PTOC. To enable directional measurement at close-in faults, causing a low
measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a
memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN-US (Equation 3)
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set
base voltage UBase. So the directional element can be used for all unsymmetrical faults including
close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence
voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

Technical manual
Current protection
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (7% of the set terminal
rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse
direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the
positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle
window ROADir.
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 48: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –55°. The parameter AngleROA gives the angular distance from
AngleRCA to define the directional borders.
A minimum current for the directional phase start current signal can be set. IMinOpPhSel is the start
level for the directional evaluation of IL1, IL2 and IL3. The directional signals release the overcurrent
measurement in the respective phases if their current amplitudes are higher than the start level
(IMinOpPhSel) and the direction of the current is according to the set direction of the step.
If no blocking signals are active, the start signal will start the timer of the steps. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or an inverse time delay
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time delay characteristics is available. It is also
possible to create a tailor made time characteristic.
The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse characteristics".

Technical manual
Current protection
HarmBlockx = Enabled
Freeze Timers
AND
2ndH_FreezeTimers_int
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b tx
F a>b
a t
TRx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR
a>b
b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
F
Inverse
Ix>
AND
AND
Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
DirModex=Off t
OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC12000008‐2‐en.vsdx
Figure 49: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC
I3P
DFWDLx
U3P DFWDLxx
DREVLx
Directional
Element
AngleRCA DREVLxx FORWARD_int
Directional
AngleROA Release REVERSE_int
Block
STLx
Greater
IMinOpPhSel Comparator
x‐ means three phases 1,2 and 3
xx – means phase to phase 12,23,31
Figure 50: OC4 directional release block diagram

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse characteristics".

Technical manual
Current protection
There is a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current
via a binary input ENMULTx (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be
changed, for example due to changed network switching state.
The operation current value Ix>, is limited to be between Ix>Max and Ix>Min. The default values of
the limits are the same as the setting limits for Ix>, and the limits can only be used for reducing the
allowed range of Ix>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is
allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If Ix> is set outside
Ix>Max and Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by the function. If Ix>Max is smaller then
Ix>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 51.
Ix>Max
MAX hi
u y
Ix>_used
Ix>
MIN lo
Ix>Min
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the start and directional
evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as described in Table 107.
Table 107: Code description for STDIRCND output signal
STDIRCND Description
bit 0 (1) General start
bit 1 (2) Direction detected in forward
bit 2 (4) Direction detected in reverse
bit 3 (8) Start in phase L1
bit 4 (16) Forward direction detected in phase L1
bit 5 (32) Reverse direction detected in phase L1
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input BLKSTx
(x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of the respective step.
The start signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKTR.
GUID-E3980B2D-EEDA-4BF1-A07D-E7B721130554 v7
A harmonic restrain of the directional phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can be
chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in a phase current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab
setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can have their timers selectively frozen by the parameter
HarmBlockx setting. When the 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function
output signal ST2NDHRM will be set to the logical value one.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract 2ndH_FreezeTimers_Int
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
Figure 52: Second harmonic blocking
When enabled, the 2nd harmonic blocking function is used to freeze the Definite
and/or the Inverse Characteristics internal timers. When the function detects a 2nd
harmonic higher than the set threshold, the internal function timers are frozen but
START outputs continues to be active as long as the measured current is above the
set pickup level. Internal timers will again resume timing when harmonic content
becomes smaller than the set threshold and the measured current is higher than the
pickup value. If TRIP output is already active when harmonic blocking signal appears
the TRIP output will not be affected.
When DirModex is set to Forward/Reverse and Ix> is set at its minimum value, that
is, 5.0% of IBase, the operation from the respective overcurrent step takes place at
20.0% of IBase. This is done to avoid unintentional maloperations during unbalanced
loading conditions that might appear in power systems and the unbalanced loading
condition might lead to a neutral current in the range of 10.0% to 15.0% of IBase.
9.2.9 Technical data

M12342-1 v23
Table 108: OC4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1-4
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
curves , step 1-4
Inverse time characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 1097, table 1098 and table
table 1097, table 1098 and table 1099 1099
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -
to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms

Technical manual
Current protection

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset to 0
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -
to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Operate frequency, directional 38-83 Hz -
overcurrent
Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -
overcurrent
9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC IP14508-1 v3
M14887-1 v4

Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>
IEF V1 EN-US
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC) has a low transient overreach and short
tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault protection, with the reach limited to less
than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to
measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure
the current from a separate current input.
EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
ENMULT
Figure 53: EFPIOC function block
9.3.4 Signals IP11448-1 v2

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 109: EFPIOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier
Table 110: EFPIOC Output signals

Table 111: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
Table 112: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

IN>>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operate residual current
level in % of IBase, if IN>> is less than
IN>>Min then IN>> is set to IN>>Min
IN>>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level in % of IBase, if IN>> is greater
than IN>>Max then IN>> is set to
IN>>Max
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
Table 113: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 114: EFPIOC Monitored data

IN REAL - A Residual current
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block.
From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as from the sample
values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual

Technical manual
Current protection
overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation
current value of the function (IN>>).
If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to
true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input
(enable multiplier ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for
example, due to transformer inrush currents.
The operation current value IN>>, is limited to be between IN>>Max and IN>>Min. The default values
of the limits are the same as the setting limits for IN>>, and the limits can only be used for reducing
the allowed range of IN>>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is
allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If IN>> is set
outside IN>>Max and IN>>Min, the closest of the limits to IN>> is used by the function. If IN>>Max is
smaller then IN>>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 54.
IN>>Max
MAX hi
u y
IN>>_used
IN>>
MIN lo
IN>>Min
EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can
be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and
autoreclosing sequences.
M12340-2 v10
Table 115: EFPIOC technical data

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Max. = 25 ms
Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

Technical manual
Current protection
9.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps

EF4PTOC IP14509-1 v8
9.4.1 Function revision history GUID-0F9199B0-3F86-45E0-AFC2-747052A20AE1 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 Technical data table updated with note “Operate time and reset time are only valid if
harmonic blocking is turned off for a step”.
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 The phase selection logic is added to allow phase segregated trip. The new phase
selections outputs added to this release are PHSELL1, PHSELL2 and PHSELL3. The
setting EnPhaseSel is added to enable or disable phase selection. The maximum value
changed to 2000.0 % of IBase for IMin1, IMin2, IMin3 and IMin4 settings.
N 2.2.5 The harmonic restrain function changed to freeze the definite and IDMT timers.
M14881-1 v7

Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 4(IN>)
51N_67N
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps (EF4PTOC) can be used as main protection for
phase-to-earth faults. It can also be used to provide a system back-up, for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
failure.
EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user-defined
characteristic.
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each step.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative sequence.

Technical manual
Current protection
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
Directional operation can be combined together with the corresponding communication logic in
permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality
are available as well.
The residual current can be calculated by summing the three-phase currents or taking the input from
the neutral CT.
EF4PTOC also provides very fast and reliable faulty phase identification for phase selective tripping
and subsequent reclosing during earth fault.
EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
U3P* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
BLKPHSEL STIN4
ENMULT1 STSOTF
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4 PHSELL1
CBPOS PHSELL2
CLOSECB PHSELL3
OPENCB 2NDHARMD
Figure 55: EF4PTOC function block
9.4.5 Signals IP11453-1 v2
Table 116: EF4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKPHSEL BOOLEAN 0 Block phase selection

Technical manual
Current protection

CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command
Table 117: EF4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN Start of phase selection, phase L1
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal
Table 118: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 119: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
PolMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start
Step 3 SOTF
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
EnPhaseSel Off - - Off Enable phase selection
On
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1
in % of IBase
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase

Technical manual
Current protection

time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
value for step 2
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
time characteristic
value for step 3
On restrain
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
time characteristic
value for step 4
On restrain
Table 120: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IN1>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if IN1> is
greater than IN1>Max then IN1> is set to
IN1>Max
IN1>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current
less than IN1>Min then IN1> is set to
IN1>Min
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
IN2>Max
IN2>Min
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
IN3>Max
IN3>Min
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3

Technical manual
Current protection

IN4>Max
IN4>Min
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4

Table 121: EF4PTOC Monitored data

IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle
M13941-51 v8
This function has the following four analog inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:

Technical manual
Current protection
1. I3P, input used for the operating quantity. Supplies the zero-sequence magnitude measuring
functionality.
2. U3P, input used for the voltage polarizing quantity. Supplies either the zero or the negative
sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3P and U3P also supply current and voltage samples for faulty phase selection functionality.
4. I3PPOL, input used for the current polarizing quantity. Provides polarizing current to the
directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a power
transformer.
5. I3PDIR, input used for directional detection. Supplies either the zero or the negative sequence
current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
configuration tool in PCM600.
9.4.8.1 Operating quantity within the function M13941-58 v10
The function always uses residual current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be:
1. Directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input I3P). This
dedicated IED CT input can be, for example, connected to:
• Parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (Holm-Green
connection).
• One single core balance current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• One single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and
earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer
winding).
• One single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object
(current transformer located between two star points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. Calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input of the
pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function Analog Input I3P, is not connected to a
dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such a case, the pre-processing block will
calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula (will take 3I0 from SMAI AI3P and will be connected to I3PDIR and I3P inputs.
If the zero sequence current is selected,
Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2, and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental
frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the
EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>,
IN3>, or IN4>).
If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional
mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate
the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START signal.
9.4.8.2 Internal polarizing M13941-82 v12
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the earth fault
(forward/reverse).

Technical manual
Current protection
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, the protection will use the residual voltage -3U0 as the polarizing
quantity U3P.
This voltage can be:
1. Directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input U3P). This
dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to the open delta winding of a three-phase main
VT.
2. Calculated from three-phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog input of the
pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC analog function input U3P, is NOT connected to a
dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such a case, the pre-processing block will
calculate -3U0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula:
UPol = -3U 0 = -(UL1 + UL2 + UL3)

where:
UL1, UL2, and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
In order to use this, all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED
VT inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the
magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter
UPolMin.
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3U0) or negative sequence voltage (-3U2) is used to
determine the location of the earth fault. This ensures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage
within the earth-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected, the function will use an external residual current (3I0) as the
polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1. Directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This
dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current transformer located
between power system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications, this dedicated IED CT input can be
connected to a parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-
Green connection).
2. Calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the
pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function analog input I3PPOL, is NOT connected
to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case, the pre-processing block will
calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula:

Technical manual
Current protection
IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2, and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental
frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with the pre-
set equivalent zero-sequence source impedance in order to calculate the equivalent polarizing
voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:
UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction to the earth fault (forward/reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing, the magnitude of the polarizing current shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and
current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol=UPol  UIPol=UPol  Z 0s  IPol  UPol   RNPol  jXNPol   Ipol

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component depending
upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the
operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (forward/reverse).
9.4.8.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function M13941-144 v6
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected,
it is possible via the function binary input BLKSTx to provide external directional control (that is,
torque control) by, for example, using one of the following functions if available in the IED:
1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection function.
9.4.8.4 Directional detection for earth fault function GUID-FC382DD3-E2C8-455E-8CD5-1DE1793DD178 v6
Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for the earth fault function. In
some cases, zero sequence quantities might detect directionality incorrectly. In such a scenario,
negative sequence quantities will be used. The user can select either zero sequence components or
negative sequence components for detecting directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR
input is always connected to the same source as I3P input.
9.4.8.5 Base quantities within the protection M13941-152 v6
The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current (IBase)
shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage
(UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.4.8.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure M13941-157 v5
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated directional
comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection schemes (permissive or
blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during
switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems
during breaker opening or closing sequence.
9.4.8.7 Four residual overcurrent steps M13941-166 v9
Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as the measuring quantity. Each
of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:
• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter setting

the directional mode of the step is selected.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting it is possible
to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault protection. Most of the standard IEC
and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this parameter setting
it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the complete list of available reset
curves, please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay,
minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user
programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter setting it is
possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual current
exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this
parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary
input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
• The operation current value INx>, is limited to be between INx>Max and INx>Min. The default
values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for INx>, and the limits can only be used for
reducing the allowed range of INx>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation
current value is allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is
reasonable. If INx> is set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest of the limits to INx> is used
by the function. If INx>Max is smaller then INx>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the
limitation is shown in Figure 56.
INx>Max
MAX hi
INx>_used
INx> u y
MIN lo
INx>Min
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in Figure 57.

Technical manual
Current protection
HarmBlockx = Enabled
Freeze Timers
AND
2ndH_FreezeTimers_int
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b tx
F a>b
a t
TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR
a>b
b
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
F
Inverse
INx>
AND
AND
txmin
DirModex=Off t
OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
Figure 57: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for respective
step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
9.4.8.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function M13941-179 v11
At least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in order
to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated
directional comparison function.
The protection has an integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current Iop is always
used, the polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing
quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:
1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. When polMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in
Figure 58, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Technical manual
Current protection
Operating area
STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg
RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0
-RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR
STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
Figure 58: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the zero sequence
components
The relevant setting parameters for the directional supervision element are:
• The directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40%
of IN>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in the set direction.
• The relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse
areas in the operating characteristic.
The directional comparison will set the output binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than setting
parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of
setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step is shown in Figure 59:

Technical manual
Current protection
| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b STFW
IN>Dir b AND
FORWARD_Int
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual IPolMin
UPol T
I3PDIR
0.0 F
polMethod=Current
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
F
UIPol
RNPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
X T
Complex 0.0 STAGE2_DIR_Int
Number 0.0 F OR
XNPol STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
Figure 59: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step
9.4.8.9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941-200 v10
A harmonic restrain can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmBlockx. If the ratio of
the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual
current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab), output signal 2NDHARMD is
set to logical value one and the harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.
Blocking from the 2nd harmonic element activates if all of three criteria are satisfied:
1. The fundamental frequency component of the current > 1% of IBase

2. The second harmonic component > 1% of IBase
3. The ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in
the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab setting
In addition to the basic functionality explained above, the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such
way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC
during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk
of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer
is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched-in transformer will cause partial
saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the
two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing,

Technical manual
Current protection
is a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore, we have high 2nd harmonic current
component initially. After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic
blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by
using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in feature is
activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual
overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which one of
the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated, the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal is sealed-in
until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting UseStartValue
(see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in Figure 60.
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
q-1
0-70ms OR 2ndH_FreezeTimers_int
AND OR
0
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
Use_PUValue
Pickup1>
Pickup2>
Pickup3>
Pickup4>
ANSI13000015-2-en.vsdx
ANSI13000015 V2 EN-US
Figure 60: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

Technical manual
Current protection
9.4.8.10 Switch on to fault feature M13941-211 v5
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are the switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and
the under-time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate SOTF, the under-time logic or
both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example
during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such
situations. The time during which SOTF and under-time logics will be active after activation is defined
by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting
parameter StepForSOTF. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB
position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual
current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay
tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The under-time logic acts as a circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The under-time logic can only be used in solidly or low
impedance grounded systems.
The under-time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The under-time logic will normally
be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The under-time logic can also be
blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer
inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The under-time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This
selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give
a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms).

Technical manual
Current protection
SOTF
200 ms
Open
t
t4U
200 ms
Closed
t ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND t
AND
STIN2
StepForSOTF
STIN3
SOTF
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME
UnderTime TRIP
tUnderTime
SOTF or
AND
2nd Harmonic HarmResSOFT t UnderTime
OR
Open
Close OR
t4U
ActUnderTime
Close command AND
STIN4
Figure 61: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and under-time features
M13941-3 v6
Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC function is shown in Figure 62:
signal to communication scheme

Directional Check
Element
4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0
angleValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir
harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element TRIP

start step 2, 3 and 4
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRSOTF
CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 62: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

Technical manual
Current protection
9.4.8.11 Phase selection element GUID-81F5DC32-C8AF-4EF4-BEF6-8335A9197617 v1
The phase selection element provides very fast and reliable faulty phase identification for phase
selective tripping and subsequent reclosing during earth faults. The operation of the phase selection
element is based on both voltage phasor comparison and current change criteria. This measuring
principle successfully distinguishes the faulty phase with minimum influence from load current or
other disturbances, such as power swing. The phase selection feature can be enabled by setting
EnPhaseSel.
The faulty phases are primarily identified by a delta current criteria. Per-phase and phase-to-phase
delta currents are calculated and compared with different criteria to determine if there is a single
phase or phase-to-phase to earth fault. In case the fault cannot be identified by the delta current
criteria, a voltage phasor based method will be applied by comparing the angle between the voltage
phasor and the zero sequence current. The voltage phasor based method is applicable for forward
direction single phase to ground faults. If a three phase disturbance has been identified (for example,
during power swing), the voltage based method will be temporarily disabled until the disturbance
disappears.
The operation of the phase selection element is controlled by the measured zero sequence current.
When the measured zero sequence current is above the operate level (60% of IN>Dir), phase
selection is released. Once the faulty phase is selected, the selected phase will be latched until the
zero sequence current drops below the operate level.
Outputs PHSELL1, PHSELL2, and PHSELL3 are used to indicate the selected faulty phases. The
outputs are released when general START from EF4 function is TRUE.
The phase selection element will be blocked by the external input BLKPHSEL or when the circuit
breaker position is open. The CBPOS input will be high when the circuit breaker is closed and it will
be low when the circuit breaker is open. The CBPOS input provides the CB position to phase
selection element.
I3P Phase selection by

delta current AND S Q
SR AND
R
3I0 a
a>b
0.6* IN>Dir
b PHSELLx
OR
CBPOS
tON = 20ms
Phase selection by
U3P voltage and zero
AND 1s AND
sequence current
phasor
No 3 Phase Disturbance
STFW
Figure 63: Simplified logic diagram for Phase selection

Technical manual
Current protection
M15223-1 v18
Table 122: EF4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

1-4 greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1-4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 1097, 16 curve types See Table 1097, Table 1098 and
Table 1098 and Table 1099 Table 1099
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used for current (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
polarization
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 Min. = 15 ms -
x Iset Max. = 30 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to Min. = 15 ms -

0 Max. = 30 ms
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x Iset Max. = 20 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -

to 0 Max. = 35 ms

*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.
9.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

Technical manual
Current protection
9.5.1 Function revision history GUID-FEAFB742-D0DA-4F9E-B4AC-84E568301282 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 Maximum value changed to 2000.0 % of IBase for IMin1, IMin2, IMin3 and IMin4
settings.
K 2.2.5 -
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
9.5.3 Functionality GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined
characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits,
phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in

permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero sequence
current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.5.4 Function block GUID-8EDB8B12-0D86-4F6B-A1FB-F5D0C72AA545 v3
NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4
Figure 64: NS4PTOC function block
9.5.5 Signals
Table 123: NS4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
Table 124: NS4PTOC Output signals

TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal
9.5.6 Settings
Table 125: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 126: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
time characteristic

Technical manual
Current protection

IMin1 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
value for step 2
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic
value for step 3
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic

Technical manual
Current protection

value for step 4
Table 127: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

ANSI reset
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
time curve for step
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 3

Technical manual
Current protection

curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4

Table 128: NS4PTOC Monitored data

IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
9.5.8 Operation principle GUID-8923EC0B-A5BA-431B-9699-EB67E2637560 v3
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following three
“Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.5.8.1 Operating quantity within the function GUID-8F0A5BDE-AC98-4188-9085-42A8DF00C476 v3
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses negative
sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence current is calculated from
three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three
inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1
I2 = (
× IL1 + a × IL 2 + a × IL 3
2
)
3
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120 deg
a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation
current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative sequence current is larger than
the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator
for this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.
9.5.8.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function GUID-B00FE98B-F269-4F1B-AC03-68250798851B v3
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/
Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the voltage polarizing
method.
NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage is
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -U2
from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1
UPol = -U 2 = - × (UL1 + a 2 × UL 2 + a × UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN-US
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing
voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting UpolMin.
Note that –U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the function.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.5.8.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function GUID-21930E81-1B40-4BA4-B1D8-3B365327AEF6 v1
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected
it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant step within the
protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of
the following functions if available in the IED:
• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection function
9.5.8.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure GUID-A6B9B3F1-A1FE-4653-A8AF-61FCCF19CE95 v1
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection schemes
(permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
9.5.8.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID-D8ACB136-2BA6-4ADA-A096-5C38BD12DB72 v2
Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as measuring
quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities:
• Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the
operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is
not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
“Directional Supervision Element” described in the next paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is
possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent function.
Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of
available inverse curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this parameter setting it
is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset
curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay,
minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user
programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary signal.
By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current pickup value when
function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the following
figure:

Technical manual
Current protection
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC09000683.vsd
Figure 65: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from
NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from
NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
9.5.8.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function GUID-F54E21F7-7C99-41D6-BEC6-2D6EC6D2B2A3 v3
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as
directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and
the integrated directional comparison function.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in figure
66, to determine the direction of the fault.

Technical manual
Current protection
Reverse
Area
AngleRCA Upol=-U2
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
Figure 66: Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
• Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of I>Dir
and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in
the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set NS4PTOC output
binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see fig 66
(Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse area, see fig 66.
(Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting I>Dir)
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication schemes
(permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step is shown in figure 67:

Technical manual
Current protection
|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b REVERSE_Int
AND
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l
UPolMin
IPolMin
t
Iop
UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067-4.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V2 EN-US
Figure 67: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step
9.5.9 Technical data GUID-10E9194D-3AE9-4D0F-867E-473E6F4BF443 v1
GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v7
Table 129: NS4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1 - 4
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1 - 4
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 1097, table 1098 and table
1097, table 1098 and table 1099 1099
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees


Technical manual
Current protection

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Real part of negative sequence source (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

impedance used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative sequence (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
source impedance used for current
polarization
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -
2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -
9.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE SEMOD171436-1 v4
SEMOD172025-2 v4

Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly smaller
than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the magnitude of the
phase-to-earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-earth faults in
high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 · cos φ,
where φ is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with
a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-earth faults
in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 · 3U0 ·
cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage,
compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or inverse time
delay.

Technical manual
Current protection
A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual overvoltage
protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the
phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase shift compared to the
residual voltage (3U0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90º in such a network.
In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the active residual
current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault detection. In
such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the selectivity of the earth
fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the
sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the following:
• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity. The
setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in
most cases sufficient in high impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not
too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large
capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the active fault current would be small and by
using sensitive directional residual power protection, the operating quantity is elevated.
Therefore, better possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed
networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of high zero-
resistive fault currents.
Phase
currents
IN
Phase-
Ground
voltages
UN
Figure 68: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block
Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be
calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to GRPxN this signal is
used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated
sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.

Technical manual
Current protection
SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL
Figure 69: SDEPSDE function block
9.6.4 Signals
Table 130: SDEPSDE Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 131: SDEPSDE Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all three mode of
residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all directional modes

Technical manual
Current protection
9.6.5 Settings
Table 132: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for
3I03U0Cosfi protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res
over current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv
time count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec

Technical manual
Current protection

kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over
voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all
directional modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction
modes in % of UBase
Table 133: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable
curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable
curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable
curve
Table 134: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function groups
Table 135: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
180 deg necessary

Technical manual
Current protection

Table 136: SDEPSDE Monitored data

INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual current along the
polarizing quantity 3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of the residual
current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of the residual
voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and 3I0 minus RCA
(Fi-RCA)
9.6.7 Operation principle
9.6.7.1 Function inputs SEMOD171963-4 v5
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and U3P
containing phasors of residual current and voltage which are taken from pre-processor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ

SEMOD171963-8 v7
φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|φ=ang(3I0)-
ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity which is used for directionality and
is defined as Uref = -3U0 e—jRCADir, that is -3U0 inversely rotated by the set characteristic angle
RCADir. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point
resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set
equal to -90° in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when
3I0·cos φ gets larger than the set value.
RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o
3I0
j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cosj
Figure 70: RCADir set to 0°

Technical manual
Current protection
Uref
RCADir = −90 , ROADir = 90
3I0
3I0 ⋅ cos ϕ
ϕ = ang (3I0 ) − ang (Uref )
−3U0
Figure 71: RCADir set to -90°

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos φ, the residual current 3I0, and the residual voltage 3U0 must
be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram
in Figure 75.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the output
signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and
TRDIRIN get activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay.
ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the reference direction in
order to detect directionality. Figure 72 shows the restrictions made by the ROADir.

Technical manual
Current protection
RCADir = 0o
3I0
Operate area
j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cos j
ROADir
Figure 72: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0·cos
(φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a
setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 73:

Technical manual
Current protection
RCADir = 0º
Operate area
-3U0 =Uref
Instrument
transformer
angle error 
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)
Figure 73: Explanation of RCAComp
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ

SEMOD171963-32 v6
φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (Uref = -3U0 e-
jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|φ=ang(3I )—ang(U )|). The function
0 ref
operates when 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ gets larger than the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical
diagram in Figure 75.
For trip, the residual power 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0,
shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay
(setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 ·
3U0·cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
kSN × (3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(measured)

Technical manual
Current protection
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

SEMOD171963-48 v4
The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the angle |φ =
ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir
RCADir = 0º
ROADir = 80º
Operate area
3I0
-3U0
Figure 74: Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and residual voltage 3U0
shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle φ shall be in the set area defined by ROADir
and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 75.
signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and
TRDIRIN get activated.
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as φ is
within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir
This variant has definite time delay.
Directional functions SEMOD171963-60 v4

For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the forward direction,
and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the directional function is set to operate for faults in
the forward direction, a fault in the reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction
will give the start signal STFW.
Non-directional earth fault current protection SEMOD171963-63 v6

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will be
used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or backup to distance
protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the
non-directional earth fault current function via the input BLKNDN.
The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase
currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high residual current, also
when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.

Technical manual
Current protection
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay
(TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the output signal STNDIN
remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals
TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection SEMOD171963-72 v8

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level
UNRel>.
In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection, with its own
definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output signal STUN is
active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP and TRUN get activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in Figure 75.

Technical manual
Current protection
OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t
OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>
UNRel> & &

tDef
INCosPhi> t
OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& ³ STDIRIN
INDir> &
1
tDef ³ TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
³ S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir
DirMode = Forward
DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd
Figure 75: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection
SEMOD173350-2 v16
Table 137: SDEPSDE technical data

Operate level for 3I0·cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
residual overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr

residual power ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Operate level for 3I0 and j residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for non-directional overcurrent (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Operate level for non-directional residual (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Technical manual
Current protection

Residual release current for all directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Residual release voltage for all directional (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 65 ms
Reset time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms
overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 65 ms
Operate time for directional residual Min. = 110 ms
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 160 ms
Reset time for directional residual Min. = 20 ms
overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 60 ms
Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
residual overvoltage at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x
Uset
Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay for directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever is
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Inverse characteristics, see table 1100, 16 curve types See Table 1100, Table 1101 and Table
Table 1101 and Table 1102 1102
Relay characteristic angle (RCADir) (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (ROADir) (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
9.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR IP14512-1 v7
M17106-1 v7

Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius
Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26

constant, Fahrenheit
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated a need of a
thermal overload protection for power lines.

Technical manual
Current protection
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the
thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant
and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
whether the function used is Thermal overload protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or (LFPTTR)
(Fahrenheit).
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is tripped.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after operation are presented.
LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
Figure 76: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc
9.7.4 Signals
Table 138: LCPTTR Input signals

SIGNAL
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 139: LFPTTR Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical manual
Current protection

ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 140: LCPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
Table 141: LFPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
9.7.5 Settings
Table 142: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)

On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 143: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 144: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup
Table 145: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 146: LCPTTR Monitored data

TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset of lockout (in
min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature used in the
calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to operate
temperature

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 147: LFPTTR Monitored data

TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset of lockout (in
min)
TEMP REAL - Temperature Calculated temperature of the device
Fahrenheit
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperature Ambient temperature used in the
Fahrenheit calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to operate
temperature
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value is
derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload protection, one time constant
LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The temperature is displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending
on whether LCPTTR/LFPTTR function is selected.
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the
expression:
2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø
where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and
Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this temperature is larger
than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-
è ø
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,
Q n-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,
Q final is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

Technical manual
Current protection
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the
ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient temperature can
be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant value. The used ambient temperature is
available as a real figure signal, TEMPAMB. The calculated component temperature is available as a
real figure signal, TEMP. The temperature of the component compared to the setting TripTemp is also
available as a real figure signal, TERMLOAD which indicates the thermal status compared to the trip
level.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM
is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is
set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This calculation is
only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:
æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to reconnect the
tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation. The thermal
content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature.
The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL. This signal is
enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used
where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of
parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm by dividing the
measured current by the total number of cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be
activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset
to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a
calculated “false” temperature level.

Technical manual
Current protection
START
Final Temp > Trip Temp
TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature
AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp
I3P
Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT
TRIP
Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT
LOCKOUT
Lockout logic
Actual Temp < Recl Temp

BLOCK
TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR
TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout
Figure 77: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

Technical manual
Current protection

M12352-1 v15
Table 148: LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data

Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ± 1.0°C, ±2.0°F

Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200
minutes ms whichever is greater
 
 I , Ip
2 2 
t < σ ln  
 2 TTrip , TAmb 2 
I , T √ I ref

 ref 
TTrip = set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs
Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
9.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR IP14513-1 v4
M14877-1 v2

Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants
SYMBOL-A V1 EN-US
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be damaged. The
insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of
internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will increase.
The thermal overload protection (TRPTTR) estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer with
two time constants, which is based on current measurement.

Technical manual
Current protection
Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be done before
dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the
protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.
TRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
COOLING ALARM1
ENMULT ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING
Figure 78: TRPTTR function block
9.8.4 Signals
Table 149: TRPTTR Input signals

SIGNAL
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and time constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 150: TRPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time
9.8.5 Settings
Table 151: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)

On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 % 1.0 100.0 Reference current in %
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference
current

Technical manual
Current protection

IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 0.10 - 500.00 Min 0.01 60.00 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1
Tau2 0.10 - 500.00 Min 0.01 60.00 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in %
of IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in
sec).
Table 152: TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Current protection

Table 153: TRPTTR Monitored data

HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat content of the
transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the function in % of
the rated current
TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of the function (in
min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to trip: not active/
1=Long Time long time/active
2=Active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to reset: not
1=Long Time active/long time/active
2=Active
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the true RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the protection function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is calculated
according to the expression:
2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷
ç I ref
è ø
where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level corresponding to
the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START will be activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

Technical manual
Current protection
If Q final > Q n
æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-
è ø
If Q final < Qn
Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) × e
-
t
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature
Q n-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step
Q final is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. There are different time
constants depending on the cooling used. Please refer to manufacturer's manuals for details
The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported from the function
as a real figure HEATCONT.
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2 the
corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When the temperature of the object
reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal
TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only
performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:
æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an integer output
TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal
LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is above the set lockout release
temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.

Technical manual
Current protection
æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 23. The calculated
component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure,
TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated time to trip is
continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this calculated time get less than the
setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated.
In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

Technical manual
Current protection
Final Temp START

> TripTemp
RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp
Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp
TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip
Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout
Figure 79: Functional overview of TRPTTR

Technical manual
Current protection
M13266-2 v9
Table 154: TRPTTR technical data

Base current 1 and 2 (30–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate time: Time constant τ = (0.10–500.00) ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater

minutes
∑ I 2 , I p2 ⌡
t < σ √ ln  2 
 I , ITrip 2 
 
I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
ITrip = steady state operate
current level in % of IBasex
Alarm level 1 and 2 (50–99)% of heat content ±2.0% of heat content trip
operate value
Operate current (50–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reset level temperature (10–95)% of heat content trip ±2.0% of heat content trip
9.9 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514-1 v6
9.9.1 Function revision history GUID-3A043295-3AE3-437E-BBE9-D7FD6F349892 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 I>BlkCBPos setting functionality correction.
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 Setting StartMode is added to choose how retrip and backup trip timers are run. The
choices are; to run the timers by external start signal which is latched, to follow the
external start signal only or to follow the external start signal and the selected
FunctionMode.
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.5 -

Technical manual
Current protection
M14878-1 v5

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the surrounding breakers in
case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF measurement criterion can be current based, CB
position based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
A current based check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.
CB position check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF provides three different options to select how t1 and t2 timers are run:
1. By external start signals which is internally latched

2. Follow external start signal only
3. Follow external start signal and the selected FunctionMode
CCRBRF can be single- or three- phase initiated to allow its use with single phase tripping
applications. For the three-phase application of the CCRBRF the current criteria can be set to
operate only if “2 elements operates out of three phases and neutral” for example; two phases or one
phase plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the backup trip command.
The CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three- phase retrip to its own breaker
to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes during
testing.
CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2 STALARM
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
Figure 80: CCRBRF function block

Technical manual
Current protection
9.9.5 Signals
Table 155: CCRBRF Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start for breaker failure protection function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal for phase L1
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Backup trip instantaneously
Table 156: CCRBRF Output signals

TRBU BOOLEAN Backup trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second backup trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
STALARM BOOLEAN External start signal timed out, when by setting StartMode the
external start signal is followed (i.e. when is NOT Latched)
9.9.6 Settings
Table 157: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 158: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)

On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Selection of measurement principle:
CB Pos Current / CB Position / Current or CB
Current or CB Pos Position
StartMode LatchedStart - - LatchedStart Select how t1 and t2 timers are run: By
FollowStart external start signals which is internally
FollowStart&Mode latched / Follow the external start signal
only / Follow external start signal and
selected FunctionMode
tStartTimeout 0.5 - 600.0 s 0.1 1.0 Time delay after which the external start
signal will be ignored, when by setting
StartMode the external start signal is
followed (i.e. when is NOT Latched)
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Select backup trip mode when t2 timer
1 out of 3 expires and current measurement is
1 out of 4 used: 2 elements operate out of three
phases and neutral / 1 element operates
out of three phases / 1 element operates
out of three phases and neutral
RetripMode Off - - Off Select retrip mode when t1 timer expires:
UseFunctionMode Off / use FunctionMode to check /
Always always without any check
IPh> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of retrip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of backup trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of backup trip at multi-phase
start. It can be used to speed up backup
trip command for multi-phase faults on
OHLs
tPulse 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Minimum trip pulse duration
Table 159: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

I>BlkCBPos 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase to block operation based
on CB Position when
FunctionMode=Current or CB Pos
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay which is added to
t2. It can be used as a second backup
trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated

Technical manual
Current protection

Table 160: CCRBRF Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A Measured current in phase L1
IN REAL - A Measured residual current
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from the protection trip command, either from
protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
To this function the three-phase current input and/or change to: the breaker normally open auxiliary
contact (i.e. "52a" or "closed") shall be connected. On OHL feeders where single pole auto-reclosing
is used, auxiliary contact from each CB pole shall be connected separately
The input START signal (i.e. initiate signal) can be phase selective or common (for all three phases).
Phase selective start signals enable single pole retrip functionality. This means that a second attempt
to open the same breaker can be done phase-selective. The retrip attempt is made after a set time
delay t1. For transmission lines, single pole trip and auto-reclosing is often used. The retrip function
can be phase selective if it is initiated from the phase selective line protection.
The retrip function can be done with or without FunctionMode check. With this check, the retrip is
only performed if the circuit breaker is still seen as closed when t1 timer has elapsed.
The START signal will also start the backup trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker
opening, either by detection of low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current
algorithm or by monitoring the circuit breaker status using normally open auxiliary contact from the
breaker. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, which is,
fast resetting of the current measurement. If the function has not detected breaker opening before
the backup timer has run-out its time a backup trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
• Three phase (i.e. common) start/initiation via input START or individual start/initiation per phase
by using phase segregated inputs STLx.
• The minimum length of the retrip pulse, the backup trip pulse and the second backup trip pulse
are settable. This pulse duration is defined by a parameter setting tPulse. The retrip pulse, the
backup trip pulse and the second backup trip pulse will however sustain as long as there is an
indication of closed breaker.
• If the current detection is used it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is
sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to
detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at
least two currents (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure
detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase
current detection.
• It is possible to have different backup time delays for single-phase faults and for multi-phase
faults.
• It is possible to have instantaneous backup trip function if the circuit breaker is incapable to clear
faults, for example, at low gas pressure. This will happen when input signal CBFLT has logical
value one and timer tCBAlarm has expired. This situation will be indicated via output signal
CBALARM.

Technical manual
Current protection
The selection of measurement criterion is done with setting parameter FunctionMode, to determine if
the breaker has opened or not:
• Option 1 - Current: Compares the measured phase current magnitude to setting IPh> (operate
phase current level in % of IBase), and the measured residual current magnitude to setting IN>
(Operate residual current level in % of IBase). Criterion is active (i.e. breaker did not open yet) if
the measured current magnitudes are higher than the set values.
• Option 2 - CB Pos: This criterion is active (i.e. breaker did not open yet in phase Lx) if the binary
input CBCLDLx has logical value one. Thus function simply follows the status of CB pole
normally open auxiliary contact (i.e. "52a" or "closed") which shall be connected to this input.
If TRBU has been given and CBCLDLx still has value one, TRBU and TRRET will internally be
reset intentionally after approximately 10 seconds. Another way of resetting TRBU and TRRET
is either to shortly activate BLOCK input or setting CCRBRF to blocked when the IED is in
TestMode.
• Option 3 - Current or CB Pos: It uses a combination of Current or CB Pos criteria. Note that
Current criterion will be then always used, while the CB Pos criterion will be only enabled and
used if current is smaller than set value I>BlkCBPos at the moment when external START signal
has been received. It is recommended to set value for I>BlkCBPos higher than the set value for
IPh>.
If TRBU has been given and CBCLDLx still has value one and if the CB Pos criterion is
used,TRBU and TRRET will internally be reset intentionally after approximately 10 seconds.
Another way of resetting TRBU and TRRET is either to shortly activate BLOCK input or setting
CCRBRF to blocked when the IED is in TestMode.
By the setting StartMode it is possible to select how t1 and t2 timers are run and consequently how
output commands are given from the function:
• Option 1 - LatchedStart: “By external start signals which is internally latched”.

When function is once started by external START signal, the timers t1 and t2 will always elapse
and then measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode will be always checked in
order to verify if the appropriate command shall be given out from the function. Timers cannot be
stopped by removing the external START signal. Function can be started again only when all of
the following three timers t1, t2 and fixed timer of 150 ms in function internal design has expired
and the measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode has been deactivated, see
Figure 81.
• Option 2 - FollowStart: “Follow the external start signal only”.

The timers t1 and t2 will run while external START signal is present. If they elapse then
measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode will be checked in order to verify if
the appropriate command shall be given out from the function. Timers can be always stopped by
resetting the external START signal, see Figure 82.
• Option 3- FollowStart&Mode: “Follow external start signal and selected FunctionMode”.

The timers t1 and t2 will run while external START signal is present and in the same time the
measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode is active. If they elapse then the
appropriate command will be given out from the function. Timers can be stopped by resetting the
external START signal or if the measurement criterion de-activates, see Figure 83.
When one of the two “follow modes” is used, there is a settable timer tStartTimeout which will block
the external START input signal when it times-out. This will automatically also reset the t1 and t2
timers and consequently prevent any backup trip command. At the same time the STALARM output
from the function will have logical value one. To reset this signal external START signal shall be
removed. This is done in order to prevent unwanted operation of the breaker failure function for
cases where a permanent START signal is given by mistake (e.g. due to a fault in the station battery
system). Note that any backup trip command will inhibit running of tStartTimeout timer.
The BLOCK signal overrides any StartMode condition and resets START signal, running of t1 and t2
timers and all function outputs.

Technical manual
Current protection
30ms t1 30ms
START OR TRRET
S Q t AND
t2 30ms
OR TRBU
t AND
Current Check
CB Position Check OR
150ms
AND
t
NOT
Figure 81: Simplified overall logic for LatchedStart
t1
START OR TRRET
t AND
Current Check
t2
TRBU
t AND
OR
Figure 82: Simplified overall logic for FollowStart
START t1 TRRET
AND t
Current Check
CB Position Check OR t2 TRBU
t
Figure 83: Simplified overall logic for FollowStart&Mode

The BuTripMode setting defines how many measurement elements must operate, when current
criterion is used, to determine if the CB is opened or not:
• 2 elements operate out of three phases and neutral

• 1 element operates out of three phases
• 1 element operates out of three phases and neutral
Note that it is possible to set several timers for the backup trip as described below:

Technical manual
Current protection
1. Timer t2 is used when function is started in one phase only (i.e. for single-phase to ground fault
on an OHL (Over Head Lines) when single-pole auto-reclosing is used).
2. Timer t2MPh is used when function is started in at least two phases. This will allow to have
shorter backup trip times for a multi-phase fault on an OHL Note that for a protected object
which are always tripped three-phase (e.g. transformers, generators, reactors, cables, etc.) this
timer shall always be set to the same value as t2 timer.
3. Timer t3 can be used to give a second backup trip command. It can be used in stations having
small DC battery which is not capable to trip all surrounding breakers at once. Note that t3 timer
will only start when t2 timer expires.
The RetripMode defines how retrip feature will behave:
• Off: The retrip command to the own circuit breaker is permanently disabled.
• UseFunctionMode: Retrip command to the own circuit breaker is given only if measurement
criterion defined by setting parameter FunctionMode is still active when set timer t1 expires (e.g.
if FunctionMode=Current and current magnitude is higher than set value IPh> when t1 expires,
the retrip command will be issued).
• Always: Retrip command to the own circuit breaker is given always when set timer t1 expires
without any further checks.
The simplified logic for the function is given in the following figures.
StartMode
LatchedStart
FollowStart
1 FollowStart&Mode OR
START 30ms
int startL1
STL1 OR AND S Q
BLOCK
NOT
int reset
OR R
NOT
TRBU
NOT int startAlarmL1
tStartTimeout
AND t NOT
AND AND int startAlarmL2 STALARM
From other OR
phases int startAlarmL3
Figure 84: Start logic for all three Function Modes of operation
IL1
a
a>b NOT
IPh> b
FunctionMode
Current
CB Pos OR AND int reset
OR
1
Current or CB Pos 150 ms
int startL1
t
OR AND
t1
t
t2
t OR
t2MPh
t
AND
CBCLDL1
NOT
Figure 85: Reset logic in latched mode

Technical manual
Current protection
StartMode
LatchedStart
FollowStart
1 FollowStart&Mode OR AND
int retrip
currPh1Check
AND t1 30ms
OR AND
int startL1 t OR
t1
t
BLOCK
RetripMode
Off tPulse
TRRETL1
UseFunctionMode AND OR AND
1
Always
TRRETL2 TRRET
TRRETL3
OR
tPulse
From other
AND phases
Figure 86: Simplified retrip logic
StartMode
LatchedStart
1 FollowStart
FollowStart&Mode OR AND
currCheck
backupTripL1
t2
AND t 30ms
OR AND
OR OR
int startL1
BLOCK
t2MPh tPulse TRBU

int startL2 From backupTripL2 OR AND
2 of 3 OR
int startL3 t other backupTripL3
phases
t3
t TRBU2
OR
AND
tPulse
CBFLT tCBAlarm CBALARM

t
Figure 87: Simplified backup trip logic
When the function Start mode is set to LatchedStart and the function mode is set CB Pos, Re-trip,
and Backup trip will internally operate and latch. To reset these two signals the breaker position has
to indicate that the CB is open.
To avoid continuous lockout of Re-trip and Back up trip signals, the signals are rested internally
under the following conditions:
1. When the function blocking input is activated breaker position input (CBCLDLxx) will internally
be forced to zero in all phases (that is simulating that CB is open), which will reset Re-
trip(TRRET) and back up trip (TRBU) output signals.
2. If TRBU is active for 10 seconds, then the activated breaker position input (CBCLDLxx) will
internally be forced to zero which will reset both RETRIP and TRBU.
3. When using FunctionMode=Current/CB pos, the same behavior is applicable only when the CB
pos part is active; that is, when the measured current is below the set value I>BlkCBPos.

Technical manual
Current protection
M12353-1 v15
Table 161: CCRBRF technical data

Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 10 ms maximum * -
Time delay for retrip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for backup trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for backup trip at multi-phase start at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
0 to 2 x Iset greater
Additional time delay for a second backup trip at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
0 to 2 x Iset greater
Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Minimum trip pulse duration (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±5 ms whichever is greater
* Valid for product version 2.2.3 or later
9.10 Stub protection STBPTOC IP14515-1 v3
9.10.1 Function revision history GUID-D32C2C38-452F-45B0-85C1-6C9542089357 v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -

Technical manual
Current protection

revision revision
L 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 -
M17108-1 v2

Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB
3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in
multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part.
The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between the current transformers and the open
disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a normally
closed, NC (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE
Figure 88: STBPTOC function block
9.10.5 Signals
Table 162: STBPTOC Input signals

SIGNAL
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection
Table 163: STBPTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start

Technical manual
Current protection
9.10.6 Settings
Table 164: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 165: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)

On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay

Table 166: STBPTOC Monitored data

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From
the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current
is derived. These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the stub protection function
STBPTOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the
function I>.
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator for this
phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from either line
disconnector (RELEASE input) and ReleaseMode is set to Release or ReleaseMode is set to
Continuous activates START signal and timer tDelay. The output signal TRIP activates, if the fault
current remains during the set timer tDelay.
The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input. Also, activation of BLKTR resets TRIP
output.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
I3P* IL1
a
IL2 a>b
IL3 b
AND
START
1
a
a>b tDelay
b TRIP
AND t AND
a
a>b
I> b
AND
RELEASE
AND
ReleaseMode = Release 1
ReleaseMode = Continuous
BLKTR
Figure 89: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

M12350-1 v13
Table 167: STBPTOC technical data

Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (50- 2500)% of IBase

Independenttime delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min.= 10 ms
Max.= 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min.= 10 ms
Max.= 25 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 5 x Iset Min.= 5 ms
Max.= 20 ms
Reset time, start at 5 x Iset to 0 Min.= 15 ms
Max.= 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
9.11 Overcurrent protection with binary release BRPTOC GUID-0C91A3D4-EDB4-4CE8-85AF-44901F81B702 v1
9.11.1 Function revision history GUID-23898A65-D896-479E-9122-E8D9D6CC4FEB v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -

Technical manual
Current protection

revision revision
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 New function release
9.11.2 Identification GUID-FB950979-9387-43A7-B1D7-D5D392EA6638 v4

Overcurrent protection with binary BRPTOC 3I> 50
release
9.11.3 Functionality GUID-17DA02BB-B0C0-4AE9-8441-DDA4082A776B v4
Overcurrent protection with binary release (BRPTOC) is a simple, non-directional three-phase

overcurrent protection function with definite time delay. A single step is available within the function.
The current pickup level and definite time delay can be set independently. It is possible to release the
function operation via a binary signal. If the binary signal is not connected, the function will
automatically operate in a continuous mode of operation. Several function instances are available.
From the measured three-phase currents, various types of measurement modes such as DFT, Peak,
and Peak-to-peak can be selected for the BRPTOC operation.
Peak and Peak-to-Peak measurement mode allow this function to be used as instantaneous over-
current protection as well. If required by application, short time delay can also be applied.
BRPTOC can be used for different line and transformer protection applications. If required, it can also
be used to supervise on-load tap-changer operation.
9.11.4 Function block GUID-391B0308-F1A5-494F-BA0F-804A3D8F3F0C v2
9.11.5 Signals
Table 168: BRPTOC Input signals

RELEASE BOOLEAN 1 Release of protection

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 169: BRPTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start
9.11.6 Settings
Table 170: BRPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT, Peak and Peak-
Peak to-peak measurements
Peak to peak
Table 171: BRPTOC Group settings (basic)

On
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay

Table 172: BRPTOC Monitored data

9.11.8 Operation principle GUID-615ABC71-399B-425A-822A-AEDE51EDD69E v3
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the function BRPTOC, it is
possible to select the type of the measurements such as DFT, Peak, and Peak-to-peak used for
overcurrent operation.
If the DFT option is selected, only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency component of each
phase current is derived. The influence of the DC current component and higher harmonic current
components are completely suppressed.
If the Peak-to-peak option is selected, the influence of CT saturation is almost suppressed.
The peak-to-peak measurement efficiently suppers the DC current component from the measured
phase currents. On the contrary, when Peak measurement mode is selected, it allows the DC current
component into the measurement signal for the BRPTOC function.

Technical manual
Current protection
If the Peak/Peak-to-peak option is selected, RMS equivalent phase currents are derived and
therefore, the set value of I> is remained intact irrespective of any type of the measurement mode.
These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the overcurrent protection with binary release
function BRPTOC. In a comparator, the RMS values are compared to the set operating current value
of the function I>.
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current, comparator output signal for this phase will
be high. This signal will, in combination with the release signal (RELEASE input), activate the timer
for the TRIP signal. If the current magnitude remains high during the timer tdelay, the TRIP output
signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.
I3P* IL1
a
IL2 a>b
IL3 b STL1
AND
a
a>b
b STL2
AND
a
a>b
I> b STL3
AND
RELEASE START
1
BLOCK
tDelay
TRIP
t AND
BLKTR
GUID-CAC3BE85-59F2-4264-A060-CA53DF9CA3E8 V1 EN-US
Figure 90: Simplified logic diagram for overcurrent protection with binary release

GUID-754FFD93-04C7-4129-B658-32F17F272211 v4
Table 173: BRPTOC technical data

Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase DFT:
± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Peak and Peak to peak:

± 2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s DFT:
Iset ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
greater
Peak to peak:
±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
greater
Peak:
±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
greater

Technical manual
Current protection

Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Iset DFT: -
Min.= 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Peak to peak:
Min.= 10 ms
Max. =25 ms
Peak:
Min.= 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Iset to 0 < 60 ms -
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset DFT: -

Min.= 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Peak to peak:
Min.= 5 ms
Max. =20 ms
Peak:
Min.= 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 < 60 ms -
Operate time, start at 0 to 5 x Iset DFT: -

Min.= 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Peak to peak:
Min.= 5 ms
Max. =15 ms
Peak:
Min.= 5 ms
Max. = 10 ms
Reset time, start at 5 x Iset to 0 < 60 ms -
Critical impulse time DFT: -

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Peak to peak:
Peak:
9.12 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC IP14516-1 v5
M14888-1 v4

Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US

Technical manual
Current protection
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on
rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence
current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists the
surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC) operates based on information from auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase
currents when required.
CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
Figure 91: CCPDSC function block
9.12.4 Signals
Table 174: CCPDSC Input signals

SIGNAL
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 175: CCPDSC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
9.12.5 Settings
Table 176: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)

On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase
Table 177: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 178: CCPDSC Monitored data

IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

M13273-3 v6
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is
used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that
a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 92.

Technical manual
Current protection
circuit breaker
Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker
en05000287.vsd
Figure 92: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a
timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and
phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 93.
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B.
poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.
poleTwoOpened from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
Figure 93: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the
trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The
sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the
fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is
derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is
lower than the setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is
started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms long.
The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only
directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that
the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole
autoreclosing is used.
M13946-3 v7
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance protection function
CCPDSC is shown in figure 94.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
Figure 94: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC - contact and
current based
CCPDSC is blocked if:
• The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance protection. It can be
connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or
can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block
command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing
cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the
autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input
in the IED and this binary input is connected to a signalization “1phase autoreclosing in progress”
from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip signal
TRIP:
• Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.
9.12.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker M13946-18 v4
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole discordance status,
then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series
with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip
(0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.12.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection M13946-21 v4
Unsymmetrical current indicated if:
• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the three phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is
turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection
occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and
if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during
unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the
circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD
(for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the
information are generated from the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push
buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

M13279-1 v10
Table 179: CCPDSC technical data

Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delay between trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is

condition and trip signal greater
9.13 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP SEMOD156693-1 v4
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a
rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover
bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous
motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where
individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the
generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be
desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Technical manual
Current protection
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the
low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself.
Figure 95 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and
overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after
synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from
the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value
(e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED Overpower IED
Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque
Figure 95: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
Figure 96: GUPPDUP function block

Technical manual
Current protection
9.13.4 Signals
Table 180: GUPPDUP Input signals

I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
Table 181: GUPPDUP Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase
9.13.5 Settings
Table 182: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
senistivity stage 2

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 183: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in %
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in %
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
angles at 30% of Ir
angles at 100% of Ir
Table 184: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Table 185: GUPPDUP Monitored data

P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of SBase

Technical manual
Current protection

SEMOD172136-4 v4
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 97. The
function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors P
Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1
S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
Figure 97: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The
apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 186.
Table 186: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )

Technical manual
Current protection

L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault
recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle
is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the reactive power component Q
is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For directional
underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is
smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of
the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the
stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For generator low forward power
protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The
hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2) would be
too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 · Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal
value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after a set time
DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out and that the timer of the stage will
reset.
9.13.7.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172136-39 v4
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce a
recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement
response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in according to the
following recursive formula:

Technical manual
Current protection
S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given
out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0,
the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
9.13.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD172136-57 v3
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5
measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see example in figure 98.
Figure 98: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude
and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power:
QPERCENT.

Technical manual
Current protection
SEMOD175152-2 v11
Table 187: GUPPDUP technical data

Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
S r = 1.732 × U r × I r
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
and Step 2 at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000 greater
9.14 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP SEMOD172360-1 v4
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a
rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover
bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous
motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where
individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the
generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be
desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the
reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself.
Figure 99 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and
overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after
synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from
the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value
(e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Technical manual
Current protection
Underpower IED Overpower IED
Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque
Figure 99: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
Figure 100: GOPPDOP function block
9.14.4 Signals
Table 188: GOPPDOP Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 189: GOPPDOP Output signals


Technical manual
Current protection

START BOOLEAN Common start
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase
9.14.5 Settings
Table 190: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
senistivity stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
senistivity stage 2
Table 191: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase

Technical manual
Current protection

angles at 5% of Ir
angles at 30% of Ir
angles at 100% of Ir
Table 192: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Table 193: GOPPDOP Monitored data

P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in % of SBase

SEMOD172154-4 v3
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 101.
The function has two stages with individual settings.

Technical manual
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors P
Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1
S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
Figure 101: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The
apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 194.
Table 194: Complex power calculation

L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*

Technical manual
Current protection
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault
recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle
is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the reactive power component Q
is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start signal
START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set
time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the
two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the
stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-power1(2)). For generator reverse power
protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The
hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) – Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2) would be
too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 · Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal
value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time
DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will
reset.
9.14.7.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172154-37 v4
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce
the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower
measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in
accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0,
the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
9.14.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD172154-55 v2
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5

Technical manual
Current protection

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude
and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The
active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive
power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
SEMOD175159-2 v9
Table 195: GOPPDOP technical data

Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and Min. =10 ms
k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and Min. = 35 ms
k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
and Step 2 at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and k=0.000 greater
9.15 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171761-1 v3

Technical manual
Current protection
9.15.1 Function revision history GUID-912F1AC6-6A15-49D7-8224-BC100CA1905A v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 A fixed time delay of 50 ms is added before asserting START signal.
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition. Broken conductor
check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase selective current unsymmetrical check on
the line where the IED is connected, gives an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.
BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
Figure 103: BRCPTOC function block
9.15.5 Signals
Table 196: BRCPTOC Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 197: BRCPTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic
9.15.6 Settings
Table 198: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)

On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay
Table 199: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset
Table 200: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 201: BRCPTOC Monitored data

IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of phase currents
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the
asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements continuously
measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output START is set on after 50.0 ms if:
• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with the
highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a conductor
breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same
phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts
for a period longer than the set time tOper, the TRIP output is activated.

Technical manual
Current protection
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in Figure
BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:
• The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI test menu
(BlockBRC=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command
from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself to
receive a block command from internal functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit
breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
AND
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
50 ms
START
t
Function Enable
BLOCK OR
tOper TRIP
AND
AND t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI
IL1<50%IP>
IL2<50%IP> OR
IL3<50%IP>
Figure 104: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
SEMOD175200-2 v9
Table 202: BRCPTOC technical data

Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir
Independent operate time delay (0.050-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 80 ms -
Max. = 95 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms

Technical manual
Current protection
9.16 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC GUID-41731DCF-840C-4717-9F51-899FC648F881 v2
GUID-67FC8DBF-4391-4562-A630-3F244CBB4A33 v2

Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -
9.16.2 Functionality GUID-D55CEBF7-9377-4E36-BD8B-533609048A1E v3
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive power compensation
and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral parts of Static Var Compensators
(SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations. Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially
designed to provide protection and supervision features for SCBs.

GUID-338FBDF8-0360-4EA4-8663-D2D30F845B44 v1
CBPGAPC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TROC
BLKTR TRUC
BLKOC TRQOL
BLKUC TRHOL
BLKUCCUT START
BLKQOL STOC
BLKHOL STUC
STQOL
STHOL
STOCL1
STOCL2
STOCL3
STUCL1
STUCL2
STUCL3
STQOLL1
STQOLL2
STQOLL3
STHDTL1
STHDTL2
STHDTL3
STHIDML1
STHIDML2
STHIDML3
RECNINH
Figure 105: CBPGAPC function block

Technical manual
Current protection
9.16.4 Signals
Table 203: CBPGAPC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current Input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the complete function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip output signals
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block over current functionality
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under current functionality
BLKUCCUT BOOLEAN 0 Block UC function when the capacitor bank is disconnected
BLKQOL BOOLEAN 0 Block reactive power over load functionality
BLKHOL BOOLEAN 0 Block harmonic over load functionality
Table 204: CBPGAPC Output signals

TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal for over current
TRUC BOOLEAN Trip signal for under current
TRQOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for reactive power over load
TRHOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for harmonic over load
STOC BOOLEAN Start signals for over current
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for under current
STQOL BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load
STHOL BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load
STOCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L1
STUCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L1
STQOLL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase L1
STHDTL1 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time stage phase L1
STHIDML1 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of phase L1
RECNINH BOOLEAN Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

Technical manual
Current protection
9.16.5 Settings
Table 205: CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationRecIn Off - - On Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On
On
IRecnInhibit< 4 - 1000 %IB 1 10 Current in % of IBase below which the
SCB is disconnected
tReconnInhibit 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to
discharge to <5%
OperationOC Off - - On Operation over current Off/On
On
IOC> 10 - 900 %IB 1 135 Start level for over current operation, %
of IBase
tOC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for over current operation
OperationUC Off - - Off Operation under current Off/On
On
IUC< 5 - 100 %IB 1 70 Start level for under current operation in
% of IBase
tUC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Time delay for under current operation
OperationQOL Off - - On Operation reactive power over load
On Off/On
QOL> 10 - 900 % 1 130 Start level for reactive power over load in
%
tQOL 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Time delay for reactive power overload
operation
OperationHOL Off - - On Operation harmonic over load Off/On
On
HOLDTU> 10 - 500 % 1 200 Start value of voltage in % for DT
harmonic voltage overload
tHOLDT 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for operation of harmonic
voltage overload
HOLIDMTU> 80 - 200 % 1 110 Start value of voltage in % for IDMT
harm. voltage overload
kHOLIDMT 0.50 - 1.50 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for harmonic voltage
overload IDMT curve
tMaxHOLIDMT 0.05 - 6000.00 s 0.01 2000.00 Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
tMinHOLIDMT 0.05 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
Table 206: CBPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Current protection

Table 207: CBPGAPC Monitored data

IPEAKL1 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current for phase L1
URMSL1 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS for phase L1
QL1 REAL - % Reactive power value for phase L1
9.16.7 Operation principle GUID-07CD9DBD-5ACB-4091-A480-7D0EEF76C241 v3
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase current. CBPGAPC
has several built-in features:
• Overcurrent stage
• Undercurrent stage
• Reconnection inhibit
• Harmonic overload
• Reactive power overload
9.16.7.1 Measured quantities GUID-48C0B6DE-2DAD-4631-A967-72DF92A72B0B v2
Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block to CBPGAPC
function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains the following quantities for every
phase:
• Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz in 60 Hz
power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system cycle). These samples
correspond to the instantaneous current waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will
be marked with symbol “i~”
• Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This value is obtained as
maximum absolute current sample value over last power system cycle divided by √2 and in
further text will be marked with symbol “IpeakRMS”
• Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:
åi 2
~m
I
TRMS = m =1
N
where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m are last N
samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms current quantity will be
marked with symbol ITRMS.
Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary amperes for every
phase from the function.

Technical manual
Current protection
From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is calculated. This is done
by continuous integration of the measured current waveform by using the following principal
equation:
1
u (t ) = × i ( t ) × ¶t
ò
C
Where:
u(t) is voltage waveform across capacitor
i(t) is capacitor current waveform
C is capacitance in Farads
By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following quantities for every phase
are calculated within the function:
• Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power
system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system cycle). These samples correspond to
the instantaneous voltage waveform across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked
with symbol u~
• Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value is obtained as
maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system cycle divided by √2 and in
further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS
• Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:
åu 2
~m
U TRMS = m =1
N
Where:
N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)
u ~m are last N samples of the voltage waveform
In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with symbol UTRMS
Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally performed within the
function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values overshooting during capacitor switching.
In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the protected capacitor
bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per unit system. In order to convert
measured current in primary amperes into per unit value the base current for the protected capacitor
bank shall be known. This value is set as parameter IBase and it represents the rated SCB current in
primary amperes at fundamental frequency. This value is calculated for a three-phase SCB as
follows:
1000 × Q [ MVAr ]
IBase =
3 × U [ kV ]

Technical manual
Current protection
Where:
IBase is base current for the function in primary amperes
Q[MVAr] is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating
U[kV] is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV
Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed. Note that the
calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the
function.
Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the function for every phase
as given by the following equation:
Q =U TRMS ×I TRMS
Where:
Q is generated reactive power in per-unit
U TRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit
ITRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit
Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in order to avoid
overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q value is available as a service
value in percent for every phase from the function.
Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the capacitor bank
protection function are shown in figure 106.
I3P I PeakRMS [A]

Overcurrent
Undercurrent
I TRMS[A]
Reconnection Inhibit
TRMS UTRMS[pu] Reactive Power Overload

FILTER
i~ [A]
IBase
 u~ [pu] PEAK UPeakRMS[pu]
Harmonic Overload
FILTER
Figure 106: Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase
9.16.7.2 Reconnection inhibit feature GUID-00A2F589-AAE4-47A3-A8F3-85A01D072254 v2
This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power system and is used to
prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live network. The IRMS values of the three
phase currents are compared with the IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the
capacitor bank is energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 107.

Technical manual
Current protection
currentRMS a 0.02 s
CapBank Energised
a>b t
b
IRecnInhibit<
CAPDISC
Phx
NOT
Figure 107: Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all three phases
When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will be given. This
signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to inhibit the reconnection of charged
capacitor bank to live network. The internal logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure
108.
CAPDISC
CAPDISC
_ Ph1
CAPDISC Ph2 tReconnInhibit

AND
AND RECNINH
CAPDISC Ph3
AND
Z-2
Z-2
en08000346.vsd
Figure 108: Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit
9.16.7.3 Overcurrent feature GUID-4182050D-0CEC-4570-B90A-5BCEDF535595 v2
The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive current conditions.
The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the preprocessing block in the IED as input.
The peakRMS value of the current is compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output.
The signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase will have its
own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for the overcurrent feature is shown
in fig 109.
IPeakRMS a
a>b tOC
IOC> b TROC
AND t AND
OperationOC=On
STOC
BLKTR
BLKOC
BLOCK OR
Figure 109: Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

Technical manual
Current protection
9.16.7.4 Undercurrent feature GUID-6D21DA11-BCBC-4A03-91CF-723883386224 v2
Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the rest of the power
system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too low for too long period of time. This
sub function uses the current peakRMS value from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The
peakRMS value of the current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function will send a START
signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current falls below the cut off level. The
capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip
operation when the capacitor bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is
delayed by a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for undercurrent.
The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 110.
IPeakRMS
a
b>a
IUC< b
tUC
AND t
AND TRUC
OperationUC=On
BLKUC
STUC
BLOCK
OR
CAPDISC
BLKTR
en08000351.vsd
Figure 110: Capacitor bank undercurrent protection
9.16.7.5 Capacitor harmonic overload feature GUID-8F40ED8B-2276-4C44-B06A-8FE9C099357C v3
Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load conditions caused by
harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two stages, first stage is Inverse time delay
(IDMT) based and a second stage is based on Definite Time (DT) delay.
IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in figure 111, where k =
1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS voltage value is higher than set value of
parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active until the value falls below the reset value.
2.3
Voltage Peak RMS [pu]
2.1
1.9
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Operate Time [s]
Figure 111: IDMT curve for harmonic overload (kHOLIDMT=1.0)

Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI standards and they are
shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 208: Main operating points for IDMT curve
UpeakRMS 1.15 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.2

[pu]
Time [s] 1800 300 60 15 1.0 0.3 0.12
Note the following regarding this IDMT curve:
1. When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is proportionally
changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times will be 90% of the values shown
in above figure 111 and table 208)
2. Between the seven main points in table 208, the operate time is calculate by using linear
interpolation in the logarithmic scale
3. Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage condition
4. By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for minimum operating time of
100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be fluffed
5. By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics overload condition
when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured
Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent pickup and time delay. It
can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage.
Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank energizing and are
capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th harmonic.
The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 112:
STHDTLx
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b
HOLDTU> b
tHOLDT
t
OperationHOL=On AND
OR TRHOL
AND
BLKHOL
BLOCK
OR OR STHOL
BLKTR
OperationHOL=On AND
TR
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b kHOLIDMT IDMT
HOLIDMTU> b
tMaxHOLIDMT
STHIDMLx
tMinHOLIDMT ST
UPeakRMS [pu]
Figure 112: Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

Technical manual
Current protection
9.16.7.6 Capacitor reactive power overload feature GUID-894B9C67-71F7-48B1-8D54-1816CB3F79A9 v2
Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from reactive power
overload conditions.
The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power input values are
calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The reactive power value is compared
with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal
will be activated. The start signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal.
The internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 113.
Q [pu]
a
a>b
QOL> b
tQOL
t
OperationQOL=On AND
TRQOL
AND
BLKTR
BLKQOL
STQOL
BLOCK
OR
en08000353.vsd
Figure 113: Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

GUID-6A7DA510-E145-4C5B-A7DC-97BC4258E621 v10
Table 209: CBPGAPC technical data

Operate value, overcurrent (10-900)% of lBase ±2.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% at (100-900)% of IBase -

Start time, overcurrent, at 0.5 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, overcurrent, at 2 x Iset to Min. = 25 ms -
0.5 x Iset Max. = 45 ms
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0.5 x Iset to 2 x Iset -
protection start 1 ms typically at 0.5 x Iset to 10 x
Iset
Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically
protection start
Operate value, undercurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir
Reset ratio, undercurrent <105% at (30-100)% of IBase -

Operate value, reconnection inhibit (4-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate value, reactive power (10-900)% ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

overload function ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Operate value, voltage protection (10-500)% ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

function for harmonic overload ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
(Definite time)

Technical manual
Current protection

Operate value, voltage protection (80-200)% ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
function for harmonic overload ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
(Inverse time)
Inverse time characteristic According to IEC 60871-1 (2005) ±20% or ±200 ms whichever is
and IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000) greater
Maximum trip delay, harmonic (0.05-6000.00) s ±20% or ±200 ms whichever is
overload IDMT greater
Minimum trip delay, harmonic (0.05-60.00) s ±20% or ±200 ms whichever is
overload IDMT greater
Independent time delay, overcurrent (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Independent time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is
undercurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 greater
Independent time delay, reactive (1.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
power overload function at 0 to 2 x greater
QOL>
Independent time delay, harmonic (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
overload at 0 to 2 x HOL> greater
9.17 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC GUID-613620B1-4092-4FB6-901D-6810CDD5C615 v4
9.17.1 Identification GUID-7835D582-3FF4-4587-81CE-3B40D543E287 v4

Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection
9.17.2 Functionality GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as generator backup
protection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either with definite
time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage controlled/restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the function in order to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
9.17.3 Function block GUID-6B4EB1A4-2226-4397-A6FD-14F9DD02B12E v4
VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
BLKOC START
BLKUV STOC
STUV
Figure 114: VRPVOC function block

Technical manual
Current protection
9.17.4 Signals
Table 210: VRPVOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI 51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function
Table 211: VRPVOC Output signals

TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent stage
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function
STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent stage
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function
9.17.5 Settings
Table 212: VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 213: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)

On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characteristic ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
t_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay / additional time delay
for IDMT curves for OC

Technical manual
Current protection

k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for IDMT curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OC
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage
in % of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time delay when used for Under-
Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase
Table 214: VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

VDepMode Step - - Slope Voltage dependent mode OC (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Start current level in % of pickup when
U< 25% of UBase
UHighLimit 30.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase

Table 215: VRPVOC Monitored data

IMAX REAL - A Maximum phase current magnitude
UUMIN REAL - kV Minimum ph-to-ph voltage magnitude
9.17.7.1 Measured quantities GUID-0D511C03-3750-4F61-9555-69DAD96CDC21 v5
The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always connected to three-
phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (ACT), but it will always
measure the maximum of the three-phase currents and the minimum of the three phase-to-phase
voltages. If frequency tracking mode for preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates
properly in wide frequency range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).
9.17.7.2 Base quantities GUID-08944177-73CF-4FB4-818E-3B7AC4F625EE v4
GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base quantities of the
function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.17.7.3 Overcurrent protection GUID-7BB29872-EBC1-4628-AFB5-7A15E2EC41A8 v2
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity with the set
start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is higher
than the set level.
Voltage restraint/control feature GUID-E7C59BAD-47A1-46C2-8929-7E589548045C v3

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage quantity. This means
that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but decreases with the decrease in
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This feature affects the start current value of both
definite time and inverse time IDMT overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT
curve operates faster during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are
available:
• Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope); the start level of
the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 115. The voltage restrained characteristic
is defined by the two points: (0.25*UBase ; VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/
100*UBase; StartCurr/100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that multiply UBase cannot be
changed.
Start level of the current
StartCurr
VDepFact * StartCurr
0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
Figure 115: Example for start level of the current variation as function of measured voltage
magnitude in Slope mode of operation
• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step); the start level of the
overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 116.

Technical manual
Current protection
Start level of the current
StartCurr
VDepFact * StartCurr
UHighLimit UBase
Figure 116: Example for start level of the current variation as function of measured voltage
magnitude in Step mode of operation
9.17.7.4 Logic diagram GUID-0A1565A4-74E1-4171-968B-50529AABF192 v2
DEF time
selected
TROC
OR
MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b
StartCurr
X Inverse
Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature
MinPh-PhVoltage
Figure 117: Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function

Technical manual
Current protection
DEF time
selected TRUV
MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt
Operation_UV=On
BLKUV
Figure 118: Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function
9.17.7.5 Undervoltage protection GUID-96171DC7-9F8E-47B4-BE0D-E1B9EE214612 v5
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the lowest measured phase-phase voltage
quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the measured
voltage quantity is lower than the set level.
The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical TRUE for longer
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to logical TRUE.
This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to provide functionality
for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v8
Table 216: VRPVOC technical data

Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -

Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -
Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
Iset greater
Inverse time characteristics, 13 curve types See tables 1097 and 1098
see tables 1097 and 1098
Minimum operate time for inverse time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
characteristics greater

Technical manual
Current protection

High voltage limit, voltage dependent (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset to Min. = 15 ms -
0
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0 greater
Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0
9.18 Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection,

APPTEF GUID-0FFF3E30-FBE7-48FD-A242-DF67DD748BA8 v1
9.18.1 Identification GUID-505DB872-1C09-47DB-BAD4-2FBDF652FE9F v1
Table 217:
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
number
Average Power Transient APPTEF Io > → TEF 67NT
Earth Fault Protection
9.18.2 Functionality GUID-A16ED4BC-855F-4561-8512-B4F30775784F v1
High impedance grounded power systems are characterized by a relatively high impedance which is
connected between the power system neutral point and ground. The most extreme example is an
isolated power system where this impedance is practically infinite. However, it is important to
understand that the natural distributed capacitances between the individual phase conductors and
ground are always present in any power network irrespective of the neutral point grounding. These
distributed capacitances are important to understand the power system behavior, during an Earth
Fault (EF) in a high impedance grounded power system.
The APPTEF (Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection) function is a transient measuring
directional earth-fault protection. Determination of the earth fault direction is based on the short-term
built-up transient at the beginning of the earth fault. This transient is to a large extent independent of
the neutral point treatment. This means that the function can be used without any modification in all
types of high-impedance grounded, resonant grounded or isolated power systems.
For a resonant grounded system, the correct directional measurement is ensured regardless of how
many Petersen coils are used throughout the interconnected power network. The function is not
sensitive to the actual compensation degree of the coils. It will operate equally well in an under- or
over-compensated system. Parallel neutral resistor to the Petersen coil are not needed to correctly
determine earth fault direction. However, these neutral resistors can still be used if already installed
in the network.

Technical manual
Current protection
9.18.3 Function block GUID-9D07F6F8-16F7-45ED-9D6B-E6E557DFBD0A v1
APPTEF
I3P* TRIP
U3P* STFW
BLOCK STRV
BLKTR STUN
RESET STIEF
WRNFW
ALMCC
ALMCIRI
IFUNDRE
IFUNDIM
IHARMIM
GUID-62978D0E-DC7C-43E3-85FB-85A75D7672AD V1 EN-US
Figure 119: APPTEF function block
9.18.4 Signals
GUID-FA45F1A1-E73B-43D0-B074-07F1561CCB18 v1
Table 218: APPTEF Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip output
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the function including all internal calculations and all
outputs
GUID-5ACF7D05-F1F6-4977-A83E-B29B9956F2AD v1
Table 219: APPTEF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip for earth fault in forward direction
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STUN BOOLEAN Start of the residual overvoltage stage 3Uo>
STIEF BOOLEAN Intermittent earth fault detetcted
WRNFW BOOLEAN Warning, a transient corresponding to the forward fault has been
detected
ALMCC BOOLEAN Alarm when cross country fault condition is detected by 3Io
measurement. Transient EF function will be prevented to make
any directional decision while this signal is active.
ALMCIRI BOOLEAN Alarm when 3Io circulating current is detected, which can
influence the Io*cos(Phi) calculations. Pickup for Io*cos(Phi) part
will be adjusted accordingly. 3Io circulating current shall be
reduced by appropriate action in the primary system.

Technical manual
Current protection

IFUNDRE REAL Integrated real part (proportional to active power) of the
fundamental frequency phasor in the residual current 3Io, given in
primary amperes
IFUNDIM REAL Integrated imaginary part (proportional to reactive power) of the
fundamental frequency phasor in the residual current 3Io, given in
primary amperes
IHARMIM REAL Integrated imaginary part (proportional to harmonic reactive
power) of the lumped harmonic phasors in the residual current
3Io, given in primary amperes
9.18.5 Settings
GUID-080EE324-4997-4090-86D0-E96B5491E545 v1
Table 220: APPTEF Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 221: APPTEF Group settings (basic)

On
OperationMode Start Only - - Start Only Operation mode ( Start Only / Start and
Start and Trip Trip )
tPulseMin 0.02 - 1.00 s 0.01 0.15 Minimum pulse length duration in
seconds, for trip and/or start outputs
UN> 5 - 80 %UB 1 30 Minimum threshold level for residual
overvoltage start condition 3Uo>
IN> 3 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum threshold level for residual
overcurrent start condition 3Io>
IMinForward 1.5 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 2.5 Minimum operate level for integrated
current in order to declare the forward
direction
IMinReverse 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 1.5 Minimum operate level for integrated
current in order to declare the reverse
direction
tStart 0.04 - 2.00 s 0.01 0.15 Minimum time delay to declare EF
direction in seconds. Timer will be
activated with STUN signal.
tReset 0.05 - 5.00 s 0.01 0.5 Drop off time delay added to 3Uo
overvoltage condition start signal STUN,
after which the function will be fully reset
tTrip 0.00 - 20.00 s 0.01 2.00 Minimum trip time delay in seconds after
STFW signal has been issued
UN>StartsNo 2 - 20 - 1 4 Minimum number of consequitive 3Uo>
start conditions to detect intermitten EF.
Note that this counting will only be active
while reset timer is running.

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 222: APPTEF Group settings (advanced)

OperationCC Off - - On Operation of cross country fault
On detection On/Off
CrossCntry_IN> 20 - 1000 %IB 1 120 Operate 3Io current level for cross
country fault detection
tCC 0.02 - 1.00 s 0.01 0.03 Time delay in seconds to activate cross
country fault detection
Circulate_IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate 3Io current level for circulating
current detection
tCircIN 5.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay in seconds to activate
circulating current detection

GUID-1DB36592-BEA2-4F2D-8518-D3EF4DF681C4 v1
Table 223: APPTEF Monitored data

INRMS REAL - A RMS value of residual current 3Io
UNMAG REAL - kV Magnitude of fundamental frequency
phasor for measured neutral voltage 3Uo
in primary kV
ANGDIF REAL - deg Phase angle difference between rotated
-3Uo voltage phasor and 3Io current
phasor in degrees
DIR INTEGER 0=None - Detected earth fault direction (0 = None,
1=Forward 1 = Forward, 2 = Reverse)
2=Reverse
IFUNDRE REAL - A Integrated real part (proportional to
active power) of the fundamental
frequency phasor in the residual current
IFUNDIM REAL - A Integrated imaginary part (proportional to
reactive power) of the fundamental
frequency phasor in the residual current
IHARMIM REAL - A Integrated imaginary part (proportional to
harmonic reactive power) of the lumped
harmonic phasors in the residual current
9.18.7 Operation principle GUID-BAACF528-D83C-4900-9C18-D0B181493E50 v1
The basic operating condition for the transient earth fault (EF) protection in a high impedance
grounded system is explained for a substation having a single incoming transformer which will be
feeding a LV side busbar having three outgoing feeders. The associated directional EF protection for
every feeder are also shown in Figure 120 as well as a grounding impedance connected to the
transformer LV winding star point.

Technical manual
Current protection
HV Busbar
HV
CB
Power Δ
Transformer
Y Ground
Grounding
Impedance
Transformer
LV Bay
CB
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3
LV Busbar
VT
F1 F2 F3
CB CB CB
67NT‐F1 67NT‐F2 67NT‐F3
Figure 120: Example Substation

Figure 121, displays a simplified equivalent circuit for the zero-sequence system during an earth-fault
in Feeder 1.
Transformer
Feeder 1 Bay Feeder 2 Feeder 3
LV Busbar
VT
Uo
F1 LV F2 F3
CB CB CB CB
Io_F1
Io_F2
Io_F3
Io_Tr
67NT‐F1 67NT‐F2 67NT‐F3

Faulty Feeder
Fault Point Power

HV Busbar
Transformer HV
Y Δ CB
Rf Grounding
Impedance
C_F1'' C_F1' L R C_F2 L_F3 C_F3 R_F3

‐UPh‐Gnd Coil Resistor
Ground
Figure 121: Simplified zero-sequence equivalent circuit during an EF in Feeder 1

Such an equivalent circuit can be used to facilitate the understanding of the basic physics-processes
which occurs when EF happens in a high-impedance grounded system.
Note the following in respect to this equivalent circuit:

Technical manual
Current protection
1. The EF location is in Feeder 1. Consequently, its distributed capacitance is split into two parts,
one in-between the LV busbar and the fault point (that is C_F1’) and the second one behind the
fault point (that is C_F1”).
2. All feeders are just represented with a capacitance to ground. All series parameters of any
feeder are ignored because their impedance is much lower than this capacitive impedance and
consequently these series parameters can be ignored.
3. A resistance to ground (R_F3) is shown with dashed lines for Feeder 3, in practice these
resistances are extremely large and typically can be ignored. Consequently, these are not
shown for other feeders.
4. An inductance to ground ( L_F3) is also shown with dashed lines for Feeder 3, that in practice
may represent distributed coils along that feeder or remote coils located in the other substation
at the end of Feeder 3. In systems with multiple coils the above-mentioned resistance to ground
(R_F3) may also include the coil losses.
5. The grounding impedance at the transformer LV winding neutral point is represented as a
parallel connection of an inductor ( L) and a resistor ( R). This is the most practical
representation because it can then represent the most commonly used grounding principles (for
isolated system L= R=∞).
6. The location of all CTs and VTs are also given because these are used to determine the
measurement points for Io and respectively Uo signals in each feeder.
7. Note that Io and Uo are correct values for this equivalent circuit. In a real installation the IED will
actually measure 3Io and 3Uo, but the difference between them is just a fixed factor of 3. In
further writing only Io and Uo notation will be used, but whatever is written is applicable to 3Io
and 3Uo as well.
8. The reference direction for current measurement (towards the protected feeder) is also given
with associated directional EF protection ( 67NT-F1 for Feeder 1) in each outgoing feeder bay.
9. As per the superposition theorem, a single source in the zero-sequence system is located at the
fault point. Its magnitude is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage in the faulty phase just before
the fault, but its phase angle shall be turned-around for 180 degrees. If it is assumed that the
fault resistance (that is Rf) has approximately a value of zero ( a bolted fault), then the Uo
voltage will be equal to this source voltage. The Uo voltage will be approximately the same for
all IEDs throughout the system. That means that the differences in the measured Io currents in
the individual feeders are important to determine the faulty versus the healthy feeder.
9.18.7.1 Fundamental frequency signals behavior during an EF in a high-

impedance grounded system GUID-38415416-F60F-46F4-B68D-AEDE78C47FF5 v1
When EF happens (that is when the switch at the fault point closes in Figure 121) the source located
at the fault point energizes all the distributed capacitances of all the feeders connected to the LV
busbar.
Note that these capacitors are not energized (that is the capacitors are empty or without any stored
energy) just before the earth fault.
Consequently, these are first charged to an energy level corresponding to the Uo voltage level (using
the formula 0.5*Uo2*C) before starting to exchange reactive power with either the source located at
the fault point or with the coil(s) which are possibly located at transformer neutral point(s). This active
power surge is quite short, but if it can be measured or detected by the IED, then it can be used to
detect the faulty feeder. Figure 122 displays the path for this active but transient power from the
source to the distributed capacitors.

Technical manual
Current protection
Transformer
Feeder 1 Bay Feeder 2 Feeder 3
LV Busbar
VT
Uo
F1 LV F2 F3
CB CB CB CB
Io_F1
Io_F2
Io_F3
Io_Tr
67NT‐F1 67NT‐F2 67NT‐F3
Faulty Feeder
Fault Point Power
HV Busbar
Transformer HV
Y Δ CB
Rf Grounding
Impedance
C_F1'' C_F1' L R C_F2 L_F3 C_F3 R_F3

‐UPh‐Gnd Coil Resistor
Ground
Figure 122: Flow of active power in the zero-sequence system at the moment when EF
happens
Note that the existence of any shunt resistance in the system (R or R_F3 in Figure 122) will increase
the active transient power flow and consequently make it easier for the active power measurement
principle to determine the EF position. The same is true if the fault resistance Rf is present in the
circuit. At the same time, the existence of any inductor in the circuit (L or L_F3) will not influence the
active power flow in any way.
The EF position can be determined because the flow of the active transient power will be in the
opposite direction through the CTs in the faulty feeder and the healthy feeders. In simple words this
active power will be negative in the faulty feeder and positive in a healthy feeder. Note that the
transient EF IED installed in a healthy feeder will measure the transient charging power of the own
distributed capacitance, while the IED installed in the faulty feeder will measure the active transient
charging power of all healthy feeders lumped together. Consequently, this transient charging power
signal magnitude will be the largest for the faulty feeder and the smallest for the shortest healthy
feeder.
It is quite a common protection practice to use -Uo voltage (that is Uo voltage phasor which is turned
around/rotated for 180 degrees) for all EF protection functions. This will only invert all power
directions previously explained. For example, in an actual IED implementation the measured power
will be essentially positive in the faulty feeder and negative in a healthy feeder. This can be simply
understood as a sign convention which is commonly used in protective relaying practice.
In a power system the active power can be only supplied by the fundamental frequency signals,
which means that this active power must be generated by one or more generation plant connected to
the networks. Consequently, only the fundamental frequency content of the Io and Uo signals shall
be used to measure this active transient power in every bay. To calculate active power based on
fundamental frequency phasors the formula given below is used. Note that Uo is taken with the
minus sign as explained previously.
P  U 01 * I 01 *cos( 1)
The index one in this equation indicates that only the fundamental frequency component signals are
used for the active power calculation. As mentioned previously -Uo is a constant for all EF IEDs in
the galvanically interconnected system, and consequently only the active fundamental frequency
current component Io*cos(ɸ) can be used to determine the direction of the EF.

Technical manual
Current protection
Figure 123 displays the method to derive the Io*cos(ɸ) component. Practically it is a part of Io
phasors which is in phase with -Uo phasor. This calculation is done at every execution of the
algorithm.
For fundamental frequency current phasor, only the Io*cos(ɸ) component has a useful physical
meaning. The Io*sin(ɸ) component is just a disturbing part of the input signal which can only cause
confusion and possible wrong operation of the transient EF IED if it is used. This is because when
multiple compensation coils are installed in the network, the flow of the reactive power in the zero-
sequence system is quite unpredictable.
‐Uo
Io
Figure 123: Deriving Io*cos(ɸ) and Io*sin(ɸ) quantities from -Uo and Io phasors
Because the instantaneous Io*cos(ɸ) values will vary quite a lot during the transient an averaged
(that is integrated) value is used. This averaged power value will correspond to the actual energy
stored in the distributed capacitances. In the feeder where EF is located this averaged value will be
always positive, while in all healthy feeders this averaged value will be always negative. Thus, by
setting two simple current threshold levels (one positive and the second one negative) the direction
of the EF can be determined. The averaged Io*cos(ɸ) value is also given as a service value from the
APPTEF function in order to make easier testing and understanding of the function operation
principles (that is see signal IFUNDRE in Figure 128). This value can be recorded by the built in DR
and even be used to fine-tune the settings for the respective pickup levels.
An example how these signals may look like for an EF on a faulty feeder and on a healthy feeder are
given in Figure 124 and Figure 125 respectively.

Technical manual
Current protection
Figure 124: Example how waveforms and the active power signals may look like for a faulty
feeder
IEC19000938=IEC19000938=1=en-us=Original.vsdx
Figure 125: Example how waveforms and the active power signals may look like for a healthy
feeder
Note that the presence of a grounding resistor is clearly visible in Figure 124b because the averaged
value of the Io*cos(ɸ) component do not drop to zero after the transient for a faulty feeder, but it
drops to zero for a healthy feeder as shown in Figure 125b.
The advantages of the averaged Io*cos(ɸ) method to detect the EF direction in high-impedance
grounded system are:
1. Simplicity, because only the active part of the fundamental frequency component of the Io
current phasor is used.
2. Use of the widely recognized protection principle Io*cos(ɸ).
3. Independence from the compensation degree, number of coils used and their physical location
in the protected network (Petersen coils do not consume active power).
4. Averaging (numerical integration) is performed continuously. No need to start/stop this
calculation process.
5. The Io*cos(ɸ) quantity will be approximately equal to zero during all operating conditions of the
protected network except during the transient charging process of the capacitors. Consequently,
it is relatively simple to determine when this quantity appears. As additional security measure it
can also be verified that this coincides with the jump of Uo voltage magnitude.
6. A low sampling rate is sufficient because only the fundamental frequency phasors of Uo and Io
are calculated from the input signal. A sampling rate of 20 samples per fundamental power
system cycle is enough for proper operation of the transient EF IED.

Technical manual
Current protection
7. Raw samples of residual voltage and current are not at all directly used in the algorithm which
simplifies the overall design.
8. There are no angular accuracy issues because no angle-based criterion is used.
9. Separate operate levels for forward and reverse directions can be used.
9.18.7.2 Higher harmonic signals behavior during an EF in a high-impedance

grounded system GUID-EB54A5C5-1A92-480F-A048-8113AEE674EA v1
The energizing of a shunt capacitor in a power system is typically followed by relatively large current
and voltage transients which contains a lot of harmonics. When an EF happens the same holds true
for the zero-sequence circuit.
As shown in Figure 124, some damped oscillation is clearly visible in the Io signal at the beginning of
this EF. The frequency of that oscillation is determined by network parameters (that is L, R and C)
and is almost never an exact multiple of the fundamental frequency signal. The frequency of the
oscillating signal may vary from 100Hz up to theoretically 5kHz. In modern numerical IEDs typically
full-cycle filters (that is 20ms long filtering window in 50Hz power system) will be used to extract the
fundamental frequency phasors but, also higher harmonic phasors. The filtering time is quite short
and the oscillation signal during an EF will pass through this filter making it visible in some of the Io
current harmonic phasors.
For resonant grounded systems the total inductance of all coils is tuned to the distributed
capacitance of the overall power system only at the fundamental (rated) frequency. For all higher
harmonic signals the coils have a h2 times higher impedance than the corresponding capacitive
reactance, where h is the harmonic number. Already for the second harmonic component (h=2) the
compensation coils will have a 4 times higher impedance than distributed capacitances. Therefore all
coils can be omitted from the zero-sequence equivalent circuit shown in Figure 121 for all harmonic
components. A simplification is that all harmonic components in any high-impedance grounded
systems behave as the fundamental frequency component in an isolated power system.
Subsequently the Io*sin(ɸ) principle which is typically used in an isolated power system can be now
applied to all the higher order harmonic components irrespective of the actual type of the grounding
used in the protected network.
Since the higher harmonics will primarily be present during the transient part of the EF, these
harmonic components will behave in a similar transient way as previously explained for the
fundamental frequency Io*cos(ɸ) component. Consequently, the same integration principle can be
used to measure this transient harmonic reactive power exchange between the capacitors and the
harmonic source located at the fault point.
To simplify the IED calculations, the following sum is formed first, where all reactive power
components from all current harmonics are lumped together:
K
IOh *sin( h )
h2
where K is the maximum harmonic component which can be measured by the relay. This summed
value is proportional to the total harmonic reactive power seen by the IED during an EF.
Since the summed instantaneous Io*sin(ɸ) harmonic values will vary quite a lot during a transient
period of the EF, the averaged (integrated) value is used. In the feeder where the EF is located this
averaged value will be positive, while in all feeders which see the EF in reverse, this averaged value
will be negative. By settings, two current threshold levels (one positive and the second negative), the
direction of the EF can be determined. Since everything is scaled back to current, even the same
pickup levels as for the active transient power part can be used.

Technical manual
Current protection
The summed averaged Io*sin(ɸ) harmonic value is also given as a service value from the function
(see signal IHARMIM in Figure 128) to make testing and understanding of the function operation
principles easier. This value can be recorded by the built in disturbance recorder and even be used to
fine-tune the settings for the respective pickup levels.
Examples how these signals may look like for an EF on a faulty feeder and on a healthy feeder are
given in Figure 126 and Figure 127 respectively. Note that this is the same EF and feeders as shown
in Figure 124 and Figure 125.
Figure 126: Example how waveforms and the summed harmonic reactive power signals may
look like for a faulty feeder
Figure 127: Example how waveforms and the summed harmonic reactive power signals may
look like for a healthy feeder
Advantages of this harmonic based transient reactive power method to detect the EF direction in
high-impedance grounded system are:
1. Simplicity, because only the reactive part of the higher harmonic phasors of Io current is used.
2. Use of the widely recognized protection principle Io*sin(ɸ).
3. Independence from the compensation degree, number of coils used and their physical location
in the protected network (all coils are disregarded for harmonic calculations).
4. Averaging (that is numerical integration) is performed continuously. There is no need to start/
stop this calculation process.
5. The Ʃ(Ioh*sin(ɸh)) quantity will be approximately equal to zero during all operating conditions of
the protected network except during the transient period of the EF. Consequently, it is simple to
determine when this quantity appears. As an additional security measure, it can be verified that
this coincides with the jump of the fundamental frequency Uo voltage magnitude.

Technical manual
Current protection
6. A low sampling rate is sufficient, because typically only up to and including the 5th harmonic is
required to be taken into calculation.
7. Raw samples of residual voltage and current are not at all directly used in the algorithm which
simplifies the overall design.
8. Separate operate levels for forward and reverse direction are possible.
9.18.7.3 Summary of the measurement principle for transient EF protection GUID-62E25B5D-2238-4D8C-B51B-A1C269005A7F v1
As explained in the previous two sections this transient EF protection function is based on two
principles:
1. Distribution of the active transient power at fundamental frequency, which is supplied from the
fault point to initially charge all distributed capacitances to ground in the zero-sequence system
at the moment of an EF inception in a high-impedance grounded network.
2. Distribution of the reactive transient power for higher harmonic components at the moment of an
EF inception in a high-impedance grounded network.
These two principles will hold true for any type of EF in a high-impedance grounded network,
including low-ohmic, high-ohmic, intermittent and restriking earth-faults. Consequently, this function is
able to operate for all of them.
Note that the neutral voltage Uo is common for all relays installed in the galvanically interconnected
system and typically the voltage measurement does not pose any problem for the IED operation.
It is not trivial to properly measure the residual current signal Io and extract the useful parts from it.
Due to this, use of complete current phasors for either fundamental frequency or higher harmonics
can be a problem and can lead to incorrect operation of the relays which are using complete current
phasors for measurement.
For fundamental frequency current phasor only the Io*cos(ɸ) component has useful physical
meaning, while the Io*sin(ɸ) component is just a disturbing part of the signal.
For all higher harmonic current phasors the situation is exactly the opposite. Io*sin(ɸ) is a useful
component with physical meaning, while the Io*cos(ɸ) component shall be avoided.
To achieve a stable and reliable signal, only the useful components of the current signal are
integrated in time. This makes these integral values proportional to the respective energy. However,
these integral values are scaled back to the measured current magnitude by using the moving
average method. Only the sign of this integral (positive or negative) during an EF is used in this
design to determine the direction of the earth fault. Some minimum (settable) magnitude level of the
integrated signal shall be exceeded for security reasons and to avoid any possible issues with IED
hardware accuracy. Using two independent measurement principles, the best practical results in
respect to dependability and security for the transient earth-fault protection will be ensured.
Figure 128 displays the overall simplified logic diagram for the APPTEF function.

Technical manual
Current protection
a uormshigh
a>b
UN> b
UNMAG *)
ioangle
ANGDIF *)
uoangle ‐
uofundamp
iofundamp
Continuous
Extract ‐Uo1 Integration IFUNDRE
|Io1|*cos(ɸ1)
Fundamental Derive current
(Averaging)
active and |Io1|*sin(ɸ1)
Extract Io1 reactive part Continuous IFUNDIM
Fundamental
Integration
Invert (Averaging)
Uo
Extract ‐Uo2 a activepowerhigh
3Uo |Io2|*cos(ɸ2) a>b
2nd Harmonic Derive current IMinForward b
VT input active and
Extract Io2 |Io2|*sin(ɸ2)
reactive part a activepowerlow
2nd Harmonic ab
3rd Harmonic Derive current b
CT input active and Continuous
Io3 |Io3|*sin(ɸ3)
Extract
rd
3 Harmonic
reactive part
Ʃ Integration
(Averaging)
a
b
a>b reactivepowerhigh
a reactivepowerlow
ab
IN> b
*) shown only in PCM600 Monitoring Tool and LHMI

Figure 128: Simplified logic for measurement part of the APPTEF function
Service values for 3Uo magnitude, 3Io magnitude and angle between them are only displayed in the
Monitoring Tool and LHMI, in order to facilitate function testing and commissioning.
The integrated value of the fundamental frequency Io*sin(ɸ) reactive part (IFUNDIM ) is not used in
the function but is provided as a service value. This enables the end user for easier understanding of
the flow of reactive power in the zero-sequence circuit during an EF in a complex sub-transmission
network configurations when several compensation coils are used which are geographically spread-
out throughout the system.
The output signals displayed in Figure 128 with small letters are only used in
simplified logic diagrams which are given below. These signals are not available
outside of the function.
9.18.7.4 Simplified Boolean logic diagrams GUID-FBFE197C-5916-4736-B97C-1E301AE2D9E3 v1
After performing the measurement of the two averaged power components, the following Boolean
logics are used to derive required binary outputs from the transient EF protection function.
Residual over-voltage start logic and function overall reset logic GUID-C68D706F-BABC-48E2-B5E0-98A26121C09C v1
The residual over-voltage start signal is internally used in the APPTEF function to arm the function to
operate in case of an EF.
Note that this voltage signal defines when the function resets internally as well.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK block
stunwindow
2.5 cycles AND
STUN
AND
tStart
stun
t tStartOn
tReset 20ms
uormshigh
t
AND
RESET 5ms
From LHMI reset
IEC61850 Command OR OR
almcc
Figure 129: Residual over-voltage start logic and reset logic
Intermittent start logic GUID-A4A737BB-3385-4855-95F8-8961B4134587 v1

This logic will enable operation of the function in case of an intermittent EF when the residual over-
voltage start will not be able to do that due to short duration of STUN signal.
20ms
stfw Counter
AND Set CounterLimit
stun reset Reached STIEF
Reset block AND
UN>StartsNo CounterLimit
stief
Figure 130: Intermittent EF start logic
Forward Start and Trip logic of the function GUID-D7606A7E-9D34-4A83-9A0F-F5C885509316 v1

The following logic diagram shows how the binary signals WRNFW, STFW and TRIP are derived.
uofundamp High = 600ms

iofundamp Impedance t
Fault 50ms
activepoweralarm stun
almciri Logic block WRNFW
AND
activepowerhigh
OR
reactivepowerhigh
stunwindow stfw
iormshigh AND
almcc S AND
reset RS
R STFW
tPulseMin OR
stief
tStartOn OR
tTrip
TRIP
t OR
AND
OperationMode = Start and Trip tPulseMin
BLKTR AND
Figure 131: Start and Trip logic for an EF in forward direction
Reverse start logic of the function GUID-BA6416AB-C991-4F77-B919-1C4ACD98F7A8 v1

The following logic diagram shows how the binary signal STRV is derived.

Technical manual
Current protection
stunwindow
activepowerlow
reactivepowerlow OR
iormshigh AND
almcc
stfw
S
reset RS
R
stief
tStartOn OR AND STRV
OR
block tPulseMin
stun
Figure 132: Start logic for an EF in reverse direction
Cross country detection logic GUID-54722D7C-F36C-4DF9-9C50-64E738D52BF3 v1

The following logic diagram shows the implementation of cross country fault logic.
tCC
OperationCC = On 200ms
t
iofundamp AND t ALMCC
a reset AND AND
a>b block
CrossCntry_IN> b
almcc
Figure 133: Cross country fault logic

Note that the operation of this logic unconditionally resets either the STFW or STRV signal.
Circulating current detection logic GUID-5405CC9B-96AB-4F07-B4E9-E9031127E185 v1

The following logic diagram shows the implementation of circulating current logic.
tCircIN
iofundamp 500ms block
a t
a>b reset t ALMCIRI
Circulate_IN> b AND AND
200ms
activepowerhigh
t
activepowerlow OR AND OR
stun
almciri
Figure 134: Circulating current detection logic

Circulating residual current may appear in a meshed high-impedance grounded network. It will be
mostly of a reactive nature. However, if the above logic operates due to the presence of some active
current component in the fundamental frequency circulating current, then the pickup for the
integrated active power component of the fundamental frequency residual current is altered. This is
done to prevent possible mal-operation of the function. If the ALMCIRI signal becomes active the end
user shall try to rectify this problem in the primary system as this may influence proper operation of
the transient EF protection. Especially, the operation of the APPTEF function for high ohmic EF will
become much more difficult.
GUID-BCCA5F2D-9FF7-4188-9B5D-DA05E8E80CC0 v1
Table 224: Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection APPTEF

Minimum operate level for residual (5-80)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
overvoltage 3Uo> start condition "UN>"
Reset ratio for residual overvoltage 3Uo> > 75% -
Operate time for residual overvoltage 3Uo> Min. = 5 ms -
at 0 to 2 x Uset Max. = 15 ms

Technical manual
Current protection

Minimum threshold level for residual (3-100)% of lBase ±1.5% of Ir
overcurrent start condition "IN>"
Minimum operate level for integrated current (2.0-100.0)% of lBase ±1.5% of Ir
to declare the forward direction
"IMinForward”
Minimum operate level for integrated current (2.0-100.0)% of lBase ±1.5% of Ir
to declare the reverse direction
"IMinReverse"
Minimum time delay to declare EF direction (0.04-2.00) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
"tStart" greater
Minimum trip time delay "tTrip" (0.00-20.00) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
greater
Minimum pulse length duration for trip and/or (0.02-1.00) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is
start outputs "tPulseMin" greater
Operate 3Io current level for cross country (20-1000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
fault detection "CrossCntry_IN>" ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Time delay to activate cross country fault (0.02-1.00) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
detection "tCC" at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Drop off time delay to de-activate cross Fixed 0.2 s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
country fault detection at 2 x Iset to 0 greater
Operate 3Io current level for circulating (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

current detection "Circulate_IN>" ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Time delay to activate circulating current (5.0-60.0) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
detection "tCircIN" at 0 to 2 x Iset greater
Drop off time delay to de-activate circulating Fixed 0.5 s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is
current detection at 2 x Iset to 0 greater

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Section 10 Voltage protection

10.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV IP14544-1 v3
M16876-1 v7

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27
3U<
V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The two-step
undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for
system restoration at power outages or as a long-time delayed back-up to the primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the system service voltage.
UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Figure 135: UV2PTUV function block

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.1.4 Signals
Table 225: UV2PTUV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
Table 226: UV2PTUV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.1.5 Settings
Table 227: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)

On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
for step 1
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
1
On
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
for step 2
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all

Technical manual
Voltage protection

IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
2
Table 228: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 229: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
Value groups

Table 230: UV2PTUV Monitored data

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. If one,
two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START signal is
generated. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the
START outputs: the measured voltages 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 have to be lower than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
UV2PTUV has two voltage-measuring steps with separate time delays. If the voltage remains below
the set value for the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted
trip due to the disconnection of the related high-voltage equipment, a voltage-controlled blocking of
the function is available: if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level, the function is blocked and
no START or TRIP signal is generated. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each
step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
10.1.7.1 Measurement principle M15326-6 v7
Depending on the value of the ConnType parameter, UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-
earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or
phase-to-phase true RMS value, and compares it against the set values, U1< and U2<. The voltage-
related settings are made in percentage of the base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase
voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:
UBase(kV )
U (%) ·
3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:
U < (%) × UBase(kV)


Technical manual
Voltage protection
When the phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected, the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
10.1.7.2 Time delay M15326-10 v13
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT).
For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú
t=ê pú
+D
ê æ Un < - U ö ú
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè Un < ø û
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so
that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100

Technical manual
Voltage protection
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different
inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
IDMT Voltage
Time
Figure 136: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time
delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some
special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition,
with respect to the measured voltage, ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user-defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 pickup
for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. After leaving the hysteresis area, the
start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. For the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend
on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the
timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 137 and figure 138.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP
U1<
Time
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-5-en.vsdx
Figure 137: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-4.vsdx
Figure 138: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Definite timer delay
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 139. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 140 and figure 141
respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed
stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND
Figure 139: Logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 140: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 141: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.1.7.3 Blocking M15326-20 v9
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or completely, by binary
input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of
step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the
blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to Off resulting in
no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The
event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 142.
The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 142: Blocking function

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.1.7.4 Design M15326-35 v10
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the
three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals
are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for
the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step undervoltage
protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 143.
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1
Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
Figure 143: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

Technical manual
Voltage protection
M13290-1 v16
Table 231: UV2PTUV technical data

Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 1106

and step 2, see table 1106
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
0
Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
0
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is greater
characteristics
Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -
10.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545-1 v3
M17002-1 v8
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US
10.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV M13798-3 v17
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power
loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open line ends, normally
then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the system voltage. When
triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Figure 144: OV2PTOV function block
10.2.4 Signals
Table 232: OV2PTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
Table 233: OV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

Technical manual
Voltage protection

10.2.5 Settings
Table 234: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

On
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
for step 1
for step 1
1
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2

Technical manual
Voltage protection

for step 2
for step 2
2
Table 235: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly decreased
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
IDMT curve, step 2

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 236: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
Value groups

Table 237: OV2PTOV Monitored data

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage. OV2PTOV
has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-phase voltages increase above the set
value, a corresponding START signal is issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1
out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps, and can be either definite time
or inverse time delayed.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase, which is set
in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental

value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of measuring is done by
the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage.
OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage
UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase(kV)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function automatically

introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> for Step 1
and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate
the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher
than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.
10.2.7.2 Time delay M15330-10 v12
For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un > ø
The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C, D, k and p are
settings:

Technical manual
Voltage protection
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so
that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration,
see figure 145. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
Figure 145: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by
selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START
condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to
allow a high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and
does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three
ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
Figure 146: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
Figure 147: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 148. Detailed
respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively),
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
Figure 148: Logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
Figure 149: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
Figure 150: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.2.7.3 Blocking M15330-20 v8
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or completely, by binary
input signals where:

10.2.7.4 Design M15330-34 v8
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or the
three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals
are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is
used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of
3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage
protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 151.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
OR TR1
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN-US
Figure 151: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
M13304-1 v15
Table 238: OV2PTOV technical data

Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 1105

and 2, see table 1105
Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset

Technical manual
Voltage protection

Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset
Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

characteristics
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
10.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV IP14546-1 v4
10.3.1 Function revision history GUID-22110E0B-DEFB-461F-A437-4D221DB88799 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 -
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) function calculates the residual voltage from
the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input transformer fed
from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer.
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.
ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2
Figure 152: ROV2PTOV function block
10.3.5 Signals
Table 239: ROV2PTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
Table 240: ROV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
10.3.6 Settings
Table 241: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 242: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

On
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
for step 1
for step 1
1
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
for step 2
for step 2
2
Table 243: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly decreased
curve for step 1
curve for step 1

Technical manual
Voltage protection

curve for step 1
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 244: ROV2PTOV Monitored data

ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured voltage
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect a high residual voltage. The
residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected
in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase-to-earth voltages, and calculate
the corresponding residual voltage internally in the IED. ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate
time delays. If the residual voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to
the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time
delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage-related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-
phase. The set UBase value is divided by sqrt(3) before the set value is calculated.
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a settable hysteresis has been included.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.3.8.2 Time delay M15331-10 v11
For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U > ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero, the time delay will be infinite. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so
that:

Technical manual
Voltage protection
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some
special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT).
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is
not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and
tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after the
defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled
again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Also, notice that
for the overvoltage function, IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage
fluctuations during the drop-off period.
There are three ways to reset the timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 153
and figure 154.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
Figure 153: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
Figure 154: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 155. Detailed
respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed
stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
Figure 155: Logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 156: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 157: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.3.8.3 Blocking M15331-18 v7
It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially or completely by
binary input signals where:

BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2
10.3.8.4 Design M15331-32 v7
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters
filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The residual voltage is compared to the set
value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the function is
schematically described in figure 158.
UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1
ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR
Figure 158: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

Technical manual
Voltage protection

M13317-2 v16
Table 245: ROV2PTOV technical data

Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for low and - See table 1105

high step, see table
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
to 1.2 x Uset greater
Definite time delay high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

to 1.2 x Uset greater
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x U set -
10.4 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV SEMOD153860-1 v2
10.4.1 Function revision history GUID-04679E4E-E0D2-4BA6-A002-4020E52DB973 v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 -

Technical manual
Voltage protection
SEMOD167723-2 v2

Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two three phase
sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step. Alternatively, it can
be used as voltage differential protection (VDCPTOV) for shunt capacitor banks.
VDCPTOV
U3P1* TRIP
U3P2* START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF
Figure 159: VDCPTOV function block
10.4.5 Signals
Table 246: VDCPTOV Input signals

U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
Table 247: VDCPTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
START BOOLEAN Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF REAL Differential voltage phase L1

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.4.6 Settings
Table 248: VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 249: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)

On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential
operate, in seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset,
in seconds
UDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm,
in seconds
U1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of
UBase
U2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of
UBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block
Table 250: VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

Table 251: VDCPTOV Monitored data

UL1DIFF REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L1
The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison of the amplitudes
of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two
Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level UDATrip
signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm
respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage
settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated.
The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1 or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking can be
switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input. It can,
for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service value. This
allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 160.
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL2> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP
UDTripL3>
AND
AND START
UDAlarmL1>
AND
UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM
UDAlarmL3>
AND
U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND
U1<L3 AND
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND
U2<L3
BLOCK
en06000382-2.vsd
Figure 160: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

Technical manual
Voltage protection

SEMOD166919-2 v7
Table 252: VDCPTOV technical data

Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is

differential alarm at 0.8 x UDAlarm to 1.2 x greater
UDAlarm
differential trip at 0.8 x UDTrip to 1.2 x greater
UDTrip
differential reset at 1.2 x UDTrip to 0.8 x greater
UDTrip
10.5 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171453-1 v3
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in networks with an automatic system
restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all three
phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker
remains closed.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.
LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU
Figure 161: LOVPTUV function block

Technical manual
Voltage protection
10.5.4 Signals
Table 253: LOVPTUV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision
Table 254: LOVPTUV Output signals

10.5.5 Settings
Table 255: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)

On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay
Table 256: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph
voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration
Table 257: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage measurement. LOVPTUV
is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if the line was restored for at least tRestore
before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is
activated. The START output signal indicates start.
Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been
detected low for more than tBlock.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore.
Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information signals,
by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by setting
tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU input) and the
information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command
from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in
order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is
in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes
START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t
STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&
tBlock
>1 t
CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s
Figure 162: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

Technical manual
Voltage protection

SEMOD175210-2 v7
Table 258: LOVPTUV technical data

Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer when disconnecting all three (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
phases greater
Time delay for enabling the functions after (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
restoration greater
Operate time delay when disconnecting all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
three phases greater
Time delay to block when all three phase (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
voltages are not low greater

Technical manual
Section 11 Unbalance protection

11.1 Shunt capacitor cascading failure protection
SCCFPVOC GUID-08928884-88E3-4A40-9B50-BDA5F1A451D9 v1
11.1.1 Function revision history GUID-D7C922F5-2C3F-40E2-8B7F-B42F12597971 v1

revision revision
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 The harmonic restraint function changed to freeze the definite timers.
11.1.2 Identification GUID-86BB3D32-8E40-48FB-8619-8D0B28B60AFA v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Shunt capacitor cascading failure SCCFPVOC 2(I > /U <) 51 V
protection
11.1.3 Functionality GUID-ACDFCB71-0652-4A60-8B2A-B18144DC3917 v1
Cascading failures are series faults in shunt capacitor banks involving more than one capacitor unit
(or even more than one rack) as shown in Figure 163. Cascading failures are characterized by the
presence of an unbalanced shunt capacitor bank (SCB) current. However, as the connected power
system is much stronger than the SCB rating, any unbalance voltage due to cascading faults inside
the capacitor bank is typically not present in the system.
The SCCFPVOC function provides protection against cascading faults and has the following
protection modes to detect the unbalances.
• Two step, negative sequence based voltage restrained over-current protection

• Two step, zero sequence based voltage restrained over-current protection
At any time only one mode can be selected for the operation. The zero sequence mode shall only be
selected if the capacitor is solidly earthed.
The zero sequence based function can also be used as a turn to turn fault protection for a shunt
reactor with a earthed neutral point.

Technical manual
Bus
VT
670 IED
CT
Cascading failure
Optional earthing of the SCB

IECI19000101-1-en.vsdx
Figure 163: Cascading failure within SCB
11.1.4 Function block GUID-77A3F430-4372-4671-BF70-F1C993767434 v1
SCCFPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
ST2
IMEAS
UMEAS
Figure 164: Function block of cascading failure protection
11.1.5 Signals
Table 259: SCCFPVOC Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Table 260: SCCFPVOC Output signals

ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2
IMEAS REAL Measured current magnitude
UMEAS REAL Measured voltage magnitude
11.1.6 Settings
Table 261: SCCFPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 262: SCCFPVOC Group settings (basic)

On
CurrentInput NegSeq - - 3*ZeroSeq Select current signal which will be
3*ZeroSeq measured inside function. Note: Needs
to have same value as VoltageInput
VoltageInput -NegSeq - - -3*ZeroSeq Select voltage signal which will be
-3*ZeroSeq measured inside function. Note: Needs
to have same value as CurrentInput
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 40.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
Operation1 Off - - Off Operation step 1 Off / On
On
I> 121 - 400 %IB 1 125 Operate current level for step 1 in % of
IBase
tDef1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of step
1
VDepFact1 0.0330 - 0.7075 - 0.0001 0.0640 Voltage dependent factor for step 1.
Note: it is recommended to be set as
[1-(117/I>)], to follow the capacitor
impedance
HarmRestr1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain to be used for 3I0 current only
Operation2 Off - - Off Operation step 2 Off / On
On
I>> 125 - 400 %IB 1 130 Operate current level for step 2 in % of
IBase

Technical manual

tDef2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of step
2
VDepFact2 0.0640 - 0.7075 - 0.0001 0.1000 Voltage dependent factor for step 2.
Note: it is recommended to be set as
[1-(117/I>>)], to follow the capacitor
impedance
HarmRestr2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain to be used for 3I0 current only

Table 263: SCCFPVOC Monitored data

IMEAS REAL - A Measured current magnitude
UMEAS REAL - kV Measured voltage magnitude
11.1.8 Operation principle GUID-0CE296ED-BBD7-4B4C-B631-6EB55E49B2CC v2
The negative or the zero sequence voltage restrained over-current principle is used to detect a
cascading failure within the shunt capacitor bank (SCB). Table 264 summarizes the current/voltage
pairs which are used for the voltage restrained principle.
Table 264: Measurement quantities for cascading failure detection
Current signal I Voltage signal U

SCB Neg. Seq. Current SCB Neg. Seq. Voltage Can be used on any SCB
SCB Zero Seq. Current SCB Zero Seq. Voltage Can only be used on directly earthed
SCB
The choice between the negative or the zero sequence quantity depends on whether the star point is
earthed or not. The restrained characteristics for this application is set in accordance with Figure 165.

Technical manual
Measured Current
(%IBase)
1.0 × Current start

level (I> or I>>)
VDepFact × Current
start level (I> or I>>)
3.0% 120% Measured Voltage

(% of UBase)
Figure 165: General voltage restrained characteristic for SCB cascading protection (Stage 1
and stage 2)
The SCCFPVOC function has two stages of definite time voltage restrained over-current functionality.
In both the stages, voltage restrained over-current feature will follow the characteristics shown in
Figure 165. In the characteristics, the over-current set values I > and I >> are modified according to
the measured voltage as follows:
When U <3% UBase:
Stage1Current set level = VDepFact1 ´ I >

Stage2 Current set level = VDepFact 2 ´ I >>
When U ≥ 120% UBase:
Stage 1 Current set level = I >

Stage 2 Current set level = I >>
When 3% UBase ≤ U < 120% UBase:

Technical manual
é æ U öù
ê 120 - ç ´100 ÷ ú
Stage1Current set level = ê VDepFact1 ´ è UBase øú ´ I >
ê 117 ú
êë úû
é æ U öù
ê 120 - ç ´ 100 ÷ ú
Stage2Current set level = êVDepFact 2 ´ è UBase ø ú ´ I >>
ê 117 ú
êë úû
Where, U is the measured voltage.
Since the capacitor impedance is linearly dependent with respect to voltage across the capacitor, the
two steps of SCCFPVOC should work as parallel characteristics (see Figure 166) to achieve the
combination of security and speed. This parallel characteristics of two steps are achieved by setting
VDepFactx as follows:
æ 117 ö
For Stage1: VDepFact1 = 1 - ç ÷
èI>ø
æ 117 ö
For Stage2 : VDepFact 2 = 1 - ç ÷
è I >> ø
Once the VDepFact1 and VDepFact2 are set as per the above equations, the current pick up level
for the linear part of Figure 165 (between 3% - 120% of the measured voltage) is calculated as
follows:
éæ UBase ö ù
Stage1 Current pickup level = I > - êç 120 ´ ÷ -Uú
ëè 3 ø û
éæ UBase ö ù
Stage2 Current pickup level = I >> - êç 120 ´ ÷ -Uú
ëè 3 ø û
Set IBase and UBase according to the capacitor bank rating. That is,
UBase = Rated Ph - Ph voltage of the capacitor bank

UBase
IBase =
3 ´ X SCB
The above rated settings are required for the restrained characteristic to follow the
capacitor impedance properly.
The resultant operating characteristic is shown in Figure 166.

Technical manual
%IBase
I>>:130
First sensitive step Second fast step
I>:125
120
100
Characteristic for
external faults
defined by XSCB
13.0(VDepFact2: 0.100)
8 (VDepFact1: 0.064)
3 100 120 % UBase
Figure 166: General voltage restrained characteristic for SCB cascading failure protection
(Stage 1 and Stage 2)
Based on the current input and the voltage input selection, Equation 76, Equation 77, and Equation
78 uses either the negative or the zero sequence quantities.
The simplified logic diagram of the function is shown in Figure 167. Start of each stage will release
the trip signal respectively after a definite time delay.
This function has an additional zero sequence 2nd harmonic restrained feature which can be
switched On/Off by setting HarmRestrx (x = 1, 2). If this setting is set to On, then the respective
stage will be blocked, if:
IzeroSeq (2nd HarmMag ) > I _ 2nd I _ fund ´ IzeroSeq ( FundamentalMag )

This second harmonic restrained feature shall only be enabled if the zero sequence mode of
operation is selected.

Technical manual
Freeze
HarmRestr1=On/Off Timer
AND
ST1
tDef1
I3P a
Voltage / Current I> a>b t TR1
X b AND
input selection
U3P
(Zero Sequence /
currentInput = NegSeq/3.ZeroSeq Negative Sequence)
1
voltageInput = NegSeq/3.ZeroSeq K
START
BLOCK 1
TRIP
VDepFact1 1
a
a>b tDef2
Zero sequence 2nd harmonic and I>> X b TR2
AND t
fundamental current extraction from
phase current
ST2
1
K
VDepFact2
Freeze
HarmRestr2 = On/Off AND Timer
I_2ndHarm/I_fund
I_2nd/I_fund Comparison
Figure 167: Logic Diagram of cascading failure protection

GUID-ABB8C954-A47E-47E2-BD6B-1632325FE0C9 v1
Table 265: Shunt Capacitor Cascading Failure Protection SCCFPVOC
Function Range Accuracy

Measuring current input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq -
Measuring voltage input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq -
Operating characteristics Voltage restrained over-current ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Operate current, Step 1 (121-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Operate current, Step 2 (125-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio >95% -

Operate time, START at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max.= 30 ms
Reset time, START at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms, whichever is
greater
Second harmonic blocking (10.0-50.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Technical manual
11.2 Current unbalance protection of SCB, SCUCPTOC GUID-6B41F976-9393-41E4-82F8-8AD841AC6E63 v1
11.2.1 Identification GUID-235120CF-F959-4092-A275-8511903520E8 v1
number
Current unbalance SCUCPTOC dI>C 60N
protection of SCB
11.2.2 Functionality Functionality GUID-0038D23F-5C59-4B31-A747-60F5C02560A9 v1
Shunt capacitor banks (SCB) are used in transmission and distribution substations for the benefit of
reactive power support and filtering. Any internal fault in the capacitor bank leads to unbalance in the
SCB and severe damage to the entire bank, which can result in an explosion or fire. Generally
internal faults in the shunt capacitor bank are due to the open or short-circuit of the capacitor units or
elements.
An internal fault will typically lead to an unbalance of currents between the two legs of the SCB. To
measure the unbalance current, several configurations are possible:
• Place a CT between the two neutral point connections of a double WYE configuration as shown
in Figure 168.
• Place a CT between the two strings of the same phase of a single WYE configuration as shown
in Figure 169.
• Place a CT between the two legs of the same phase of a H-bridge configuration as shown in
Figure 170.
For unbalance current calculation, the SCUCPTOC function uses measured phase current (I3P) and
measured unbalance current (I3UNB). Based on the measured unbalance current deviation from the
stored reference current value, the function identifies the severity of the internal fault in the SCB.

Technical manual
L1
IL1
L2
IL2
L3
IL3
C C C C C C
C C C C C C
C C C C C C
C C C C C C
IUNB1
Grounded
IUNB1 Ungrounded
Figure 168: Typical earthed/unearthed double WYE connected SCB

Technical manual
L1
IL1
L2
IL2
L3
IL3
C C C C C C
C C C C C C
C C C C C C
C IUNB1 C C IUNB2 C C IUNB3 C
Grounded/Ungrounded
IEC19000182-1-en-us. vsdx
Figure 169: Typical earthed/unearthed single WYE connected SCB with strings in each phase
L1
IL1
L2
IL2
L3
IL3
C C C C C C
IUNB1 IUNB2 IUNB3
C C C C C C
Grounded/Ungrounded
IEC19000183-1-en-us.vsdx
Figure 170: Typical earthed/unearthed H-bridge connected SCB

Technical manual
11.2.3 Function block GUID-A8D1DBFA-AA21-449A-917C-7BA01EBDEDFB v1
SCUCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3UNB* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKTR TRL3
BLKALM START
BLKWRN STL1
INHIBIT STL2
TRIGCOMP STL3
RESETCOMP ALARM
ALML1
ALML2
ALML3
WARNING
WRN L1
WRN L2
WRN L3
BLKDL1
BLKDL2
BLKDL3
COMP EX ED
IUNBCLCL1
IUNBCLCL2
IUNBCLCL3
Figure 171: Function block
11.2.4 Signals
Table 266: SCUCPTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for phase current input
SIGNAL
I3UNB GROUP - Group signal for unbalance current input
SIGNAL
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block of alarm
BLKWRN BOOLEAN 0 Block of warning
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Inhibit the function
TRIGCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Trigger input to store the measured quantities into the IED
memory. The stored values will be used for future compensation
of the function measurement.
RESETCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Force the stored natural unbalance current and stored reference
current to zero.

Technical manual
Table 267: SCUCPTOC (60N) Output signals

TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from either phase A or from the neutral unbalance
depending how many unbalance currents are used (3 or 1).
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B. Forced to zero when only one
unbalance current is used.
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C. Forced to zero when only one
BFI BOOLEAN Common pickup signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Start signal from either phase A or from the neutral unbalance
PU_B BOOLEAN Start signal from phase B. Forced to zero when only one
PU_C BOOLEAN Start signal from phase C. Forced to zero when only one
ALARM BOOLEAN General alarm signal
ALMA BOOLEAN Alarm signal for either phase A or for the neutral unbalance
depending how many unbalance currents are used (3 or 1)
ALMB BOOLEAN Alarm signal from phase B. Forced to zero when only one
ALMC BOOLEAN Alarm signal from phase C. Forced to zero when only one
WARNING BOOLEAN General warning signal
WRNA BOOLEAN Warning signal for either phase A or for the neutral unbalance
WRNB BOOLEAN Warning signal from phase B. Forced to zero when only one
WRNC BOOLEAN Warning signal from phase C. Forced to zero when only one
BLKDA BOOLEAN Phase A or neutral unbalance operation blocked, depending how
many unbalance currents are used (3 or 1), when corresponding
reference current going lower than set IMin value
BLKDB BOOLEAN Phase B operation blocked when corresponding reference current
goes lower than set IMin value. Forced to zero when only one
BLKDC BOOLEAN Phase C operation blocked when corresponding reference current
goes lower than set IMin value. Forced to zero when only one
COMPEXED BOOLEAN Indicates that a trigger was made for natural unbalance current
calculation
IUNBCLCA REAL Magnitude of calculated unbalance current for either phase A or
neutral unbalance depending how many unbalance currents are
used (3 or 1).
IUNBCLCB REAL Magnitude of calculated unbalance current of phase B. Forced to
zero when only one unbalance current is used.
IUNBCLCC REAL Magnitude of calculated unbalance current of phase C. Forced to
zero when only one unbalance current is used.

Technical manual
11.2.5 Settings
Table 268: SCUCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

SCBConf 1 unbalance curr - - 1 unbalance curr Number of unbalance currents available
3 unbalance curr
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base value selector for phase
current
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base value selector for unbalance
current
Table 269: SCUCPTOC Group settings (basic)

On
IMin 5.0 - 100.0 %IB1 0.1 10.0 Minimum reference phase current for
operation in % of IBase1 with reference
to phase current CT
IUnbalWrn> 1.0 - 1000.0 %IB2 0.1 10.0 Current unbalance warning level for
unbalance current in % of IBase2 with
reference to unbalance current CT
tDefWrn 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay for warning
IUnbalAlm> 1.0 - 1000.0 %IB2 0.1 20.0 Current unbalance alarm level for
tDefAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay for alarm
IUnbal> 1.0 - 1000.0 %IB2 0.1 30.0 Current unbalance trip level for
CurveType Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for trip
Programmable
tDefTrip 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay for trip. Note that
when Programmable IDMT curve is
used, this definite time delay will be
added to the calculated IDMT time.
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for programmable curve
for trip
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.00 Minimum operate time for programmable
curve for trip
tReset 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset time delay for warning, alarm and
trip
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 2.00 Parameter P for programmble curve for
trip
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 28.200 Parameter A for programmble curve for
trip
tBCrv 0.0000 - 20.0000 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for programmble curve for
trip
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for programmble curve for
trip
Table 270: SCUCPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

BlockTrip Trip disabled - - Trip enabled Trip blocked / enabled
Trip enabled

Technical manual

Table 271: SCUCPTOC Monitored data

LASTCOMP GROUP - - Indicates date and time when last trigger
SIGNAL was made for natural unbalance current
calculation
IUNBCLCL1 REAL - A Magnitude of calculated unbalance
current for either phase L1 or neutral
unbalance depending how many
unbalance currents are used (3 or 1).
current of phase L2. Forced to zero
when only one unbalance current is
used.
current of phase L3. Forced to zero
used.
IL1 REAL - A Reference quantity which is either phase
L1 current or positive sequence current
depending how many unbalance
currents are used (3 or 1).
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2. Forced to zero
used.
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3. Forced to zero
used.
IUNBL1 REAL - A Unbalance current in either phase L1 or
neutral depending how many unbalance
currents are used (3 or 1).
IUNBL2 REAL - A Unbalance current in phase L2. Forced
to zero when only one unbalance current
is used.
IUNBL3 REAL - A Unbalance current in phase L3. Forced
to zero when only one unbalance current
is used.
IMEML1 REAL - A Stored value for either phase L1 current
or positive sequence current depending
how many unbalance currents are used
(3 or 1).
IMEML2 REAL - A Stored phase current of phase L2.
Forced to zero when only one unbalance
current is used.
IMEML3 REAL - A Stored phase current of phase L3.
current is used.
IMEMUNBL1 REAL - A Stored unbalance current for either
phase L1 or neutral depending how
many unbalance currents are used (3 or
1).
IMEMUNBL2 REAL - A Stored unbalance current of phase L2.
current is used.

Technical manual

IMEMUNBL3 REAL - A Stored unbalance current of phase L3.
current is used.
IREFUNBL1 REAL - A Magnitude of stored unbalance current
scaled to the reference quantity for either
phase L1 or neutral depending how
many unbalance currents are used (3 or
1).
scaled to present phase current of phase
L2. Forced to zero when only one
scaled to present phase current of phase
L3. Forced to zero when only one
11.2.7 Operation principle GUID-EBE289B2-BE8B-46BE-AD75-BCD57C42D6B9 v1
In case of single WYE or H-bridge capacitor bank configurations the three-phase unbalance currents
are used for the protection. For double WYE configuration, only the neutral unbalance current is used
for the protection. The internal unbalance in the capacitor bank due to capacitor units or elements
failure is measured by the SCUCPTOC function and warning, alarm, start and trip signals are issued
when the unbalance current exceeds preset levels. The terminologies of different currents used in
the document are mentioned in the following table:
Table 272: Different terminologies of currents used in the function
Quantity Description
ĪLy Measured phase current
(where y = 1, 2, and 3)
ĪUnbLy Measured unbalance current
Īx Reference current
ĪMemUnbLy Stored natural unbalance current
ĪMemLy Stored reference current
ĪRefUnbLy Reference unbalance current
ĪUnbClcLy Calculated unbalance current
IBase1 and IBase2 corresponds to the primary phase currents and primary
unbalance currents, respectively.
The unbalance current in a phase or in the neutral is either due to natural differences in the capacitor
bank impedances or due to faults within the capacitor bank.
The natural unbalance current in the capacitor bank (ĪMemUnbLy) is present because of the following
factors:
• Mismatch of capacitor value with the manufacturing data

• Varying temperature
• Aging of capacitors
To avoid operation of the SCUCPTOC function during healthy conditions of the capacitor bank, the
natural unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy) is measured during a healthy situation and stored for future
reference. The actively measured unbalance current (ĪUnbLy) is then compensated by subtracting the
stored natural unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy) and the resulting current is referred to as the calculated

Technical manual
unbalance current (ĪUnbClcLy ). By doing this, the sensitivity of the protection function improves and
can be maintained as the capacitor bank changes its natural unbalance current over its lifetime.
Storing of the natural unbalance current is achieved through an active trigger input (TRIGCOMP).
This TRIGCOMP input can be activated by using either a binary input, MMS input or through an
LHMI command.
The unbalance current flowing through the capacitor bank is directly proportional to the respective
phase current in the shunt capacitor bank and is expressed through the following equation:
I UNBLy = k ´ I X
Where k depends on the impedance of the capacitor bank.
If any external disturbances occur, the phase currents of the SCB will be affected, which in turn
changes the unbalance current as per Equation 82. Since the natural unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy)
is stored under the healthy condition of the system, it is scaled to the present phase current (Īx) in
order to compare correctly with the present unbalance current. This scaled natural unbalance current
is considered as the reference unbalance current which is compensated from the measured (present)
unbalance current.
For double WYE connected capacitor banks, the positive sequence component of the three-phase
current is selected as the reference current (Īx). Whereas for single WYE or H-bridge connected
capacitor banks, individual phase currents are considered as the reference current (Īx) to the
respective phase unbalance currents.
If SCBConf is selected as 1 unbalance curr, then:
• One unbalance current is connected to the function.

• Positive sequence component of the three-phase current is selected as reference current (Īx).
If SCBConf is selected as 3 unbalance curr, then:
• Three unbalance currents are connected to the function.

• Three individual phase currents are considered as the reference current (Īx) to the respective
phase unbalance currents.
The measured unbalance current (ĪUnbLy) is referred with respect to its reference
current (Īx).
The stored natural unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy) is scaled with the present phase current, which is
considered as the reference unbalance current (ĪRefUnbLy).
The reference unbalance current is obtained by the following equation:
I
X
I = ×I
RefUnbLy MemUnbLy
I
MemLy
The outputs IMEMUNBLy (where y = 1, 2, and 3) and IMEMLy shows the magnitude of the recorded
value of natural unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy) and reference current (ĪMemLy), respectively. The
output IREFUNBLy shows the magnitude of the reference unbalance current (ĪRefUnbLy).
When there is no stored current, such as when the function is first turned on, the
stored reference and stored natural unbalance current are considered as zero.

Technical manual
The calculated unbalance current is obtained by the following equation:
I
UnbClcLy (
= I
UnbLy
-I
Re fUnbLy )
IX
IMemLy = IX
IMemLy
IRefUnbLy
IMemUnbLy = IUnbLy IUnbLy
IMemUnbLy
IUnbClcLy -IRefUnbLy
At the instant of TRIG CO MP Afte r the element fai lure
Figure 172: Unbalance current calculation
If the magnitude of the calculated unbalance current (ĪUnbClcLy) is higher than the set value, an
internal fault is declared in the shunt capacitor bank.
The output IUNBCLCLy (where y = 1, 2, and 3) shows the magnitude of the calculated unbalance
current (ĪUnbClcLy).
When TRIGCOMP is activated:
• The measured unbalance current and reference current are considered as stored natural
unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy) and stored reference current (ĪMemLy) respectively, and these two
currents are used for further calculation of unbalance current.
• The output COMPEXED is pulsed for a duration of 100 ms. This indicates that the function is
ready for the reference unbalance current calculation.
• The output LASTCOMP displays the date and time of the latest successfully performed trigger
event.

Technical manual
100 ms
COMPEXED
TRIGCOMP DATE LASTCOMP

AND
TIME
IUnbLy
T IMemUnbLy
Z -1
Ix
T IMemLy
Z -1
Figure 173: Trigger logic

TRIGCOMP input is inhibited when:
• Any measured unbalance current has disturbances at the time of trigger.

• The trip signals exist.
• INHIBIT input is active.
• Reference current is below set IMin.
Ensure that IED date and time values are set or synchronized properly before the
compensation process.
All the stored current values can be reset to zero by activating RESETCOMP input. When
RESETCOMP is activated by using either a binary input or through an LHMI command, the stored
natural unbalance current (ĪMemUnbLy) and the stored reference current (ĪMemLy) resets to zero. By
returning the stored natural unbalance current value to zero, the SCUCPTOC function behaves as an
over-current protection and will respond directly to the measured unbalance current.
Minimum reference current check

If SCBConf is selected as 1 unbalance curr and if the magnitude of the positive sequence component
of the three-phase current goes below the set minimum current level, the SCUCPTOC function is
blocked and the output BLKDL1 rises. The corresponding analog output IUNBCLCL1 will show a
zero value.
If SCBConf is selected as 3 unbalance curr and if any of the phase current magnitude goes below
the set minimum current level, the corresponding phase operation is blocked and the respective
output BLKDLy (where y = 1, 2, and 3) rises. The corresponding analog output IUNBCLCLy will show
a zero value.
The setting IMin is used to set the minimum current level.

Technical manual
ScbConf
IL1 Reference Current (Ix)
IL2
Reference current BLKDLy
IL3 selection
IMin
<
Positive sequence component
Figure 174: Minimum reference current check logic
Warning, Alarm, and Trip logic

The current unbalance protection function has warning, alarm, and trip signals based on the
calculated unbalance current magnitude. The operation levels for the warning, alarm, and trip can be
independently set. If the magnitude of the calculated unbalance current (ĪUnbClcLy) is higher than the
set warning level IUnbalWrn>, a security time delay of approximately 20 ms is considered to check
the stability of the warning pickup level. This security time avoids incorrect operation due to de-
energization and energization of the SCB.
The warning level pickup signal is passed through a definite timer before giving the output WRNLy
(where y = 1, 2, and 3). The definite time delay for the warning signal can be set by using the setting
tDefWrn. The general warning output WARNING is activated when any one of the outputs among
WRNLy becomes active.
Similar to the warning logic, for the alarm output the set alarm limit IUnbalAlm> is checked. Once the
alarm level is crossed, the ALMLy output raises after the security time delay. The definite time delay
for the alarm signal can be set by using the setting tDefAlm. The general alarm output ALARM is
activated when any one of the outputs among ALMLy becomes active.
The STLy output is activated if the magnitude of the calculated unbalance current (ĪUnbClcLy) is above
the set trip level which is set by using the setting IUnbal>. The stability is checked by adding a
security time delay of approximately 20 ms.
The TRLy output is issued after a time delay, which is based on the setting CurveType.
If the setting CurveType is selected as Definite time, then definite time delay is selected for the trip
operation and the output is activated after a time delay given by the setting tDefTrip.
If the setting CurveType is selected as Programmable, then programmable curve is selected for the
trip operation and the output is activated after a time delay given by the following equation:
ì ææ A ö öü
top = max ítMin, ç ç P + B ÷ ´ k + tDef ÷ý
î èè I - C ø øþ
Where,
A, B, C, and P are the numerical coefficients which can be set by using the settings tACrv, tBCrv,
tCCrv, and tPCrv respectively.

Technical manual
k is the time multiplier setting value which can be set by using the setting ‘k’
tMin is the setting which provides the minimum operating time for the programmable curve
tDef is the definite time delay which can be set by using the setting tDefTrip
I is the ratio between the magnitude of calculated unbalance current (ĪUnbClcLy) and the setting
IUnbal>
top is the operating time in seconds
The general start output START is activated when any one of the outputs among STLy becomes
active. Similarly, the general trip output TRIP is activated when any one of the outputs among TRLy
becomes active.
Once the magnitude of the calculated unbalance current (ĪUnbClcLy) goes below the set warning level,
the warning output resets after the set time delay tReset. Similarly, the alarm and trip outputs reset
after the set tReset time delay and when the magnitude of the calculated unbalance current
(ĪUnbClcLy) goes below the corresponding set levels. To avoid oscillations at the boundary conditions,
hysteresis is added to the calculated unbalance current for comparison with the set value.
The setting BlockTrip can be used to avoid tripping of the function during energization or de-
energization of SCB or while commissioning the IED. To block the TRLy and TRIP signals, select the
setting as Trip disabled.
BLKDL1
tOn  20 ms
IUnbClcL1 a tOn = tDefWrn
ABS From other WRNL3
a >b t tOff = tReset WARNING
phases WRNL2 OR
IUnbalWrn> b t
t WRNL1
tDefWrn AND
BLKWRN
tOn  20 ms
a tOn = tDefAlm
From other ALML3
a >b t tOff = tReset phases
ALARM
t ALML2 OR
IUnbalAlm> b
t ALML1
AND
tDefAlm
STL3
BLKALM From other START
phases
STL2 OR
BlockTrip STL1
AND
tOn  20 ms
a
a >b t AND tOn = tDefTrip
IUnbal> b
t
CurveType
tDefTrip From other TRL3
Definite Time tOff = tReset phases TRIP
TRL2 OR
k
t TRL1
tPCrv AND
t
tACrv
tBCrv IDMT Curve

tCCrv
tMin
tReset
INHIBIT
OR
BLOCK
BLKTR
Figure 175: Simplified Warning, Alarm, and Trip logic

Technical manual
If any programmable curve is selected as IEC curve, then tDef should be set to 0.
When SCBConf is selected as 1 unbalance curr, then all the outputs corresponding
to one unbalance current are referred to phase L1 and the remaining phases (L2 and
L3) outputs show zero.
2.8
2.6
Unbalance current (I) in (pu)
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0 500 1000 1500
Operate time (sec)
Figure 176: Typical programmable curve

The programmable curve with the following values of the numerical coefficients are shown in Figure
176.
Name Value
tMin 0.0
k 1
tPCrv 2.0
tACrv 28.2
tBCrv 0.1217
tCCrv 1.0
tDef 5.00
tMin 0.00
Blocking logic
• When the BLOCK input is activated, the binary outputs of the function will be reset.
• The warning, alarm, and trip outputs can be blocked individually by using BLKWRN, BLKALM,
and BLKTR inputs respectively.
• The INHIBIT input can be used in case of any problems during switching On/Off of a capacitor
bank and also it can be used to freeze all the calculations and to block binary outputs.
Table 273 summarizes the INHIBIT and BLOCK behavior in the function.

Technical manual
Table 273: INHIBIT and BLOCK behavior in the function
Activated ILy and IMEMLy and IUNBCLCLy TIMER operation TRIGCOMP RESETCOMP
input signal IUNBLy IMEMUNBLy
INHIBIT - Freeze Freeze Reset Not allowed Allowed
BLOCK - - - Reset Allowed Allowed
– No impact due to the respective input activation
IEC 61850 reporting
The reporting of reference unbalance current is performed in 1 minute interval over IEC 61850. If the
reference unbalance current changes from the last reported value, and if the change is larger than
the pre-defined limit of 2% of IBase2, then the measuring channel reports the new value irrespective
of the cyclic trigger as shown in Figure 177. Similarly the calculated unbalance current is also
reported.
Set IBase2 equal to the unbalance CT rated primary current.
Value
Y1...Y7 : Cyclic reported values, depending upon time Δt.

Y’ and Y” : Deadband reported value, change is greater than setting
Value
Reported
Y5 Y6
+ΔY
-ΔY
Y”
Y’
Y1 Y2 Y7
Y4
Y3
Δt Δt Δt Δt Δt Δt
Time
Figure 177: Reporting over IEC 61850

Technical manual

GUID-E6D094FC-3059-4B7A-B171-485B48B9EBC5 v1
Table 274: Current unbalance protection of shunt capacitor bank SCUCPTOC

Current unbalance level (1.0 -1000.0)% of IBase2 ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (5.0 - 1000.0)% of IBase2 -
>75% at (1.0 - 5.0)% of IBase2
Minimum reference current (5.0 - 100.0)% of IBase1 ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±65 ms, whichever is
Iset greater
Reset time delay at to 2 x Iset to 0 (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms, whichever is
greater
Inverse time characteristics Programmable ±5.0% or ±65 ms, whichever is
greater
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±65 ms, whichever is
curve greater
Operate time, START at 0 to 2 x Iset Min = 30 ms -
Max = 60 ms
Reset time, START at 2 x Iset to 0 Min = 20 ms -
Max = 35 ms
11.3 Phase voltage differential based capacitor bank

unbalanced protection, SCPDPTOV GUID-662626C7-409B-4CE2-9DF0-A47A3A2FC5DF v1
GUID-9E095985-CC54-4BDE-8108-B10BBB5EE3EE v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
identification
Phase voltage differential SCPDPTOV Ud> 87V
based capacitor bank
unbalanced protection
11.3.2 Functionality GUID-EA91752D-C383-4215-A4E9-7678FD3E5D6D v1
Shunt capacitor banks (SCB) are used in transmission and distribution substations for the benefit of
reactive power support and filtering. Any internal fault in the capacitor bank leads to unbalance in the
SCB and severe damage to the entire bank, which can result in an explosion or fire. In the shunt
capacitor bank, the internal faults are due to open-circuit or short circuit of the capacitor units or
elements. The phase voltage differential protection function (SCPDPTOV) can detect the voltage
unbalance in the capacitor bank.
The SCPDPTOV function can be applied to grounded and ungrounded capacitor bank
configurations, where the three-phase bus and tap voltage measurements are available. The function
has the option of connecting an ungrounded capacitor bank configuration with or without neutral
voltage measurement. If a neutral VT is not available, then the zero sequence component of the bus
voltage is used as the neutral voltage (UN).The tapped voltage can be measured in percentage of the

Technical manual
total series capacitor groups in the bank from the ground or across a low-voltage capacitor in each
phase. The typical shunt capacitor bank configuration with VT connections is shown in Figure 178.
Bus
ULx
UTapLx
SCB
UN
Grounded/Ungrounded
Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3
Figure 178: Single line diagram of the typical single WYE shunt capacitor bank configuration
11.3.3 Function block GUID-0F409D7D-DF47-4B56-9A15-0B09D801375A v1
SCPDPTOV
U3P* TRIP
U3PTAP* TRL1
U3NEUT TRL2
BLOCK TRL3
BLKTR START
BLKALM STL1
BLKWRN STL2
INHIBIT STL3
TRIGCOMP ALARM
RESETCOMP ALML1
ALML2
ALML3
WARNING
WRNL1
WRNL2
WRNL3
BLKDL1
BLKDL2
BLKDL3
DIFURATL1
DIFURATL2
DIFURATL3
COMPEXED
PUDIFL1
PUDIFL2
PUDIFL3
USEDURATL1
USEDURATL2
USEDURATL3
URATIOL1
URATIOL2
URATIOL3
Figure 179: SCPDPTOV function block

Technical manual
11.3.4 Signals
Table 275: SCPDPTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3PTAP GROUP - Group signal for three phase tap voltage
SIGNAL
U3NEUT GROUP - Group signal for capacitor bank neutral voltage
SIGNAL
TRIGCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Trigger input to store the voltage ratios into the IED memory. The
stored values will be used for future compensation in the function.
RESETCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Reset the stored voltage ratios to set voltage ratio value
Table 276: SCPDPTOV Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN General alarm signal
ALML1 BOOLEAN Alarm signal from phase L1
WARNING BOOLEAN General warning signal
WRNL1 BOOLEAN Warning signal from phase L1
BLKDL1 BOOLEAN Function operation blocked due to bus voltage in phase L1 or all
three phase equivalent tap voltages going below UMin>

Technical manual

DIFURATL1 BOOLEAN Alarm when deviation between the calculated and the set voltage
ratio for phase L1 is larger than the set threshold limit for
percentage variation (URatioVar>)
COMPEXED BOOLEAN Indicates that a trigger was made for compensation
PUDIFL1 REAL Differential voltage magnitude of phase L1 in % of UBase
USEDURATL1 REAL Magnitude of ratio between tap and bus voltages stored and used
for calculation of differential voltage of phase L1
URATIOL1 REAL Magnitude of ratio between tap and bus voltages of phase L1
11.3.5 Settings
Table 277: SCPDPTOV Non group settings (basic)

SCBGndType Grounded - - Grounded Selection of shunt capacitor bank ground
Ungrounded type
NeutVoltMeas Not available - - Available Selection of shunt capacitor bank neutral
Available voltage VT availability
Value groups
VoltRatioL1 0.010 - 0.950 - 0.001 0.500 Voltage ratio of tap voltage to bus
voltage for phase L1
Table 278: SCPDPTOV Group settings (basic)

On
URatioVar> 5 - 300 % 1 10 Threshold limit for percentage variation
of calculated voltage ratio from set
voltage ratios (VoltRatioLx, where Lx is
phase L1, L2 and L3)
UMin> 5.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum bus voltage for operation in %
of UBase

Technical manual

UdifWrn> 1.0 - 95.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Phase voltage differential warning level
in % of UBase
tDefWrn 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay to warning
UdifAlm> 1.0 - 95.0 %UB 0.1 8.0 Phase voltage differential alarm level in
% of UBase
tDefAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay to alarm
Udif> 1.0 - 95.0 %UB 0.1 10.0 Phase voltage differential trip level in %
of UBase
Programmable
tDefTrip 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay for trip
for trip
curve for trip
trip
tPCrv 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for programmble curve for
trip
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for programmble curve for
trip
tBCrv 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for programmble curve for
trip
tCCrv 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for programmble curve for
trip
tDCrv 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for programmble curve for
trip
CrvSat 0 - 100 - 1 0 Tuning parameter for programmable
curve
Table 279: SCPDPTOV Non group settings (advanced)

Trip enabled

Table 280: SCPDPTOV Monitored data

LASTCOMP GROUP - - Indicates date and time when the last
SIGNAL trigger was made for compensation
UDIFL1 REAL - kV Magnitude of differential voltage of
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
PUDIFL1 REAL - % Differential voltage magnitude of phase
L1 in % of UBase

Technical manual

L2 in % of UBase
L3 in % of UBase
UL1 REAL - kV Bus voltage of phase L1
UTAPL1 REAL - kV Tap voltage of phase L1
UNSCB REAL - kV Measured voltage at capacitor bank
neutral
USEDURATL1 REAL - - Magnitude of ratio between tap and bus
voltage used for calculation of differential
voltage of phase L1
voltage of phase L2
voltage of phase L3
URATIOL1 REAL - - Magnitude of ratio between tap and bus
voltage of phase L1
voltage of phase L2
voltage of phase L3
11.3.7 Operation principle GUID-55F8BC0C-9A36-4CA0-A390-6F49A8EEDB28 v1
The SCPDPTOV function is based on the voltage division principle across the capacitor bank. It uses
the measured bus and tap voltages to calculate the differential voltage in the shunt capacitor bank
which is caused by the internal faults. The differential voltage is either due to the difference in the
capacitor bank impedances or due to the faults within the capacitor bank. The phase voltage
differential protection is intended to operate for the capacitor elements or the units failure within the
capacitor bank.
The measured tap voltages are multiplied by the voltage ratio and subtracted from the bus voltages
to give the differential voltage (UDIFLx, where Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3).
1
UDIFLx  U Lx   U TapLx
m
Where,
m is the voltage ratio of the tap voltage to bus voltage.
As per the tap position, the measured bus voltage and the tap voltage have a constant voltage ratio.
This voltage ratio can be calculated based on the tap position and set in the function (VoltRatioLx).
The function continuously calculates the voltage ratio using the measured bus voltage and tap
voltage. This calculated voltage ratio can be stored and used in the function by activating a trigger

Technical manual
input (TRIGCOMP). The trigger input can be activated by using either a binary input, MMS input or
through an LHMI command.
The stored voltage ratio helps to remove the differential voltage due to mismatch between real
capacitor unit values and ideal manufacturing data, variation in temperature and aging of capacitors.
In the case of ungrounded shunt capacitor bank configuration, measured neutral voltage or zero
sequence component of the bus voltage is used to calculate the voltage ratio and differential voltage.
The Shunt capacitor bank grounding type can be selected by using the parameter setting
SCBGndType.
• If the parameter setting SCBGndType is selected as Grounded, then the function uses grounded
capacitor bank configuration.
• If the parameter setting SCBGndType is selected as Ungrounded, then the function uses
ungrounded capacitor bank configuration.
The internal fault caused by open circuiting or short circuiting of the capacitor elements or the units in
the bank results in a differential voltage. Based on the magnitude of a differential voltage, the
function identifies the severity of the internal fault in the SCB.
UBase corresponds to the primary bus voltage.
11.3.7.1 Voltage ratio calculation and trigger update GUID-3F5432F2-E84D-4963-A284-71CF20772C6E v1
The voltage ratio is calculated using bus, tap, and neutral voltage as follows:
U TapLx U N
U RatClcLx 
U Lx U N
Where URatClcLx is an internal signal which represents the calculated voltage ratio for phase Lx (Lx =
Phase L1, L2 and L3).
For a grounded SCB configuration, the neutral voltage UN is 0.
The URatClcLx is checked against plausibility limit (0.000 ≤ URatClcLx ≤ 1.000). If URatClcLx passes the
plausibility check, the output URATIOLx shows the calculated voltage ratio (URatClcLx). Otherwise, the
output URATIOLx shows 9999.999 to indicate that the calculated voltage ratio is invalid.
If URATIOLx is valid, its percentage variation from the set value (VoltRatioLx) is monitored as shown
in Equation 88. If the monitored percentage value goes above the set percentage limit (URatioVar>),
the binary output DIFURATLx is raised.
| VoltRatioLx  U RatClcLx |  | (URatioVar  /100)  VoltRatioLx |
The voltage ratio URATIOLx can be stored and used for the calculation of differential voltage by
activating a trigger input (TRIGCOMP). The output USEDURATLx shows the stored voltage ratio.
When TRIGCOMP is activated:

Technical manual
• The calculated voltage ratio (URATIOLx) is saved as the stored voltage ratio (USEDURATLx)
and used for further calculation of the differential voltage.
• The output COMPEXED is pulsed for a duration of 100 ms. This indicates that the calculated
voltage ratio (URATIOLx) is ready to use for differential voltage calculation.
• The output LASTCOMP displays the date and time of the latest successfully performed trigger
event.
TRIGCOMP input is inhibited if:
• The URatClcLx variation is more than ± 25% of set VoltRatioLx at the time of trigger.
• The trip signal exists.
• Bus voltage or tap voltage of any phase has disturbances at the time of trigger.
When there is no stored voltage ratio, such as when the function is first turned ON,
the set voltage ratio (VoltRatioLx) is considered as stored voltage ratio
(USEDURATLx).
When RESETCOMP is activated by using either a binary input, MMS input or through a LHMI
command, the setting value of voltage ratio (VoltRatioLx) is considered as the stored voltage ratio
(USEDURATLx) and it is used for the differential voltage calculation.
Irrespective of any other inputs (INHIBIT and BLOCK) and minimum voltage
condition, RESETCOMP input activation resets the stored voltage ratios
(USEDURATLx) to set values (VoltRatioLx).
11.3.7.2 Differential voltage calculation GUID-3A9E56C1-D603-4519-84AA-17A3D0C2A11C v1
For a grounded single WYE capacitor bank, the phase wise differential voltage is calculated using
the measured bus voltage (ULx, where Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3), the tap voltage (UTapLx) and the
stored voltage ratio USEDURATLx. The typical grounded single WYE capacitor bank is shown in
Figure 180.

Technical manual
L1
L2
L3
C C C
C C C
Tap
UL1
C C C
UTapL1
C C C
Figure 180: Grounded single WYE connected SCB

The differential voltage for grounded capacitor bank is calculated as follows:
1
UDIFLx  | U Lx   U TapLx |
USEDURATLx
Where,
UDIFLx is the differential voltage of phase Lx (Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3)
ULx is the voltage of phase Lx at the bus. These voltages (UL1, UL2 and UL3) are derived from the
U3P input.
UTapLx is the tap voltage of the phase Lx. These voltages (UTapL1, UTapL2 and UTapL3) are derived from
the U3PTAP input.
USEDURATLx is the stored voltage ratio used for the differential voltage calculation for the phase Lx
(Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3).
For an ungrounded single WYE capacitor bank, the phase wise differential voltage is calculated
using the measured bus voltage (ULx, where Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3), the tap voltage (UTapLx), the
capacitor bank neutral voltage (UN) and the stored voltage ratio USEDURATLx. A typical ungrounded
single WYE capacitor bank is shown in Figure 181.
If the neutral VT is not available, the differential voltage is calculated by using the zero-sequence
component of the bus voltage. The selection of the shunt capacitor bank neutral VT availability can
be done using the parameter setting NeutVoltMeas.

Technical manual
• If the parameter setting NeutVoltMeas is selected as Available, then the measured neutral
voltage from the capacitor bank is used for calculation of the differential voltage.
• If the parameter setting NeutVoltMeas is selected as Not available, then the zero sequence
component of the bus voltage is used for the differential voltage calculation. In this case, the
neutral voltage is calculated as follows.
U L1  U L 2  U L3
U N U 0 
3
L1
L2
L3
C C C
C C C
Tap
UL1
C C C UTapL1
C C
C
UN
Figure 181: Ungrounded single WYE connected SCB

The differential voltage for an ungrounded capacitor bank is calculated as follows:
1
UDIFLx  | U Lx  U N    U TapLx  U N  |
USEDURATLx
Where,
UN is either the measured neutral voltage or the zero sequence component of the bus voltage
The differential voltages are expressed in percentage of base voltage UBase as follows:
UDIFLx
PUDIFLx = ´ 100
UBase 3

Technical manual
Where,
UBase is the Rated bus voltage(L-L)
PUDIFLx is the percentage differential voltage of the phase Lx (Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3).
11.3.7.3 Minimum voltage check GUID-10B214B7-3769-40D8-9606-30A998E3DF1F v1
A minimum voltage check is performed on both the bus voltages and their equivalent tap voltages.
The equivalent tap voltage is calculated by dividing the tap voltage with the stored voltage ratio
(UEDURATLx).
The output BLKDLx (Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3) is raised if the corresponding phase bus voltage or
all three phase equivalent tap voltage goes below the set minimum voltage level. To avoid
oscillations of the BLKDLx output, a hysteresis is added for comparison with the set value.
When the function is blocked due to a minimum voltage violation, the output URATIOLx shows
9999.99 and outputs UDIFLx and PUDIFLx show a zero value.
The setting UMin> is used to set the minimum bus voltage or equivalent tap voltage level.
11.3.7.4 Warning, Alarm, and Trip logic GUID-C861D048-1CA2-4788-B165-FF024990B7D7 v1
The phase voltage differential function has warning, alarm, and trip signals based on the magnitude
of the differential voltage. The operation levels for the warning, alarm, and trip can be independently
set. If the magnitude of the differential voltage (UDIFLx) is above the set warning level UdifWrn>, a
security time delay of approximately 20 ms is considered to check the stability of the warning pickup
level. This security time avoids incorrect operation due to de-energization and energization of the
SCB.
The warning level pickup signal is passed through a definite timer before providing the output
WRNLx (Where, x = 1, 2, and 3). The definite time delay for the warning can be set by using the
setting tDefWrn. The general warning output WARNING is raised when any of the outputs among
WRNLx becomes active.
Similar to the warning logic, the set alarm limit UdifAlm> will be checked for the alarm level. Once the
alarm level is crossed, the ALMLx output raises after a security time delay and a definite time delay.
The definite time delay can be set by using the setting tDefAlm. The general alarm output ALARM
will be raised when any of the outputs among ALMLx becomes active.
The SCPDPTOV function raises the STLx output if the magnitude of the differential voltage (UDIFLx)
is above the set trip level which is set by using the setting Udif>, after the stability is checked by
adding a security time delay of approximately 20 ms. The TRLx output activates from the output
STLx after a time delay which is based on the setting CurveType.
If the setting CurveType is selected as Definite time, the definite time delay is selected for the trip
operation and the output is activated after a time delay given by the setting tDefTrip.
If the setting CurveType is selected as Programmable, the programmable curve is selected for the
trip operation and the output is activated after a time delay set by the setting tMin or the time delay
calculated by the equation 93, whichever is greater:
 
 
 k . A 
t op  max tMin, p
 D 
  U U   
 B.  C 
  U  

Technical manual
Where,
top is the operating time in seconds
A, B, C, D, and P are the numerical coefficients which can be set using the settings tACrv, tBCrv,
tCCrv, tDCrv, and tPCrv respectively.
k is the time multiplier setting which can be set using the setting k
U is the calculated differential voltage
U> is the settable trip level in % UBase which can be set using the setting Udif>
tMin is the settable minimum operating time for programmable curve which can be set using the
setting tMin
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero, the time delay is infinity and there is an
undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSat is set to compensate for this
phenomenon.
In the voltage interval U> up to U>×(1.0 + CrvSat/100) the used voltage is: U>× (1.0 + CrvSat /100).
If the programmable curve is used, then this parameter can be calculated as mentioned below:
CrvSat
B´ -C = 0
100
GUID-5B25EED3-C433-4B55-B545-71205E1E6E79 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)
The general start output START is activated when any one of the outputs among STLx becomes
active. Similarly, the general trip output TRIP is activated when any one of the outputs among TRLx
becomes active.
Once the magnitude of the differential voltage (UDIFLx) drops below the set warning level, the
warning output resets after the set time delay tReset. Similarly, alarm and trip outputs reset after the
set tReset time delay and once the magnitude of the differential voltage (UDIFLx) drops below the
corresponding set levels. To avoid oscillations at boundary conditions, a hysteresis is added to the
calculated differential voltage for comparison with the set value.
The setting BlockTrip can be used to avoid tripping of the function so that the function can be used
for alarming only. To block the TRLx and TRIP signals, select the setting as Trip disabled.

Technical manual
BLKDL1
tOn = 20 ms
UDIFL1 a tOn = tDefWrn
ABS From other WRNL3
a>b t tOff = tReset WARNING
phases WRNL2 OR
UdifWrn> b t
t WRNL1
AND
tDefWrn
BLKWRN
tOn = 20 ms
a tOn = tDefAlm
From other ALML3
a>b t tOff = tReset phases
ALARM
ALML2 OR
UdifAlm> t
b
t ALML1
AND
tDefAlm
STL3
BLKALM From other START
phases STL2 OR
BlockTrip STL1
AND
tOn = 20 ms
a
a>b t AND tOn = tDefTrip
Udif> b
t
CurveType
TRL3
tDefTrip Definite Time tOff = tReset From other TRIP
phases TRL2 OR
k
t TRL1
AND
tPCrv
tACrv t
tBCrv
tCCrv
Programmable
tDCrv Curve
CrvSat
tMin
tReset
INHIBIT
OR
BLOCK
BLKTR

Figure 182 shows the programmable curve with the following values of the numerical coefficients:
Table 281: Numerical coefficient values for programmable curve
Name Value
tMin 0.10
k 0.05
tPCrv 1.000
tACrv 1.000
tBCrv 1.00
tCCrv 0.0
tDCrv 0.000
CrvSat 0

Technical manual
2.5
Differential voltage (U/U>)(pu)
1.5
1
0 tMin 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Operate time (sec)
Figure 183: Programmable curve
11.3.7.5 Blocking logic GUID-D5E0798D-BF17-488C-9186-916C2FEE6A3F v1
The blocking behavior of the function is mentioned as below:
• When the BLOCK input is activated, the binary outputs of the function will reset and will be
suppressed as long as the BLOCK signal is active.
• The warning, alarm and trip outputs can be blocked individually using BLKWRN, BLKALM, and
BLKTR inputs respectively.
• The INHIBIT input can be used in case of any problems during switching On/Off of a capacitor
bank. Also, it can be used to freeze all the calculations and to block binary outputs.
Table 282 summarizes the INHIBIT and BLOCK behavior in the function.
Table 282: INHIBIT and BLOCK behavior in the function
Active input URATIOLx USEDURATLx PUDIFLx TIMER TRIGCOMP RESETCOMP

signal Operation
INHIBIT Freeze Freeze Freeze Reset Not allowed Allowed
BLOCK - - - Reset Allowed Allowed
- No impact due to the respective input activation
11.3.7.6 IEC 61850 reporting GUID-E5806E17-A3CB-4C9F-A32C-1EA715335CA0 v1
The SCPDPTOV Function has below service values reported over IEC 61850:
• Calculated voltage ratio (URATIOLx) (Cyclic reporting at every 30 seconds)

• Stored voltage ratio (USEDURATLx) (Cyclic reporting at every 30 seconds)
• Differential voltage (UDIFLx) (Dead band reporting for value change more than 1% of UBase
and cyclic reporting at every 1 minute)
The cyclic reporting of the calculated voltage ratio (URATIOLx) and stored voltage ratio
(USEDURATLx) is performed over IEC61850 in a reporting interval of 30 seconds. The measuring
channel reports the value independent of amplitude change as shown in Figure 184.

Technical manual
Y1…Y5: Cyclic reported values

∆t: Reporting interval
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y4
Y2
Y1 Y5
∆t ∆t ∆t ∆t
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
Figure 184: Cyclic reporting of calculated and stored voltage ratios over IEC 61850
The reporting of differential voltage over IEC 61850 is performed in a reporting interval of 1 minute.
Additionally, if the value has changed from the last reported value, and the change is larger than the
predefined limit of 1% of UBase, then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level
immediately irrespective of cyclic trigger as shown in Figure 185.

Technical manual
Value

Value
Reported
Y5 Y6
+ΔY
-ΔY
Y”
Y’
Y1 Y2 Y7
Y4
Y3
Time
Figure 185: Differential voltage reporting over IEC 61850

GUID-42E90A81-B44D-42C1-B9B5-CD4CDB6E376C v1
Table 283: Phase voltage differential based capacitor bank unbalanced protection SCPDPTOV
Parameters Range Accuracy

Phase voltage differential level (1.0-95.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset Ratio >90 % at (5.0 – 95.0)% of UBase -
>45% at (1.0 – 5.0)% of UBase
Minimum Bus Voltage (5.0-100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±70 ms whichever is
Uset greater
Reset time Delay at to 2 x Uset to 0 (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
greater
Inverse time characteristics Programmable ±5.0% or ±70 ms whichever is
greater
Minimum Operate Time for Inverse (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±70 ms whichever is
Curve greater

Technical manual
Parameters Range Accuracy

Operate Time, START at 0 to 2 x Min = 30 ms -
Uset Max = 60 ms
Reset Time, START at 2 x Uset to 0 Min = 15 ms -
Max = 35 ms
11.4 Voltage unbalance protection of shunt capacitor bank,

SCUVPTOV GUID-C41B59C8-9CA0-4B5F-9F90-354804BC1449 v1
11.4.1 Identification GUID-62C0BF41-EB2D-41E1-A2C6-799C46C1BFD2 v1

Voltage unbalance protection of the shunt SCUVPTOV Uub> 60 V
capacitor bank
11.4.2 Functionality GUID-DB1F5E61-48E0-4C2B-852A-42D8EC5F7095 v1
The unbalance protection function provides the protection against faults within the shunt capacitor
bank (SCB). The protection scheme is decided based on the following:
• Fusing method
• Size of the capacitor bank
• Method of grounding
• Available CT or VT installation
The SCUVPTOV function uses the neutral voltage measurement of an ungrounded single or double
WYE configuration of SCB.
The protection arrangements are based on the terminal voltage limit and the current limit of the
capacitor units.
In practice, the unbalance is present in the SCB due to:
• Loss of individual capacitor units or elements

• Inherent system and the capacitor bank unbalances
The natural unbalance, which exists on all the capacitor bank installations, is due to the system
voltage unbalance and the capacitor manufacturing tolerances. In addition to these natural
unbalances, there are secondary unbalance errors that are introduced by the measurement device
tolerances and variations, and by the relative changes in the capacitance due to the difference in the
capacitor unit temperatures in the capacitor bank.
The use of fuses for protecting the capacitor units and its location has influence in the design of the
capacitor bank unbalance protection. Removal of a failed element or unit by its fuse, results in an
increase in the voltage across the remaining elements or units, causing unbalance in the capacitor
bank. Unbalance protection senses these changes associated with the failure of a capacitor element
or unit.
The SCUVPTOV function considers both the bus voltage and the capacitor bank neutral voltage
which is measured between the capacitor bank neutral and ground of the system. It uses the system
bus voltages to remove the system unbalance from the measured neutral voltage. If any internal fault
occurs in the capacitor elements, then there is an unbalance in the capacitor bank and that

Technical manual
unbalance voltage appears across the neutral. The protection decision is taken based on the
magnitude of the neutral voltage.
11.4.3 Function block GUID-974B2016-611D-499E-A894-22419D6DE2A8 v1
SCUVPTOV
U3P* TRIP
U3NEUT* START
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR WARNING
BLKALM BLKD
BLKWRN COMP EX ED
INHIBIT PUNU NBAL
TRIGCOMP
RESETCOMP
Figure 186: SCUVPTOV function block
11.4.4 Signals
Table 284: SCUVPTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3NEUT GROUP - Group signal for capacitor bank neutral voltage
SIGNAL
TRIGCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Trigger input to store the calculated compensation factors into the
IED memory. The stored values will be used for future
compensation in the function.
RESETCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Force the stored compensation factors to zero.
Table 285: SCUVPTOV Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal
BLKD BOOLEAN Block due to bus voltage in any phase is lower than the set
UMin> value or SCB disconnection is detected
COMPEXED BOOLEAN Indicates that a trigger was made for compensation
PUNUNBAL REAL Capacitor bank neutral unbalance voltage in % of UBase

Technical manual
11.4.5 Settings
Table 286: SCUVPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 287: SCUVPTOV Group settings (basic)

On
UMin> 5.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 75.0 Minimum bus voltage for operation in %
of UBase
CompEnable Disable - - Enable Selection of neutral voltage unbalance
Enable compensation
UNUnbalWrn> 1.0 - 95.0 %UB 0.1 1.0 Neutral voltage unbalance warning level
in % of UBase
tDefWrn 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay to warning
UNUnbalAlm> 1.0 - 95.0 %UB 0.1 2.5 Neutral voltage unbalance alarm level in
% of UBase
tDefAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay to alarm
UNUnbal> 1.0 - 95.0 %UB 0.1 5.5 Neutral voltage unbalance trip level in %
of UBase
Programmable
tDefTrip 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay for trip
for trip
curve for trip
trip
tPCrv 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for programmable curve for
trip
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for programmable curve for
trip
tBCrv 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for programmable curve for
trip
tCCrv 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for programmable curve for
trip
tDCrv 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for programmable curve for
trip
CrvSat 0 - 100 - 1 0 Tuning parameter for programmable
curve
Table 288: SCUVPTOV Non group settings (advanced)

Trip enabled

Technical manual

Table 289: SCUVPTOV Monitored data

LASTCOMP GROUP - - Indicates date and time when the last
SIGNAL trigger was made for compensation
UNUNBAL REAL - kV Instantaneous magnitude of capacitor
bank neutral unbalance voltage
PUNUNBAL REAL - % Capacitor bank neutral unbalance
voltage in % of UBase
UNSCB REAL - kV Capacitor bank neutral voltage
K1USED REAL - - Used compensation factor of K1 for
unbalance neutral voltage calculation
K2USED REAL - - Used compensation factor of K2 for
K1MON REAL - - Monitored compensation factor of K1 for
K2MON REAL - - Monitored compensation factor of K2 for
11.4.7 Operation principle GUID-7D38A783-EC0F-45BA-8D9F-05A8E3D9B554 v1
The SCUVPTOV function is used to protect an ungrounded shunt capacitor bank, which has a
neutral voltage transformer. The measured neutral voltage is used to calculate the unbalance neutral
voltage due to the capacitor failure. The function uses the bus voltage to avoid any system
unbalance effect.
A neutral voltage transformer for an ungrounded-WYE connected capacitor bank is connected

between the neutral of the WYE connection and the substation ground. If all the capacitor units are in
service and the system voltage is balanced, then the neutral of the WYE should be close to the
ground potential. If there is some voltage, there is an indication of an unbalance in the bank due to
an out of service capacitor, or due to the system unbalance.
The function can compensate the natural unbalance in the capacitor bank from the measured
unbalance voltage. A zero-sequence component of the three phase bus voltage is used to
compensate the system unbalance from the calculated neutral unbalance voltage. If there is any
neutral unbalance voltage after compensating for the natural and the system unbalances, then it is
because of the unit or elements failure in the capacitor bank.
As the unbalance voltage value is very small, for security reasons the warning and alarm signals
have a settable definite time delay and the trip signal has a definite time delay or a programmable
curve-based time delay.
Figure 187 shows the simplified block diagram of a neutral voltage unbalance protection function.

Technical manual
BLKD
Minimum COMPEXED
U3P*
voltage check LASTCOMP
K1MON
SCB
K2MON
disconnection
detection Calculation of K1USED
compensation K2USED
factors
U3NEUT*
TRIGCOMP PUNUNBAL
RESETCOMP Calculation of
INHIBIT neutral
unbalance
voltage UNUNBAL
Warning,
alarm, and
trip logic
START
WARNING
BLOCK Blocking logic ALARM
BLKWRN
TRIP
BLKALM
BLKTR
Figure 187: SCUVPTOV block diagram
Figure 188 shows the connection between SMAI and the function block of a typical ungrounded
single WYE capacitor bank.
L3
L2
L1
VL1
VL2
VL3
C C C
VL1N
C C C
V L1G C C C
C C C
N
VNG UN
Figure 188: Ungrounded single WYE SCB connected to function block
Calculation of neutral-to-ground voltage(VNG)

The neutral unbalance voltage is calculated as follows:
Generally, the zero-sequence voltage component is calculated as,
3V0 = VL1G + VL 2G + VL 3G
Where,
VL1G, VL2G, and VL3G are the phase-to-ground bus voltages of phases L1, L2, and L3, respectively.
3V0 is the zero-sequence voltage component.

Technical manual
Equation 1 can be re-written by considering the measured neutral voltage as,
3V0 = (VL1N + VNG ) + (VL 2 N + VNG ) + (VL 3 N + VNG )
Where,
VL1N, VL2N, and VL3N are the bus voltages with respect to the neutral of phases L1, L2, and L3,
respectively.
VNG is the neutral-to-ground voltage.
and,
3VNG - 3V0 = - I L1Z L1 - I L 2 Z L 2 - I L 3 Z L 3

Where,
IL1, IL2, and IL3 are the phase currents.
ZL1, ZL2, and ZL3 are the impedances of SCB of phases L1, L2, and L3, respectively.
As the capacitor bank is ungrounded,
I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 = 0
I L1 = - ( I L 2 + I L 3 )
Now Equation 97 can be written as,
3 (VNG - VO ) = ( Z L1 - Z L 2 ) I L 2 + ( Z L1 - Z L 3 ) I L 3
Therefore, the neutral voltage should be,
æ Z - Z L1 ö æ Z L 3 - Z L1 ö
VNG = V0 + ç L 2 ÷ (VNG - VL 2G ) + ç ÷ (VNG - VL 3G )
è 3 Z L2 ø è 3Z L 3 ø
The neutral-to-ground voltage (VNG) has the following components:
• System unbalance voltage

• Inherent unbalance within the capacitor bank
The voltage appearing at the capacitor bank neutral due to the system unbalance is the zero-
sequence component. An equivalent zero-sequence component can be derived utilizing three-phase
bus voltages. The voltage difference between the neutral unbalance voltage due to the system
unbalance and the zero-sequence voltage is adjusted to zero. Once this adjustment is made, the
effect of the system voltage unbalance is compensated for all conditions of the system unbalance.
In Equation 101, assume that all the impedances at different phases are equal (ZL1 = ZL2 = ZL3), then
Equation 101 can be written as,

Technical manual
VNG = V0
The neutral unbalance voltage is derived as,
VNU = VNG - V0
However, the effects of manufacturer’s capacitor tolerances are not considered in the calculation of
VNU in Equation 103. An impedance ratio compensates for the remaining error appearing at the
neutral due to the manufacturer’s capacitor tolerance. When this error is subtracted from the
measured neutral-to-ground voltage, the remaining quantity represents the true unbalance resulting
from an element or a unit failure within the bank.
The neutral unbalance voltage is derived as,
VNU = VNG - V0 - (VNG - VL 2G ) K1 - (VNG - VL 3G ) K2

Note that K1 and K2 factors are scalar quantities whose values are ideally zero if the bank is
completely balanced.
The calculated neutral unbalance voltage is presented at the output PUNUNBAL in terms of % of
UBase and the actual value UNUNBAL is communicated through IEC 61850.
The magnitude of the compensated neutral unbalance voltage (VNU), indicates the presence of faulty
elements in the capacitor bank.
Calculation of compensation factors

To compensate for inherent unbalance within the bank, the factors K1 and K2 are derived from
Equation 104. Since the factors K1 and K2 are scalars and Equation 104 is a phasor equation, this
can be represented as a real and imaginary equation, to solve K1 and K2. If the capacitor bank is
healthy, then the magnitude of the unbalance voltage (VNU) should be zero. Thus,
R e (VNG ) - R e (V0 ) - ( R e (VNG ) - R e (VL 2G ) ) K1 - ( R e (VNG ) - R e (VL 3G ) ) K 2 = 0

and
I m (VNG ) - I m (V0 ) - ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL 2G ) ) K1 - ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL 3G ) ) K 2 = 0

After solving Equation 105 and Equation 106, the factors are,
K1 =
( ( ( R (V
e ) - Re (V0 ) ) ´ ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL 3G ) ) ) - ( ( I m (VNG ) - I m (V0 ) ) ´ ( Re (VNG ) - Re (VL 3G ) ) ) )
NG
( ( ( Re (VNG ) - Re (VL 2G ) ) ´ ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL3G ) ) ) - ( ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL2G ) ) ´ ( Re (VNG ) - Re (VL3G ) ) ) )

and
K2 =
( ( ( R (V
e ) - Re (V0 ) ) ´ ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL 2G ) ) ) - ( ( I m (VNG ) - I m (V0 ) ) ´ ( Re (VNG ) - Re (VL 2G ) ) ) )
NG
( ( ( Re (VNG ) - Re (VL3G ) ) ´ ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL 2G ) ) ) - ( ( I m (VNG ) - I m (VL3G ) ) ´ ( Re (VNG ) - Re (VL2G ) ) ) )


Technical manual
The compensation factors are automatically calculated based on the available voltage
measurements. However, it is assumed that the capacitor bank is in an acceptably balanced state
and neutral unbalance voltage is zero, for the calculation of compensation factors. The calculated
compensation factors can be stored in the IED and used for further calculation of neutral unbalance
voltage by activating the trigger input TRIGCOMP. This TRIGCOMP input can be activated by using
either a binary input, MMS input or through an LHMI command. After the successful operation of the
compensation factor update, a binary output COMPEXED is pulsed for a period of 100 ms. Also, the
function output LASTCOMP indicates the date and time of the latest successfully performed trigger
event.
Ensure that IED date and time values are set or synchronized properly before the
compensation process.
The compensation for the natural unbalance with factors K1 and K2 can be either enabled or disabled
based on the setting CompEnable. If the setting CompEnable is enabled, then the calculated
compensation factors can be stored in the IED for compensation by activating TRIGCOMP input. If
the setting CompEnable is disabled, then the compensation factors are considered as zero. The
calculated compensation factors are shown at the outputs K1MON and K2MON. When there is no
stored compensation factors, such as when the function is first turned on, the stored compensation
factors are considered as zero. The used compensation factor values are shown at outputs K1USED
and K2USED. The used compensation factor values can be reset to zero by activating the
RESETCOMP input. The RESETCOMP input can be activated either through binary input or the
LHMI command.
Stabilization and plausibility check for compensation factors

Only when the calculated compensation factors are within ± 1.000, they will be considered, otherwise
these values will be discarded. These calculated values of compensation factors are provided as
outputs K1MON and K2MON to monitor continuously. When the calculated values are out of range,
the outputs K1MON and K2MON will show 9999.999.
The calculated compensation factors are checked for stability before using them for unbalance
voltage calculation. This check will be performed once the TRIGCOMP input is received. The stability
is checked by observing the deviation in the last five K1 and K2 calculated values. If the difference is
within 2% of the present value, then the compensation factor is updated and COMPEXED is set. If
the calculated compensation factors fail during stability check or if the TRIP output exists in the
SCUVPTOV function, the present TRIGCOMP input is discarded and the COMPEXED output is not
raised.
Minimum bus voltage check

To validate the healthy voltage measurement, the bus voltages are checked for a minimum voltage
level. If the bus voltages are greater than the minimum bus voltage set level, then the function works
as expected. If the bus voltages are below the set minimum bus voltage limit, then function is blocked
and the output BLKD is made high. Additionally the calculated neutral unbalance voltage is forced to
zero.
The minimum voltage level can be set using the setting UMin>.
To avoid oscillations of the BLKD output at the boundary conditions, a hysteresis is added with the
bus voltage for comparison with the set value.
SCB disconnection detection

To avoid maloperation when the SCB is disconnected, the measured neutral voltage and the zero
sequence voltage are checked. If the SCB is disconnected, then the calculated compensation factors
are frozen and the calculated unbalance neutral voltage is set to zero. Also, BLKD output is raised to
indicate the function is blocked.

Technical manual
Warning, Alarm, and Trip logic

The neutral voltage unbalance function has warning, alarm, and trip signals based on the calculated
neutral unbalance voltage magnitude. The operation levels for warning, alarm, and trip are settable
independently. As the unbalance voltage value is very small, for security reasons the warning and
alarm signals have a settable definite time delay and the trip signal has a definite time delay or a
programmable curve-based time delay.
If the magnitude of the neutral unbalance voltage (UNUNBAL) is above the set warning level
UNUnbalWrn>, then a security time delay of approximately 20 ms is considered to check the stability
of the warning pickup level. This security time prevents maloperation due to de-energization,
energization, and asymmetrical switching of the SCB.
The warning level pickup signal is passed through a definite timer before giving the output
WARNING. The definite time delay for the warning signal can be set by using the setting tDefWrn.
Similar to the warning logic, the set alarm limit UNUnbalAlm> is checked for the alarm output. Once
the alarm level is crossed, the ALARM output is activated after the security time delay and the set
definite time delay (tDefAlm).
The function gives START output, if the magnitude of the neutral unbalance voltage (UNUNBAL) is
above the trip level set by the setting UNUnbal>. The stability is checked by adding a security time
delay. The TRIP output is activated from the START after a time delay based on the setting
CurveType.
If the setting CurveType is selected as Definite time, then:
• The definite time delay is selected for the trip operation.

• The output is activated after a time delay set by the setting tDefTrip.
If the setting CurveType is selected as Programmable, then:
• The programmable curve is selected for the trip operation.

• The output is activated after a time delay as shown in Equation 109.
ì ü
ï ï
ï kÁ ï
top = max ítMin, + D ý
UNUNBAL - UNUnbal >
P
ï æ ö ï
ç B ´ - C ÷
ïî è UNUnbal > ø ïþ
Where,
A, B, C, D, and P are the numerical coefficients provided by the settings tACrv, tBCrv, tCCrv, tDCrv,
and tPCrv, respectively.
k is the time multiplier setting value provided by the setting k.
tMin is the minimum operating time for the programmable curve.
The time delay is infinity when the denominator in Equation 109 is equal to zero. There will be an
undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSat is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the unbalance voltage interval UNUnbal> up to UNUnbal> × (1.0 + CrvSat/100), the
used voltage will be: UNUnbal> × (1.0 + CrvSat/100). If the programmable curve is used, the
parameter must be calculated so that:
UNUNBAL - UNUnbal >

B´ -C >0
UNUnbal >

Technical manual
Once the magnitude of the neutral unbalance voltage is below the set warning level, the warning
output is reset after the set time delay tReset. Similarly, the alarm and the trip outputs are reset after
the set tReset time delay once the magnitude of the neutral unbalance voltage is less than the
corresponding set levels. But the START output resets immediately once the magnitude of the
neutral unbalance voltage is less than the set trip level. To avoid oscillations at the boundary
conditions, a hysteresis is added with the neutral unbalance voltage for comparison with the set
value.
Blocking logic
The function can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input. When the BLOCK input is activated,
• - The function will be blocked from operating binary outputs, the function will reset and will be
suppressed as long as the BLOCK signal is active.
• All the ongoing timers will reset.
• If the TRIGCOMP input is received, the calculated compensation factors can be stored in the
IED.
• The COMPEXED pulse output will be active, if the trigger command is received and valid
compensation factors are calculated and stored.
In each individual level of the warning, the alarm and the trip can be blocked through separate binary
inputs BLKWRN, BLKALM, and BLKTR respectively.
The INHIBIT input can be used in case of any problems during switching On/Off of a capacitor bank.
When the INHIBIT input is activated,
• Binary outputs from the function will reset and will be suppressed as long as the INHIBIT signal
is active.
• All the ongoing timers will reset.
• Processed values (K1MON, K2MON, K1USED, K2USED, PUNUNBAL, and UNUNBAL) are
frozen with the previous valid (plausibility checked) values.
• The function is not allowed to store the compensation factors in the IED.
The INHIBIT input can be connected from the output RECNINH of the CBPGAPC function or an
operation of any bay protection function. Figure 189 shows the logic diagram for the warning, alarm,
and trip logic.
Irrespective of INHIBIT and BLOCK inputs and minimum voltage condition, RESETCOMP input
activation resets the stored compensation factors to zero.

Technical manual
BLKD
tOn » 20 ms
UNUNBAL a tOn = tDefWrn
ABS
a>b t tOff = tReset
b t
UNUnbalWrn> t
WARNING
tDefWrn AND
BLKWRN
tOn » 20 ms
a tOn = tDefAlm
t
a>b tOff = tReset
UNUnbalAlm> b t
t
AND
ALARM
tDefAlm
BLKALM
BlockTrip START
AND
tOn » 20 ms
a
t AND tOn = tDefTrip
a>b
UNUnbal> b
t
CurveType
tDefTrip Definite Time tOff = tReset
k t
AND
TRIP
tPCrv
tACrv t
tBCrv
tCCrv IDMT Curve
tDCrv
tMin
CrvSat
tReset
INHIBIT
BLOCK OR
BLKTR

The setting BlockTrip can be used to avoid tripping of the function, so that the function can be used
for alarming only. To block the TRIP signal, select the BlockTrip setting as Trip disabled.
IEC 61850 reporting

The reporting of neutral unbalance voltage is performed in 1 minute interval over IEC 61850. If the
neutral unbalance voltage changes from the last reported value, and if the change is larger than the
pre-defined limit of 1% of UBase, then the measuring channel reports the new value irrespective of
the cyclic trigger as shown in Figure 190.

Technical manual
Value

Value
Reported
Y5 Y6
+ΔY
-ΔY
Y”
Y’
Y1 Y2 Y7
Y4
Y3
Time
Figure 190: Reporting over IEC 61850
Set UBase corresponding to primary bus voltage.

GUID-47B33B7C-0F5E-4731-A7A8-FF1BDA5D5F41 v1
Table 290: Voltage unbalance protection of shunt capacitor bank SCUVPTOV

Neutral voltage unbalance level (1.0-95.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio >90% at (5.0 – 95.0)% of UBase -
>45% at (1.0 – 5.0)% of UBase
Minimum bus voltage (5.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±65 ms, whichever is
Uset greater
Reset time delay at to 2 x Uset to 0 (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms, whichever is

greater
Inverse time characteristics Programmable ±5.0% or ±65 ms, whichever is
greater

Technical manual

Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00-60.00) s ±0.2% or ±65 ms, whichever is
curve greater
Operate time, START at 0 to 2 x Uset Min = 30 ms -
Max = 60 ms
Reset time, START at 2 x Uset to 0 Min = 15 ms -
Max = 35 ms

Technical manual
Section 12 Frequency protection

12.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF IP15746-1 v3
M14865-1 v5

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN-US
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used for load
shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on. Separate definite time
delays are provided for operate and restore.
SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or
three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual /IED application /Analog inputs /Setting guidelines .
SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ
Figure 191: SAPTUF function block
12.1.4 Signals
Table 291: SAPTUF Input signals

SIGNAL
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Technical manual
Table 292: SAPTUF Output signals

RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency
12.1.5 Settings
Table 293: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)

On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
IntBlockLevel 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 1.0 50.0 Internal blocking level in % of UBase
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer
in % of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
Table 294: SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency. SAPTUF can
either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage
magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and
the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time
period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an
unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking
voltage IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

Technical manual
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared
with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If
the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which
should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.
12.1.6.2 Time delay M13354-10 v10
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable definite time delay or
a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a
high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the
definite time delay, the setting tDelay sets the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings UNom, UMin,
Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to Figure 192 and Equation 111. The setting
TimerMode is used to decide what type of time delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time
delay tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this user
set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is
reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to
only return back to the hysteresis area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus the minimum
operate time of the start function (80-90 ms).
On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to
the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the
setting RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is se to 0.000 s the restore
functionality is disabled, and no output will be given.
12.1.6.3 Voltage dependent time delay M13354-19 v6
Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some
deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions,
based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is
load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has
been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to Equation 111
undervoltage and overvoltage functions.

Technical manual
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin) + tMin
ëUNom - UMin úû
U = U measured
where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.
The inverse time characteristics are shown in Figure 192, for:
UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4
1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]
2
3
0.5 4
0
90 95 100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
Figure 192: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency protection
SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured
voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
12.1.6.4 Blocking M13354-50 v7
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely, by binary input

signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks the START, TRIP and

RESTORE outputs
BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

Technical manual
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the START and the
TRIP outputs are blocked.
12.1.6.5 Design M13354-63 v10
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence
voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid
transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay
time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the
setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore. The design of
underfrequency protection SAPTUF is schematically described in figure 193.
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
block START
OR
U < IntBlockLevel
Start
&
start Trip
Voltage
output
Definite timer
logic TRIP
or
Voltage based timer
Frequency
f < StartFrequency
tReset trip
tDelay RESTORE
AND
BLKTRIP
f > RestoreFreq tRestore

restore
AND
BLKREST
Figure 193: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

Technical manual

M13360-1 v16
Table 295: SAPTUF technical data
Function Range or Value Accuracy

Operate value, start function, at (35.00 - 75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
symmetrical three phase voltage,
StartFrequency 1)
Reset hysteresis 10.0 mHz fixed ±2.0 mHz
Operate time 1) Start time measurement Min. = 175 ms -

with sudden frequency
change Max. = 195 ms
fr = 50 Hz
Start time measurement Min. = 70 ms
with frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Start time measurement Min. = 150 ms -
change Max. = 165 ms
fr = 60 Hz
with frequency ramp
Max. = 75 ms
Disengaging time 1) Start time measurement Min. = 20 ms -

change Max. = 30 ms
fr = 50 Hz
with frequency ramp
Max. = 100 ms
Start time measurement Min. = 20 ms -
change Max. = 30 ms
fr = 60 Hz
with frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Operate time delay, fr = 50 Hz ±0.2% or ±200 ms
tDelay 1) whichever is greater
(0.000-60.000)s
fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±175 ms
whichever is greater
Voltage dependent Settings: ±1.0% or ±120 ms
time delay UNom = (50-150)% of UBase whichever is greater
UMin = (50-150)% of UBase
Exponent = 0.0-5.0
tMax = (0.010-60.000)s
tMin = (0.010- 60.000)s
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin) + tMin
ëUNom - UMin úû
U = U measured
Note: The stated accuracy is valid for the voltage range 50 V – 250 V secondary.
1) The settings and test conditions are in accordance with IEC 60255-181 standard (section 6.2 – 6.7).
12.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF IP15747-1 v3

Technical manual
M14866-1 v4

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN-US
Overfrequency protection function (SAPTOF) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection
of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. Close to
the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation shedding and
remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring. A definite time
delay is provided for operate.
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or
three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual /IED application /Analog inputs /Setting guidelines .
SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ
Figure 194: SAPTOF function block
12.2.4 Signals
Table 296: SAPTOF Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical manual
Table 297: SAPTOF Output signals

FREQ REAL Measured frequency
12.2.5 Settings
Table 298: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)

On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
Table 299: SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency. SAPTOF has a
settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an
unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking
voltage IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and
compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is dependent on
the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF
is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output
START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
12.2.6.2 Time delay M14958-9 v8
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time delay, specified by
the setting tDelay.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time
delay, tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this
user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START

Technical manual
output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to
only return back to the hysteresis area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum operate
time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).
12.2.6.3 Blocking M14958-13 v7
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely, by binary input

BLOCK: blocks the START and TRIP outputs

12.2.6.4 Design M14958-24 v9
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence
voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid
transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time integrator operates due to a
definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in
figure 195.
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
block START
OR
U < IntBlockLevel
Start
&
start Trip
Voltage
output
logic TRIP
Definite timer
Frequency
f > StartFrequency tReset
trip
tDelay
AND
BLKTRIP
Figure 195: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF

Technical manual

M14964-1 v13
Table 300: SAPTOF technical data
Function Range or Value Accuracy

Operate value, start function, (35.00 - 90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
at symmetrical three phase
voltage, StartFrequency 1)
Reset hysteresis 1) 10.0 mHz fixed ±2.0 mHz
Operate time 1) Start time measurement with Min. = 175 ms -

sudden frequency change
Max. = 195 ms
fr = 50 Hz
Start time measurement with Min. = 70 ms
frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Start time measurement with Min. = 150 ms -
Max. = 165 ms
fr = 60 Hz
frequency ramp
Max. = 75 ms
Disengaging time 1) Start time measurement with Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
fr = 50 Hz
frequency ramp
Max. = 100 ms
Start time measurement with Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
fr = 60 Hz
frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Operate time delay, fr = 50 Hz ±0.2% or ±200 ms
tDelay 1) whichever is greater
(0.000-60.000)s
fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±175 ms
Note: The stated accuracy is valid for the voltage range 50 V – 250 V secondary.
1) The settings and test conditions are in accordance with IEC 60255-181 standard (section 6.2 – 6.7).
12.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC IP15748-1 v4
M14868-1 v4

Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 81
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN-US

Technical manual
The rate-of-change of frequency protection function (SAPFRC) gives an early indication of a main
disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high accuracy, and can be used for
generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate
between a positive or negative change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on positive sequence
voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be
connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED
application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines .
SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
Figure 196: SAPFRC function block
12.3.4 Signals
Table 301: SAPFRC Input signals

SIGNAL
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output
Table 302: SAPFRC Output signals

RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes

Technical manual
12.3.5 Settings
Table 303: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)

On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
Table 304: SAPFRC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system frequency
changes at an early stage. SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of
frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the
chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the
set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.
If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is
also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting
IntBlockLevel , SAPFRC is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If
SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting StartFreqGrad has been given a
negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE
output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive
setting of StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.
12.3.6.2 Time delay M14970-10 v7
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay, tDelay.
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START
output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after

Technical manual
leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tDelay, when the
measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the
TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will
be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period,
defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
12.3.6.3 Blocking M14970-23 v6
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input
BLOCK: blocks the START and TRIP outputs

BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output
12.3.6.4 Design M14970-34 v7
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously measures the

frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal
is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates
with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the
RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued.
The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 197.

Technical manual
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
block
OR
Voltage
U < IntBlockLevel
START
Start
Rate-of-change
&
of Frequency start
If Trip
[StartFreqGrad<0 output
AND logic
Definite timer
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
start TRIP
OR
tReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
tDelay
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START trip
AND
BLKTRIP
RESTORE
Frequency restore
f > RestoreFreq
> tRestore
AND
BLKREST
Figure 197: Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC

M14976-1 v11
Table 305: SAPFRC technical data
Function Range and value Accuracy

Operate value, start function, at Positive gradient: from 0.05 to 10.00 Hz/s ** ±10.0 mHz/s
symmetrical three phase voltage Negative gradient: from -0.05 to -10.00 Hz/s **
*, StartFreqGrad or Gs per IEC
60255-181 standard
Reset hysteresis * < 15.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore enable (45.00 - 65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
frequency, at symmetrical three
phase voltage, RestoreFreq

Technical manual

Restore time delay, tRestore fr = 50 Hz (0.025 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±110 ms
Test conditions: fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±100 ms
Restore time delay whichever is greater
measurement with sudden
frequency change from
RestoreFreq -0.02 Hz to
RestoreFreq + 0.02 Hz
Start time * fr = 50 Hz Gs: ±0.05 & ±0.50 Hz/s Min. = 110 ms
Tested frequency slope:
1.2, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0 x Gs Max. = 290 ms
Gs: ±1.00 Hz/s Min. = 180 ms

1.2, 2.0, 5.0 x Gs Max. = 300 ms
Gs: ±3.00, ±6.00 & ±10.00 Min. = 300 ms

Hz/s
Tested frequency slope: Max. = 390 ms
1.2, 2.0 x Gs
fr = 60 Hz Gs: ±0.05 & ±0.50 Hz/s Min. = 90 ms
1.2, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0 x Gs Max. = 220 ms
Gs: ±1.00 Hz/s Min. = 140 ms

1.2, 2.0, 5.0 x Gs Max. = 240 ms
Gs: ±3.00, ±6.00 & ±10.00 Min. = 180 ms

Hz/s
Tested frequency slope: Max. = 300 ms
1.2, 2.0 x Gs
Disengaging time * fr = 50 Hz Gs: ±0.05 Hz/s Min. = 130 ms
1.2, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0 x Gs Max. = 270 ms
Gs: ±5.00 Hz/s Min. = 130 ms

1.2, 2.0 x Gs Max. = 210 ms
Gs: ±10.00 Hz/s Min. = 130 ms

1.2 x Gs Max. = 160 ms
fr = 60 Hz Gs: ±0.05 Hz/s Min. = 100 ms

1.2, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0 x Gs Max. = 210 ms
Gs: ±5.00 Hz/s Min. = 100 ms

1.2, 2.0 x Gs Max. = 170 ms
Gs: ±10.00 Hz/s Min. = 100 ms

1.2 x Gs Max. = 130 ms
Operate time delay *, tDelay fr = 50 Hz (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±220 ms

Test conditions: whichever is greater
Gs: ± 0.2 Hz/s
Frequency slope: 0.4 Hz/s fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±180 ms
Test points: 10%, 20%, 30%, whichever is greater
50% and 100% of the time delay
setting range

Technical manual

Reset time delay, tReset fr = 50 Hz (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±220 ms
Test conditions: whichever is greater
Gs: ±0.2 Hz/s
Frequency slope: 0.4 Hz/s fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±180 ms
* The settings and test conditions are in accordance with IEC 60255-181 standard (section 6.2 – 6.7).
** The value ±0.05 Hz/s is used as minimum pickup value for frequency gradient.
Note! The stated accuracy is valid for phase-to-earth voltage range from 50 V to 250 V secondary. During testing three phase-to-earth
voltages with magnitude of 110/sqrt(3)=63.5 V were always used.
12.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function

FTAQFVR GUID-124A1F91-44C0-4DB6-8603-CC8CA19AE2A6 v3
12.4.1 Identification GUID-87605DA0-EAA6-4A6C-BF03-7FDB187E1B29 v2
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/

identification identification IEEEidentificatio
n
Frequency time accumulation FTAQFVR f<> 81A
protection
12.4.2 Functionality GUID-020CE8CF-9BEA-455D-ACBD-13023B93B4D1 v5
Frequency time accumulation protection (FTAQFVR) is based on measured system frequency and
time counters. FTAQFVR for generator protection provides the START output for a particular settable
frequency limit, when the system frequency falls in that settable frequency band limit and positive
sequence voltage within settable voltage band limit. The START signal triggers the individual event
timer, which is the continuous time spent within the given frequency band, and the accumulation
timer, which is the cumulative time spent within the given frequency band. Once the timers reach
their limit, an alarm or trip signal is activated to protect the turbine against the abnormal frequency
operation. This function is blocked during generator start-up or shut down conditions by monitoring
the circuit breaker position and current threshold value. The function is also blocked when the system
positive sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band limit which can be
enabled by EnaVoltCheck setting.
It is possible to create functionality with more than one frequency band limit by using multiple
instances of the function. This can be achieved by a proper configuration based on the turbine
manufacturer specification.
12.4.3 Function block GUID-E3D2093B-8A97-4037-AAFE-5483489BF350 v2
GUID-E27E0BC3-CB61-4E9E-9117-6AB8906F8362 V1 EN-US
Figure 198: FTAQFVR function block

Technical manual
12.4.4 Signals
Table 306: FTAQFVR Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage
SIGNAL
CBCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed status input
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open status input
LOADINIT BOOLEAN 0 Loads the initial accumulation time to the function
HOLDACC BOOLEAN 0 Holds the time accumulation when input is activated
RESETACC BOOLEAN 0 Resetting the accumulated time of the function block
Table 307: FTAQFVR Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN Error output for incorrect settings
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal of the function
TRIPACC BOOLEAN Trip signal when accumulation time is exceeded the set limit
TRIPCONT BOOLEAN Trip signal when continuous time is exceeded the set limit
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the function
ACCALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for reaching the frequency time accumulation value
STRORHLD BOOLEAN Activated when function starts or HOLDACC input is active
FREQOK BOOLEAN Indicates the system frequency within the frequency band limits
VOLTOK BOOLEAN Indicates the system voltage within the voltage band limits
12.4.5 Settings
Table 308: FTAQFVR Group settings (basic)

On
tContinuous 0.0 - 6000.0 s 0.1 20.0 Continuous time limit for frequency band
limits
tAccLimit 10.0 - 90000.0 s 0.1 600.0 Accumulation time limit for frequency
band limits
FreqHighLimit 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 47.50 Frequency High limit value
FreqLowLimit 30.00 - 85.00 Hz 0.01 47.00 Frequency Low limit value
CBCheck Disable - - Enable Enabling the generator start or stop
Enable detection logic
CurrStartLevel 5.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Threshold current value of generator in
percentage of base current

Technical manual

EnaVoltCheck Disable - - Enable Enabling the voltage band limit check
Enable
UHighLimit 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 1.0 200.0 Voltage high limit for voltage band limit
check
ULowLimit 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 1.0 0.0 Voltage low limit for voltage band limit
check
Table 309: FTAQFVR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
initTimeAcc 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.0 Initial accumulated time when LOADINIT
command is executed

Table 310: FTAQFVR Monitored data

FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency value
ACCTIME REAL - s Accumulated time for frequency band
limits
12.4.7 Operation principle GUID-DB8A3411-2FA6-47B1-BC75-9892BD224DC0 v4
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR is used to protect the turbine against an
abnormal frequency operation. During the startup and shutdown of the turbine-generator set,
FTAQFVR is blocked to avoid unnecessary accumulation of time or tripping of generator. FTAQFVR
is also blocked when the system positive-sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given
voltage band limit, which can be enabled with the EnaVoltCheck setting. The overall logic of
FTAQFVR is explained in Figure 199.
The frequency of the measured input voltage is monitored continuously and compared to the set
frequency band limits FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit. When the measured system frequency is
above the FreqLowLimit setting and below the FreqHighLimit setting, the FREQOK and START
signals are activated. The START signal is controlled by the measured current and voltage input
magnitude and the status of the circuit breaker position.
FTAQFVR function will block START signal activation and Accumulation of time under two following
conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band limits.
• When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN signal input: Generator
currents are considered to detect whether the generator is supplying its unit auxiliary supply
transformers or not. FTAQFVR function will be blocked when the measured current magnitude
drops below the setting CurrStartLevel and CBOPEN input is high. FTAQFVR remains blocked
until the generator returns to the operation condition. It can be verified by using the CBCLOSE
signal. Generator's start and stop detection logics for the START output can be ignored by
disabling the CBCheck setting.
• When the positive-sequence voltage of the measured input voltage is outside the band limit.
The START output will be blocked if the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled and the system
positive sequence voltage is not within the voltage band limits.
Voltage band limit check will be ignored for the START output if the EnaVoltCheck setting is
disabled. The voltage band limits are set with the settings UHighLimit and ULowLimit.

Technical manual
The output VOLTOK is activated only if the system positive-sequence voltage falls within the
voltage band limits and the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled.
To avoid oscillations of the START output signal, a hysteresis has been added with current input
comparison and voltage input comparison. It is also possible to block FTAQFVR completely by
activating the binary input BLOCK and its function is to reset all the binary outputs of FTAQFVR and
freeze the accumulation time.
Time counters
FTAQFVR uses two time counters.
1. Individual event time: The individual event time counter registers the time passing if the system
frequency falls within the frequency band limits each time. It resets when the frequency comes
out of the frequency band limits and also when the BLOCK binary input is activated and start
from zero when a new start is activated.
2. Accumulation time: The accumulation time counter registers the time passing whenever the
START output is activated. It holds the registered time value even when the START signal is
deactivated and continues from the registered value when the START signal is reactivated.
The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input HOLDACC or
BLOCK is activated. The accumulation time can be set to the initTimeAcc parameter value by
activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and it can be reset to zero by activating the RESETACC
input. The RESETACC input can be activated by a binary input. The accumulated time ACCTIME is
provided as a service output.
The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output. This output holds the
last completed individual event time until the next event to complete.
Trip logic
The individual event and accumulation timer values are compared to the tCont and tAcclLimit
settings respectively. If these counter values exceed their limit values, TRIPCONT and ACCALARM
outputs will be activated. The TRIPACC output is activated if both the ACCALARM and START
signals are activated. A common TRIP signal is generated when either TRIPCONT or TRIPACC is
activated.

Technical manual
Comparator
If
FreqHighLimit <= ERROR
FreqLowLimit
Then
ERROR
FREQ FREQ
Comparator
If
FREQOK FREQOK
f <= FreqHighLimit
AND
f > FreqLowLimit
VOLTOK VOLTOK
Then
U3P
START
START
Accumulation time
Comparator
counter
U01 <= UHighLimit TRIPACC
START
AND
Signal Routing Continuous time
U01 >= ULowLimit
Based on counter TRIPCONT
Generator
START
Start or Stop AND
I3P Comparator
Detection Logic TRIP
I < CurrStartLevel
and Start & Trip
Voltage Band Limit
CBOPEN Output Logic
Check Logic
ACCALARM
CBCLOSE
LOADINIT STRORHLD
RESETACC
ACCTIME
HOLDTIME
BLOCK LASTEVTD
Figure 199: Logical diagram

To achieve a proper operation, the set frequency high limit should be more than the set frequency
low limit. To avoid malfunction, a check is performed that FreqHighLimit is greater than FreqLowLimit.
If not, the ERROR signal is activated.
FTAQFVR can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the turbine
manufacturer's specification. When the frequency falls in to the common zone when two frequency
ranges overlap it is necessary to block one instance and keep only one instance of FTAQFVR active.
The STRORHLD output is activated when either the START output is active or when the HOLDACC
input signal is on. The STRORHLD output is connected to the input HOLDACC of the other instance
of FTAQFVR.
GUID-E8D0EE7C-D7B8-46C3-9C0D-363FFC75DE93 v5
Table 311: FTAQFVR technical data

Operate value, frequency high limit level at (35.00 – 90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
symmetrical three phase voltage
Operatevalue, frequency low limit level at (30.00 – 85.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
symmetrical three phase voltage
Operate value, voltage high and low limit for (0.0 – 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
voltage band limit check ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Technical manual

Operate value, current start level (5.0 – 100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir or 0.01 A at I≤Ir
Independent time delay for the continuous (0.0 – 6000.0) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
time limit at fset+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz greater
Independent time delay for the accumulation (10.0 – 90000.0) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
time limit at fset+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz greater

Technical manual
414
Section 13 Multipurpose protection

13.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC IP14552-1 v2
13.1.1 Function revision history GUID-74F9B9A9-91EB-45BA-A883-6BA325C8B272 v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 • The harmonic restraint function changed to freeze the definite and IDMT timers.
• The maximum value of the settings IMin1 and IMin2 has been decreased to 1000.0
% of IBase.
• Setting BlkLevel2nd was removed from the function.
• Previously called stepwise settings t_DefOCx and tResetDef_OCx had their names
changed to t_OCx and tReset_OCx for more clear understanding.
M14886-2 v3

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -
13.1.3 Functionality
M13083-11 v9
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a negative sequence
current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults, outside the
distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used, which measures the
neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load
currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from
the directional earth fault protection function.

Technical manual
CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE
Figure 200: CVGAPC function block
13.1.5 Signals
Table 312: CVGAPC Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2

Technical manual

BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 313: CVGAPC Output signals

TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current
13.1.6 Settings
Table 314: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Table 315: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used
NegSeq for curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase

Technical manual

CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. OC1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
t_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay / additional time delay
for IDMT curves for OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for IDMT curves for OC1
of IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Off function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase

Technical manual

CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. OC2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
t_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay / additional time delay
for IDMT curves for OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for IDMT curves for OC2
of IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Off function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC1 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1

Technical manual

HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC2 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A OV1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time delay of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for IDMT curves for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A OV2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time delay of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for IDMT curves for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A UV1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time delay of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for IDMT curves for UV1

Technical manual

EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV1 in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A UV2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time delay of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for IDMT curves for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV2 in % of UBase
Table 316: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Constant reset time for OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Constant reset time for OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2

Technical manual

A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in Definite Time
characteristic for OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in Definite Time
characteristic for OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Technical manual

tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in Definite Time
characteristic for UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in Definite Time
characteristic for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2

Table 317: CVGAPC Monitored data

DIROC1 INTEGER 0=Non- - Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
directional forward,reverse)
1=Forward
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 0=Non- - Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
directional forward,reverse)
1=Forward
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current multiplied with cos
(Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage and current

Technical manual
13.1.8.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC M13751-3 v4
General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to three-phase
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one
current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.
The user can select a current input, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of the
current quantities shown in table 318.
Table 318: Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor
multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally
calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the
phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector
difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)
difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)
difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally
calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor
with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
The user can select a voltage input, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of the
voltage quantities shown in table 319:
Table 319: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor

Technical manual
Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage
phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180° in order to enable
easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor
multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180° in order
to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally
calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the
phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector
difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-
UL2)
difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-
UL3)
difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-
UL1)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally
calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor
with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
Note that the voltage selection from table 319 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT
connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-earth
voltages, UL1, UL2 and UL3, , and or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 and UL3L1, , and .
This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then be taken care automatically.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 320 for built-in current restraint
feature:
Table 320: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor
multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
13.1.8.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-112 v4
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup levels of
all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC function.

Technical manual
Base current shall be entered as:
1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current
Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table "".
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3 (1.732 x
Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table "".
Base voltage shall be entered as:
1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage
13.1.8.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps M13751-136 v3
Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one
will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 318)
with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. However depending on other enabled built-in
features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will
only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
Second harmonic feature M13751-254 v3

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured
current quantity (see table 318). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when
one of the following measured currents is selected:
• PosSeq (positive sequence current)

• NegSeq (negative sequence current)
• UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
• UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance phase-phase current)
This feature will prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured
current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature M13751-263 v5

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle
between measured current phasor (see table 318) and measured voltage phasor (see table 319). In
protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function
can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will
only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means towards
the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the
outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 319) and measured
current phasor (see table 318) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole
responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a
proper directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use the
current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 321 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two
quantities from traditional directional relays.

Technical manual
Table 321: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the

parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is from 45° to 90° depending on the power
system voltage level (X/R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is from 45° to 90° depending on the power
system voltage level (X/R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical
setting for RCADir is from 0° to 90° depending on the power system
earthing (that is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained.
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained.
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first
principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate
angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 201).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup ROADir I=3Io
Operate region
MTA line
Figure 201: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function
where:
RCADir is 75°
ROADir is 50°
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle between the
current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the I·cos(Φ)
straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 201).

Technical manual
U=-3U0
Ipickup ROADir  I=3Io
Operate region
MTA line
Figure 202: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle
where:
RCADir is 75°
ROADir is 50°
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave
when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-set value. User can select
one of the following three options:
• Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

• Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
• Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time
the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if
the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.
Voltage restraint/control feature M13751-326 v4

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity
(see table 319). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead
decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types
of dependencies are available:
• Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

Technical manual
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
Figure 203: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured
voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude
en05000323.vsd
Figure 204: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured
voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude
variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup
current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will
operate faster during low voltage conditions).
Current restraint feature M13751-338 v3

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity
(see table 320). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead
increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

Technical manual
Imeasured
StartCurr_OC2
StartCurr_OC1
Atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
Figure 205: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured current
quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature
will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means
that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance
with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the
overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous
or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
13.1.8.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps M13751-231 v2
Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one
will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current
quantity (see table 318) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start
signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip
signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
13.1.8.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps M13751-234 v3
Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 319)
with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity is bigger than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end
user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage
step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay
in accordance with the end user setting.

Technical manual
13.1.8.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps M13751-239 v3
Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 319)
with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity is smaller than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end
user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage
step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay
in accordance with the end user setting.
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all
be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.
1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one
three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage
input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input
calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function:
1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 318) for internally measured
current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 319) for internally measured
voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 320) for internally measured
restraint current.

Technical manual
CURRENT
UC1
TRUC1
2nd Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
nd
TRUC2
2 Harmonic
restraint
STOC1
OC1 TROC1
2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint ³1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint
STOC2
OC2 TROC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint ³1
UDIRLOW
Directionality DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
STOV1
OV1 TROV1
STOV2
OV2 TROV2
STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1
STUV2
UV2 TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
Figure 206: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
Logic in figure 206 can be summarized as follows:

Technical manual
1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection
element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and TRIP output
signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures.
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR
logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
a Freeze Timers
a>b AND
BlkLevel2nd b
Enable DEF time

second Second harmonic selected
harmonic check DEF BLKTROC1 TROC1
AND
OR
a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse
Voltage
control or Directionality DIR_OK Inverse
time
restraint check selected
feature
Selected voltage Current

Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint
Figure 207: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)
BLKUC1TR
a Freeze Timer
a>b AND
BlkLevel2nd b
Enable
second Second harmonic
harmonic check
a TRUC1
b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND
Operation_UC1=On
STUC1
BLKUC1
Figure 208: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the
same internal logic)

Technical manual
DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected
en05000751.vsd
Figure 209: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)
DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected
en05000752.vsd
Figure 210: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)
When enabled, the 2nd harmonic blocking function applied in UC1, UC2, OC1 and
OC2 is used to freeze the Definite and/or the Inverse Characteristics internal timers.
When the function detects a 2nd harmonic higher than the set threshold, the internal
function timers are frozen but START outputs continues to be active as long as the
measured current is above the set pickup level. Internal timers will again resume
timing when harmonic content becomes smaller than the set threshold and the
measured current is higher than the pickup value. If TRIP output is already active
when harmonic blocking signal appears the TRIP output will not be affected.

Technical manual

M13095-2 v11
Table 322: CVGAPC technical data

Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Independent time delay, overcurrent at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2 greater
Independent time delay, undercurrent at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

2 x Iset to 0, step 1 - 2 greater
Overcurrent (non-directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Start time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 1097, 1098 and table
1097, 1098 and table 1099 1099
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
curves, step 1 - 2 greater
Voltage level where voltage memory (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
takes over
Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Independent time delay, overvoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, step 1 - 2 greater

Technical manual

Independent time delay, undervoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset, step 1 - 2 greater
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overvoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 4 curve types See table 1105
1105
Undervoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 3 curve types See table 1106
1106
High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of U at U > Ur
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and -

reverse
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate frequency 10-90 Hz -
Overcurrent:

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -
Uset

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -
Uset

Technical manual
438
System protection and control
Section 14 System protection and control

14.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC GUID-6B541154-D56B-452F-B143-4C2A1B2D3A1F v1
14.1.1 Identification GUID-8224B870-3DAA-44BF-B790-6600F2AD7C5D v1

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -
14.1.2 Functionality GUID-EB0B11C3-FF79-4B8D-A335-649623E832F9 v3
The multi-purpose filter function block (SMAIHPAC) is arranged as a three-phase filter. It has very
much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard pre-processing function block
SMAI. However the main difference is that it can be used to extract any frequency component from
the input signal. Thus it can, for example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for
synchronous generator.
14.1.3 Function block GUID-FA590757-0DB1-4605-9DE2-20FA8304795F v1
SMAIHPAC
BLOCK AI3P
G3P* AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
14.1.4 Signals GUID-DF7C833A-9AB9-40CA-867B-950AC1F662B5 v1
Table 323: SMAIHPAC Input signals

G3P GROUP - Analog input group from SMAI
SIGNAL
Table 324: SMAIHPAC Output signals

AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 1

Technical manual
14.1.5 Settings GUID-5EA398AD-66E2-4240-8918-4332995CED11 v1
Table 325: SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)

ConnectionType Ph - Ph - - Ph - N Analogue input connection type
Ph - N
SetFrequency 2.0 - 500.0 Hz 0.1 50.0 Desired frequency to be extracted by the
filter
FreqBandWidth 0.0 - 60.0 Hz 0.1 0.0 Extra added frequency band around the
set frequency
FilterLength 0.1 s - - 1.0 s Approximate length of the filtering
0.2 s window in seconds
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
OverLap 0 - 95 % 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two
calculations in percent
14.1.6 Operation principle GUID-262C1783-3A0A-46B6-99FC-1202AE8E7519 v3
For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual quantity) the input
samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20 samples per fundamental system
cycle are first stored. When enough samples are available in the internal memory, the phasor values
at set frequency defined by the setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values
are internally available for each of the calculated phasors:
• Magnitude
• Phase angle
• Exact frequency of the extracted signal
Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This algorithm is different
from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically used by the numerical IEDs. This filter
provides extremely good accuracy of measurement and excellent noise rejection, but at the same
time it has much slower response time. It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle
and actual frequency) of any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the connected CTs
and/or VTs. The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are calculated with very high
precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of the phasor can be estimated even if it has
magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1‰ ) in comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental
frequency component). Several instances of this function block are provided. These instances are
fully synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two multi-
purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the second one for the voltage
signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can be calculated from them by the over-/
under-power function or CVMMXN measurement function block.
In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
• Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors

• True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
• Positive sequence phasor
• Negative sequence phasor
• Zero sequence phasor
• etc.
In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase phasors or vice
versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It defines what quantities (i.e. individual
phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring.

Technical manual
Then the IED knows which one of them are the measured quantities and the other one is then
internally calculated. This setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are typically
star connected all the time.
Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function or overcurrent
function or over-voltage function or over-power function many different protection applications can be
arranged. For example the following protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
• Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators

• Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
• Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous generators
• Super-synchronous protection
• Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
• Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-harmonic, inter-
harmonic etc.
• Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase power system
• Sensitive reverse power protection
• Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
• etc.
The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as CVMMXN
(Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU (Phase-phase voltage
measurement), etc.
The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the extracted signal. Thus
the user can check the actual frequency of some phenomenon in the power system (e.g. frequency
of the sub-synchronous currents) and compare it with expected value obtained previously by either
calculation or simulation. For the whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal
connected to the first input (i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used either by over-/
under-frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any other external client via the
measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.
How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on the setting
parameter FilterLength. Table 326 gives overview of the used number of samples for phasor
calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of samples is always a power of number two.
Table 326: Length of the filtering window
Value for parameter Used No of samples for Corresponding length of Corresponding length of
FilterLength calculation (fixed, the input waveform in the input waveform in
independent from rated miliseconds for 50Hz miliseconds for 60Hz
frequency) power system power system
0.1 s 128 = 27 128 ms 107 ms
0.2 s 256 = 28 256 ms 213 ms
0.5 s 512 = 29 512 ms 427 ms
1.0 s 1024 = 210 1024 ms 853 ms
2.0 s 2048 = 211 2048 ms 1707 ms
4.0 s 4096 = 212 4096 ms 3413 ms
Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines certain filter
properties as described below:
First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall always be longer
than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted. Actually the best results are
obtained if at least five complete periods are available within the filtering window. Thus, this filter
feature will limit which filter lengths can be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7
Hz signal shall be extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:

Technical manual
1000
3× = 180ms
16.7
Thus based on the data from Table 326 the minimum acceptable value for this parameter would be
“FilterLength = 0.2 s” but more accurate results will be obtained by using “FilterLength = 0.5 s”
Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter FilterLength is the capability
of the filter to separate the desired signal from the other disturbing signals which may have similar
frequency value. Note that the filter output will be the phasor with the highest magnitude within
certain “pass frequency band” around the SetFrequency. Table 327 defines the natural size of this
pass frequency band for the filter, depending on the selected value for parameter FilterLength.
Table 327: Pass frequency band due to FilterLength
Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system For 60Hz power system
0.1 s ±22.5 Hz ±27.0 Hz
0.2 s ±11.5 Hz ±14.0 Hz
0.5 s ±6.0 Hz ±7.2 Hz
1.0 s ±3.0 Hz ±3.6 Hz
2.0 s ±1.5 Hz ±1.8 Hz
4.0 s ±0.8 Hz ±1.0 Hz
Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the disturbing signals close to
the required frequency component and any other noise present in the input signal waveform. For
example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz power system, then from Table 327 it can be
concluded that “FilterLength=1,0 s” shall be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency
deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into account it may be
advisable to select “FilterLength=2,0 s” for such application.
Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency band the filter will
return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the signal frequency will have value
minus one. Finally the set value for parameter FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter
after a step change of the measured signal. The filter will correctly estimate the new signal
magnitude once 75% of the filter length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the
change).
If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate but wider filter) it
is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value different from zero for parameter
FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass band can be defined as:
± (value given in Table 327 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)
Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are “FilterLength =1.0 s” and “FreqBandWidth = 5.0”
the total filter pass band will be ±(3.6+5.0/2)= ± 6.1 Hz.
It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding (required certain
amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU usage for this filter, the setting
parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter defines how often the new phasor value is
calculated during time period defined by the set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 326).
The following list gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the
extracted phasor:
• when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per FilterLength
• when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per FilterLength
• when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per FilterLength
• when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per FilterLength

Technical manual
Filterlength of SMAIHPAC shall be properly coordinated with the operate times of the
functions that are consuming SMAIHPAC data, in order to prevent inadvertent
operation.
14.1.7 Filter calculation example GUID-F5828B0A-CED3-483E-B5B1-F389C3C2AEFB v3
In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50 Hz turbo generator
with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this installation filter is used to measure the
stator sub-synchronous resonance currents. For this particular installation the following settings were
used for the filter:
• SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
• FilterLength= 1.0 s
• OverLap = 75%
• FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz
Figure 211: Example of filter calculation

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED. The following traces
are presented in this Figure.
a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.
b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in primary amperes.
c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the filter in Hz.
Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well indicates with which
precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor magnitude and frequency of the extracted
stator sub-synchronous current component.
The following can be observed in the Figure:

Technical manual
• The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.

• The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A primary (that is, 0.5%
of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
• The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.
With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency are calculated
approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four times per 1024 ms).

Technical manual
Secondary system supervision
Section 15 Secondary system supervision

15.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC IP14555-1 v5
M14870-1 v5

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection
functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current functions.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three phase set of
current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of
cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection
functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.
CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
Figure 212: CCSSPVC function block
Signal ISIREF must be connected in the configuration.
15.1.4 Signals
Table 328: CCSSPVC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Table 329: CCSSPVC Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure
15.1.5 Settings
Table 330: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase
Table 331: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase
Table 332: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three
phase currents |ΣIphase| and the absolute value of the residual current |Iref| from another current
transformer set, see figure 213.
The FAIL output will be set to high when the following criteria are fulfilled:
• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value
of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate
value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more
than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL
and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of
the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

Technical manual
IL1 IL1 I>1.054 * IMinOp

IL2 IL2 +
IL3 IL3  -
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
I>IP>Block
10 ms AND
OR FAIL
OR t
40 ms 100 ms
170 ms 3000 ms ALARM

OPERATION
BLOCK
Figure 213: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, which is shown in Figure 214.
| åI phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp
| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
Figure 214: Operate characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref
| respectively, the slope can not be above 1.

M12358-1 v11
Table 333: CCSSPVC technical data

Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

Technical manual
15.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3
M14869-1 v4

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC) is to block voltage measuring functions
at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid
inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods, negative
sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and delta current
detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed
networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to take into
account the particular earthing of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure
supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated
with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3
Figure 215: FUFSPVC function block

Technical manual
15.2.4 Signals
Table 334: FUFSPVC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active
Table 335: FUFSPVC Output signals

BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
15.2.5 Settings
Table 336: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase

Technical manual

3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase
Table 337: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 338: FUFSPVC Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative sequence voltage
15.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection M13677-3 v5
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in all
three phases and calculates, see figure 216:
• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2

Technical manual
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-sequence voltage
is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence current is below the set value
3I0<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative sequence current is below the
set value 3I2<.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will
prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.
Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq
Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b
3U2>
Figure 216: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local HMI and
monitoring tool in PCM600.
Input and output signals M13677-19 v6

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead
line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:
• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the
HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function.
It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external
devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a
block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs
and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the protection functions
included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked;
a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against

Technical manual
unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for
which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The dead
line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary
contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets
the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is
open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent
function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order
to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection
function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that
can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected
to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system
and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage
protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
15.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection M13685-3 v8
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 217. The calculation of the changes of
currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The calculated delta quantities are
compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a
sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase
separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:
• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:
• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5 cycles (i.e.
30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting DU>
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<
• The magnitude of voltages drop in all three phases
• The zero sequence voltage is smaller than 3U0>
In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be fulfilled in order to
activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:
• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current for the
three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse
failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused
by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false
fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as circuit
breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable
the delta function. If the DUDI detections of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at

Technical manual
the level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three
phases are lower then the setting Uph>.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also generated by the
delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are
activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the
sudden change is based on a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least
three consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way DelatI is
activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the setting DI<. When DeltaU
or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1, STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1,
STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20
ms time off delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms time off
delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current detection) is
deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

Technical manual
DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR
DI<
UL1
DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b
IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1
IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1
UL1
a
ab
IPh> b AND
OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR
UL2
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR
UL3
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
Figure 217: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

Technical manual
intBlock
STDI
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND
STDU
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND
Figure 218: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output signals
15.2.7.3 Dead line detection M13679-44 v4
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 219. A dead phase condition is indicated if
both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD< and
IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal
DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is
activated

Technical manual
Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b
IL3
a
a<b
b
IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b
UDLD<
intBlock
Figure 219: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
15.2.7.4 Main logic GUID-D474A49E-D3A8-438C-B7E4-E527FEC2F335 v6
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 220. The fuse failure supervision function
(FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector, OpMode,
has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero
sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are:
• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel (OR-
condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in series (AND-
condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the highest
magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When selected it
operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq, FuseFailDetNegSeq

or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function will activate the output
signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for blocking
voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The
output BLKZ shall be used to block the impedance protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter SealIn is set
to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This
will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value
USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting parameter

Technical manual
SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ
will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in the non-
volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due
to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the
conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above
USealIn< before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting
USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the set
value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD<
(criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP
signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when
the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage
dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit
breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order
to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection
function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction
of the distance protection.

Technical manual
Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted
All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b
AND
DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t
AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND
VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd
Figure 220: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

Technical manual

M16069-1 v13
Table 339: FUFSPVC technical data

Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
15.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-9C5BA1A7-DF2F-49D4-A13A-C6B483DDFCDC v2
15.3.1 Identification GUID-109434B0-23E5-4053-9E6E-418530A07F9C v2

Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60
15.3.2 Functionality GUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v5
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of measured voltage at
the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:
• Distance protection function.

• Undervoltage function.
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between
voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can be prevented by
fuse failure supervision (VDSPVC).
VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit, based on phase
wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC blocking output can be
configured to block functions that need to be blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

Technical manual
15.3.3 Function block GUID-0C4A6C94-E0D7-4E36-AB49-D74A5E330D36 v2
VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL
Figure 221: VDSPVC function block
15.3.4 Signals
Table 340: VDSPVC Input signals

U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
Table 341: VDSPVC Output signals

MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
15.3.5 Settings
Table 342: VDSPVC Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase

Technical manual
Table 343: VDSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 344: VDSPVC Non group settings (advanced)

ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main
Ph-Ph fuse group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot
Ph-Ph fuse group

Table 345: VDSPVC Monitored data

UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L1 for alarm
functionality
functionality
functionality
UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L1 for block
functionality
functionality
functionality
15.3.7 Operation principle GUID-06BC0CC0-8A4F-4D84-A0B1-506E433F72F3 v4
VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and pilot fuse
groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical zero in the healthy
condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse failure.
If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 < vPilotL1 or vMainL2
< vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage difference exceeds the operation level
(Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and block the
voltage-dependent functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage
reduction has occurred.
If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 < vMainL1 or vPilotL2
< vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage difference exceeds the operation level
(Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty
phase where the voltage reduction occurred.
When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the blocked
protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are restored above the
USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal voltage conditions are restored.

Technical manual
5s
a
ab AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0
MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL
vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL
vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL
Figure 222: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v5
Table 346: VDSPVC technical data

Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms

Technical manual
15.4 Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC GUID-579ED249-B8C9-4755-9E80-28E2BA8E5377 v2
GUID-C7108931-DECA-4397-BCAF-8BFF3B57B4EF v2

Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC – 7V_78V
15.4.2 Functionality GUID-6188C4C1-E1D5-421A-B496-96676287EBB2 v2
Delta supervision function is used to quickly detect (sudden) changes in the network. This can, for
example, be used to detect faults in the power system networks and islanding in grid networks.
Voltage based delta supervision (DELVSPVC) is needed at the grid interconnection point.
15.4.3 Function block GUID-06FEC7EF-B37E-4D42-99DA-868453E6FDBF v2
DELVSPVC
U3P* START
BLOCK STARTL1
STARTL2
STARTL3
STRISE
STRISEL1
STRISEL2
STRISEL3
STLOW
STLOWL1
STLOWL2
STLOWL3
DELMAGL1
DELMAGL2
DELMAGL3
Figure 223: DELVSPVC function block
15.4.4 Signals
Table 347: DELVSPVC Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 348: DELVSPVC Output signals

START BOOLEAN General start of function
STARTL1 BOOLEAN Start of L1
STRISE BOOLEAN Common rise signal when input has increased

Technical manual

STRISEL1 BOOLEAN L1/L12 delta value increased
STLOW BOOLEAN Common low signal when input has decreased
STLOWL1 BOOLEAN L1/L12 delta value decreased
DELMAGL1 REAL Delta magnitude of L1 / L12
15.4.5 Settings
Table 349: DELVSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
OpMode Instantaneous 1 - - DFT mag Operation mode
cycle
Instantaneous 2
cycle
RMS
DFT mag
DFT Angle (Vector
shift)
MeasMode Phase to phase - - Phase to ground Measurement type: Phase to ground /
Phase to ground Phase to phase
Table 350: DELVSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
UMin 1.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Minimum start value of voltage for
release of delta function
DeltaT 1 - 10 cycle 1 2 Number of old power cycles for delta
calculation
DelU> 2.0 - 500.0 %UB 0.1 40.0 Magnitude start level for magnitude,
RMS and sample based delta
comparison
DelUAng> 2.0 - 40.0 Deg 1.0 8.0 Start level for angle based delta
detection
tHold 0.10 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Hold time for start signal

Technical manual

Table 351: DELVSPVC Monitored data

UL1 REAL - kV RMS magnitude of L1 /L12
15.4.7 Operation principle GUID-7F65AD13-1F0E-402A-8B9C-3B1D6ED0D2BB v3
The delta supervision function DELVSPVC is a phase segregated function with the following
features.
• Check of the minimum signal level

• Five different modes of operation
• Frequency stabilization for angle shift
The general design of DELVSPVC is shown in Figure 224:
opMode = Instantaneous 1cycle/2 cycle

Sample delta STARTSAMPLE
U3P calculation
opMode = DFTAngle
Frequency
estimation and Frequency stabilization STARTANGLE
angle shift based on 2 cycle old
calculation frequency
1 START
AND
Signal pre‐processing
  fundamental DFT
opMode= RMS/DFTMag
  harmonic extraction
Magnitude based STARTMAG
delta calculation DELMAGLx
MinValueCheck AND
BLOCK
Figure 224: Simplified logic diagram for voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC
15.4.7.1 Minimum signal level check GUID-FE5377C8-E4CF-43D3-B1EC-C886E76377A6 v2
The setting Umin is used to check and release the signals for the delta supervision. The delta
detection is blocked for 2 cycles by Umin comparator for angle shift mode.
15.4.7.2 Mode of operation GUID-B4EDA716-DB28-422A-88E3-F41D5D7BB6A4 v3
DELVSPVC can be selected for phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurements using the

MeasMode setting. If the setting is selected as phase-to-phase, then outputs with L1 and L2 will
represent L12, L23, and L31 phase-to-phase quantities, respectively. Following are the modes of
operations for the OpMode setting:
• Instantaneous 1 cycle
• True RMS
• DFT mag
• Vector Shift
These modes of operation are explained in following sections.

Technical manual
15.4.7.3 Instantaneous 1 cycle / 2 cycle GUID-BAF266E2-A0A0-4848-9DFB-776C197B4A7F v2
This method uses the instantaneous samples for delta detection. The logic of this scheme is shown
in Figure 225. The instantaneous difference between the present sample and the one cycle (or two
cycle) old sample is used for the delta detection. The change (delta) is verified for three continuous
samples in order to release the start signal. Once the start signal is set, any subsequent change in
sample values within 60 ms will not be detected. The DELU> setting will be set in % of UB. The
sample based delta is selectable for one cycle/two cycle operation, based on the OpMode setting.
Old value buffer

Voltage sample input
  1 cycle /
  2 cycle
‐ Abs
60ms
>
StartSampleDelta
AND t
DelU>
q‐1
q‐1
Figure 225: Simplified logic diagram for sample based delta detection
15.4.7.4 RMS/DFT based supervision GUID-B299BE6C-AD89-4DFE-AFFC-E3DD252A260A v2
This mode uses the RMS or DFT magnitude value of the voltage signal for the delta detection. The
logic of this scheme is given in Figure 226. Difference between the present value and the old value is
used for the delta detection. The old value is chosen based on the setting DeltaT, which is defined as
the number of old power cycles.
The function has an execution cycle time of 3 ms. For a DeltaT setting of 3, the old
value is 60 ms. Therefore, accuracy of the old cycle data depends upon the
execution cycle.
The output of the comarator is ascertained for half a cycle before releasing a STARTMAG signal. In
DELVSPVC, the DelU> setting is set in % of UB. RMS based delta will have poor accuracy if the
signal contains harmonics and other frequency components. DFT Mag based delta will operate better
in these conditions.
Additional information for the STARTRISE and STARTLOW outputs of the delta are also available in
this mode. The STARTRISE and STARTLOW outputs will be sealed by the start signal. These
outputs explains the reason for the STARTMAG signal.
Seal‐in STARTLOW
logic
0.1
>
RMS input / Seal‐in STARTRISE

> logic
DFT mag Delay defined by ‐0.1
DeltaT
0. 3 cycle
‐ Abs
> t
DelU>
IEC17000200-2-en.vdsx
Figure 226: Simplified logic diagram for RMS/DFT based delta detection

Technical manual
15.4.7.5 Angle based supervision or vector shift supervision GUID-26960EA3-233A-4B76-8C11-245334012C76 v3
The Vector shift selection in the OpMode setting is used to set the DELVSPVC function to operate. A
change in magnitude will not have any impact on this supervision. Angle shift is measured based on
the half cycle time (HCTime) as shown in Figure 227. The figure shows a waveform shift of 40
degree in the voltage waveform. There are two half cycle times which are affected by this angle shift
namely, HCTime(k-1) and HCTime(k). A cumulative difference of two HCTime difference is calculated
to get an accurate estimate of the angle shift. This angle shift is compared with DelUang> setting to
release the STARTANGLE signal.
The logic for this mode is given in Figure 228. The DelUAng> setting will be set in absolute degrees.
Voltage
Angle shift= [{Hctime(k) ‐ Hctime(k‐2)} + {Hctime(k‐1) ‐ Hctime(k‐3)}]
Angle shift
HC time (k‐3) HC time (k‐2) HC time (k‐1) HC time (k)

Time
Figure 227: Angle shift

Angle measurement is affected by system parameters such as frequency, load or generation. Hence,
a stabilization of the angle is also present in this mode of operation. The measured frequency is
compared with the 2 cycles old value. If the change is greater than 0.2 Hz, the STARTANGLE signal
is blocked. The output will release Angle shift mode when the measured frequency difference is
continuously less than 0.2 Hz for 2 cycles. The general logic is presented in Figure 228. In this mode
STLOW, STRISE, STLOWLx and STRISELx outputs will not be used and set as FALSE.
ULx Angle shift

calculation
0.5 cycle
Abs Delta Angle
> t
DelUang> STARTANGLE
Frequency difference of last 2 cycles AND
> AND
0.2 Hz
Figure 228: Simplified logic diagram for angle based delta detection

Technical manual

GUID-DAECF9F5-1D0B-43FC-AD29-8F96E05DD0DA v4
Table 352: DELVSPVC technical data

Minimum Voltage (5.0 - 50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
DelU> (2.0 - 500.0)% of UBase Instantaneous 1 cycle &
Instantaneous 2 cycle mode:
±20% of Ur at U ≤ Ur±20% of U
at U > Ur
RMS & DFT Mag mode:±10% of
Ur at U ≤ Ur±10% of U at U > Ur
DelUAng> (2.0 - 40.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate time for changeat Ur to (Ur + 2 x DelU>)at Instantaneous 1 cycle &
Ur to (Ur + 5 x DelU>) Instantaneous 2 cycle mode -
<20msRMS & DFT Mag mode -
<30ms
Operate time for jump from Zero degrees to Vector shift mode - <60ms
'AngStVal' + 2 degrees
15.5 Current based delta supervision DELISPVC GUID-4F012876-FA0A-4A97-9E23-387974304CED v2
GUID-0B735A27-6A7D-40E1-B981-91B689608495 v1

Current based delta supervision DELISPVC – 7I < >
15.5.2 Functionality GUID-30A00AE0-8D3A-4CE8-9379-8D1A0A6078E3 v2
Delta supervision function is used to quickly detect (sudden) changes in the network. This can, for
example, be used to detect disturbances in the power system network. Current based delta
supervision (DELISPVC) provides selectivity between load change and the fault.
Present power system has many power electronic devices or FACTS devices, which injects a large
number of harmonics into the system. The function has additional features of 2nd harmonic blocking
and 3rd harmonic start level adaption. The 2nd harmonic blocking secures the operation during the
transformer charging, when high inrush currents are supplied into the system.

Technical manual
15.5.3 Function block GUID-D1467592-DD2D-488F-94CA-66BD0FA57A8D v2
DELISPVC
I3P* START
BLOCK STARTL1
STARTL2
STARTL3
STRISE
STRISEL1
STRISEL2
STRISEL3
STLOW
STLOWL1
STLOWL2
STLOWL3
ADAPTVAL
HARM2BLK
DELMAGL1
DELMAGL2
DELMAGL3
Figure 229: DELISPVC function block
15.5.4 Signals
Table 353: DELISPVC Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 354: DELISPVC Output signals

START BOOLEAN General start of function
STRISE BOOLEAN Common rise signal when input has increased
STLOW BOOLEAN Common low signal when input has decreased
ADAPTVAL BOOLEAN Delta start level changed by 3rd harmonic
HARM2BLK BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic blocking active

Technical manual
15.5.5 Settings
Table 355: DELISPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
OpMode Instantaneous 1 - - DFT mag Operation mode
cycle
Instantaneous 2
cycle
RMS
DFT mag
MeasMode Phase to phase - - Phase to ground Measurement type: Phase to ground /
Phase to ground Phase to phase
Table 356: DELISPVC Group settings (basic)

On
IMin 1.0 - 50.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Minimum current start value for release
of delta function
DeltaT 1 - 10 cycle 1 2 Number of old power cycles for delta
calculation
DelI> 2.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 40.0 Magnitude start level for magnitude,
RMS and sample based delta
comparison
EnaHarm2Blk Off - - Off Enable 2nd harmonic blocking
On
HarmBlkLevel 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Harmonic blocking level for 2nd
harmonic in % of fundamental
EnStValAdap Off - - Off Enable set level setting adaption based
On on 3rd harmonic
Harm3Level 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 3rd Harmonic level in % of fundamental
for enabling adaptive start value
StValGrad -90.00 - 500.00 % 0.10 -10.00 Gradient for adapting magnitude set
level during 3rd harmonic in % of DelI>

Table 357: DELISPVC Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A RMS magnitude of L1 /L12
15.5.7 Operation principle GUID-27E7C6C8-83B1-4CA6-9B4E-38FDED3FD360 v2
The delta supervision function is a phase segregated function. Following are the features of
DELISPVC:

Technical manual

• Four different modes of operation
• 2nd harmonic blocking of delta function
• 3rd harmonic based adaption of starting value
The general design of DELISPVC is shown in Figure 230:
opMode = Instantaneous 1cycle/2 cycle

I3P Sample delta STARTSAMPLE
calculation
1 AND START
Signal pre‐processing
  fundamental DFT
opMode= RMS/DFTMag
  harmonic extraction
Magnitude based STARTMAG
delta calculation DELMAGLx
DFTMagToComp
rd
3 harmonic based ADAPTVAL
adaption nd HARM2BLK
2 harmonic
blocking
AND
MinValueCheck
BLOCK
Figure 230: Simplified logic diagram for current based delta supervision DELISPVC
15.5.7.1 Minimum signal level check GUID-5E5503ED-1A61-4927-86F0-6ABDC7E2AA2B v3
The setting Imin is used to check and release the signals for the delta supervision. This setting can
be used to obtain selectivity between load current and fault current.
15.5.7.2 Mode of operation GUID-2B87BAB6-A0D4-4A3D-8116-88F1598C1AC6 v2
DELISPVC can be selected for phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurements using the

MeasMode setting. If the setting is selected as phase-to-phase, then outputs with L1 will represent
L12 phase-to-phase quantities and so on. Following are the modes of operations for the OpMode
setting:
• True RMS
• DFT mag
These modes of operation are explained in following sections.
15.5.7.3 Instantaneous 1 cycle / 2 cycle GUID-4FD743D6-DB93-4C76-819D-E81C562B762A v2
This method uses the buffer of instantaneous sample for delta detection. The logic of this scheme is
given in Figure 231. The instantaneous difference between the present sample and the one cycle (or
two cycle) old sample is used for the delta detection. The change (vectorial delta) is verified for three
continuous samples in order to release the start signal. This delta calculation is affected by angle or
magnitude or both changes in the signal in the last one cycle/two cycle. It is also known as vectorial
delta scheme. Once the start signal is set, any subsequent change in sample values within 60 ms will
not be detected. The DelI> setting will be set in % of IB. The sample based delta is selectable for one
cycle/two cycle operation, based on the OpMode setting.

Technical manual
Old value buffer

Current Samples   1 cycle /
  2 cycle
‐
60ms
Abs
> AND
StartSampleDelta
t
DelI>
q‐1
q‐1
Figure 231: Simplified logic diagram for sample based delta detection
15.5.7.4 RMS/DFT based supervision GUID-427A82EF-1BB6-45C5-BAEB-2DF50A9D99BD v2
This mode uses the RMS or DFT magnitude value of the current signal for the delta detection. The
logic of this scheme is given in Figure 232. Difference between the present value and the old value is
used for the delta detection. The old value is chosen based on the setting DeltaT, which is defined as
the number of old power cycles.
The function has an execution cycle of 3 ms. For a DeltaT setting of 3, the old value
is 60 ms. Therefore, accuracy of the old cycle data depends upon the execution
cycle.
The output of the comparator is ascertained for half a cycle before releasing a STARTMAG signal. In
DELISPVC, the DelI> setting is set in % of IB.
Additional information for the STARTRISE and STARTLOW outputs of the delta are also available in
this mode. The STARTRISE and STARTLOW outputs will be sealed by the start signal. These
outputs explains the reason for the STARTMAG signal.
Seal‐in STARTLOW
logic
0.1
>
Seal‐in STARTRISE
> logic
RMS Input Delay defined by ‐0.1
DeltaT
0. 5 cycle
‐ Abs STARTMAG
> t
DelI>
Figure 232: Simplified logic diagram for RMS based delta detection
15.5.7.5 2nd Harmonic blocking GUID-BE749AFA-992C-44A6-8C12-12BA4D1AA674 v2
Presence of the harmonics is another reason for maloperation of the delta based protection. The 2nd
harmonic blocking is an additional security feature in this function. It can be enabled by the
EnaHarm2Blk setting. If the ratio of 2nd harmonic frequency signal magnitude to the fundamental
frequency magnitude is greater than the set level harmBlkLev, then this feature will block the start
signal of the delta protection. The logic for this functionality is shown in Figure 233. The tON of 1.25
cycle is added to ensure a reliable harmonic blocking. The tOFF of 2 cycles is added to block the
operation during any sudden increase in the current load.

Technical manual
EnaHarm2Blk
2 cycles
t HARM2BLK
DFTInput‐2ndHarm AND
< 1.25 cycle
t
DFTInput ‐ fundamental
X
HarmBlkLev
Figure 233: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking logic
15.5.7.6 3rd Harmonic based adaption GUID-02A00917-EAB6-47F9-8375-643F76AA0D2B v2
Present days power system network has high amount of the 3rd harmonics presence due to heavy
power electronic devices. In such case, many networks modify the settings based on the 3rd
harmonic present in the system. Delta supervision can be adapted based on the 3rd harmonic
present in the signal. When OpMode is set to DFTMag and EnStValAdap is set to is Enable, then the
setting DelI> will change based on the StValGrad setting if the third harmonic is greater than the set
level defined by the Harm3Level setting. The logic for this functionality is shown in Figure 234.
 DelI  New  DelI 1  StValGrad 
DeltaMode = DFTMag
EnStValAdap = Enable/Disable
2 cycle
t ADAPTSTLEV
rd
DFTInput ‐ 3 Harmonics AND
< 1.25 cycle
DFTInput ‐ fundamental t
X
Harm3Lev
StValGrad X T DeltaMagToComp
F
DelI>
Figure 234: Simplified logic diagram for 3rd harmonic restrain of MagStVal setting
Since this mode is adaptably changing the setting, the tOFF time is mandatory to ensure the reliable
operation during any sudden change.

Technical manual

GUID-ED3FE722-1F29-4340-94E9-6C907C4474F2 v3
Table 358: DELISPVC technical data

Minimum current (5.0 - 50.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I
> Ir
DelI> (10.0 - 500.0)% of IBase Instantaneous 1 cycle &
Instantaneous 2 cycle mode:
±20% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±20% of I at I
> Ir
RMS & DFT Mag mode:
±10% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±10% of I at I
> Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0 - 100.0)% of ±2.0% of Ir
fundamental
Third harmonic restraining (5.0 - 100.0)% of ±2.0% of Ir
fundamental
Operate time for changeat Ir to (Ir + 2 x DelI>)at Ir to Instantaneous 1 cycle &
(Ir + 5 x DelI>) Instantaneous 2 cycle mode -
<20ms
RMS & DFT Mag mode - <30ms
15.6 Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC GUID-470F7470-F3D1-46BC-B0EA-CD180FBA0AB2 v1
GUID-66CFBA71-B3A4-489F-B7F4-F1909B75E1DD v1

Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC – –
15.6.2 Functionality GUID-8FAD2CCF-091F-4CDB-8ABF-1BDC874A8403 v2
Delta supervision functions are used to quickly detect (sudden) changes in the power system. Real
input delta supervision (DELSPVC) function is a general delta function. It is used to detect the
change measured qualities over a settable time period, such as:
• Power
• Reactive power
• Temperature
• Frequency
• Power factor
15.6.3 Function block GUID-1472A816-E653-4828-8F03-4B26B93E7EF9 v1
DELSPVC
BLOCK START
INPUT STRISE
STLOW
DELREAL
Figure 235: DELSPVC function block

Technical manual
15.6.4 Signals
Table 359: DELSPVC Input signals

INPUT REAL 0 Real Input
Table 360: DELSPVC Output signals

START BOOLEAN Start of function
STRISE BOOLEAN Rise signal when input has increased
STLOW BOOLEAN Low signal when input has decreased
DELREAL REAL Delta value of real input
15.6.5 Settings
Table 361: DELSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
MinStVal 0.1 - 99999.9 - 0.1 1.0 Minimum start value for release of delta
function
DeltaT 6 - 100 cycle 1 10 Number of old execution cycle for delta
calculation
DelSt> 0.1 - 9999999.9 - 0.1 10.0 Delta start level for real input
15.6.6 Operation principle GUID-CA9B38EB-26E4-4286-8517-C5ECDA730236 v1
Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC is a general delta function with the following features:

• Detect an increase or decrease of the measured value
The general design of DELSPVC is shown in Figure 236.

Technical manual
Seal‐in STARTLOW
Logic
>
0.1
Seal‐in STARTRISE
Logic
REALIN Delay defined by >
‐0.1
DeltaT
0. 5 cycle
‐ Abs
> t
DelStLevel
tHold
& t
>
MinStVal
Figure 236: Simplified logic diagram for DELSPVC

The setting MinStVal is used to check and release the signals for the delta supervision. In its initial
condition, during the first time a real value signal is detected (ascertained by the MinStVal
comparator), the delta detection is blocked for operation for the next 11 cycles. These 11 cycles are
used to block any unwanted operation during the initialization of the function.
The outputs STARTRISE and STARTLOW are released based on the difference (respectively above
and below) from the old value at the instant when the START signal is released.

Technical manual
Control
Section 16 Control
16.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN IP14558-1 v4
M14889-1 v4

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment including
the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) function checks that the voltages
on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that
closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and 1½ breaker or
ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different
settings.
For systems, which can run asynchronously, a synchronizing feature is also provided. The main
purpose of the synchronizing feature is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two
asynchronous systems are in phase and can be connected. The synchronizing feature evaluates
voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before
issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a setting.

Technical manual
Control
SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Figure 237: SESRSYN function block
16.1.4 Signals
Table 362: SESRSYN Input signals

U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 1
SIGNAL
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 2
SIGNAL
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 1
SIGNAL
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 2
SIGNAL
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2

Technical manual
Control

B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 363: SESRSYN Output signals

SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing

Technical manual
Control

FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing
16.1.5 Settings
Table 364: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)

On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing
in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
CloseAngleMax 15.0 - 30.0 Deg 1.0 15.0 Maximum closing angle between bus
and line for synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions

Technical manual
Control

OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check
On function Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of
UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Technical manual
Control
Table 365: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
Table 366: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

Table 367: SESRSYN Monitored data

UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of
set voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

Technical manual
Control
16.1.7.1 Basic functionality M14832-3 v9
The synchrocheck feature measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to
set limits. The output for closing operation is given when all measured quantities are simultaneously
within their set limits.
The energizing check feature measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high
and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured quantities match the
set conditions.
The synchronizing feature measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also determines
the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the measured slip
frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions are simultaneously within their set
limits. The closing of the output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time needed
for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit operation.
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the
IED centrally and are available for the SESRSYN function for evaluation. By setting the phases used
for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2,
a compensation is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle
difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the breaker. If needed, an
additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.
Some restrictions when using CBConfig selections 1½ bus CB, 1½ bus alt.CB and
Tie CB are described in Table 369 Such restriction are applicable only when a power
transformer is connected in the diameter and VT used for synchrocheck function is
located on the other side of the transformer.
For double bus single circuit breaker and 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, the SESRSYN function
blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For double bus single circuit
breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus
disconnectors. For 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting
parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application
related information, please refer to the application manual.
16.1.7.2 Logic diagrams IP14739-1 v1
M14833-3 v5
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function components
such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to
simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchrocheck M14834-3 v15

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC and
UHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set values
for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA,
PhaseDiffM and U DiffSC. If additional phase angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting,
the adjustment factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle
values.

Technical manual
Control
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than ±5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus
frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for
the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function and
selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of the
function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match
the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOKSC shows
that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the
voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit breaker has been
closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage conditions are fulfilled
at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line is suddenly changed from being
larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.
OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND
invalidSelection AND
OR AUTOSYOK
AND
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA
UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA
1
PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA
UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60° AND
PhDiff < 5°
Figure 238: Simplified logic diagram for the auto synchrocheck function

Technical manual
Control
Synchronizing SEMOD171603-4 v12

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for
UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. Also the
voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of
set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference
between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for
acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange
and phase angle CloseAngleMax.
The measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will
initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent at the
right moment including the set tBreaker time. The calculation of the operation pulse sent in advance
is using the measured SlipFrequency and the set tBreaker time. To prevent incorrect closing pulses,
a maximum closing angle between bus and line is set with CloseAngleMax. Table 368 below shows
the maximum settable value for tBreaker when CloseAngleMax is set to 15 or 30 degrees, at different
allowed slip frequencies for synchronizing. To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing near
a power station, a narrower limit for CloseAngleMax needs to be used.
Table 368: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with different CloseAngleMax values
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) with tBreaker [s] (max settable value) with SlipFrequency [Hz]
CloseAngleMax = 15 degrees [default CloseAngleMax = 30 degrees [max (BusFrequency -
value] value] LineFrequency)
0.040 0.080 1.000
0.050 0.100 0.800
0.080 0.160 0.500
0.200 0.400 0.200
0.400 0.810 0.100
1.000 0.080
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040
At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets.
The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch
time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting
for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function
and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function
where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.

Technical manual
Control
OperationSynch=On
TSTSYNCH
STARTSYN
invalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
BLOCK AND
S
BLKSYNCH OR
R
UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t
UHighLineSynch OR
FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin
tClosePulse
FreqRateChange
AND
fBus&fLine ± 5Hz
tMaxSynch
CloseAngleMax AND
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=Close pulse in advance
FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker
=IEC06000636=5=en=Original.vsd
Figure 239: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Energizing check M14835-3 v12

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the Energizing check
function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead.
This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for bus
energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions
respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will
be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example, can be
connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB,
3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting
tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are
0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function
respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where
the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

Technical manual
Control
manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB 50ms tManEnerg
AND
OR t t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND
ManEnerg BOTH
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND
UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz
Figure 240: Manual energizing
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB 50ms tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND
BOTH
AutoEnerg
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz
Figure 241: Automatic energizing

Technical manual
Control
BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND
ManEnerg
1½ bus CB
CBConfig AND
B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND
LN2QOPEN
1½ bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR
B2QCLD
AND
Tie CB
AND
AND
OR
AND
Figure 242: Open bays
Fuse failure supervision M14837-3 v11

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs
that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals
from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection
possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the
voltage circuit is faulty.
The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the ULN1OK/
ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary
input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line
voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing
and the synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse failure is
needed.
Voltage selection M14836-3 v9

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for the different
arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines the voltages fed to the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the
appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting is also used in the
case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must
also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

Technical manual
Control
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply
Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter for one of the
positions.
If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is allowed, it is
considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for manual energizing in 1½
breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2
CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars M14838-3 v10
The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for single CB and
double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus
2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2
is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs
B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.
The function checks the fuse failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs
UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2.
ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or
healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected
in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the
selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked
with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 243.
B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND
B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND
bus1Voltage busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND
ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR
BLOCK
en05000779-2.vsd
Figure 243: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Technical manual
Control
Voltage selection for a 1½ circuit breaker arrangement M14839-3 v9

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for the complete
diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described.
With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1½ circuit breaker
switchgear is done. The settings are: 1½ bus CB, 1½ alt. bus CB or Tie CB.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers
auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN function. For the bus circuit breaker
one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to
line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the selection of voltage circuit.
Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD

are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The
outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference
to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and with alternative

Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the other side is
connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to
bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is
closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit breaker is
closed.
Some restrictions when using CBConfig selections 1½ bus CB, 1½ bus alt.CB and
Tie CB are described in Table 369. Such restriction are applicable only when a
power transformer is connected in the diameter and VT used for synchrocheck
function is located on the other side of the transformer.
Table 369: Limitations for VT selection regarding selected value for CBConfig
CBConfig setting Possible closing Used GblBaseSel settings PhaseShift setting Conclusion
between has impact on
1½ bus CB Bus1 - Line1 GblBaseSelBus => Bus1 Line1
GblBaseSelLine => Line1
Bus1 - Line2 GblBaseSelBus => Bus1 Line2
Bus1 - Bus2 GblBaseSelBus => Bus1 No impact Bus1 and Bus2 must have
GblBaseSelBus => Bus2 same base voltage.
GblBaseSelLine has no impact PhaseShift setting has no
impact.
1½ bus alt.CB Bus2 - Line2 GblBaseSelBus => Bus2 Line2
impact.

Technical manual
Control
CBConfig setting Possible closing Used GblBaseSel settings PhaseShift setting Conclusion
between has impact on
Tie CB Bus1 - Line2 GblBaseSelBus => Bus1 Line2
impact.
Line1 - Line2 GblBaseSelLine => Line1 Line2 Line1 and Line2 must
GblBaseSelLine => Line2 have same base voltage.
GblBaseSelBus has no affect
The function also checks the fuse failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT failure is
detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the
selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as the function can be blocked with
the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker
is shown in figure 244 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 245.

Technical manual
Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND
line1Voltage lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000780-2.vsd
Figure 244: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

Technical manual
Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND
line1Voltage busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND
line2Voltage lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000781-2.vsd
Figure 245: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement.

M12359-1 v16
Table 370: SESRSYN technical data

Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
Voltage high limit for synchronizing and (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

synchrocheck ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -


Technical manual
Control

Frequency difference limit between bus and (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
line for synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit between bus (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
and line for synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit between bus and line (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
for synchronizing and synchrocheck
Time delay output for synchrocheck when (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
angle difference between bus and line jumps greater
from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” -
2 degrees
Frequency difference minimum limit for (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
synchronizing
Frequency difference maximum limit for (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency rate of change (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Maximum closing angle between bus and (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees
line for synchronizing
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
function if no close has been made before greater
set time
Minimum time to accept synchronizing (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
conditions greater
Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -

Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Time delay for energizing check when (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Urated greater
Operate time for synchrocheck function when Min. = 15 ms –
angle difference between bus and line jumps Max. = 30 ms
from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” -
2 degrees
Operate time for energizing function when Min. = 70 ms –
voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Urated Max. = 90 ms
16.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC IP14559-1 v6

Technical manual
Control
M14890-1 v7
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
5(0 -->1)
The auto recloser (SMBRREC) function provides:
• high-speed and/or delayed auto reclosing

• single and/or three phase auto reclosing
• support for single or multi-breaker applications.
The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar restoration.
Up to five reclosing shots can be performed. The first shot can be single-, two-, and /or three-phase
depending on the type of the fault and the selected auto reclosing mode.
Several auto reclosing functions can be provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit
allows one circuit breaker to reclose first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be
transient.
Each auto reclosing function can be configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck function.
SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
STARTHS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
CBCLOSED PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECB
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE
ABORTED
SYNCFAIL
INHIBOUT
Figure 246: SMBRREC function block

Technical manual
Control
16.2.4 Signals
Table 371: SMBRREC Input signals

ON BOOLEAN 0 Switch AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switch AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Set AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Release AR from blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupt and inhibit reclosing sequence
START BOOLEAN 0 Start reclosing sequence
STARTHS BOOLEAN 0 Start high-speed reclosing without synchrocheck
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from switch-on-to-fault
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Skip high speed shot and continue with delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordinate local AR with down stream devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Two phase trip occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Three phase trip occurred
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Hold AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker is ready
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker status
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal is lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchrocheck conditions are fulfilled
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set reclosing mode (alternative to setting)
Table 372: SMBRREC Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN AR is blocked
SETON BOOLEAN AR is operative
READY BOOLEAN AR is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing is successful
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing is unsuccessful
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing in progress, inactive during reclaim time
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1

Technical manual
Control

PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Single-phase trip is permitted
PREP3P BOOLEAN Three-phase trip is prepared
CLOSECB BOOLEAN Close command for circuit breaker
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Wait signal to slave issued by master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Number of three-phase shot 1 reclosings
COUNTAR INTEGER Number of total reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode
ABORTED BOOLEAN General abort
SYNCFAIL BOOLEAN AR sequence is aborted by synchrocheck conditions not fulfilled
INHIBOUT BOOLEAN AR sequence is aborted via INHIBIT input
16.2.5 Settings
Table 373: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)

On
ExternalCtrl Off - - Off To be set On if AR is to be used with
On external control
t1 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 6.000 Dead time for shot 1, delayed reclosing
with synchrocheck conditions
t1_HS 0.000 - 20.000 s 0.001 0.400 Dead time for shot 1, high speed
reclosing
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 2.00 Maximum wait time for fulfilled
synchrocheck conditions
tLongStartInh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum allowed start pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Circuit breaker closing pulse duration
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Minimum time that circuit breaker must
be closed before new sequence is
allowed
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximun wait time for circuit breaker
closing before indicating unsuccessful
LongStartInhib Off - - On To be set ON if AR is to be used with
On maximum allowed start pulse duration
check

Technical manual
Control
Table 374: SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)

NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Max number of reclosing shots
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - - Off To be set ON if AR is to be started by
On circuit breaker open position
CBReadyType CO - - CO Circuit breaker ready signal type
OCO
t2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Dead time for shot 2
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Reset time for reclosing inhibit
CutPulse Off - - Off Shorten circuit breaker closing pulse at a
On new start
Follow CB Off - - Off Advance to next shot if circuit breaker
On has been closed during dead time
BlockByUnsucCl Off - - Off Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
On
tSuccessful 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Delay time before indicating successful
reclosing
16.2.6.1 Terminology explanation GUID-EA0760DF-8F0B-4146-8A42-3F20E75E1053 v1
Before describing the auto reclosing function it is first necessary to define the following terminology:
• a shot is an attempt from the function to close a circuit breaker

• multi-shot is where more than one shot is attempted
• dead time is the time between a start of the function and the attempt to close the circuit breaker
• reclaim time is the time from the circuit breaker closing command till the reset of the function,
should the auto reclosing attempt be successful and no new start is received
• high-speed shot is generally used for an application where the dead time is less than 1 second
and synchrocheck is not required
• delayed auto reclosing is generally regarded as an application where the dead time is greater
than 1 second and where typically synchrocheck is required
• sequence is the auto reclosing cycle beginning with start and ending with successful,
unsuccessful or aborted reclosing as a result
• status is the state which the auto reclosing function have reached in the sequence
16.2.6.2 Status descriptions GUID-AFC069D6-ADA5-4D97-9699-8C9F058458EB v1
The auto reclosing function can be in one of the following five statuses:
“Inactive” GUID-BF80C969-FCBE-4CAB-BF71-9590A2DB433C v1
The auto recloser is in “inactive” status when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the auto recloser is set to On and

Technical manual
Control
• either the circuit breaker is not closed

• or the circuit breaker is not ready
The function will not react on any start from protection trips while in “inactive” status and no
automatic reclosing is possible.
“Ready” GUID-04F154EC-E236-40A4-A3E0-7624A2F6B132 v1
The function is in “ready” status when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the circuit breaker is ready

• the circuit breaker must have been closed for more that the set time in setting: tCBClosedMin
• the function is not in “blocked” status
• the function is not in “in progress” status
Only in “ready” status a start of the auto reclosing sequence is possible.
“In progress” GUID-24F8890F-A8FA-4A6F-B9E8-08BDB17B9A0D v1

The function is in “in progress” status when the following condition is fulfilled:
• the auto reclosing sequence is started
Start can be initiated by either protection trip command or circuit breaker position change. The
second starting alternative is only possible when enabled by a setting.
In “in progress” status the dead time starts and the status ceases when the dead time expires. Then
circuit breaker close command is given and the function changes its state into the "reclaim time"
status.
“Reclaim time” GUID-D838C380-C74B-498C-82D6-3364E2F6BA22 v1

The auto recloser is in “reclaim time” status while the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the reclaim time has not yet expired

• the status is not interrupted by either a new start signal or a block signal
A new start signal during “reclaim time” status forces the function to proceed to next shot and change
state into “in progress” status, as long as the last shot is not reached.
“Blocked” GUID-9C38B1BE-3772-49AE-B4B3-391CE15D5CD2 v1
The function is in “blocked” status when an external blocking signal exists. No auto reclosing is
possible in “blocked” status. Only an external signal for cancellation of the blocking can cancel this
status.
16.2.6.3 Description of the status transition GUID-C12DF571-AC0D-4A04-9B9E-D53E15A24331 v1
From Table 375 below it is possible to see which status transitions are possible. When the auto
recloser is for instance in “inactive” status only two transition are possible:
• transition to “ready” status when the circuit breaker is ready and closed
• transition to “blocked” status by external blocking
The empty cells in the table indicate that no such transition is possible.

Technical manual
Control
Table 375: Status transition matrix
To → inactive ready in progress reclaim time blocked

From ↓ (dead time)
inactive activate activate BLKON
CBCLOSED and
CBREADY
ready deactivate activate START activate BLKON
CBCLOSED or or activate
CBREADY or STARTHS
activate INHIBIT
or RESET
in progress activate INHIBIT when activate BLKON
(dead time) or RESET CBCLOSED
issued
reclaim time activate RESET activate START activate BLKON
or INHIBIT and the last shot
has not been
reached yet
blocked deactivate activate
CBCLOSED or BLKOFF and
CBREADY and CBCLOSED and
activate BLKOFF CBREADY
16.2.6.4 Functional sequence description GUID-C73A160D-330B-4627-B8F0-A31C9B3F7417 v1
To comprehend this chapter better it is essential to first read chapters “Status descriptions“ and
“Description of the status transition” carefully.
The logic for most of the explained inputs, outputs, settings and internal signals, described in this
chapter, is shown in Figure 252. Other figures mentioned are in some way connected or cooperate
with Figure 252.
Before going into details in the following chapters, the short functional/feature summary is given
below.
The auto reclosing function is multi-shot capable and suitable for both high-speed and delayed auto
reclosing. The function can be set to perform a single-shot, two-shot, three-shot, four-shot or five-
shot reclosing sequence. Dead times for all shots can be set independently.
An auto recloser sequence can be initiated by:
• protection operation
• circuit breaker operation (when enabled by setting StartByCBOpen=On)
At the end of the dead time, provided that other conditions are fulfilled, a circuit breaker close
command signal is given. The other conditions to be fulfilled are:
• input signal SYNC is true, which typically indicates that power systems on the two sides of the
circuit breaker are in synchronism
• and that input signal CBREADY is true, typically indicating that circuit breaker springs are
charged.
If a circuit breaker close command is given successfully at the end of the dead time, a reclaim time
starts. If the circuit breaker does not trip again within reclaim time, the auto recloser indicates a
successful reclosing and resets into "ready" status. If the protection trips again during the reclaim
time, the sequence advances to the next shot. If all reclosing attempts have been made and the
circuit breaker does not remain closed, the auto recloser indicates an unsuccessful reclosing. Each
time a breaker close command is given, a shot counter is incremented by one.

Technical manual
Control
Operation Off and On GUID-D868C9CF-CDB1-48AA-8B31-60C447FBD1D3 v1

The auto recloser can be switched Off or On with a setting or by external control inputs. With the
setting Operation = On, the auto recloser is activated and with the setting Operation = Off it is
deactivated. With the settings Operation = On and ExternalCtrl = On, the activation and deactivation
is made by signal pulses to the ON and OFF inputs, for example, from a control system or by a
control switch.
If the input conditions CBCLOSED and CBREADY, from the circuit breaker, are not fulfilled while
switching the auto recloser on, the auto recloser changes into “inactive” status and the output
SETON is activated (high). The auto recloser is not ready for auto reclosing. If, however, the circuit
breaker is closed and ready when switching the auto recloser on, the output READY is activated and
the function is prepared to start the auto reclosing cycle. The circuit breaker must have been closed
for at least the set value for setting tCBClosedMin before a start is accepted. The logic for Off or On
operation is shown in Figure 247.
Operation
AND OR S SETON
ExternalCtrl
R
ON AND
OR
OFF AND
StartByCBOpen
START AND
STARTHS AND
100ms OR
AND OR initiate
100ms
AND
TRSOTF
startThermal AND
CBReady
120ms
CBREADY OR S
t AND start
AND
AND
tCBClosedMin R
CBCLOSED
t
cbClosed AND
count0 AND READY
inhibit
OR
INHIBIT
Figure 247: Simplified logic for Operation Off/On and starting
Mode selection GUID-25A24DC8-80C8-4C42-A084-D25712049F06 v1

The auto reclosing mode is selected with the setting ARMode. As an alternative to the setting, the
mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function block B16I, to the
MODEINT input. The six possible modes are described in Table 376 below with their corresponding
MODEINT integer value.
When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected setting ARMode will be invalid
and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode is reported as an integer on
the MODE output.

Technical manual
Control
Please note that tripping mode of the IED is defined in Trip Logic function block SMPPTRC. For
example for two-phase faults either 2ph or 3ph tripping and consequent auto reclosing can be
selected
Table 376: Type of reclosing shots at different settings of “ARMode” or integer inputs to "MODEINT"
MODEINT (Integer) ARMode Type of fault 1st shot 2nd - 5th shot
1ph 3ph 3ph
1 3ph 2ph 3ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
2 1/2/3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
3 1/2ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph - -
1ph 1ph 3ph
4 1ph+1x2ph 2ph 2ph -
3ph - -
1ph 1ph 3ph
5 1/2ph+1x3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph –
1ph 1ph 3ph
6 1ph+1x2/3ph 2ph 2ph -
3ph 3ph -
Auto reclosing shots GUID-817797BE-FAFC-4BC7-B288-F19416459DCE v1

A maximum of five auto reclosing shots can be selected with the setting NoOfShots. Every shot has
its own dead time setting.
The first shot differs from the other shots by the possibility to extend its dead time and to utilize up to
four different time settings for it.
For the first shot, there are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase dead times, t1 1Ph, t1
2Ph and t1 3Ph. If only the START input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program with single-
phase reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the TR2P or
TR3P inputs is activated in in parallel with the START input, the auto reclosing dead time for either
two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used.
There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto reclosing, t1 3PhHS.
This high-speed auto reclosing is activated by the STARTHS input and is used when auto reclosing
is done without the requirement of synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled. The high-speed dead time
shall be set shorter than normal first shot three-phase dead time. Note that if high-speed three-phase
shot is not successful the auto reclosing sequence will continue with shot two.
A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time delay for the first shot. It is
intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a
case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends, where
a longer auto reclosing dead time can be useful. This time extension is controlled by the setting
Extended t1 and the PLCLOST input. The logic for control of extended dead time is shown in
Figure248 and Figure 252. Time extension delay is not possible to add to the three-phase high-
speed auto reclosing dead time, t1 3PhHS.

Technical manual
Control
Extended t1
AND extendTime
PLCLOST
OR
initiate AND
AND
start
Figure 248: Control of extended dead time

Shots 2 to 5 are all three-phase shots and have only one corresponding time setting each, t2 3Ph, t3
3Ph, t4 3Ph and t5 3Ph.
Starting auto reclosing GUID-7794EA6E-7D73-46BD-A623-65DED8E45D05 v1

When a start is applied to the auto function, it status will change from “ready” status to “in progress”
status. When the dead time has expired, the close command is issued and the reclaim time is started
and the “in progress” status will change to “reclaim time” status.
The usual way to start a reclosing sequence, is to start it when a selective line protection tripping has
occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. If the auto reclosing mode with only three-phase
reclosing is selected, activation of the START input will start the three-phase dead timer. When
alternatively the START input signal is applied, and an auto reclosing mode with single-phase
reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time for single-phase is used. However if one of the
TR2P or TR3P inputs is activated in connection with the START input, the auto reclosing dead time
for two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used. The STARTHS input (start high-speed
reclosing) can also be used to start a separate, high-speed three-phase dead time in which case the
synchrocheck condition will be bypassed.
To start a new auto reclosing cycle, a number of conditions of input signals need to be fulfilled. The
inputs are:
• CBREADY: circuit breaker is ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear.
• CBCLOSED: to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed when the line fault occurred and start
was applied. The CBCLOSED condition must be present for more that the settable time
tCBClosedMin.
• no BLKON or INHIBIT signal is present.
When the start has been accepted, the internal signals “start” and “initiate” are set. The internal
signal “start” is latched and the internal signal “initiate” follows the length of the signal on the START
input. The latched signal “start” can be interrupted by a signal to the INHIBIT input.
The simplified logic is shown in Figure 247.
The auto recloser is normally started by selective tripping. It is either a zone 1 or communication
aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the auto recloser must be blocked, via the
INHIBIT input, from all back-up tripping. The breaker failure function must always be connected to
inhibit the auto recloser. START makes a first shot with synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled,
STARTHS makes its first shot without any fulfilled synchrocheck conditions. The TRSOTF “trip by
switch onto fault” input starts shots 2 to 5. It may be connected to the “switch onto fault” output of line
protection if multi-shot auto reclosing is used.
In normal circumstances, the auto recloser is started with a protection trip command which resets
quickly due to fault clearing. In case the start signal lasts for a too long time, the user can set a
maximum start pulse duration tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by setting
LongStartInhib. When the start pulse duration signal is longer than the set maximum start pulse
duration, the auto reclosing sequence will be interrupted in the same way as if the INHIBIT input was
set to true. The logic for the control of long start pulse duration is shown in Figure 249.

Technical manual
Control
LongStartInhib
start
AND
tLongStartInh
initiate
t
longStartInhibit
OR
Extended t1 AND
t13PhExtTimeout
Figure 249: Control of long start pulse duration

If the user wants to start the auto recloser from circuit breaker open position instead of the protection
trip signals, this starting mode is selected by enabling a setting StartByCBOpen. Typically, a circuit
breaker auxiliary contact of type normally open (NO) shall be connected to the CBCLOSED and
START inputs. Then the circuit breaker status change from closed to open will generate an auto
reclosing start pulse of limited length (100ms) subject to the usual auto recloser checks. The auto
reclosing sequence continues then as usual. Signals from manual tripping and other functions, which
shall prevent auto reclosing, need to be connected to the INHIBIT input. The logic for start from
circuit breaker open position is shown in Figure 247.
The function can also be set to proceed to the next reclosing shot (if selected) even if the external
start signal is not received but the breaker is still not closed. The user can set a required time delay
for the auto recloser to proceed without a new start with setting tAutoContWait. Also the
synchrocheck conditions not fulfilled will also make the auto recloser to proceed to next shot. This
automatic proceeding of shots is controlled by setting AutoContinue and is shown in figure 250.
tAutoContWait
t
AND
commandCloseCB
AND S
R
OR
AND
OR
cbClosed AND autoInitiate
synchroCheckOK
AutoContinue
Figure 250: Automatic proceeding of shots
Blocking, resetting and inhibiting auto reclosing GUID-82719FE0-02E4-48FB-9685-2146480F3653 v1

The BLKON input is used to block the auto recloser for example, when certain special service
conditions arise. The auto recloser can also be blocked by an unsuccessful reclosing attempt. This is
controlled by the setting BlockByUnsucCl. When the auto recloser is blocked it immediately resets to
its initial conditions and the ACTIVE output is unactivated. The BLOCKED output indicates that the
auto recloser is blocked. To unblock the auto recloser the BLKOFF input must be activated.
The RESET input is used to reset the auto recloser to its initial conditions. When initial starting
conditions are fulfilled again, after a reset, the auto recloser is ready for a new reclosing sequence.
If the INHIBIT input is activated it is reported on the INHIBOUT output. To ensure reliable interruption
and temporary blocking of the auto recloser a reset time delay tInhibit is used. The auto recloser will

Technical manual
Control
be blocked the time set in tInhibit after the deactivation of the INHIBIT input. The following internal
inhibit signals are also affected by the setting tInhibit:
• inhibitWaitForMaster: after expiration of the tWaitForMaster time for the WAIT input to reset, the
reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited.
• longStartInhibit: if start pulse duration is longer than the tLongStartInh time, the reclosing cycle
is inhibited.
The ABORTED output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited while it was in one of following
internal states:
• inProgress: auto recloser is started and dead time is in progress.

• reclaimTimeStarted: the circuit breaker closing command has started the reclaim timer.
• wait: an auto recloser, acting as slave, is waiting for a release from the master to proceed with
its own reclosing sequence.
The SYNCFAIL output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited because the synchrocheck or
energizing check condition has not been fulfilled within the set time interval, tSync. The ABORTED
output will also be activated.
The behavior of the functionality described above is described in Table 377 and Table 378 below.
Table 377: BLKON, BLKOFF, RESET, INHIBIT and SYNC behavior when the function is in "ready" status
Output → READY ACTIVE BLOCKED INHIBOUT ABORTED SYNCFAIL

Input ↓
None of below True False False False False False
inputs
activated
BLKON pulse False False True False False False
BLKOFF pulse True False False False False False
RESET pulse False False False False False False
INHIBIT pulse False False False True False False
SYNC True False False False False False
Table 378: BLKON, BLKOFF, RESET, INHIBIT and SYNC behavior when the function is in "in progress" status
Output → READY ACTIVE BLOCKED INHIBOUT ABORTED SYNCFAIL

Input ↓
None of below False True False False False False
inputs
activated
BLKON pulse False False True False False False
BLKOFF pulse True False False False False False
RESET pulse False False False False False False
INHIBIT pulse False False False True True False
No SYNC False False False False True True
Auto reclosing sequence GUID-78AAE7CD-702E-407B-94D2-6A70BAFC8E70 v1

When the function has started and the dead time has elapsed during the auto reclosing sequence,
certain conditions must be fulfilled before the circuit breaker closing command is issued. In three-
phase reclosing, a synchrocheck and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a
synchrocheck function in the same physical device or an external one. The synchrocheck release
signal shall be connected to the auto reclosing SYNC input. If reclosing without synchrocheck is
preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high) permanently. The synchrocheck release
signal is not checked for single-phase or two-phase auto reclosing. When a three-phase high-speed

Technical manual
Control
reclosing started by STARTHS input, synchronization is not checked either, and the state of the
SYNC input is disregarded. The SYNC input shall be true within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not,
the auto reclosing is interrupted and the SYNCFAIL and ABORTED outputs are activated.
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (circuit breaker ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of
the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the circuit breaker closing command. If the circuit
breaker has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (circuit breaker ready for an Open-
Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be fulfilled during the dead time and at the moment of
auto reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the auto
reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the circuit breaker is prepared for a Close-Open sequence.
The reclaim timer, tReclaim, is started each time a circuit breaker closing command is given. If no
start occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. A new start received in “reclaim time” status
will move the auto recloser to “in progress” status and next shot as long as the final shot is not
reached. The auto recloser will reset and enter “inactive” status if a new start is given during the final
reclaim time. This will also happen if the circuit breaker has not been closed within set time interval
tUnsucCl after each circuit breaker close command. The latter case is controlled by setting
UnsucClByCBChk. The auto reclosing sequence is considered unsuccessful for both above cases
and the UNSUCCL output is activated.
If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is closed within the set time
interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the set time interval tSuccessful. The logic for
successful and unsuccessful reclosing indication is shown in Figure 251.
initiate
reclaimTimeStarted AND
OR
AND UNSUCCL
OR tUnsucCl S
AND t unsuccessful
cbClosed
AND
UnsucClByCBChk
count0
OR R
tUnsucCl tSuccessful
AND SUCCL
commandCloseCB t AND S t
R
OR
Figure 251: Successful/Unsuccessful

Figure 252 shows the logic for most parts of an auto reclosing sequence. Figure 252 should be read
together with the other logic diagrams to get the whole picture.

Technical manual
ZoneSeqCoord
ZONESTEP AND
MODEINT MODE
start ARMode
initiate inProgress
TR2P and INPROGR
TR3P NoOfShots 1PT1
startThermal OR 2PT1
Technical manual
selection 3PT1
Dead time
reclaimTimeStarted 3PT2
Bay control REC670

tExtended t1 tExtended t1 is 3PT3
extendTime inhibitThermalStart
1MRK 511 402-UEN Rev. N
t added to t1 1Ph 3PT4

or t1 2ph or t1 3Ph 3PT5
SKIPHS Skips high-speed shot (t1 3PhHS) and PREP3P
continues with delayed shot (t1 3Ph) AND tReclaim PERMIT1P
AND t 1
t1 1Ph OR
t1 2Ph OR
Dead t1 3PhHS AND
t13PhExtTimeout
time inhibit
The outputs are:

t1 3PH OR OR
settings t2 3PH synchroCheckOK
t3 3PH OR BlockByUnsucCl
t4 3PH AND
t5 3PH unsuccessful AND ACTIVE
1
Figure 252: Auto reclosing sequence

t OR OR
AND S
tSlaveDeadTime AND
slaveDeadTime sets every dead timer R
t BLOCKED
to tSlaveDeadTime
tSync
SYNC AND t SYNCFAIL
inProgress AND
reclaimTimeStarted OR
CBReadyType wait AND ABORTED
CB OR
AND
readiness
AND inhibitWaitForMaster tInhibit
CBReady check t
OR
longStartInhibit count0
OR Counter COUNT1P
inhibitThermalStart COUNT2P
CutPulse inProgress COUNT3P1
AND Set COUNT3P2
OR COUNT3P3
OR COUNT3P4
AND
AND COUNT3P5
Reset COUNTAR
tPulse
Follow CB CLOSECB
OR
AND AND
cbClosed

50ms commandCloseCB
RSTCOUNT
RESET
BLKON
BLKOFF
INHIBIT INHIBOUT
A number of outputs from the function keeps track of the actual state in the auto reclosing sequence.
507
Control
Section 16
Control
• INPROGR: any dead time is in progress

• 1PT1, 2PT1, 3PT1, 3PT2, 3PT3, 3PT4 and 3PT5: dead time is in progress for respective shot
and fault type
• ACTIVE: during dead time + reclaim time
• COUNTAR: total number of auto reclosing shots
• COUNT1P, COUNT2P, COUNT3P1, COUNT3P2, COUNT3P3, COUNT3P4 and COUNT3P5:
number of circuit breaker close commands made for respective shot
• STATUS: reports, only through the IEC 61850 protocol, the actual status of the function.
The possible statuses are described in Table 379 below. Their mapping to output signals and their
corresponding IEC 61850 integer value is also given in the table. Mapping from IEC 61850 Ed2
standard is also shown for the AutoRecSt data object.
Table 379: Auto reclosing status reported by IEC 61850 in priority order
Data object AutoRecSt Description for mapped Mapped output signals / Description in IEC61850
value signals Comments Ed2
1 Ready READY Ready
2 In Progress INPROGR In Progress
3 Successful SUCCL Successful
4 Waiting for trip
5 Trip issued by protection
6 Fault disappeared
7 Wait to complete CLOSECB Wait to complete
8 Circuit breaker closed
9 Cycle unsuccessful UNSUCCL
10
-1 Aborted by synchrocheck SYNCFAIL
fail
11 Aborted ABORTED Aborted
-2 Set On, Not Ready SETON = 1, READY = 0,
ACTIVE = 0, SUCCL = 0,
UNSUCC = 0, INPROG =
0
-3 Set Off, Not Ready SETON = 0
-99 Others Means that auto recloser is
in transitional state, that
should not be visible in
steady state situation
There are several counters within the function. One for each shot and type of fault and one overall
counter for total number of circuit breaker closing commands. All counters can be reset to zero using
either the HMI command or the RSTCOUNT input or by an IEC 61850 command.
The circuit breaker closing command, CLOSECB output is a pulse with settable duration by setting
tPulse. For circuit breakers without anti-pumping function, close pulse cutting can be used. This is
controlled by the setting CutPulse. In case of a new auto recloser start pulse, the breaker closing
command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the closing pulse is always 50ms.
The prepare three-phase trip, PREP3P output is usually connected to the trip function SMPPTRC to
force the coming trip to be three-phase. If the auto recloser cannot make a single-phase or two-
phase reclosing, the start from the trip function should be three-phase.
The permit single-phase trip, PERMIT1P output is the inverse of the PREP3P output. It can be
connected to a binary output relay for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of a
total loss of auxiliary power, the output relay drops and does not allow single-phase trip.

Technical manual
Control
The setting Follow CB can be used to prevent close command to be issued when dead time has
expired and circuit breaker is already closed (e.g. by manual close command). If a new start is
received after the dead time expiration the auto recloser will advance to next shot.
If input SKIPHS is activated, and simultaneously STARTHS input is initiated then actually normal
three-phase shot one with dead time "t1 3Ph" will be started.
The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers and down stream
auto reclosers is needed. If function is in "ready" status and this input is activated the auto recloser
increases its actual shot number by one and enters directly the “reclaim time” status for shot one. If a
start is received during the reclaim time, the function will proceed with the next shot (e.g. starting
dead time for shot two). Every new pulse on the ZONESTEP input will further increase the shot
number. Note that ZONESTEP input will have such effect only if local start signal was not activated,
as shown in Figure 252. The setting NoOfShots limits of course the maximum number of available
shots. This functionality is controlled by the setting ZoneSeqCoord.
By activating the THOLHOLD input the auto recloser is set on hold. It can be connected to a thermal
overload protection trip signal which resets only when the thermal content has fallen to an acceptable
level, for example, 70%. As long as the signal is high, indicating that the line is hot, the auto reclosing
is halted. When the signal resets, a reclosing cycle will continue. This may cause a considerable
delay between start of the auto recloser and the breaker closing command. An external logic limiting
this time and activating the INHIBIT input can be used. The THOLHOLD input can also be used to
set the auto recloser on hold, for longer or shorter time periods, for other purposes if for some reason
the auto recloser needs to be halted. The logic for thermal protection hold is shown in Figure 253.
start inhibitThermalStart
THOLHOLD AND AND S
q-1 20ms
startThermal
AND
inhibit OR
Figure 253: Thermal protection hold

The auto recloser is set as master or slave in multi-breaker arrangements with sequential reclosing
with the setting Priority. The auto recloser for the first circuit breaker, e.g. near the busbar, is set as
master (when Priority=High) and the auto recloser for the second circuit breaker is set as slave
(when Priority=Low). While the master is in progress, it issues the WFMASTER output. After an
unsuccessful reclosing the WFMASTER output is also maintained by the UNSUCCL output.
When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave, every dead timer is changed to the
value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the auto reclosing operation. When the WAIT input
is reset at the time of a successful reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is released to
continue the reclosing sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for shortening the time,
for the normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give the slave permission to react
almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The mimimum settable time for tSlaveDeadTime is
0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the breaker closing command at the same
time. The slave should take the duration of the breaker closing time of the master into consideration
before sending the breaker closing command. A setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time
for the WAIT input to reset. If the wait time expires, the reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. The
maximum wait time, tWaitForMaster for the second circuit breaker is set longer than the auto
reclosing dead time plus a margin for synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled for the first circuit
breaker. Typical setting is 2sec. In single circuit breaker applications, the setting Priority is set to
None. The logic for master-slave is shown in Figure 254.

Technical manual
Control
Master:
High (Master)
Priority
WFMASTER
inProgress AND
unsuccessful OR
Slave:
Low (Slave)
Priority
inhibitWaitForMaster
AND
start tWaitForMaster
AND t
WAIT
wait
AND slaveDeadTime
AND S
inhibit
commandCloseCB R
OR
reclaimTimeStarted
Figure 254: Master-Slave

If reclosing of the first circuit breaker is unsuccessful, the UNSUCCL output connected to the INHIBIT
input of the slave unit interrupts the reclosing sequence of the latter. The signals can be cross-
connected to allow simple changing of the priority by just setting the High and the Low priorities
without changing the configuration. The CBCLOSED inputs from each circuit breaker are important in
multi-breaker arrangements to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed at the beginning of the
sequence. If the High priority breaker was not closed its auto reclosing sequence will not start and
the low priority breaker will just continue its auto reclosing sequence in accordance with its normal
settings.
16.2.6.5 Time sequence diagrams M12458-10 v5
Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and permanent faults
are shown below in Figure 255 to 258.

Technical manual
Control
Fault
CBCLOSED
Closed Open Closed
CBREADY
START
SYNC
tReclaim
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
ACTIVE
CLOSECB t1 1Ph tPulse
PREP3P
SUCCL
Time
Figure 255: Transient single-phase fault, single-phase reclosing
Fault
CBCLOSED Open
Closed Open C C
CBREADY
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1 t1 3Ph
3PT2 t2 3Ph
ACTIVE tReclaim
CLOSECB tPulse tPulse
PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
Figure 256: Permanent fault, three-phase trip, two-shot reclosing

Technical manual
Control
Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
3PT1
3PT2
CLOSECB t1 1Ph
PREP3P
UNSUCCL tReclaim
Figure 257: Permanent single-phase fault, single-phase trip, single-shot reclosing,

ARMode=1/2/3ph
Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
3PT1
3PT2
t2 3Ph
CLOSECB t1 1Ph
PREP3P
UNSUCCL tReclaim
Figure 258: Permanent single-phase fault, single-phase trip, two-shot reclosing, ARMode=1ph
+ 1*2ph

Technical manual
Control

M12379-1 v14
Table 380: SMBRREC technical data

Dead time:
shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater
shot 1 “t1 3Ph “
shot 1 “t1 3PhHS”
Dead time: (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 2 “t2 3Ph” whichever is greater
shot 3 “t3 3Ph”
shot 4 “t4 3Ph”
shot 5 “t5 3Ph”
Extend three-phase dead time duration “tExtended t1” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before new (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
sequence is allowed “tCBClosedMin” whichever is greater
Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has reset (0.100-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
“tSlaveDeadTime” whichever is greater
Maximum allowed start pulse duration “tLongStartInh” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Circuit breaker closing pulse duration “tPulse” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Reclaim time ”tReclaim” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Maximum wait time for release from master “tWaitForMaster” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Reset time for reclosing inhibit “tInhibit” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
Wait time after close command before proceeding to next (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
shot “tAutoContWait” whichever is greater
Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
“tSync” whichever is greater
Delay time before indicating successful reclosing (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±50 ms
“tSuccessful” whichever is greater
Maximum wait time for circuit breaker closing before (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
indicating unsuccessful “tUnsucCl” whichever is greater
16.3 Interlocking IP15572-1 v2
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for
instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental
human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the
interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not dependent on any central
function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard
wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system at any given
time.

Technical manual
Control
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is
distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different
bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that
might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates.
This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might
influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the
operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of
all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere
with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the
control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module
is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker
or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections
between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure
259.
Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module
Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Figure 259: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following:
• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid
Figure 260 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Technical manual
Control
Station bus
Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn
...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay
..
WA1
WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2
QA1 QA1 QA1
QB9 QB9
en05000494.vsd
Figure 260: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error are used
as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be
given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in
cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches are
always identical.
• Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches, are normally
interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with
reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included
into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the
appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when
operating.
• Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without load/voltage.
Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the status of the circuit
breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors
in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the
disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be
operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other
closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally
in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing switch on the other side of the
transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in
progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested
software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available:
• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC

Technical manual
Control
• Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES

• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
• 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by adding
configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the
interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of
information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for
transfer to other bays.
16.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO IP14138-1 v2
16.3.3.1 Identification
GUID-3EC5D7F1-FDA0-4F0E-9391-08D357689E0C v3

Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3
16.3.3.2 Functionality M15048-3 v7
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching operation if the
interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality.
The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking
logic.
16.3.3.3 Function block M15049-3 v6
SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
Figure 261: SCILO function block
16.3.3.4 Signals
Table 381: SCILO Input signals

POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Technical manual
Control
Table 382: SCILO Output signals

EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking
conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position for example, open,
then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN
and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if
they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The
outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching
device is needed.
POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
Figure 262: SCILO function logic diagram
16.3.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES IP14164-1 v4
GUID-F3CBAFDC-3723-429F-9183-45229A6F0A12 v3

Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar earthing switch
on any busbar parts according to figure 263.

Technical manual
Control
QC
en04000504.vsd
Figure 263: Switchyard layout BB_ES
BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB
Figure 264: BB_ES function block
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1
QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
16.3.4.5 Signals
Table 383: BB_ES Input signals

QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part
Table 384: BB_ES Output signals

QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

Technical manual
Control
16.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS IP14154-1 v2
GUID-29EF1F25-E10A-4C82-A6B7-FA246D9C6CD2 v3

Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-section circuit
breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 265. The function can be used for different
busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2
QA1
QC3 QC4
en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
Figure 265: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

Technical manual
Control
A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
Figure 266: A1A2_BS function block
A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000542.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd
16.3.5.5 Signals
Table 385: A1A2_BS Input signals

QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1

Technical manual
Control

QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
Table 386: A1A2_BS Output signals

QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
16.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC IP14159-1 v2
GUID-0A0229EB-5ECD-405C-B706-6A54CBBDB49D v3

Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

Technical manual
Control
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one bus-section
disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 267. A1A2_DC function can be used for
different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1 QC2
A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd
Figure 267: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3
Figure 268: A1A2_DC function block

Technical manual
Control
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3
en04000544.vsd
16.3.6.5 Signals
Table 387: A1A2_DC Input signals

QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position

Technical manual
Control

S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB
Table 388: A1A2_DC Output signals

QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)
16.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC IP14144-1 v2
GUID-8149EE0A-E2A4-431C-9D07-D1A0BD296743 v3

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 269. The function can also be used for a single
busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

Technical manual
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
en04000514.vsd
Figure 269: Switchyard layout ABC_BC
ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
Figure 270: ABC_BC function block

Technical manual
Control
ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000534.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000535.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2
en04000536.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd
16.3.7.5 Signals
Table 389: ABC_BC Input signals

QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position

Technical manual
Control

BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
Table 390: ABC_BC Output signals

QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden

Technical manual
Control

QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid
16.3.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH IP14173-1 v3
GUID-03F1A3BB-4A1E-49E8-88C6-10B3876F64DA v4

Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A, BH_LINE_B) functions are
used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter according to figure 271.

Technical manual
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1
QA1 QA1
QC2 QC2
QB6 QB6
QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B
QB61 QA1 QB62
QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9
BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
Figure 271: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

M13570-7 v4
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the
connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the
diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard layout.

Technical manual
Control
16.3.8.3 Function blocks IP14412-1 v1
M13574-3 v6
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
Figure 272: BH_LINE_A function block

Technical manual
Control
M13578-3 v6
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
Figure 273: BH_LINE_B function block

M13582-3 v6
BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
Figure 274: BH_CONN function block

Technical manual
Control
M13577-1 v5
BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

Technical manual
Control
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000555.vsd

Technical manual
Control
CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000558.vsd
CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd
16.3.8.5 Signals
Table 391: BH_LINE_A Input signals

QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position

Technical manual
Control

CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11

Technical manual
Control
Table 392: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Table 393: BH_LINE_B Input signals

QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

Technical manual
Control

CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
Table 394: BH_LINE_B Output signals


Technical manual
Control

Table 395: BH_CONN Input signals

1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
Table 396: BH_CONN Output signals

16.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB IP14167-1 v2

Technical manual
Control
GUID-D6D10255-2818-44E4-A44E-DF623161C486 v3

Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B
and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement according to
figure 275.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4
QA1 QA2
DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5
QB61 QB62
QC3
QB9
DB_LINE
QC9
en04000518.vsd
Figure 275: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Technical manual
Control
M15105-1 v4
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000547.vsd
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

Technical manual
Control
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
en04000552.vsd
VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

Technical manual
Control
DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
& en04000549.vsd
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd
16.3.9.4 Function block IP14391-1 v1
M13591-3 v6
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
Figure 276: DB_BUS_A function block

M15107-3 v6
DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
Figure 277: DB_LINE function block

Technical manual
Control
M13596-3 v6
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
Figure 278: DB_BUS_B function block
16.3.9.5 Signals
Table 397: DB_BUS_A Input signals


Technical manual
Control
Table 398: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Table 399: DB_BUS_B Input signals


Technical manual
Control
Table 400: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Table 401: DB_LINE Input signals

VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure

Technical manual
Control

Table 402: DB_LINE Output signals

16.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE IP14139-1 v2
GUID-BEA26EA4-F402-4385-9238-1361E862D987 v3

Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 279. The function can also be used for a
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without
transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9
en04000478.vsd
Figure 279: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

Technical manual
Control
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4
Figure 280: ABC_LINE function block

Technical manual
Control
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2
en04000527.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1EX3
en04000528.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000529.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd

Technical manual
Control
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd
16.3.10.5 Signals
Table 403: ABC_LINE Input signals

BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open

Technical manual
Control

BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
Table 404: ABC_LINE Output signals


Technical manual
Control

16.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO IP14149-1 v2
GUID-AD839CAA-531B-43BC-B508-39AED3D0A97D v3

Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer bay connected
to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 281. The function is used when there is no
disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay
(ABC_LINE) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

Technical manual
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1
QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2
QC3
QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking
QB3 QB4
en04000515.vsd
Figure 281: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
Figure 282: AB_TRAFO function block

Technical manual
Control
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1
en04000538.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000539.vsd

Technical manual
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000540.vsd
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd
16.3.11.5 Signals
Table 405: AB_TRAFO Input signals


Technical manual
Control

QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
Table 406: AB_TRAFO Output signals


Technical manual
Control

16.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL GUID-F20A8939-E91E-44F6-920C-083E5D3FCDFD v2
GUID-3C4B9379-C861-406C-9295-0309014D548E v2

Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -
16.3.12.2 Functionality GUID-C3D07B40-FF01-45C5-A083-EED5643A5FCC v4
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal POSITION,
consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
16.3.12.3 Function block GUID-B5EF4A28-9C9F-4558-8CD6-453FB480314B v2
POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Figure 283: POS_EVAL function block
16.3.12.4 Logic diagram GUID-F0EF8D38-031B-4A8E-BD7D-60314F5DCD59 v2
POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN-US
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS

0 (Breaker intermediate) Good 0 0
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

Technical manual
Control
16.3.12.5 Signals
Table 407: POS_EVAL Input signals

POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality
Table 408: POS_EVAL Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position
16.4 Apparatus control IP14560-1 v3
16.4.1 Function revision history GUID-CC62CA75-201A-4C5D-9FD4-89DBFD56F97C v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.2 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 The command response for the command to move to the current is changed by
selecting the parameter PosDependent. This action decides if it is allowed. The
response if allowed is now successful.
L 2.2.5 SXCBR & SXSWI: Execution outputs follow the operation request inputs. If not
blocked, output is maintained active until operation request input is deactivated.
Changes are valid for all 2.2 releases.
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of
conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and
external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications

Technical manual
Control
• Overriding of interlocking functions

• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position
Two types of command models can be used:
• Direct with normal security

• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an additional supervision
of the status value of the control object. The command sequence with enhanced security is always
terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command was
successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so defined.
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The
different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control functions
directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation
system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the interaction and status of
each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control
functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one
function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the control of a
breaker or a disconnector are almost the same, the same function block type is used to handle these
two types of apparatuses.
The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for circuit breakers) or to
an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing switches). The physical process in the
switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary inputs and outputs.
Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the
bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard
configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These types are:
• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle the
local/remote switch. The functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the
reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function.
The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and setting parameters for all
these functions are described below.
16.4.4 Error handling GUID-6C31D291-74E8-46A3-8FC2-D3959C2458A5 v9
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a
value. Table 409 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation to AddCause
values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 410. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only

Technical manual
Control
addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes
are used. The values are available in the command response to commands from IE C61850-8-1
clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker
(SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the value of the cause during the latest command if
the function specific command evaluation has been started. The causes that are not always reflected
on the output L_CAUSE, with description of the typical reason are listed in table 411.
Table 409: Values for "cause" signal
Cause Name Description Supported

number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready state X
2 Blocked-by-switching- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches like X
hierarchy in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) X
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos in X
XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or X
XSWI)
6 Parameter-change-in- Control action is blocked due to running parameter change X
execution
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has reached the X
limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/ X
XSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at process X
level that prevents a successful operation, for example blocking
indication (EEHealth in XCBR or XSWI)
10 Blocked-by-interlocking Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or
EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to exceed of X
synchrocheck time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already-in- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because control X
execution action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked because another control action in a X
domain (for example, substation) is already running (in any
XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit X
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was not X
selected
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the addressed object is X
already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority
21 Ended-with-overshoot Control action executed but the end position has overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value

Technical manual
Control
Cause Name Description Supported

number
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with the
communication-loss client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by-command Control action is blocked due to the data attribute CmdBlk.stVal X
is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services are not X
parameters consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and Operate
service are different
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the object X
-22 Wrong-Ctl-model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-23 Blocked-by-command Blocked by command X
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd Blocked for Open command X
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd Blocked for Close Command X
-30 Long-operation-time Operation time too long X
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving X
-32 Persistent- Switch stopped in intermediate state X
intermediate-state
-33 Switch-returned-to-init- Switch returned to the initial position X
pos
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 Not-expected-final- Switch did not reach the expected final position X
position
Table 410: Translation of cause values for IEC 61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected

Technical manual
Control
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong-Ctl-model
-23 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
-24 9 -24 Blocked-for-open-cmd
-25 9 -25 Blocked-for-close-cmd
-30 16 -30 Long-operation-time
-31 16 -31 Switch-not-start-moving
-32 4 -32 Persistent-intermediate-state
-33 22 -33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos
-34 4 -34 Switch-in-bad-state
-35 22 -35 Not-expected-final-position
Table 411: Cause values not reflected on the output L_CAUSE
Cause number Cause description Conditions

3 Select-failed Canceled due to an unsuccessful selection (select
service)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked because the LN (CSWI)
is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any
switching or does not match the mode of the
command.
12 Command-already-in-execution Control, select or cancel service is rejected
because control action is already running.
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal
event that prevents a successful operation
(Health).
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of
some time limit.
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected because control object
was not selected.
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the
addressed object is already selected.
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access
authority.
26 Inconsistent-parameters The parameters between successive control
services are not consistent, for example the
ctlNum of Select and Operate service are
different.
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the object.
16.4.5 Bay control QCBAY IP15597-1 v2

Technical manual
Control
The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Local remote and local remote control
functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking
functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM
Figure 284: QCBAY function block
16.4.5.3 Signals
Table 412: QCBAY Input signals

LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command
Table 413: QCBAY Output signals

PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed
16.4.5.4 Settings
Table 414: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)

AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote

Technical manual
Control
16.4.5.5 Operation principle

M13446-4 v8
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking
conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions and voltage control
functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0
node in the IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC 61850 edition 1 the
functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function
is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.
Local panel switch M13446-7 v8

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to
this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions are here defined so that
remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or remote level and local means that
operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED
itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally,
not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to
the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in Off
position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote
switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to
operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks
LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) M13446-16 v11

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate,
PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to
Table 415. In addition, there are two settings and one command that affect the value of the PSTO
signal.
When the external switch is in Off position, or invalid position, the output always shows the actual
state of the switch (0 for Off and 3 for Invalid). In these cases, it is not possible to control anything,
and the setting AllPSTOValid has no effect on the PSTO output.
If the setting AllPSTOValid is set to No Priority and the LR-switch position is in Local or Remote
state, the PSTO output is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from local, station and remote
level without any priority.
The LocSta command value is forced to FALSE if AllPSTOValid is set to No priority.
If the setting RemoteIncStation is set to Yes and the LR-switch position is in Remote state, the PSTO
output is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from both station and remote
level without any priority.
If the LR-switch position is in Remote state, and AllPSTOValid is set to Priority and RemoteIncStation
is set to No, the switching between station and remote level control is done through the command
LocSta. The command is accessible only through the IEC 61850 Edition 2 protocol.

Technical manual
Control
Table 415: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel AllPSTOVali RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVa PSTO LED Possible

switch d Station l (command) value indications on locations that
positions (setting) (setting) LHMI shall be able
to operate
0 = Off - - - 0 Remote and Not possible
Local Off to operate
1 = Local Priority - - 1 Remote Off, Local Panel
Local On
1 = Local No priority - - 5 Remote and Local, Station
Local On or Remote
level without
any priority
2 = Remote Priority No TRUE 6 Remote On, Station level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority No FALSE 7 Remote On, Remote level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority Yes - 2 Remote On, Station or
Local Off Remote level
2 = Remote No priority - - 5 Remote and Local, Station
Local On or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty - - - 3 Remote and Not possible
Local to operate
Flashing
Blockings M13446-50 v6
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for
the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus
positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions
within the bay.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will
be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED, otherwise the
default authority level can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined
with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
16.4.6 Local/Remote switch LOCREM IP16319-1 v3
M17086-3 v11
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via the function
blocks local remote (LOCREM) and local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) to the Bay control
(QCBAY) function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if
the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via
binary inputs.

Technical manual
Control
LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID
Figure 285: LOCREM function block
LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 HMICTR1
^PSTO2 HMICTR2
^PSTO3 HMICTR3
^PSTO4 HMICTR4
^PSTO5 HMICTR5
^PSTO6 HMICTR6
^PSTO7 HMICTR7
^PSTO8 HMICTR8
^PSTO9 HMICTR9
^PSTO10 HMICTR10
^PSTO11 HMICTR11
^PSTO12 HMICTR12
Figure 286: LOCREMCTRL function block
16.4.6.2 Signals
Table 416: LOCREM Input signals

CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control
Table 417: LOCREM Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid
Table 418: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1

Technical manual
Control

Table 419: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
16.4.6.3 Settings
Table 420: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch
16.4.6.4 Operation principle M17087-3 v9
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch.
The connections are seen in Figure 287, where the inputs on function block LOCREM are connected
to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used.
The switching between external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode.
The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To
Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

Technical manual
Control
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12
Figure 287: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays and two
screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the
included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different
depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function
block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/
remote position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be
requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the
default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords
are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
16.4.7 Switch controller SCSWI IP15603-1 v2
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate
switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one multi-phase
device or up to three one-phase devices.

Technical manual
Control
SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENP OS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOSL1* POS_INTR
XPOSL2* XEXINF
XPOSL3*
Figure 288: SCSWI function block
16.4.7.3 Signals
Table 421: SCSWI Input signals

PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Control
Table 422: SCSWI Output signals

EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function, started through
START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XEXINF GROUP SIGNAL Execution information to XCBR, XSWI & XLNPROXY
GUID-7DABB496-EABE-48A4-8078-7ED5D6D4FE14 v3
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands. They work
without regard to how the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have
effect on the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input,
EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is active.
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence connected to
binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place selector, PSTO, must be set
to local or to remote with no priority. If the control model used is Select before
operate, Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no interlocking is
active. The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the
control model is Select before operate.
If one multi-phase XCBR/XSWI or two single-phase XCBR/XSWI are used for a two-
or three-phase system, two or more of the inputs XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3
are connected to the same source.

Technical manual
Control
16.4.7.4 Settings
Table 423: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm 00/11 position
Not perm cPos
Not perm cPos/
00/11
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during time
On tIntermediate; tIntermediate is set on
each connected XCBR/XSWI function
individually
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

M13484-4 v4
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence,
that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are fulfilled. The involved functions for
these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Control handling M13484-6 v8

.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal security"
and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter CtlModel defines which
one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct with normal security" does not
require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select
before execution. The command sequence for a command with control mode SBO with enhanced
security is shown in figure 289, with control mode direct with normal security is shown in figure 290.

Technical manual
Control
Reservation SXCBR /
Client SCSWI
logic SXSWI
select
SEL_CL = TRUE
RES_RQ = TRUE
tReservation
Response
tSelect
RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
selectAck/AddCause = 0
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB
POSITION = 00, timeStamp

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0
SELECTED = FALSE
SEL_CL = FALSE
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
IEC15000416-2-EN.vsdx
Figure 289: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the control
model SBO with enhanced security is used
Reservation SwitchCtrl Switch

client
core core core
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
RES_RQ
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk
operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0
POSITION = 00, timeStamp POSITION = 00, timeStamp

cmdTermination/
POSITION = 10, timeStamp AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
Figure 290: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the control
model direct with normal security is used
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the
selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed
signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in
one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE)
can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent
is set to Not perm 00/11 or Not perm cPos/00/11, and the position is in intermediate state or in bad

Technical manual
Control
state, the command is rejected with the cause Invalid-position. If the parameter is set to Not perm
cPos or Not perm cPos/00/11 and the command is to move to the current position, the command is
rejected with the cause Position-reached. If the parameter is set to Always permitted the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position M13484-14 v5

The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch controller
SCSWI. The XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3 input signals receive the position, time stamps and
quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
In the case when there are two or more one-phase switches connected to the switch control function,
the switch control will "merge" the position of the switches to the resulting multi-phase position. In the
case when the position differ between the one-phase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in closed position: switch control position = closed
At least one switch in open position and the switch control position = intermediate
other(s) in closed position:
Any switch in intermediate position: switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state: switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output multi-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the
last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad
state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any
time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In
case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for
a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch
modules circuit breaker (SXCBR)/circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest
priority is shown.
Blocking principles M13484-37 v5

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC
61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and
configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, that is, no
blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs
are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Dependence on operator place GUID-AB327F15-AF44-4ACC-8FA5-2A52AE4AE090 v5

For the commands from a communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1, and through the inputs
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated, and only the commands from
actual operator place are accepted, see Table 415. Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN
and L_CLOSE are always from the local operator place. For commands through the inputs
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is only evaluated so that it is not set to Off or is
invalid.

Technical manual
Control
Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions M13484-47 v5

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing
function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is continuously in operation and
gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close
execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send a start
signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to SXCBR
when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see Figure 291. If no synchronizing function is
included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means
no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchrocheck" in
the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 295.
SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function
Figure 291: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck and

synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams M13484-51 v8

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision
conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command
signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the
object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set
en05000092.vsd
Figure 292: tSelect

Technical manual
Control
The Long-operation-time cause (-30) is only given on the output L_CAUSE. It is not
sent on protocols since the selection has already received a positive response, and
no operation has been issued. If an operation is issued after the time out, the
negative response is Object-not-selected.
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, that
is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved
in the reservation function.
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
Figure 293: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command
termination, see Figure 294.
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination *
position open
close
t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
Figure 294: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute
command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute
command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the
synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.

Technical manual
Control
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the start signal
for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
Figure 295: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
16.4.8 Circuit breaker SXCBR IP15614-1 v3
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit
breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOP EN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENP OS
CBOPCAP CLOSEPOS
TR_OPEN TR_POS
TR_CLOSE CNT_VAL
RS_CNT L_CAUSE
EEH_WARN EEHEALTH
EEH_ALM CBOPCAP
XIN
Figure 296: SXCBR function block

Technical manual
Control
16.4.8.3 Signals
Table 424: SXCBR Input signals

LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO, 5
= COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL
Table 425: SXCBR Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm, 2=Warning,
3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO, 5
= COCO, 6+ = More

Technical manual
Control
16.4.8.4 Settings
Table 426: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

M13487-4 v9
The circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as, for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED
or the operator place. The SXCBR function executes commands, evaluates block conditions and
evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function
indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 409.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read
remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI, a binary input or remotely from
the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals
(SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored
according to IEC 61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment health
supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.
Local/Remote switch M13487-7 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote switch position
from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of
position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command
from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of
the local/remote switch is described in Figure 297.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 297: Local/Remote switch

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they
will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller, protection functions and
autoreclosure.

Technical manual
Control
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for the open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for the close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other
signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution M13487-22 v5
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch. The
typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process
value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value instead of the
value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication

and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the other
signals related to the position follow the substituted position. The substituted values
are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update
when the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the last
substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating
that the value is old and not reliable.
When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data object is
marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but the position quality
of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the substitution indication in the
quality, so it does not show that it is derived from a substituted value.

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove
supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate
defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 298 explains these two timers
during the execute phase.

Technical manual
Control
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 298: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the minimum length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse. Figure 299 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse
parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses. However, as long as the OPEN or CLOSE
inputs are active, the corresponding execute output will remain active if the operation is allowed, thus
overriding AdaptivePulse parameter.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 299: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive and the activating input is not still active, it is not possible for the
pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when the activating input is reset and either of the following
happens:

Technical manual
Control
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set
to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch not start moving, that is tStartMove has elapsed for normal
commands, or tIntermediate has elapsed starting from intermediate position, and the position
indications are valid.
If either of the position inputs are invalid or unconnected, the combined position is considered as
invalid. Then the execute output pulse resets at earliest when time tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time has elapsed,
and AdaptivePulse is not true, then the function waits for the end of the execution
pulse before indicating the activating function that the command is complete.
If the activating input remains active when the breaker has reached its final position
and the execution pulse time has elapsed, then the function waits for the reset of the
activating input before indicating that the command is complete.
There is one exception to the first item above: if the primary device is in open position and an open
command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command is executed.
In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true,
the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false, the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS=1) when a
command is executed, the execute output pulse resets at earliest when timer
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
Figure 300 .
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 300: Open command when valid open position is indicated
16.4.9 Circuit switch SXSWI IP15620-1 v2

Technical manual
Control
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of
disconnectors or earthing switches via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation
and position.
SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOP EN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENP OS
SWOPCAP CLOSEPOS
RS_CNT CNT_VAL
EEH_WARN L_CAUSE
EEH_ALM EEHEALTH
XIN SWOPCAP
Figure 301: SXSWI function block
16.4.9.3 Signals
Table 427: SXSWI Input signals

LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Control
Table 428: SXSWI Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O and C
16.4.9.4 Settings
Table 429: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)

AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,3=EarthS
Disconnector w,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

M16494-3 v9
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example, switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator
place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is to be allowed, SXSWI
performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value, see Table 409.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read
remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator
place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for
example.

Technical manual
Control
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC 61850-8-1.
Local/Remote switch M16494-6 v5

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch position
from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of
position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command
from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) from internal IED clients are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is
described in Figure 302.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 302: Local/Remote switch

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they
will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller, protection functions and
autorecloser.
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other
signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution M16494-21 v7
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch. The
typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the real process value is
erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for
positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication

and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the other
signals related to the position follow the substituted position. The substituted values
are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update
when the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the last
substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating
that the value is old and not reliable.
When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data object is
marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but the position quality
of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the substitution indication in the
quality, so it does not show that it is derived from a substituted value.

Technical manual
Control

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove
supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate
defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 303 explains these two timers
during the execute phase.
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 303: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the
primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different
pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse. Figure 304 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse
parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 304: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive and the activating input is not still active, it is not possible for the
pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
For the SXSWI the activating inputs should be pulsed, however, the functionality of following them is
the same as for SXCBR.

Technical manual
Control
The execute output pulses are reset when the activating input is reset and either of the following
happens:
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set
to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch not start moving, that is tStartMove has elapsed for normal
commands, or tIntermediate has elapsed starting from intermediate position, and the position
indications are valid.
If either of the position inputs are invalid or unconnected, the combined position is considered as
invalid. Then the execute output pulse resets at earliest when time tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has
elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for the end of the
execution pulse before indicating the activating function that the command is
completed.
If the activating input remains active when the switch has reached its final position
and the execution pulse time has elapsed, the function waits for the reset of the
activating input before indicating that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an
open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is
executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has
elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a
command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse
or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
Figure 305.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 305: Open command with open position indication

Technical manual
Control
16.4.10 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY
16.4.10.1 Functionality GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) gives an internal
representation of the position status and control response for a switch modelled in a breaker IED.
This representation is identical to that of an SXCBR or SXSWI function.
16.4.10.2 Function block GUID-408513CD-A87E-45E8-8E44-24E153947F02 v1
XLNPROXY
BEH* XPOS
BEH_VALID* SELECTED
LOC* OP_BLKD
LOC_VALID* CL_BLKD
BLKOPN* OPENPOS
BLKOPN_V* CLOSEPOS
BLKCLS* CNT_VAL
BLKCLS_V* L_CAUSE
POSVAL* EEHEALTH
POSVAL_V* OPCAP
OPCNT*
OP_CNT_V*
BLK
BLK_VAL
STSELD
STSELD_V
OPRCVD
OPRCVD_V
OPOK
OPOK_VAL
EEHEALTH
EEH_VAL
OPCAP
OPCAP_V
COMMVALID
XIN
Figure 306: XLNPROXY function block
16.4.10.3 Signals
Table 430: XLNPROXY Input signals

BEH INTEGER -1 Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BEH input
LOC BOOLEAN 0 Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on LOC input
BLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKOPN input
BLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKCLS input
POSVAL INTEGER 0 Switch position, Pos.stVal
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on POSVAL input
OPCNT INTEGER -1 Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCNT input

Technical manual
Control

BLK BOOLEAN 0 Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLK input
STSELD BOOLEAN 0 The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on STSELD input
OPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPRCVD input
OPOK BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPOK input
EEHEALTH INTEGER -1 External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on EEHEALTH input
OPCAP INTEGER -1 Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCAP input
COMMVALID BOOLEAN 0 Communication valid
SIGNAL
Table 431: XLNPROXY Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
3=Alarm
OPCAP INTEGER Switch / breaker operating capability
16.4.10.4 Settings
Table 432: XLNPROXY Non group settings (basic)

SwitchType Circuit Breaker - - Circuit Breaker 0 = CB, 1 = Load Break, 2 =
Load Break Disconnector, 3 = Earthing Switch, 4 =
Disconnector High Speed Earthing Switch
Earthing Switch
HS Earth Switch
GUID-A4CCC681-D4D8-4534-905D-1D8AD40E923B v1
The default values of the inputs BEH, OPCNT, EEHEALTH and OPCAP are set to -1
to denote that they are not connected.

Technical manual
Control
16.4.10.5 Operation principle GUID-D2679E0E-ABB5-46F0-AD9C-F6E8E8099534 v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) is intended to be used when
the switch (XCBR/XSWI) is modelled and controlled in a breaker IED or similar unit on the process
bus. XLNPROXY packages the signals from the GOOSE receive function, normally
GOOSEXLNRCV, into the same format as used from SXCBR and SXSWI to SCSWI. It makes a
similar evaluation of the command response as SXCBR and SXSWI when a command is issued from
the connected SCSWI.
16.4.10.6 Position supervision GUID-95C72346-A577-4F0A-8584-8E1593B9B947 v1
XLNPROXY has two outputs for position indication: OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS. Position is a
double point indication and the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are binary outputs intended to be used
for condition logics to protection and control functions
Normally, the position outputs, OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS, follow the value of the input POSVAL.
However, if the POSVAL_V input is FALSE, the communication is lost (COMMVALID = FALSE), or
the quality of the position received is bad, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are both set to FALSE.
16.4.10.7 Command response evaluation GUID-A2CDC1AE-A6F5-478B-B6E5-3442C54212D8 v2
The command evaluation is triggered through the group input XIN that is connected to the SCSWI
function controlling the switch.
If an operation is initiated by the SCSWI, the XLNPROXY function checks if the switch is blocked for
the operation direction and that the position moves to the desired position within the two time limits
tStartMove and tIntermediate. The default values for tStartMove and tIntermediate are for a breaker.
The typical values for a disconnector are:
• tStartMove = 3s
• tIntermediate = 15s
In most cases, tStartMove and tIntermediate can be set to the same values as in the
source XCBR or XSWI function. However, if the time limits are set very close to the
actual movement times of the apparatus, compensation may be needed for the
communication delays and differences in cycle time of the XLNPROXY function and
the source function. The compensation should be in the range of 0 - 5ms.
When the switch has started moving, it issues a response to the SCSWI function that the operation
has started. If it does not start moving within tStartMove, the command is deemed as failed, and a
cause is raised on the L_CAUSE output and sent to the SCSWI. The different causes it can identify
are listed in order of priority in table 1. The detection of the different ways of blocking is done while
waiting for movement of the switch, but the cause is not given until the tStartMove has elapsed.
Table 433: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY
IEC61850 IEC61850 Cause Description Conditions

ED1 ED2
8 8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy The LOC input indicates that only local commands are
allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 9 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 9 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.

Technical manual
Control
IEC61850 IEC61850 Cause Description Conditions

ED1 ED2
9 9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating that the
switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the OPCAP input is
connected, it indicates that the operation capability of the
switch is not enough to perform the command.
5 5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-33 16 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-34 4 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer than
tIntermediate.
-35 22 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-32 4 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-33 22 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.
The L_CAUSE output keeps its output value until a new command sequence has been started.
If the quality of the position or the communication becomes bad, the command evaluation replaces
the uncertain position value with intermediate position. Thus, as long as the quality is bad, all
commands will result in the cause Persistant-intermediate-state, -32.
If the switch in the merging unit has the behaviour set to Test or Test blocked, when the IED has the
behaviour On or Blocked, all data from the switch is regarded as invalid. Thus, any command will fail
with the cause PersistantiIntermediate-state, -32, and if selection is used for the switch, all attempts
to select the connected SCSWI will fail with the cause Select-failed, 3, from the SCSWI.
It is possible to speed up the command response for when the command has been started by the
switch in the breaker IED by connecting the inputs OPOK and OPOK_VAL. Then the blocking check
is only done until OPOK is activated and confirmation of that the command has been started is given
to the SCSWI function.
If the inputs STSELD and STSELD_V are connected, the switch in the breaker IED is assumed to
use selection. Then the SCSWI will wait for a selected indication, STSELD input of XLNPROXY,
before accepting selection, this information is transferred to the SCSWI function from the
XLNPROXY through the group connection XPOS. If STSELD is not activated within tSelect of the
SCSWI function, the selection is deemed failed and it gives a negative selection acknowledgement to
the command issuer with the cause Select-failed. Further, if the communication is lost, or the data
received is deemed invalid, the selection will also fail with cause Select-failed from the SCSWI.
16.4.11 Bay reserve QCRSV IP15629-1 v2
The purpose of the reservation (QCRSV) function is primarily to transfer interlocking information
between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete
substation.

Technical manual
Control
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLOCK ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
Figure 307: QCRSV function block
16.4.11.3 Signals
Table 434: QCRSV Input signals

EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 435: QCRSV Output signals

RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks

Technical manual
Control
16.4.11.4 Settings
Table 436: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)

tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1

M13505-4 v3
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to operate in two
ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for
reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved.
The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch
controller (SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN
and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or
other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is
created.
Reservation request of own bay M13505-7 v2

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which
apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and
parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to
decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the
own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal
RESERVED.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is
the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay
already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation of other bays M13505-11 v2

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other
bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other
bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of
reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS.

Technical manual
Control
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is
received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the
reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation request from another bay M13505-15 v2

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block
RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT
in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will
be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the
bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation M13505-18 v4

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLOCK is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no
reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a
binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same
time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, that
is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.
Bay with more than eight apparatuses M13505-22 v6

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses, the input
EXCH_IN must be set to zero.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay, there has to be one additional QCRSV. The two
QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and
EXCH_OUT according to Figure 308. If more than one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very
important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the
next one.
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLOCK ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
1
BLOCK ACK_TO_B RESERVED
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
Figure 308: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

Technical manual
Control
16.4.12 Reservation input RESIN IP15650-1 v2
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from other bays. The
number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).
RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Figure 309: RESIN1 function block
RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Figure 310: RESIN2 function block
16.4.12.3 Signals
Table 437: RESIN1 Input signals

BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 438: RESIN1 Output signals

ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

Technical manual
Control
Table 439: RESIN2 Input signals

EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 440: RESIN2 Output signals

ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
16.4.12.4 Settings
Table 441: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)

FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use
Table 442: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use
16.4.12.5 Operation principle M16503-3 v7
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic
diagram in Figure 311 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are
connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from
another bay.

Technical manual
Control
EXCH_IN INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
³1
ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK ³1
VALID_TX
&
BAY_VAL ³1
RE_RQ_B
³1
BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
³1
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
en05000089.vsd
Figure 311: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 312 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current
bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The
output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve
(QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in the own bay.

Technical manual
Control
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
Figure 312: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
16.5 Voltage control SEMOD158732-1 v3
SEMOD173054-2 v6

Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U
Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90

changer, parallel control
U
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC 84

binary inputs
IEC10000165000 V1 EN-US
Tap changer control and supervision, TCLYLTC 84

32 binary inputs
IEC10000165000 V1 EN-US

Technical manual
Control
Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control (TR1ATCC), Automatic voltage control for
tap changer, parallel control (TR8ATCC), Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
(TCMYLTC) and Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs (TCLYLTC) are used for
control of power transformers with an on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic
regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers or alternatively on a load point further
out in the network.
Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in parallel is possible.

For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative methods are available: the master-
follower method, the circulating current method and the reverse reactance method. The first two
methods require exchange of information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for
within IEC 61850-8-1.
Voltage control includes many extra features such as the possibility to avoid simultaneous tapping of
parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer in a group which regulates it to a
correct tap position even though the LV CB is open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on
the LV side bay of a transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and
hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that, for example, the voltage
control can be blocked if the power reverses, etc.
16.5.3 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC and

TR8ATCC SEMOD158820-1 v4
SEMOD158823-5 v6
The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel
control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a transformer either automatically or manually.
The automatic control can be either for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.

SEMOD158880-5 v6
The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If necessary, the LV side
current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage drop to the regulation point. This current
is also used when parallel control with the circulating current method is used.
In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding where the tap changer
is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control
and TR8ATCC for parallel control function for over current blocking.
The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive sequence quantity.

It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-side. The involved phases are also
selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phase-phase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is
possible but it is commonly selected for current and voltage.
The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for example, protection
functions.
The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, load current IL and for load point voltage UL
will be used in the text to follow.
Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC SEMOD158887-4 v6
Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the magnitude of the
busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled (line voltage drop compensation), this
voltage is further used for voltage regulation.

Technical manual
Control
TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides which action should be
taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint, a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is
introduced. The deadband is symmetrical around USet, see figure 313, and it is arranged in such a
way that there is an outer and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband
start the timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured voltage is
once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer deadband is denoted ΔU. The
setting of ΔU, setting Udeadband should be set to a value near to the power transformer’s tap
changer voltage step (typically 75–125% of the tap changer step).
Security Range
*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DU DU Lower Cmd
DUin DUin
0 Ublock Umin U1 Uset U2 Umax Voltage Magnitude
*) Action in accordance with setting
Figure 313: Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer deadband (interval
between U1 and U2 in figure 313). In that case no actions will be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if
UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The
timer will run as long as the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition
persists longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate ULOWER or
URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC,
or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be
repeated until the magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of
the inner deadband is denoted ΔUin. The inner deadband ΔUin, setting UDeadbandInner should be
set to a value smaller than ΔU. It is recommended to set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the ΔU
value.
This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the security range
defined by settings Umin and Umax
A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal situation.
Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the transformer itself, it
is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the network, downstream from the transformer.
The Line Voltage Drop Compensation (LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works
such that the voltage drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the
measured load current and the known line impedance.
In order to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary voltage
fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial networks, a time delay is used for
the tapping command to the load tap changer. The time delay can be either definite time or inverse
time and two time settings are used, the first (t1) for the initial delay of a tap command, and the
second (t2) for consecutive tap commands.
Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC SEMOD158887-54 v4

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power transformers connected to
the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also on the HV side. Special measures must be
taken in order to avoid a runaway situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers
gradually diverge and end up in opposite end positions.
Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control for tap changer,
parallel control TR8ATCC:

Technical manual
Control
• master-follower method
• reverse reactance method
• circulating current method.
Parallel control with the master-follower method SEMOD158887-59 v4

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and will regulate the
voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage control for a tap changer. Selection of the
master is made by activating the binary input FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC function block for one of
the transformers in the group.
The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter:
1. Raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the master, initiates the
corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs simultaneously, and consequently they will
blindly follow the master commands irrespective of their individual tap positions.
2. The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap position or to a tap
position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode, the followers can also be time
delayed relative to the master.
Parallel control with the reverse reactance method SEMOD158887-64 v5

In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is used. The purpose of
which is normally to control the voltage at a load point further out in the network. The very same
function can also be used here but with a completely different objective. Whereas the LDC, when
used to control the voltage at a load point, gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage
UB to a load point voltage UL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control of
transformers, gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL with respect to the
power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately equal to the length of UB) from UB up
towards the transformer itself.
When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance from the transformer
to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative reactance is entered instead of the
normal positive line reactance, parallel transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a
higher tap position will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the
transformer with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage decreases.
The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be avoided and that the
circulating current will be minimized.
Parallel control with the circulating current method SEMOD158887-78 v5

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function blocks (one
TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). The TR8ATCC function block can
either be located in the same IED, where they are configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different
IEDs. If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay
communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay
communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete exchange of TR8ATCC data,
analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made cyclically every 300 ms.
The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are:
1. Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value.

2. Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the reactive load between
parallel transformers.
The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel group by its
associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will then be exchanged between the
transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The
resulting value UBmean will then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus
assuring that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that one

Technical manual
Control
erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same time,
supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.
Figure 314 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If transformer T1 has
higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which adds to the load current in T1 and
subtracts from the load current in T2.
UT1 ICC...T2 UT2

ICC...T2
+ +
T1 T2 ZT1 IT1 IT2 ZT2
ICC...T1
ICC...T1
IT1 IT2
UB
IL IL
UL Load UL Load
Figure 314: Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be approximately
calculated with the formula:
UT1 - UT 2
I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
ZT 1 + ZT 2
Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use just the transformer
reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means that T1 circulating current lags the
busbar voltage by almost 90°, while T2 circulating current leads the busbar voltage by almost 90°.
See figure 315.

Technical manual
Control
UT1 CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1
UB
CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2
UT2
IL
IT2 IT1
2*Udeadband
ICC_T2 ICC_T1
T2 Receives Cir_Curr T1 Produces Cir_Curr
IL = IT1+ IT2
Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
en06000525.vsd
Figure 315: Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel
Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total reactive power flow is
optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state the apparent power flow is distributed
among the transformers in the group in proportion to their rated power.
In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the individual transformers
must be communicated between the participating TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the
Fourier filters in different IEDs run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors
cannot be exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to “synchronize”
measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common reference must be chosen. The most
suitable reference quantity for all transformers, belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar
voltage. This means that the measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and
the position of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference. This
is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for synchronization between
the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function.
At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the secondary side of the
transformer are calculated from measured values, and distributed to the TR8ATCC functions
belonging to the same parallel group.
As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the individual
transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations. The real part of the current will,
however, be used to calculate the total through load current and will be used for the line voltage drop
compensation.
The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:
k
I L = å Ii
i =1
where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of parallel transformers
in the group (k≤ 8). Next step is to extract the circulating current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible

Technical manual
Control
to identify a term in the bay current which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the
circulating current in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:
I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i ´ I L )
where Im signifies the imaginary part of the expression in brackets and Ki is a constant which
depends on the number of transformers in the parallel group and their short-circuit reactances. The
TR8ATCC function automatically calculates this constant based on the transformer reactances which
are setting parameters, and shall be given in primary ohms calculated from each transformer rating
plate. The minus sign is added in the above equation in order to get a positive value of the circulating
current for the transformer that generates it.
In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own bay.
A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus sign means that
the transformer receives circulating current.
As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each transformer. To do
that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first converted to a voltage deviation, Udi,
with the following formula:
U di = Ci ´ I cc _ i ´ X i
where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting parameter named Comp
which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or decreasing the impact of the circulating
current in the TR8ATCC control calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for
transformers that produce circulating current and negative values for transformers that receive
circulating current.
Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be approximated with:
U i = U Bmean + U di
Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the voltage control
function in a similar way as for the single transformer described previously. Ui would then be
regarded similarly to the single transformer measured busbar voltage, and further control actions
taken.
For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-load voltage will be
greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be
compared with the set voltage USet . A steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will
result in ULOWER or URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will
always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the transformer no-load
voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner deadband at the same time as the
calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in the parallel group are inside the outer deadband.
The example in figure 316,is a fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on
how the described regulation works.

Technical manual
Control
T1 T2 T3 T4
UBmean
T1 No-load voltage
DB1
DB2
USet
DB2
DB1
Figure 316: Selection of transformer to tap

In the figure 316, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet, and decreasing
below that line.
In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and T4 respectively, is
above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.
In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed from the upper DB1, is
not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the lower DB1 it is outside (below) the
deadband. However, there is a restriction in a situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage,
UBmean, is on the opposite side of the USet line (in figure 316), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the
calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for tapping. Thus in the
example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, although below DB1, would not be considered
for tapping in this case.
In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above the upper limit of
DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the upper limit DB1, transformers with
negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1,
transformers with positive voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the
calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in
the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be
considered for tapping in this case.
It is possible to avoid simultaneous tapping, and to distribute tapping actions evenly among the
parallel transformers in a busbar group. This is a selected by a setting parameter, and the algorithm
in the TR8ATCC function will then select the transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap
first that is, after time delay t1. Thereafter, the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi
amongst the remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so on. This
is made possible as the calculation of Icc is updated every time the measured values are exchanged
on the horizontal communication (every 300 ms). If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi,
then there is a predetermined order governing which one is going to tap first.

Technical manual
Control
Logic diagrams SEMOD158887-166 v2
AUTO
UL a
ab
>
U2 INNER DB b &
a
a1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b
a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b
UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &
FSD &
en06000509.vsd
Figure 317: Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation
AUTO
PARALLEL START
&
OPERSIMTAP
UL a
ab
>
U2 INNER DB b &
U CIRCCOMP
&
MIN a
a1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b >1
U CIRCCOMP
MAX a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b >1
UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &
FSD &
en06000511.vsd
Figure 318: Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode

Technical manual
Control
UCCT4 a
a=b
b &
T4PG &
T4
UCCT3 a 1
a=b & ³1
b & & &
T3PG T3 SIMLOWER
³1
UCCT2 a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T2
T2PG
UCCT1 a &
a=b
1 &
& T1
b
MAX
T1PG
a
a=b
b &
&
T1
a 1
a=b & ³1
b & & &
T2PG T2 SIMRAISE
³1
a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T3
T3PG
a &
a=b
1 &
T4
b &
T4PG
MIN
ADAPT
a
³1
a=b
ActualUser S b
³1 1
³1
Udeadband S a
a=b
b
LoadVoltage
HOMING
OperSimTap
1
en06000521.vsd
Figure 319: Simplified logic for simultaneous tapping prevention
From the Master via

horizontal comm.
relativePosition a
ab
> =
b & URAISE
& 1
Follow Tap
&
& =
ULOWER
1 1
YLTCOUT ® ATCCIN
tapPosition &
&
tapInHighVoltPos
tapInLowVoltPos
en06000510.vsd
Figure 320: Simplified logic for parallel control in Master-Follower mode

Technical manual
Control
16.5.4 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC

and TCLYLTC SEMOD171455-1 v6
SEMOD171466-5 v7
The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC
gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and supervises that commands are carried through
correctly. It has built-in extensive possibilities for tap changer position measurement, as well as
supervisory and monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give information
about tap position to the transformer differential protection.

Reading of tap changer position SEMOD159170-10 v4
The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function block in the following ways:
1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray coded binary signals.
3. Via a mA input signal.
Via binary input signals, one per tap position SEMOD159170-21 v6

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary input in the IED.
Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary input card are then directly
connected to the
• inputs B1 – B6 on TCMYLTC function

• or inputs B1 – B32 on TCLYLTC function.
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray coded binary signals SEMOD159170-24 v4
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes binary data from up to
six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY
format depending on the setting of the parameter CodeType.
It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the parity check shall
be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.
The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input for indication of any
external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for reading of tap changer position. Likewise, the
input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the Binary Input Module.
The truth table (see table 443) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded Decimal, and Gray
coded signals.

Technical manual
Control
Table 443: Binary, BCD and Gray conversion
The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from decimal
numbers to Gray code is given below.

Technical manual
Control
Table 444: Gray code conversion
Via a mA input signal SEMOD159170-35 v4

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap changer position
reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32
binary inputs TCLYLTC.
The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the principle that the
specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into N intervals corresponding to the
number of positions available on the tap changer. All mA values within one interval are then
associated with one tap changer position value.
The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting parameters LowVoltTap
and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest voltage and highest voltage respectively.

Technical manual
Control
16.5.5 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and TCMYLTCor

TCLYLTC SEMOD159211-5 v6
The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC and
parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and
32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are connected to each other according to figure 321 below.
(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
TR8ATCC TCLYLTC also be connected
I3P1 ATCCOUT YLTCIN URAISE to HORIZx input of
I3P2 MAN TCINPROG ULOWER the parallel
U3P2 AUTO INERR HIPOSAL transformer
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR LOPOSAL TR8ATCC function
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR POSERRAL
block)
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY POSOUT
LOWERV REVACBLK BIERR CONVERR
EAUTOBLK UHIGH B1 NEWPOS
DEBLKAUT ULOW B2 HIDIFPOS
LVA1 UBLK B3 INVALPOS
LVA2 HOURHUNT B4 YLTCOUT
LVA3 DAYHUNT B5
LVA4 HUNTING B6
LVARESET SINGLE B7
RSTERR PARALLEL B8
DISC HOMING B9
Q1ON ADAPT B10
Q2ON TOTBLK B11
Q3ON AUTOBLK B12
SNGLMODE MASTER B13
T1INCLD FOLLOWER B14
T2INCLD MFERR B15
T3INCLD OUTOFPOS B16
T4INCLD COMMERR B17
T5INCLD ICIRC B18
T6INCLD TRFDISC B19
T7INCLD VTALARM B20
T8INCLD T1PG B21
FORCMAST T2PG B22
RSTMAST T3PG B23
ATCCIN T4PG B24
HORIZ1 T5PG B25
HORIZ2 T6PG B26
HORIZ3 T7PG B27
HORIZ4 T8PG B28
HORIZ5 B29
HORIZ6 B30
HORIZ7 B31
HORIZ8 B32
MA
Figure 321: Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC

The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT, which is connected
to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary
signals, one “word” containing 10 binary signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent
from output ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower or
circulating current mode is used.

Technical manual
Control
Table 445: Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN
Signal Description
raiseVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command
lowerVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command
automaticCtrl The regulation is in automatic control
extRaiseBlock Block raise commands
extLowerBlock Block lower commands
Table 446: Binary signals contained in word “enableBlockSignals”: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN
Signal Description
CircCurrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current
CmdErrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error
OCBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current
MFPosDiffBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a follower and the
master is greater than the set value
OVPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax
RevActPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated
TapChgBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
TapPosBl Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has reached an end
position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
UVBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock
UVPartBl Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin and Ublock
Table 447: Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN
Signal Description
currAver Value of current in the phase with the highest current value
In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal ATCCOUT to other
TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word" containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog
signals:
Table 448: Binary signals contained in word “status”: ATCCOUT / HORIZx
Signal Description
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going to tap when
the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower parallel control
mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel control mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Technical manual
Control
Table 449: Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx
Signal Description
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoad Currim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control
The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As shown in figure 321, this
output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer
signals:
Table 450: Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN
Signal Description
tapInOperation Tap changer in operation, changing tap position
direction Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation
tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position
tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position
tapPositionError Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one step change, BCD
code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out of range, hardware fault for
example, BIM etc.)
tapChgError This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower command within
the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping without a given command.
cmdError This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap position change
within the expected max. time
raiseVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be executed
lowerVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be executed
timeOutTC Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.
Table 451: Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN
Signal Description
tapPosition Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer
numberOfOperations Accumulated number of tap changer operations
tapPositionMaxVolt Tap position for highest voltage
tapPositionMinVolt Tap position for lowest voltage

Technical manual
Control
SEMOD173000-4 v4
TR1ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET TIMERON
RSTERR TOTBLK
ATCCIN AUTOBLK
UGTUPPDB
ULTLOWDB
Figure 322: TR1ATCC function block

SEMOD172997-4 v5
TR8ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET SINGLE
RSTERR PARALLEL
DISC TIMERON
Q1ON HOMING
Q2ON ADAPT
Q3ON TOTBLK
SNGLMODE AUTOBLK
T1INCLD MASTER
T2INCLD FOLLOWER
T3INCLD MFERR
T4INCLD OUTOFPOS
T5INCLD UGTUPPDB
T6INCLD ULTLOWDB
T7INCLD COMMERR
T8INCLD ICIRC
FORCMAST TRFDISC
RSTMAST VTALARM
ATCCIN T1PG
HORIZ1 T2PG
HORIZ2 T3PG
HORIZ3 T4PG
HORIZ4 T5PG
HORIZ5 T6PG
HORIZ6 T7PG
HORIZ7 T8PG
HORIZ8
Figure 323: TR8ATCC function block

Technical manual
Control
SEMOD173008-4 v4
TCMYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOU T
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
MA
Figure 324: TCMYLTC function block

SEMOD173023-4 v3
TCLYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA
Figure 325: TCLYLTC function block

SEMOD173145-4 v3
VCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_REC
COMVALID
DATVALID
Figure 326: VCTRRCV function block

Technical manual
Control
16.5.7 Signals
Table 452: TR1ATCC Input signals

I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise and lower
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
Table 453: TR1ATCC Output signals

ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last 24
hours

Technical manual
Control

HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer operations within
the time sliding window
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER command to
come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE command to come
Table 454: TR8ATCC Input signals

I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise and lower
DISC BOOLEAN 0 Disconnected transformer
Q1ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 1 connected
SNGLMODE BOOLEAN 0 The voltage control in single control
T1INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer1 included in parallel group

Technical manual
Control

FORCMAST BOOLEAN 0 Force transformer to master
RSTMAST BOOLEAN 0 Reset forced master transformer to default
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
HORIZ1 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication from T1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 455: TR8ATCC Output signals

ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during the last 24
hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer operations within
the time sliding window
SINGLE BOOLEAN The transformer operates in single mode
PARALLEL BOOLEAN The transformer operates in parallel mode
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
HOMING BOOLEAN Transformer is in homing conditions
ADAPT BOOLEAN The transformer is adapting

Technical manual
Control

TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
MASTER BOOLEAN The transformer is master
FOLLOWER BOOLEAN This transformer is a follower
MFERR BOOLEAN The number of masters is different from one
OUTOFPOS BOOLEAN To high difference in tap positions
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER command to
come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE command to come
COMMERR BOOLEAN Communication error
ICIRC BOOLEAN Block from high circulating current
TRFDISC BOOLEAN The transformer is disconnected
VTALARM BOOLEAN VT supervision alarm
T1PG BOOLEAN Transformer1 included in parallel group
Table 456: TCMYLTC Input signals

YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

Technical manual
Control
Table 457: TCMYLTC Output signals

URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN
Table 458: TCLYLTC Input signals

YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position

Technical manual
Control

MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position
Table 459: TCLYLTC Output signals

URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN
Table 460: VCTRRCV Input signals


Technical manual
Control
Table 461: VCTRRCV Output signals

VCTR_REC GROUP SIGNAL Received data from horizontal communication
COMVALID BOOLEAN Communication is valid
DATVALID BOOLEAN Data valid
16.5.8 Settings
Table 462: TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)

On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when fast
step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode

Technical manual
Control

OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop
On compensation
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated
current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max
operations/window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision
Table 463: TR1ATCC Group settings (advanced)

UseCmdUSet Off - - Off Enable command input for voltage
On control set voltage

Technical manual
Control
Table 464: TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
Table 465: TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)

On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
Q1 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
for C and <0 for L
for C and <0 for L
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan

Technical manual
Control

tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when fast
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop
On compensation
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated
current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour

Technical manual
Control

tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max
operations/window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision
OperationPAR Off - - Off Parallel operation, Off/
CC CirculatingCurrent/MasterFollower
MF
OperCCBlock Off - - On Enable block from circulating current
On supervision
CircCurrLimit 0.0 - 20000.0 %IB2 0.1 100.0 Block level for circulating current
tCircCurr 0 - 1000 s 1 30 Time delay for block from circulating
current
Comp 0 - 2000 % 1 100 Compensation parameter in % for
Circulating Current
OperSimTap Off - - Off Simultaneous tapping prohibited
On
OperUsetPar Off - - Off Use common voltage set point for
On parallel operation
OperHoming Off - - Off Activate homing function
On
VTmismatch 0.5 - 10.0 %UB 0.1 10.0 Alarm level for VT supervision, % of
rated voltage
tVTmismatch 1 - 600 s 1 10 Time delay for VT supervision alarm
T1RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer1
On transformer2
On transformer3
On transformer4
On transformer5
On transformer6
On transformer7
On transformer8
TapPosOffs -5 - 5 - 1 0 Tap position offset in relation to the
master
MFPosDiffLim 1 - 20 - 1 1 Limit for tap pos difference from master
tMFPosDiff 0 - 6000 s 1 60 Time for tap pos difference from master

Technical manual
Control
Table 466: TR8ATCC Group settings (advanced)

UseCmdUSet Off - - Off Enable command input for voltage
On control set voltage
Table 467: TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)

TrfId T1 - - T1 Identity of transformer
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
tAutoMSF 0 - 60 s 1 10 Time delay for command for auto
follower
OperationAdapt Off - - Off Enable adapt mode
On
MFMode Follow Cmd - - Follow Cmd Select follow tap or follow command
Follow Tap
CircCurrBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block high circ current
Auto&Man Block
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
MFPosDiffBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm or auto block for tap position
Auto Block difference in MF
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage

Technical manual
Control
Table 468: TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 - 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
Value groups
Table 469: TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)

On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration
Table 470: TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function

Technical manual
Control

InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
Value groups
Table 471: TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

Table 472: TR1ATCC Monitored data

BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation compared to dead
band (%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in single mode
(service value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated voltage
(service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power (service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive power (service
value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents (service value)
Table 473: TR8ATCC Monitored data

BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation compared to dead
band (%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in single mode
(service value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated voltage
(service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power (service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive power (service
value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Technical manual
Control

CCAVolt REAL - kV Circulating Current Adjusted Voltage
USETPAR REAL - kV Average voltage setpoint used in parallel
mode
ICIRCUL REAL - A Circulating current
Table 474: TCMYLTC Monitored data

TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value corresponding to actual tap
position
Table 475: TCMYLTC Monitored data

CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of operations at rated
load
position
Table 476: TCLYLTC Monitored data

position
The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical nodes in IEC
61850-8-1.
• Automatic voltage control for tap changer

• TR1ATCC for single control
• TR8ATCC for parallel control
• Tap changer control and supervision
• TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs
• TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs
TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the LV-side side of a
power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A raise or lower command is
generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given period of time, deviates from the set target
value by more than the preset deadband value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse
or definite time) is set to avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the
target value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the system.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC and the transformer
load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives information from TR1ATCC or
TR8ATCC and based on this it gives command-pulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load
tap changer and also receives information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress
of given commands, and so on.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap position to the
transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

Technical manual
Control

SEMOD175215-2 v15
Table 477: TR1ATCC/TR8ATCC, TCMYLTC/TCLYLTC technical data

Transformer reactance (0.1–200.0) Ω, primary -
Time delay for lower command when fast (1.0–100.0) s -
Voltage control set voltage (85.0–120.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
Outer voltage deadband (0.2–9.0)% of UBase -

Inner voltage deadband (0.1–9.0)% of UBase -
Upper limit of busbar voltage (80–180)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Lower limit of busbar voltage (70–120)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Undervoltage block level (50–120)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Time delay (long) for automatic control (3–1000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms

commands whichever is greater
Time delay (short) for automatic control (1–1000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
commands whichever is greater
Minimum operating time in inverse mode (3–120) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
Line resistance (0.00–150.00) Ω, primary -
Line reactance (-150.00–150.00) Ω, primary -
Load voltage adjustment constants (-20.0–20.0)% of UBase -
Load voltage auto correction (-20.0–20.0)% of UBase -
Duration time for the reverse action block (30–6000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
signal whichever is greater
Current limit for reverse action block (0–100)% of I1Base -
Overcurrent block level (5–250)% of I1Base ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir
±1.0% of I at I>Ir
Level for number of counted raise/lower (0–30) operations/hour -

within one hour
Level for number of counted raise/lower (0–100) operations/day -
within 24 hours
Time window for hunting alarm (1–120) minutes -
Hunting detection alarm, max. operations/ (3–30) operations/window -
window
Alarm level of active power in forward and (-9999.99–9999.99) MW ±1.0% of Sr
reverse direction at (10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase
Alarm level of reactive power in forward and (-9999.99–9999.99) MVAr ±1.0% of Sr
reverse direction at (10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase
Time delay for alarms from power (1–6000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
supervision whichever is greater
Tap position for lowest and highest voltage (1–63) -
mA for lowest and highest voltage tap (0.000–25.000) mA -
position
Type of code conversion BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA -

Technical manual
Control

Time after position change before the value (1–60) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms
is accepted whichever is greater
Tap changer constant time-out (1–120) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms
Raise/lower command output pulse duration (0.5–10.0) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms
16.6 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v5
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) (or the selector
switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality compared to the one
provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities,
in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The
selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

Technical manual
Control
SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
Figure 327: SLGAPC function block
16.6.4 Signals
Table 478: SLGAPC Input signals

UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
Table 479: SLGAPC Output signals

P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1

Technical manual
Control

SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)
16.6.5 Settings
Table 480: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is
Enabled reached

Technical manual
Control

Table 481: SLGAPC Monitored data

SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

SEMOD114931-4 v8
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function has two
operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the function will
activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (for example if the present
activated output is P03 and one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a
signal is received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the present
activated output, in descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one
activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the output settings
the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active till the
time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have a
time delay between activation of the UP or DOWN input signals and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration Tool, there
are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating the
intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can
block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be
kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through
the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block
can be connected. SLGAPC function block has also an integer value output, that generates the
actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These
names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.
16.6.7.1 Graphical display SEMOD114931-35 v4
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC
• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as
defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first
three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the
Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following sequence of
commands will ensure:

Technical manual
Control
From the graphical display:
Control
Control Sing le Line Diagram
Measurements Comma nds
Events
Disturb ance r eco rds
Settings
Diagno stics
Test
Chang e to the "Switche s" pag e Reset
of the SLD by left-righ t arrows. Authori zation
Sele ct switch by up-down Lan guage
arro ws
../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control

WFM Sele ct switch. Pre ss the
WFM
I or O key. A dialo g b ox
Pilo t se tup app ears.
Pilo t se tup
OFF OFF
Damage control
P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not b e mod ified
(outputs will not b e activa ted) unt il OK Cancel
you press the Enter button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilo t se tup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
Figure 328: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
16.7 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43
The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety of
applications, as a general purpose switch.

Technical manual
Control
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the
local HMI or from Binary inputs.
VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
Figure 329: VSGAPC function block
16.7.4 Signals
Table 482: VSGAPC Input signals

IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input
Table 483: VSGAPC Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1
16.7.5 Settings
Table 484: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

Technical manual
Control
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as switch
controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and
IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to
IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that a symbol is associated with a controllable
object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A symbol is created
and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place,
operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from Fixed
signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a
combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the string
that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11
16.8 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication
Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function block is used to
send double point position indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the substation
through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially intended to be used in the
interlocking station-wide logics.

Technical manual
Control
Figure 330: DPGAPC function block
Table 485: DPGAPC Input signals

OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
Table 486: DPGAPC Output signals

POSITION INTEGER Double point indication
16.8.5 Settings ABBD8E283863 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the systems,
equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be able to get the
signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools, described in the
Engineering manual, and define which function block in which systems, equipment or functions
should receive this information.
More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication output
POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE,
together with the logical input signal VALID.
When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs determine the two-
bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the output POSITION will have the latest
updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE.
When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to intermediated state.
When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output POSITION will be
updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.
Refer to Table 487 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the value and the
quality attributes.

Technical manual
Control
Table 487: Description of the input-output relationship
POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State
16.9 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection of 8 single point
commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs or putting IED in
"ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED
outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be
achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can
be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ÔUT1
PSTO ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
Figure 331: SPC8GAPC function block
16.9.4 Signals
Table 488: SPC8GAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation

Technical manual
Control
Table 489: SPC8GAPC Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
16.9.5 Settings
Table 490: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
Latched output 2
Latched output 3
Latched output 4
Latched output 5
Latched output 6
Latched output 7
Latched output 8
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs is
activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings Latchedx and
tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the

Technical manual
Control
pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function – in case a command is
sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although,
PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places, only REMOTE
operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.
16.10 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3
Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the configuration
of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function plays the same role
as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
Figure 332: AUTOBITS function block

Technical manual
Control
16.10.4 Signals
Table 491: AUTOBITS Input signals

Table 492: AUTOBITS Output signals

CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1

Technical manual
Control
16.10.5 Settings
Table 493: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

On
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a
Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains
parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point,
send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining
parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the
setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32
CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data
from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the
DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place.
The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local” then no change is
applied to the outputs.
16.11 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local HMI.
The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage
apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

Technical manual
Control
SINGLECMD
BLOCK ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
Figure 333: SINGLECMD function block
16.11.4 Signals
Table 494: SINGLECMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function
Table 495: SINGLECMD Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1

Technical manual
Control
16.11.5 Settings
Table 496: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)

Steady
Pulsed
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The outputs can
be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output
signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the
local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses
are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at
power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the
outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions or via the
configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

Technical manual
654
Section 17 Scheme communication

17.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or
overcurrent protection ZCPSCH IP15749-1 v3
17.1.1 Function revision history GUID-E8271DE5-A605-432C-8608-F8DEEF97D4F0 v1

revision revision
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.4
M 2.2.5 Added separate DOs for teleprotection permissive (TxPrm & RxPrm1), blocking (TxBlk &
RxBlk1) and direct trip (TxTr & RxTr1) transmit and receive signals in accordance with
61850 Ed 2.0.
M14854-1 v4

Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication logic is provided.
All types of communication schemes for permissive underreaching, permissive overreaching,
blocking, delta based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are available.
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signaling when
included.

Technical manual
ZCPSCH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* CS
BLOCK CHSTOP
BLKTR CRL
BLKCS LCG
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
CBOPEN
IEC09000004
Figure 334: ZCPSCH function block
17.1.5 Signals
Table 497: ZCPSCH Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open
Table 498: ZCPSCH Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send signal
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of carrier guard signal

Technical manual
17.1.6 Settings
Table 499: ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)

On
SchemeType Intertrip - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Co-ordination time for blocking
communication scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send
signal
Table 500: ZCPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for
fault inception detection
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection
Table 501: ZCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

GlobalBaseSelector 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

M13893-3 v5
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send
signal, the communication schemes are divided into blocking and permissive schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking
scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its
dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.
17.1.7.1 Blocking scheme M13893-6 v7
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip
instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received
from the remote IED.

Technical manual
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to block the zone to be accelerated to
clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward overreaching zone to be accelerated
is connected to the input CACC, see figure 335.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord
elapses to prevent a false trip, see figure 335.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK. Tripping can be blocked by
activating the input BLKTR. Signal send can be blocked by activating the input BLKCS.
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000512.vsd
Figure 335: Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
17.1.7.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-22E3BFAC-82E9-4434-B761-AD63BCFC68D5 v2
In order to avoid delays due to carrier coordination times, the initiation of sending of blocking signal
to remote end is done by a fault inception detection element based on delta quantities of currents
and voltages. The delta based fault detection is very fast and if the channel is fast there is no need
for delaying the operation of the remote distance element. The received blocking signal arrives well
before the distance element has started. If the fault is in forward direction the sending is immediately
stopped by a forward directed distance, directional current or directional earth fault element.
The fault inception detection element detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or zero
sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase voltage or zero sequence
voltage. The criterion for the fault inception detection is if the change of any phase voltage and
current exceeds the settings DeltaU and DeltaI respectively, or if the change of zero sequence
voltage and zero sequence current exceeds the settings Delta3U0,Delta3I0 respectively. The
schemeType is selected as DeltaBlocking.
If the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal CS will be issued and sent to
remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be fulfilled for sending
the CS signal:
1. The breaker has to be in closed condition, that is, the input signal CBOPEN is deactivated.
2. A fault inception should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not blocked, that is,
the input signal BLKCS is not activated.
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the CS signal, the
function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.
The received signal, which is connected to the CR input, is not used to accelerate the release of the
overreaching zone to clear the fault instantaneously. The overreaching zone to be accelerated is
connected to the input CACC, see Figure 336.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord
elapses, to prevent a false trip, see Figure 336.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input
BLKTR, block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.

Technical manual
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000512.vsd
Figure 336: Basic logic for trip signal in delta blocking scheme
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
17.1.7.3 Permissive underreaching scheme M13893-13 v6
In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreaching measuring element

(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected.in forward
direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer
has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 337.
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000513.vsd
Figure 337: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

activating the input BLKTR. Signal send can be blocked by activating the input BLKCS.
17.1.7.4 Permissive overreaching scheme M13893-22 v6
In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreaching measuring element (normally

zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The
received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has
elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 337.
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000513.vsd
Figure 338: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

activating the input BLKTR. Signal send can be blocked by activating the input BLKCS.e.
17.1.7.5 Unblocking scheme M13893-31 v8
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability of a permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss
of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a receive signal. It is common or
suitable to use the function when older, less reliable power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR
signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is
used as a CR signal, see figure 339. This enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line
fault blocks the signal transmission. The CRG signal is only used in unblocking schemes.

Technical manual
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has
elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking
function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
CR
tSecurity CRL
t OR
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG
Figure 339: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = Restart
CR
CRL
tSecurity OR
CRG t
Figure 340: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = NoRestart
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling
17.1.7.6 Intertrip scheme M13893-36 v5
In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping
the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a trip for tripping without local criteria. The signal is
further processed in the tripping logic.
In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
17.1.7.7 Simplified logic diagram M13893-40 v4
The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 341.

Technical manual
Unblock =Off
CR
Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND
200 ms 150 ms LCG

AND
t AND OR t
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR
BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL
Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR
tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR
t TRIP
CACC t
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
CSOR OR AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCS
AND
Figure 341: Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection, simplified logic
diagram

M16038-1 v15
Table 502: ZCPSCH technical data

Scheme type Off -
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU
Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI

Technical manual

Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0
Delta 3U0
Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0
Delta 3I0
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
signal
Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
signal detection
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart
17.2 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance

protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH IP15751-1 v4
17.2.1 Function revision history GUID-23BE6A6F-8D87-4CD9-952B-40EE65D7F04C v1

revision revision
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.4
M 2.2.5 Added DOs for teleprotection permissive (TxPrm & RxPrm1) transmit and receive signals
in accordance with 61850 Ed 2.0
M15073-1 v5

Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZCRWPSCH - 85
logic for distance protection 3-phase
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and weak end infeed logic functions that
supplement the standard scheme communication logic. It is not suitable for standalone use as it
requires inputs from the distance protection functions and the scheme communications function
included within the terminal.

Technical manual
On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic provides an output to block the sending
of the teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block the permissive tripping at the local end.
This blocking condition is maintained long enough to ensure that no unwanted operation will occur as
a result of the current reversal.
On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end infeed logic provides an output for
sending the received teleprotection signal back to the remote sending end and other output(s) for
local tripping. For terminals equipped for single- and two-pole tripping, outputs for the faulted
phase(s) are provided. Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the faulted phase(s).
ZCRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK TRWEIL1
IRV TRWEIL2
WEIBLK1 TRWEIL3
WEIBLK2 ECHO
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL
Figure 342: ZCRWPSCH function block
17.2.5 Signals
Table 503: ZCRWPSCH Input signals

SIGNAL
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 504: ZCRWPSCH Output signals

IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
TRWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L1
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic

Technical manual
17.2.6 Settings
Table 505: ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)

CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of
fault condition
Table 506: ZCRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
17.2.7.1 Current reversal logic M16679-3 v9
The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter CurrRev = On. The current
reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to recognize the fault on the parallel
line in any of the phases.When the reverse zone has been activated (even if only for a short time), it
prevents sending of a communication signal and tripping through the scheme communication logic
after a settable time tPickUpRev. The prevention will last for tPickUpRev + 10 ms + tDelayRev after
the IREV reset. This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the carrier-aided trip
signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone. The logic diagram for
current reversal is shown in Figure 343.
BLOCK
IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVL
IRV AND t
t t t
CurrRev = On
Figure 343: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

By connecting the output signal IRVL to input BLKCS in the ZCPSCH function, the sending of the
signal CS from the overreaching zone connected to CSOR in ZCPSCH will be blocked. By
connecting IRVL to input BLKTR in the ZCPSCH function, the TRIP output from the ZCPSCH
function will be blocked.

Technical manual
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which will secure that the current reversal logic will
be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
17.2.7.2 Weak-end infeed logic M16679-8 v12
The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal under the
condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward or reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received signal, shown in Figure 344, when:
• The setting parameter WEI is set to either Echo or Echo & Trip.
• No active signal is present on the input BLOCK.
• The functional input CRL is active for a time longer than the tPickUpWei setting. This input is
usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme communication logic ZCPSCH.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLK1 functional input
or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually configured to the VTSZ functional output of
the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR
combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the IED is
usually used for this purpose.
• The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when local breaker
opens.
BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND
OR t t
ECHO
200 ms AND
WEIBLK2
t
AND
OR
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t
WEI = Echo
Figure 344: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be
looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the
echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local
breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip. With this setting the Echo and Trip are working in
parallel as in logic shown in Figure 345.

Technical manual
BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND ECHO
OR t t AND
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t
AND
1500 ms
OR
CBOPEN
t
AND
U3P*
UL1<UPN<
UL2 < UPN<
UL3 < UPN<
UPN< 100 ms
OR
AND t
TRWEI
OR
15 ms
TRWEIL1
U3P*
AND t
UL1L2 <UPP< OR
UL2L3 < UPP<
UL3L1 < UPP<
15 ms
UPP< TRWEIL2
AND t
OR
15 ms
OR TRWEIL3
AND t
WEI = Echo & Trip
IEC00000551-TIFF V4 EN-US IEC00000551-TIFF.vsd
Figure 345: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo&Trip

M16039-1 v16
Table 507: ZCRWPSCH technical data

Detection level phase-to-neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
logic
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
infeed logic
17.3 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH SEMOD52894-1 v4
M14860-1 v4

Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -

Technical manual
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is available,
local acceleration logic (ZCLCPSCH) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing and re-
closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-of-load current
(loss-of-load acceleration).
ZCLCPSCH
I3P* TRZE
BLOCK TRLL
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC
Figure 346: ZCLCPSCH function block
17.3.4 Signals
Table 508: ZCLCPSCH Input signals

SIGNAL
ARREADY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip
NDST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip
EXACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone extension
BC BOOLEAN 0 Breaker Close
LLACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load
Table 509: ZCLCPSCH Output signals

TRZE BOOLEAN Trip by zone extension
TRLL BOOLEAN Trip by loss of load

Technical manual
17.3.5 Settings
Table 510: ZCLCPSCH Group settings (basic)

On
LoadCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Loss of
On load.
ZoneExtension Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Zone
On extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB
trip in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR
value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load current
release
Table 511: ZCLCPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
17.3.6.1 Zone extension M13819-3 v3
When the auto-recloser controls the function, a signal auto-recloser ready (ZCLCARREADY) allows
an overreaching zone (ZCLC-EXACC) to trip instantaneously, see figure 347.
The ZCLC-ARREADY functional input should be configured to READY output of auto-reclosing

function.
The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC.
Figure 347: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

The function provides instantaneous trip (TRZE) if the ARREADY and EXACC inputs are set. After
that, the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state and therefore

Technical manual
ARREADY signal will be low. This will block the TRZE output. If a non-direction start is picked up
after reclosing, the TRZE is blocked and therefore the fault clearance is as per the step-time distance
protection.
In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted autoreclosing
cycle will occur due to the zone extension functionality.
On the other hand, if the fault is a persistent line fault on the line section and not covered by
instantaneous zone (normally zone 1), then a trip after reclosing will be with the step-time distance
function (which is time delayed) and only the first trip (before reclosing) will be "instantaneous" .
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-of-load acceleration).
17.3.6.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration M13819-9 v6
The local acceleration logic uses the loss-of-load condition to accelerate the trip for faults that were
not detected in an instantaneous zone (normally zone 1). If there is a fault in the range of over
reaching zone but still in the same line section, then the distance protection in the remote operates in
the instantaneous zone and the remote breaker opens in all three phases. Due to this, the load
current in the healthy phases will be discontinued, however, the current continues to flow in the fault
phases. Hence, this scenario is used to detect that the fault is inside the line section and then LLACC
is released for TRLL.
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used for "acceleration"
connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during normal non-fault system
conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than
setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault
condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the
opposite IED, see figure 348. The current measurement is performed internally and the internal
STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy
phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite IED. Note that this function will not
operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the
opposite IED is tripped.
BLOCK
BC OR
I_PHL1
a overPhase1
a>b
LoadCurr b
tLoadOn tLoadOff
a
a > b overPhase2 AND t t
b
a
a>b
b overPhase3
tLoadOn
AND TRLL
AND t
OR
a
a < b underPhase1
MinCurr b
tLowCurr
I_PHL2
a AND t
a < b underPhase2 OR
b
I_PHL3
a
a<b
b underPhase3
LLACC
Figure 348: Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing.
M13819-14 v2

Technical manual
17.4 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH IP14711-1 v2
17.4.1 Function revision history GUID-F53CEDFF-DD1E-4FC2-A8AF-85DD40DBF71B v1

revision revision
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.4
M 2.2.5 Added separate DOs for teleprotection permissive (TxPrm & RxPrm1), blocking (TxBlk &
RxBlk1) and direct trip (TxTr & RxTr1) transmit and receive signals in accordance with
61850 Ed 2.0.
M14882-1 v2

Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous
step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent protection can be
supported with a logic that uses communication channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other
line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time of the protection including a channel
transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function
after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection enables blocking as well
as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking schemes. The logic can also be supported by
additional logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end
infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function.

Technical manual
ECPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
Figure 349: ECPSCH function block
17.4.5 Signals
Table 512: ECPSCH Input signals

BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
Table 513: ECPSCH Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal by communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic
LCG BOOLEAN loss of carrier guard signal

Technical manual
17.4.6 Settings
Table 514: ECPSCH Group settings (basic)

On
SchemeType Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send
signal
Table 515: ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

M13922-4 v5
The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to give input
information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH logic:
• Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally the start signal of
a forward overreaching step of STFW.
• Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking communication scheme,
normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching step of STRV.
• Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching permissive
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward underreaching step of STINn,
where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
• Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching permissive
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STINn,
where n corresponds to the overreaching step.
In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the BLKCS input
for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.
17.4.7.1 Blocking scheme M13922-9 v5
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects an
earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips after a
short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally
30 – 40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed if the
ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero and positive sequence source
impedances, the channel can be shared with the impedance measuring system, if that system also
works in the blocking mode. The communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal
attenuation will occur due to the fault.

Technical manual
Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence
outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received
signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never
any need for weak-end infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no
blocking signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for
a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal
comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received signal) the TRIP output is activated
after the tCoord set time delay.
Figure 350: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme
17.4.7.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme M13922-17 v6
In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends a permissive
signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at
the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before activating a trip signal. Independent
channels must be available for the communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode, with one channel
in each direction, can share the channels with the communication scheme for residual overcurrent
protection. If the impedance measuring IED works in the permissive overreaching mode, common
channels can be used in single line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus
at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the
directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions,
which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in the distance or
earth-fault protection.
In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a
permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal). Local tripping is permitted when
the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the CR
binary input (received signal).
The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the underreaching
alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as
sending criterion of the permissive input signal CSUR.

Technical manual
In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent measurement

element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal CSOR. Also the
underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.
BLOCK
CRL
CR AND
25 ms
t TRIP
0 - 60 s
CACC AND AND t

50 ms
tCoord
t
AND
BLKCS OR CS
AND
Overreach
CSOR AND 25 ms
CSUR OR t
IEC05000280.vsd
17.4.7.3 Unblocking scheme M13922-45 v6
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss
of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a receive signal. It is common or
suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR
signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is
used as a CR signal, see figure 351. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the
line fault blocks the signal transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has
elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signaling purpose. The unblocking
function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
CR
tSecurity CRL
t OR
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG
Figure 351: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Technical manual
Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

M16049-1 v10
Table 516: ECPSCH technical data

Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
coordination time
17.5 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH IP14365-1 v4
M14883-1 v2

Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection
17.5.2 Functionality
M13928-3 v8
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) is
a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth fault protection
function can be supported with logic that uses tele-protection channels.
This is why the IEDs have available additions to the scheme communication logic.
M13928-6 v2
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching permissive
communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping
affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a
total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current
reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.
M13928-8 v5
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can basically operate only
when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient
minimum residual fault current, out from this IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened
breaker or high-positive and/or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome

Technical manual
these conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is limited to
200 ms to avoid channel lockup.
ECRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK ECHO
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL
Figure 352: ECRWPSCH function block
17.5.4 Signals
Table 517: ECRWPSCH Input signals

SIGNAL
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 518: ECRWPSCH Output signals

IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
ECHO BOOLEAN Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in case of weak
end infeed

Technical manual
17.5.5 Settings
Table 519: ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)

CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
3U0> 5 - 70 %UB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault
conditions measurement
Table 520: ECRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
17.5.6.1 Directional comparison logic function M13929-4 v6
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and permissive
overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak-end
infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault protection module to get
backup tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the
directional comparison logic.
Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional comparison
scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison
module.
17.5.6.2 Fault current reversal logic M13929-11 v8
The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the input signal IRV,
which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction element is
activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is shown in Figure 353. The logic is now ready to
handle a current reversal without tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input
on the permissive overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and IRVBLK is activated.
The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal. The signal blocks operation of the
overreach permissive scheme for residual current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by
fault current reversal.

Technical manual
BLOCK
IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev AND t
IRVL
IRV
t t t
CurrRev = On
Figure 353: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal
17.5.6.3 Weak-end infeed logic M13929-24 v10
The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal
and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic diagrams are depicted in Figure 354
and Figure 355.
The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to
WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is
activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive
signal as shown in Figure 354 and Figure 355. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received
permissive signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the end of
line.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the
fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the earth fault function that is in operation.
CR
BLOCK AND
VTSZ
OR
tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1
t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
CRL t
WEIBLK2
AND
1500 ms
CBOPEN OR
t
WEI = Echo
Figure 354: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo
With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the diagram above. Further,
it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral
point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0> .
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth fault function
which is in operation.

Technical manual
BLOCK
VTSZ
OR
tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1 t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
t
CRL
AND
WEIBLK2 1500 ms
OR
t
CBOPEN
AND
ST3U0
15 ms TRWEI
a>b AND
3U0> t
WEI = Echo&Trip
Figure 355: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip
The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this
time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a
time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.

M16051-2 v11
Table 521: ECRWPSCH technical data

Operate mode of WEI logic Off -
Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
logic
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
infeed logic

Technical manual
680
Logic
Section 18 Logic
18.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC IP14576-1 v4
18.1.1 Function revision history GUID-ADA72CE6-B6ED-48B3-A897-A7B42ECDEBB4 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 STN (Start neutral) output added. IEC 61850 mapping is made for the added output.
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 Added TRINN (Trip neutral) input and TRN (trip neutral) outputs. TRINALL (Trip all
phases) input is changed from TRIN. IEC 61850 mapping is made for the added output.
The block logic is corrected for the lockout functionality.
L 2.2.5 -
SEMOD56226-2 v7

Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94
1 -> 0
A function block for protection tripping and general start indication is always provided as a basic
function for each circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse
of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing
functions.
The trip function block includes a settable latch function for the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout.
The trip function can collect start and directional signals from different application functions. The
aggregated start and directional signals are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model.

Technical manual
Logic
SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRINALL TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TRN
TRINL3 TR1P
TRINN TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3 START
1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
STDIR REV
Figure 356: SMPPTRC function block
18.1.5 Signals
Table 522: SMPPTRC Input signals

BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRINALL BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L1
TRINN BOOLEAN 0 Trip neutral, trips all phases
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective carrier aided trip
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective earth fault trip
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
STDIR INTEGER 0 General start direction input
Table 523: SMPPTRC Output signals


Technical manual
Logic

TRN BOOLEAN Trip signal from neutral
TR1P BOOLEAN Trip single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Trip two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Trip three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
STN BOOLEAN Start signal from neutral
FW BOOLEAN General forward signal
REV BOOLEAN General reverse signal
18.1.6 Settings
Table 524: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)

On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two
1ph/3ph or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secure 3-pole trip when phase selection
failed
Table 525: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

TripLockout Off - - Off Latch TRIP output when SETLKOUT
On input is activated
AutoLock Off - - Off Activate CLLKOUT output when TRIP
On output is activated
tEvolvingFault 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Secure 3-pole tripping at evolving faults
There is a single input (TRINALL) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs' binary inputs are
routed. It has a three-phase trip output (TRIP) to connect to one or more of the IEDs' binary outputs,
as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

Technical manual
Logic
Simplified logic where setting

Program = 3 phase
BLOCK
BLKLKOUT Final Tripping Circuits
BLOCK
3 phase
BLKLKOUT TRIP TRIP
BLOCK TRIPALL TRIPALL TRL1 TRL1
TRINALL TRINALL TRIPL1 TRL2 TRL2
TRINL1 TRINL1 TRIPL2 TRL3 TRL3
TRINL2 TRINL2 TRIPL3 TRN TRN
TRINL3 TRINL3 TRIPN TR1P
1PTRZ 1PTRZ SETLKOUT TR2P
1PTREF 1PTREF RSTLKOUT TR3P TR3P
CLLKOUT CLLKOUT
TRINN
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

BLOCK Program = 1ph/3ph
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/3ph TRIPALL TRL1
TRL1
Phase Segregated TRIPL1 TRL2
TRL2
BLOCK TRIPL1
TRINALL TRL3
TRINALL L1TRIP L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 TRN
TRINL1 L2TRIP L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TRN
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL2 L3TRIP L3TRIP TRIPN TR1P
TRINL3 SETLKOUT TR2P
TRINL3 P3PTR
PSL1 TR3P
PSL1 RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF
P3PTR
TRINN
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

BLOCK Program = 1ph/2ph/3ph

BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/2ph/3ph TRIPALL TRL1 TRL1
Phase Segregated TRIPL1 TRL2 TRL2
BLOCK TRIPL1
TRINALL L1TRIP TRL3
TRINALL L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 L2TRIP TRN
TRINL1 L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TRN
TRINL2 L3TRIP TR1P
TRINL2 L3TRIP TRIPN TR1P
TRINL3 SETLKOUT TR2P TR2P
TRINL3 P3PTR
PSL1 TR3P
PSL1 RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF
P3PTR
TRINN
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
Figure 357: Simplified logic diagrams with different program modes

SMPPTRC function has separate inputs (TRINL1, TRINL2, TRINL3) which are used for single-phase
and two-phase tripping from the functions which offer phase segregated trip outputs.
The input TRINN can be activated from functions which provide data for trip in the neutral.
The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions
which do not have their own phase selection capability (that is, which have just a single trip output).
An example of such a protection function is the residual overcurrent protection. The SMPPTRC
function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (1PTRZ used for carrier-aided
tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (1PTREF
used for tripping from a residual overcurrent protection). External phase selection for these two trip
signals shall be provided via inputs PSL1, PSL2, and PSL3.

Technical manual
Logic
A timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for these two trip signals in the absence
of the external phase selection signals.
The SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the three-phase trip
output TRIP), one per phase, to connect to one or more of the IEDs’ binary outputs, as well as to
other functions within the IED requiring these signals. These three output signals shall be used as
trip signals for individual circuit breaker poles. These signals are important for cooperation with the
autorecloser SMBRREC function.
The outputs TRN and TRIP are activated when the input TRINN is activated.
The SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as
well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A binary input P3PTR is provided which will force all
tripping to be three-phase. This input is required in order to cooperate with the SMBRREC function.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each circuit breaker.
The lockout function

The SMPPTRC function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lockout. The lockout can be set
to only activate the circuit breaker lockout output CLLKOUT or to both initiate the circuit breaker
lockout output and to maintain the trip signal outputs TRIP, TRL1, TRL2, TRL3, and TR3P (latched).
If external conditions are required to initiate a circuit breaker lockout, it can be achieved by activating
input SETLKOUT. The settingAutoLock = Off means that the internal three-phase trip will not activate
lockout so only initiation of the input SETLKOUT will result in lockout. This is normally the case for
overhead line protection where most faults are transient. Unsuccessful autoreclosing and back-up
zone tripping can in such cases be connected to initiate lockout by activating the input SETLKOUT.
If CLLKOUT is set by an external trip signal from another protection function, that is by activating
SETLKOUT input, or internally by a three-phase trip, that is with the setting AutoLock = On and the
setting TripLockout = On, then also all trip outputs are set latched.
The lockout can manually be reset after checking the primary fault by activating the reset lockout
input RSTLKOUT.
The BLKLKOUT input blocks the circuit breaker lockout output CLLKOUT.
The following three sequences in the following table shows the interaction between the inputs
BLOCK, BLKLKOUT, SETLKOUT, RSTLKOUT and the output CLLKOUT.
Table 526: Lockout related signal interactions
Inputs Output
BLOCK BLKLKOUT SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT CLLKOUT
Active - - - False
Active - Active - False
- - - - False
- - Active - True
Active - - - True
Active - - Activated True
- - - - True
- Active - - False

Technical manual
Logic
Inputs Output
BLOCK BLKLKOUT SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT CLLKOUT
- Active Active - False
- - - - True
- - - Activated False
Directional data
Merged directional data from application functions can be provided to the trip function (SMPPTRC)
via the start matrix function (SMAGAPC) connected to the STDIR input.
The directional input signal STDIR is a coded integer signal which contains 15 individual Boolean
signals, see Figure 362:
STDIRX=[b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13, b14]
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (start L1)
b4= FWL1 (forward L1)
b5= REVL1 (reverse L1)
b6= STL2 (start L2)
b9= STL3 (start L3)
b12= STN (start N)
b13= FWN (forward N)
b14= REVN (reverse N)
The indications for general start START and phase-wise starts STL1, STL2 and STL3, and neutral
STN and general directional forward FW and reverse REV are all available as outputs on the trip
function.
All start and directional outputs are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model of the trip
function. The time stamping is updated each time an operate or start signal is changed:
• The common DIR output (general) is mapped as:
dirGeneral
0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
3 both
• The phase wise directional outputs (DIRL1, DIRL2, DIRL3, and DIRN) are mapped as:

Technical manual
Logic
dirPhsA, dirPhsB, dirPhsC, dirNeut

0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
tTripMin
BLOCK TRIPALL
OR
AND t
TRINL1
TRINL2
TRINL3
TRINALL OR
1PTREF
1PTRZ
Figure 358: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram

Technical manual
Logic
TRINALL
TRINL1 L1TRIP
OR
PSL1
AND
TRINL2
L2TRIP
OR
PSL2
AND
TRINL3
L3TRIP
OR
PSL3
AND
-LOOP
OR OR
OR
AND AND
OR
tWaitForPHS
-LOOP
t
OR
1PTREF AND
AND
1PTRZ OR
Figure 359: Phase segregated front logic
tTripMin
BLOCK
OR TR
L1TRIP AND t OR
tEvolvingFault
t AND
L2TRIP
L3TRIP
OR
P3PTR
IEC170
Figure 360: Simplified additional logic per phase, Program = 1ph/3ph or 1ph/2ph/3ph

Technical manual
Logic
TRIPL1
OR TRL1
OR
TRIPL2
OR TRL2
OR
TRIPL3
OR TRL3
OR
TRIPN TRN
OR OR TRIP
OR
TRIPALL
OR -LOOP
OR
-LOOP AND
AND TR3P
OR
AND OR
AND
10 ms To ensure that the
fault is single phase TR1P
AND t
OR To ensure that the

5 ms
fault is two phase TR2P
t
OR
AND
AND OR AND
OR
-LOOP
AND
TripLockout
AND AND
AutoLock -LOOP
SETLKOUT OR
OR AND CLLKOUT
AND AND
RSTLKOUT
AND
AND
BLOCK
BLKLKOUT
Figure 361: Final tripping circuits

Technical manual
Logic
Directional logic
IntToBits
STDIR START START
in b0
FW STL1
b1
REV STL2
b2
STL1 STL3
b3
FWL1 STN
b4
REVL1
b5
STL2
b6
FWL2 FW
b7
REVL2 BitsToInt
b8 dirGeneral (61850 Standard)
STL3
b9 0 = unknown
FWL3 b0 out
b10 DIR 1 = forward
REVL3 b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b11
STN 3 = both
b12
FWN REV
b13
REVN
b14
b15
BitsToInt dirPhsA (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL1
b0 = START 1 = forward
b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b1 = FW
b2 = REV
b3 = STL1 XOR
b4 = FWL1
b5 = REVL1
b6 = STL2 AND
b7 = FWL2
b8 = REVL2
b9 = STL3 BitsToInt dirPhsB (61850 Standard)
b10 = FWL3
0 = unknown
b11 = REVL3 AND b0 out DIRL2
1 = forward
b12 = STN b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b13 = FWN
b14 = REVN
b15 = N/A XOR
AND
BitsToInt dirPhsC (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL3
1 = forward
XOR
AND
BitsToInt dirNeut (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRN
1 = forward
XOR
AND
Figure 362: The directional logic

M12380-1 v15
Table 527: SMPPTRC technical data

Trip action, Program 3 phase, 1ph/2ph, 1ph/2ph/3ph -
Minimum trip pulse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
length ,tTripMin
3-pole trip delay, tWaitForPHS (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
, tEvolvingFault

Technical manual
Logic
18.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC
18.2.1 Identification GUID-C6D3DE50-03D2-4F27-82FF-623E81D019F4 v1

Generat start matrix block SMAGAPC - -
18.2.2 Functionality GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3
The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional output signals from different application
functions and creates a common start and directional output signal (STDIR) to be connected to the
Trip function, see Figure 363.
The purpose of this functionality is to provide general start and directional information for the IEC
61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC.
18.2.3 Function block GUID-99B1DF71-F7C4-4954-8688-BC709C3C2A16 v1
SMAGAPC
BLOCK STDIR
STDIR1
STDIR2
STDIR3
STDIR4
STDIR5
STDIR6
STDIR7
STDIR8
STDIR9
STDIR10
STDIR11
STDIR12
STDIR13
STDIR14
STDIR15
STDIR16
Figure 363: SMAGAPC function block
18.2.4 Signals
Table 528: SMAGAPC Input signals

STDIR1 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 1

Technical manual
Logic

Table 529: SMAGAPC Output signals

STDIR INTEGER Common start direction output
18.2.5 Settings
Table 530: SMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
18.2.6 Operation principle GUID-02403756-5715-4D6B-9308-540D72979BD0 v3
Start matrix
The Start Matrix function requires that a protection function delivers the directional output signals in a
fixed order to Start Matrix.
A directional input signal STDIRX of the Start Matrix is of type word. Each input contains 14
individual Boolean signals, which are positioned as, see Figure 365.
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b4= FWL1 (forwardL1)
b5= REVL1 (reverseL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)

Technical manual
Logic
b12= STN (startN)

b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)
The StartMatrix function contains two function: the START criteria and the DIRECTION criteria, see
Figure 364.
The START criteria is to ensure that a forward and reverse signal shall come together with a start
signal to pass through the block. This is done individually for each protection function connected to
the StartMatrix via the STDIRX inputs, see Figure 365.
All STDIROUT signals are then connected via an OR gate, see Figure 364.
The DIRECTION criteria allow either forward or reverse (phase-wise forward FWLx or forward
neutral FWN or phase-wise reverse REVLx or reverse neutral REVN) to pass through to the general
STDIR output. If both forward and reverse are active phase-wise (e.g. REVLx=FWLx = True) or at
neutral (e.g. FWN = REVN = True) at the same time, none will be shown, see Figure 366.
SMAGAPC
(StartMatrix)
START Criteria
STDIR1
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR2
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR3
STDIRX STDIROUT
DIRECTION Criteria
STDIR
≥1 STDIRIN STDIR
START Criteria
STDIR4
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR5
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR6
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR7
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR8
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR9
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR10
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR11
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR12
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR13
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR14
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR15
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR16
STDIRX STDIROUT
Figure 364: The StartMatrix function

Technical manual
Logic
START Criteria
START (in)
STL1 (in)
STL2 (in) ≥1 START (out)
STL3 (in)
IntToBits STN (in) BitsToint
STDIRX STDIROUT
in b0 START (in) STL1 (out) START (out) b0 out
b1 FW (in) STL2 (out) FW (out) b1
b2 REV (in) STL3 (out) REV (out) b2
b3 STL1 (in) STN (out) STL1 (out) b3
b4 FWL1 (in) FWL1 (out) b4
b5 REVL1 (in) REVL1 (out) b5
&
b6 STL2 (in) FW (in) STL2 (out) b6
≥1 FW (out)
b9 STL3 (in) STL3 (out) b9
b11 REVL3 (in) & REVL3 (out) b11
REV (in)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) ≥1 REV (out) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)

FWL1 (in)
& REVL1 (out)

REVL1 (in)
& FWL2 (out)

FWL2 (in)
& REVL2 (out)

REVL2 (in)
& FWL3 (out)

FWL3 (in)
& REVL3 (out)

REVL3 (in)
& FWN (out)

FWN (in)
& REVN (out)

REVN (in)
Figure 365: The START Criteria function
DIRECTION Criteria
START (in) START (out)

IntToBits STL1 (in) STL1 (out) BitsToint
STDIRIN STL2 (in) STL2 (out) STDIR
in b0 START (in) START (out) b0 out
STL3 (in) STL3 (out)
b1 FW (in) FW (out) b1
STN (in) STN (out)
b2 REV (in) REV (out) b2
FW (in)
≥1 FW (out)
REV (in)
≥1 REV (out)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)
FWL1 (in)
=1
REVL1 (in)
& REVL1 (out)
& FWL2 (out)
FWL2 (in)
=1
REVL2 (in)
& REVL2 (out)
& FWL3 (out)
FWL3 (in)
=1
REVL3 (in)
& REVL3 (out)
& FWN (out)
FWN (in)
=1
REVN (in)
& REVN (out)
Figure 366: The DIRECTION Criteria function
STARTCOMB
To make it possible to provide the directional information from a protection function, a STARTCOMB
block is used in between the application function and the Start Matrix function.
The STARTCOMB function has one block input and 14 Boolean inputs that convert the 14 Boolean
inputs into a WORD output STDIR, see Figure 367.

Technical manual
Logic
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)
b12= STN (startN)
b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)
STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDI R
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
FWL3
REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN
Figure 367: STARTCOMB
Protection functions
Some protection functions are provided with start and directional outputs, for example:
• Protection 1: General START, FW and REV

• Protection 2: Phase-wise STLx, FWLx and REVLx (where x = 1, 2 and 3)
• Protection 3: STN, FWN and REVN
• Protection 4: STDIR
Connection example
In Figure 368 below is an example how to connect start and directional signals from protection
functions via STARTCOMB and SMAGAPC to SMPPTRC.

Technical manual
Logic
SMAGAPC
STARTCOMB BLOCK STDIR
PROTECTION 1 BLOCK STDIR STDIR1
START START STDIR2
FW FW STDIR3
REV REV STDIR4
STL1 STDIR5
FWL1 STDIR6 SMPPTRC
REVL1 STDIR7 BLOCK TRIP
STL2 STDIR8 BLKLKOUT TRL1
FWL2 STDIR9 TRIN TRL2
REVL2 STDIR10 TRINL1 TRL3
STL3 STDIR11 TRINL2 TR1P
FWL3 STDIR12 TRINL3 TR2P
REVL3 STDIR13 PSL1 TR3P
STN STDIR14 PSL2 CLLKOUT
FWN STDIR15 PSL3 START
REVN STDIR16 1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
STARTCOMB SETLKOUT STN
BLOCK STDIR RSTLKOUT FW
START STDIR REV
FW
PROTECTION 2 REV
STL1 STL1
FWL1 FWL1
REVL1 REVL1
STL2 STL2
FWL2 FWL2
REVL2 REVL2
STL3 STL3
FWL3 FWL3
REVL3 REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN
STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDIR
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
PROTECTION 4
FWL3
-
PROTECTION 3 REVL3
STDIR
STN STN
-
FWN FWN
-
REVN REVN
Figure 368: Connection example of protection functions using STARTCOMB, SMAGAPC to

SMPPTRC
18.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to route trip signals and other logical output signals
to different output contacts on the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to physical
tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or steady output.
TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
Figure 369: TMAGAPC function block
18.3.4 Signals
Table 531: TMAGAPC Input signals

BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1

Technical manual
Logic

Table 532: TMAGAPC Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32
18.3.5 Settings
Table 533: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time

Technical manual
Logic

ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The
function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide grouping of connected input
signals to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the first output
signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the third output
signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay and

OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always active and will
delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides
whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse
with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are connected in
an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and then
one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset.
Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 370

Technical manual
Logic
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 16
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 32
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput3=Pulsed
OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
Figure 370: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output
contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set
to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the
circuit breaker trip coils.

GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v3
Table 534: Number of TMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
18.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1
18.4.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -
18.4.2 Functionality GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4
The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to route several alarm signals to a common
indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
18.4.3 Function block GUID-EA192656-71DD-4D44-A1D5-96B1B4937971 v1
ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
18.4.4 Signals
Table 535: ALMCALH Input signals

Table 536: ALMCALH Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
18.4.5 Settings
Table 537: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)

On
18.4.6 Operation principle GUID-0405BB7B-7EF7-4546-92CD-F703AA0DD9F4 v2
The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one ALARM output
signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM output
signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady signal.
Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
³1 t
Input 16
Figure 371: Group alarm logic

GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v2
Table 538: Number of ALMCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
18.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH
18.5.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -
18.5.2 Functionality GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4
The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to route several warning signals to a common
indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
18.5.3 Function block GUID-C909E4FB-3F7A-47F7-8988-36B159E2C7B2 v1
WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
18.5.4 Signals
Table 539: WRNCALH Input signals

Table 540: WRNCALH Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
18.5.5 Settings
Table 541: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)

On
18.5.6 Operation principle GUID-71C65C20-7B6C-499F-BFCD-E418AA55F7EC v2
The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING
output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the WARNING output
signal will get logical value 1.
INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
³1 t
INPUT16

GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v2
Table 542: Number of WRNCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5
18.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH
18.6.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Logic for group indication INDCALH - -
18.6.2 Functionality GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4
The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to route several indication signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
18.6.3 Function block GUID-9D89E183-449A-4016-AB83-E57C8DDBA843 v1
INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
18.6.4 Signals
Table 543: INDCALH Input signals

Table 544: INDCALH Output signals

IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
18.6.5 Settings
Table 545: INDCALH Group settings (basic)

On
18.6.6 Operation principle GUID-72B1B4E8-BC6C-4AF7-8B41-058241B944F8 v2
The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 IND output
signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND output signal
will get logical value 1.
INPUT1
200 ms
IND
³1 t
INPUT16

GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2
Table 546: Number of INDCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
18.7 Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v20
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals (have no
suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic blocks and timers are always available
as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs. The list below
shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
The logic blocks are available as a part of an extension logic package. The list below is a summary of
the function blocks and their features.
• AND function block. The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the input to
the output.
• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal to the output.

Technical manual
Logic
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
• OR function block. The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. RESET input has priority.
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. The SET input has priority.
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The
timer has a settable time delay.
• XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs
and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals
are different and 0 if they are the same.
18.7.1 AND function block AND IP11013-1 v2
M11453-3 v4
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The AND
function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
18.7.1.1 Function block

M11452-3 v2
AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
Figure 372: AND function block
18.7.1.2 Signals
Table 547: AND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1

Technical manual
Logic
Table 548: AND Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal
18.7.1.3 Technical data

GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3
Table 549: Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
18.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE IP11021-1 v2
M11489-3 v2
The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

M11490-3 v2
GATE
INPUT OUT
Figure 373: GATE function block
18.7.2.2 Signals
Table 550: GATE Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate
Table 551: GATE Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate
18.7.2.3 Settings
Table 552: GATE Group settings (basic)

On

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v3
Table 553: Number of GATE instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
18.7.3 Inverter function block INV IP11011-1 v2

M11445-3 v1
INV
INPUT OUT
Figure 374: INV function block
18.7.3.2 Signals
Table 554: INV Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input
Table 555: INV Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output

GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v3
Table 556: Number of INV instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
18.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD GUID-05D959B5-A55B-437C-8E8F-831A4A357E24 v2
GUID-64B24094-010D-4B8F-8B7B-DDD49499AAE5 v3
The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

GUID-EE44CFDF-C8F7-4870-BD1C-98D9CD91FD97 v4
LLD
INPUT OUT
IEC15000144.vsd
Figure 375: LLD function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.7.4.2 Signals
Table 557: LLD Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 558: LLD Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v2
Table 559: Number of LLD instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
18.7.5 OR function block IP11012-1 v3
M11449-3 v2
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR
function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

M11448-3 v1
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
Figure 376: OR function block
18.7.5.2 Signals
Table 560: OR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate

Technical manual
Logic
Table 561: OR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v4
Table 562: Number of OR instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 78 60 160
18.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER IP11016-1 v2
M11466-3 v3
The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting the
operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When the input is 1, the output
will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

M11465-3 v4
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT
Figure 377: PULSETIMER function block
18.7.6.2 Signals
Table 563: PULSETIMER Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer
Table 564: PULSETIMER Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer
18.7.6.3 Settings
Table 565: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v2
Table 566: Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
18.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY GUID-9C93669F-078B-49EA-85B8-C4BB6A434734 v1
GUID-4C804DEA-3C83-4C20-82C6-BAD03BD48242 v5
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or
set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where
one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has
higher priority over SET input.
Table 567: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT

0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

GUID-50D5A4C0-59BF-44DE-86AC-47640ACD35A7 v3
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 378: RSMEMORY function block
18.7.7.2 Signals
Table 568: RSMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
Table 569: RSMEMORY Output signals


Technical manual
Logic
18.7.7.3 Settings
Table 570: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2
Table 571: Number of RSMEMORY instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
18.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY IP11020-1 v2
M11485-3 v4
The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs,
where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The input SET has priority.
Table 572: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT

0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

M11484-3 v2
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 379: SRMEMORY function block
18.7.8.2 Signals
Table 573: SRMEMORY Input signals


Technical manual
Logic
Table 574: SRMEMORY Output signals

18.7.8.3 Settings
Table 575: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

On

GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2
Table 576: Number of SRMEMORY instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
18.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET IP11022-1 v2
M11494-3 v3
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of the input signal
at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On
and Off that controls the operation of the timer.
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
t
Figure 380: TIMERSET status diagram

M11495-3 v3
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF
Figure 381: TIMERSET function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.7.9.2 Signals
Table 577: TIMERSET Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
Table 578: TIMERSET Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed
18.7.9.3 Settings
Table 579: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v3
Table 580: Number of TIMERSET instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
18.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018-1 v2
M11477-3 v4
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal
OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
Table 581: Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

M11476-3 v1
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
Figure 382: XOR function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.7.10.2 Signals
Table 582: XOR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 583: XOR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v2
Table 584: Number of XOR instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
18.8 Configurable logic blocks Q/T GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v5
The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the input signals (have
suffix QT at the end of their function name).
The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' configuration to the specific application needs.
The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position input is copied to
value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of SP_OUT output. Quality input
bits are copied to the corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.
• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The value part of single
position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single position input is copied to
TIME output. The quality bits in the common part and the indication part of inputs signal are
copied to the corresponding quality output.
• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input. Inputs are
copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit
will be set to invalid. The time stamp of an output will be set to the latest time stamp of INPUT
and VALID inputs.
• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the time stamp and
the quality of the input signal.
• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
the input signal.

Technical manual
Logic
• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset.
The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset.
The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The
timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
the input signal.
• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
18.8.1 ANDQT function block GUID-E3023D85-FDCC-4A5F-99B4-64DA7B4AC5BB v5
The ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.
18.8.1.1 Function block GUID-4CEE3C76-A39D-4C33-AD55-88C570210F2B v2
ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
Figure 383: ANDQT function block
18.8.1.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1
Table 585: ANDQT Input signals

Table 586: ANDQT Output signals


Technical manual
Logic

GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1
Table 587: Number of ANDQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100
18.8.2 Single point indication related signals combining function

block INDCOMBSPQT GUID-13C9325D-D3A0-480F-9F3B-738A13E0ECF8 v3
GUID-EEBD65A5-394C-4ECD-BF6F-D556B610FC57 v3
The value of single point input (SP_IN) is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT output. The TIME
input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the
corresponding state part of the SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT output changes,
the Event bit in the state part is toggled.
INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.
18.8.2.1 Function block GUID-55B49FC7-8239-4891-BE16-29296A8F40BE v1
INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*
IEC15000146.vsd
Figure 384: INDCOMBSPQT function block
Table 588: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode
Table 589: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1
Table 590: Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10
18.8.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT GUID-9C3D6C45-6B3A-466C-86A1-3DBCD4809B33 v1
GUID-9B700C69-4DAE-434A-BCE6-CE2D1139680A v3
The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of
single point input is copied to the TIME output. The state bits in the common part and the indication
part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding state output.
INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.
18.8.3.1 Function block GUID-04AA5209-B919-4161-A585-336CE9618A89 v2
INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST
Figure 385: INDEXTSPQT function block
Table 591: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication
Table 592: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1
Table 593: Number of INDEXTSPQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10
18.8.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT GUID-66C6DCEE-1F0E-4EB8-9ADB-97F8B41E53DF v4
Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.
The values of the input signals INPUTx (where 1<x<16) are copied to the outputs OUTPUTx (where
1<x<16). If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid, all outputs OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16)
quality bit will be set to invalid. The time stamp of any output OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) will be set to
the latest time stamp of any input and the input VALID.
INVALIDQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.
18.8.4.1 Function block GUID-0BD84306-0965-4702-8D5C-9570A70168EA v1
INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID
iec08000169.vsd
Figure 386: INVALIDQT function block
Table 594: INVALIDQT Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1

Technical manual
Logic

VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not
Table 595: INVALIDQT Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1

GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v2
Table 596: Number of INVALIDQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT 10 6 6
18.8.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT GUID-502064E0-FE2F-43C0-AA40-79D058FC3E1C v4
The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output. It can propagate the
quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

Technical manual
Logic
18.8.5.1 Function block GUID-06C5C594-E00B-4FD5-8B0F-4ED05DB348B6 v2
INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT
Figure 387: INVERTERQT function block
Table 597: INVERTERQT Input signals

Table 598: INVERTERQT Output signals


GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1
Table 599: Number of INVERTERQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100
18.8.6 ORQT function block GUID-F8F8D591-F895-4BCB-ADBD-5F95E7B70FEB v2
GUID-F8AECD9C-83FC-4025-9AB5-809D88122277 v4
The ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions OR with boolean
variables. ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. It
can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via IEC 61850.
18.8.6.1 Function block GUID-BCDFD5F0-4F30-4012-BA49-2E5C2115912E v2
ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
Figure 388: ORQT function block

Technical manual
Logic
Table 600: ORQT Input signals

Table 601: ORQT Output signals


GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1
Table 602: Number of ORQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100
18.8.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT GUID-5CB71BD1-58A0-4A06-9207-6DAE389B5288 v2
GUID-D930E5A7-C564-4464-B97F-C72B4801C917 v4
The pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
for limiting the operation time of the outputs. PULSETIMERQT has a settable output pulse length.
When the input goes to 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it
returns to 0.
When the output changes value, the time stamp of the output signal is updated.
The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each execution
cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp on the output.
PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.
18.8.7.1 Function block GUID-C0490ECF-5C4E-4F17-B628-482694C590D2 v1
PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT
IEC15000145.vsd
Figure 389: PULSETIMERQT function block

Technical manual
Logic
Table 603: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Table 604: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

18.8.7.3 Settings
Table 605: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)

t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1
Table 606: Number of PULSETIMERQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
18.8.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT GUID-095B2670-610E-47AE-A5D3-F3E7C0A56B65 v2
GUID-32A1B759-2ED8-45B3-8385-762167626CE2 v6
The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set an output
from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has two outputs, where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to
the state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, the RESET input has higher
priority than the SET input.
RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.
Table 607: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT

0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
18.8.8.1 Function block GUID-BDBFD8BA-9253-4277-96D8-0FF7EE93B56E v1
RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 390: RSMEMORYQT function block

Technical manual
Logic
Table 608: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Table 609: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

18.8.8.3 Settings
Table 610: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

On

GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1
Table 611: Number of RSMEMORYQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30
18.8.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT GUID-D910BA2D-07FA-44C5-A820-E0413AD7FD91 v2
GUID-39060D4B-9AA7-4505-9487-88B2CBC534F0 v5
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output
from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block has two outputs, where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to
the state it had before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.
SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.
Table 612: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT

0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

Technical manual
Logic
18.8.9.1 Function block GUID-8B04BA86-9685-4E73-9C04-3AE74752CDBF v1
SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 391: SRMEMORYQT function block
Table 613: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Table 614: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

18.8.9.3 Settings
Table 615: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

On

GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1
Table 616: Number of SRMEMORYQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30
18.8.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT GUID-582D9F19-9974-40D6-95EB-7BAD72910748 v2
GUID-3830BCA7-4876-481E-B5AC-2104675232E7 v5
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the input signal at
pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also has an Operation setting On/Off
that controls the operation of the timer.
When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The supported
“quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each execution cycle. A change of
these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

Technical manual
Logic
18.8.10.1 Function block GUID-13589BAE-38AE-46A1-8E9F-94BCD1CBCBF1 v1
TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF
Figure 392: TIMERSETQT function
Table 617: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Table 618: TIMERSETQT Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed
18.8.10.3 Settings
Table 619: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)

On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1
Table 620: Number of TIMERSETQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
18.8.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT GUID-76ADACC1-A273-4100-BE62-99BCDABFEB7A v2
GUID-62986D87-1690-499E-B8D3-1F51D2DA191E v4
The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.

Technical manual
Logic
Table 621: Truth table for XORQT function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1
XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.
18.8.11.1 Function block GUID-A685524C-DF12-4BA8-A29C-A027CEAC75E5 v2
XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
Figure 393: XORQT function block
Table 622: XORQT Input signals

Table 623: XORQT Output signals


GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1
Table 624: Number of XORQT instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30
18.9 Extension logic package IP11362-1 v2
When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be ordered.

Technical manual
Logic
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v8
Table 625: Number of instances in the extension logic package

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SLGAPC 10 10 54
VSGAPC 10 10 100
AND 80 40 100
OR 80 40 100
PULSETIMER 20 20 49
GATE — — 49
TIMERSET 34 30 49
XOR 10 10 69
LLD — — 49
SRMEMORY 10 10 110
INV 80 40 100
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
18.10 Fixed signals FXDSIGN
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the
configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/
value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of signals are
available.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
Figure 394: FXDSIGN function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.10.3 Signals
Table 626: FXDSIGN Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
18.10.4 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
18.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals
into an integer.

Technical manual
Logic
B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
Figure 395: B16I function block
18.11.4 Signals
Table 627: B16I Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
Table 628: B16I Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Technical manual
Logic

Table 629: B16I Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary
inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values
on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the
inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is =
Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function is
designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the
function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are active
that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the
B16I function block.

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v4
Table 630: Number of B16I instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
18.12 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to
transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the output at
the last value.
BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
Figure 396: BTIGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.12.4 Signals
Table 631: BTIGAPC Input signals

Table 632: BTIGAPC Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Table 633: BTIGAPC Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (BTIGAPC) will transfer
a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a
value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1
where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as
a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx
(where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on
the output OUT. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Technical manual
Logic
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.
function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are active
that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the
BTIGAPC function block.

GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v2
Table 634: Number of BTIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
18.13 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
boolean (logical) signals.

Technical manual
Logic
IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Figure 397: IB16 function block
18.13.4 Signals
Table 635: IB16 Input signals

INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input
Table 636: IB16 Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1

Technical manual
Logic
18.13.5 Setting parameters ABBD8E242451 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx = 0
for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the
table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a
value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2
+ 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be
equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value between 0
to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The
sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the
different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535
is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the integer input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.
function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when

deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0

Technical manual
Logic
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16 function
block.

GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v3
Table 637: Number of IB16 instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 12 4 8
18.14 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) is used to
transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16 boolean
(logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L (Remote/Local)
push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R (Remote
i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit), and the corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO
ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and
blocks new integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.
ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Figure 398: ITBGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.14.4 Signals
Table 638: ITBGAPC Input signals

Table 639: ITBGAPC Output signals

18.14.5 Settings
GUID-F573CA16-4821-4203-970A-F7D01AF5E63B v1
This function does not have any setting parameters.
An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and received by the
ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2
OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is
represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4;
and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC 61850
network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the
Table 640. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of
the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value received over
IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) will transfer
an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and connected to the

Technical manual
Logic
ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values
represented by the different OUTx are according to Table 640. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for
example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
Table 640: Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when

deactivated
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are active equals
65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number that is
communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position
“Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no changes are applied to the outputs.

GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2
Table 641: Number of ITBGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8

Technical manual
Logic
18.15 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC
18.15.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -
18.15.2 Functionality GUID-390D7433-0C1C-48B4-9A90-71AA148C3C35 v3
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when a
given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 399.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain
q-1
a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b
a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b
a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b
q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd
Figure 399: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC
• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time
18.15.3 Function block GUID-6D50A060-7751-405B-AEC1-FAE942EBDA64 v2
TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
Figure 400: TEIGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.15.4 Signals
Table 642: TEIGAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time, when
its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time
Table 643: TEIGAPC Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds
18.15.5 Settings
Table 644: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision
18.15.6 Operation principle GUID-04CC8365-DCDE-4DC7-BEF0-6EF8382305DD v3
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides
• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to 999999.9 seconds
• retaining of the integrated value
Figure 401 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time Integration“ covers the
logics for the first two items listed above while the block “Transgression Supervision Plus
Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

Technical manual
Logic
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
Figure 401: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities
• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high

• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation value for the
integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm and
tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is no check if
tAlarm > tWarning.
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on the level of
the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if an overflow
occurs.
18.15.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-E0772193-9F6E-43DA-B642-2923565E5D4C v3
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

Technical manual
Logic
• function cycle time

• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses may lead to
reduced accuracy.
18.15.6.2 Memory storage GUID-6FDD6590-30F9-4CC1-AC9D-945544AB8688 v3
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4
Table 645: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy

Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever
is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever
is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever
is greater
Table 646: Number of TEIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
18.16 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP
18.16.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>
18.16.2 Functionality GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system relative to each
other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring, supervision,
interlocking and other logics.
18.16.3 Function block GUID-EB28F45B-B1D0-452F-98B4-F96D7FA34069 v1
INTCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

Technical manual
Logic
18.16.4 Signals
Table 647: INTCOMP Input signals

INPUT INTEGER 0 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 648: INTCOMP Output signals

INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value
18.16.5 Settings
Table 649: INTCOMP Group settings (basic)

EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either input
Input REF or setting
SetValue -2000000000 - - 1 100 Set value for reference
2000000000

Table 650: INTCOMP Monitored data

INEQUAL BOOLEAN - - Input value is equal to the reference
value
INHIGH BOOLEAN - - Input value is higher than the reference
value
INLOW BOOLEAN - - Input value is lower than the reference
value
18.16.7 Operation principle GUID-E9C1B863-ACA7-45C0-91F1-A51FE38755FE v3
The comparison can be done in two ways,
• Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

• Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.
The selection of reference value for comparison is done through setting RefSource. If RefSource is
selected as "Input REF" then the reference value for comparison is taken from second input signal
(REF). If RefSource is selected as "Set Value" then the reference value for comparison is taken from
setting (SetValue).
The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values, which is governed by
on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as "Absolute" then both input and reference values are

Technical manual
Logic
converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as "Signed" then the
comparison is done without any conversion.
The function has three binary outputs representing the result of the comparison:
• If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH is set HIGH
• If the input is below the reference value then INLOW is set HIGH
• If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL is set HIGH
18.17 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP
18.17.1 Function revision history GUID-D91005E2-2607-4FE2-A500-29D1F15CAEC4 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 Settings EqualBandLow and EqualBandHigh maximum value has been changed to
50.00 in order to make the function more user friendly.
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L 2.2.5 -
18.17.2 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>
18.17.3 Functionality GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system relative to
each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring,
supervision, interlocking and other logics.
18.17.4 Function block GUID-8752DF2A-D131-4461-80C6-C52F9980D228 v1
REALCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

Technical manual
Logic
18.17.5 Signals
Table 651: REALCOMP Input signals

INPUT REAL 0.000 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF REAL 0.000 Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 652: REALCOMP Output signals

INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value
18.17.6 Settings
18.17.7 Operation principle GUID-3FA699A8-D076-4E5E-BCB8-C6B7907573D1 v3
The comparison can be done in two ways,
1. Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

2. Between INPUT and the SetValue setting
The selection of reference value for comparison is done through setting RefSource. If RefSource is
selected as "Input REF" then the reference value for comparison is taken from second input signal
(REF). If RefSource is selected as "Set Value" then the reference value for comparison is taken from
setting (SetValue).
Generally the inputs to the function are in units, but when the comparison is to be done with respect
to set level, then the user can scale the reference value in steps of 1000, as per the setting RefPrefix.
Internally the function handles the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.
Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values, which is
determined by the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as "Absolute" then both input and reference
values are converted into absolute values and then comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as
"Signed" then the comparison is done without absolute conversion.
This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins from reference
value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low band around the reference
value, output INEQUAL will get set.
In order to avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit, hysteresis
has been provided. If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin including hysteresis, then
INHIGH will set. Similarly if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin including hysteresis, then
INLOW will set.

Technical manual
Logic
INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset
EqualBandHigh
Internal
Equal Band REF or SetValue Hysteresis for
equal band
EqualBandLow
INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

Figure 402: Operation principle of REALCOMP
When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than 0.1% of
the set unit then INLOW output will never pick up. During the above mentioned
condition, due to marginal value for avoiding oscillations of function outputs, the
INLOW output will never set.

GUID-62792FCB-B436-4034-9A08-C9FF918FF547 v1
REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level and the
maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ.
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v4
Table 653: Number of REALCOMP instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 10 10 10
18.18 Hold maximum and minimum of input HOLDMINMAX GUID-18E05AF9-05D1-49C0-BD89-9BCB4F168907 v1
18.18.1 Identification GUID-18E05AF9-05D1-49C0-BD89-9BCB4F168907 v1

Hold maximum and minimum of input HOLDMINMAX - -
18.18.2 Functionality GUID-7DA0AA9A-CCEA-4467-B67E-45B9C1DC145A v1
Hold minimum and maximum of input (HOLDMINMAX) function will acquire, compare and hold the
minimum and maximum values of INPUT as soon as the START input goes to 1, the outputs are
updated as long as the START is 1. After START goes to 0, the last updated value is stored. The
outputs are reset when the RESET is 1.

Technical manual
Logic
18.18.3 Function block GUID-8CA6CD4E-1080-4849-B146-25C19DEDFA66 v1
HOLDMAXMIN
HOLDMINMAX
INPUT MAX
START MIN
RESET
Figure 403: HOLDMINMAX function block
18.18.4 Signals
GUID-5B941634-5868-427A-80F8-9CA5740D3039 v1
Table 654: HOLDMINMAX Input signals

INPUT REAL 0 Input
START BOOLEAN 0 Start
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset
Table 655: HOLDMINMAX Output signals

MAX REAL Maximum value
MIN REAL Minimum value
18.19 Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL GUID-B9C23419-0B94-4D72-B88D-4FB7C8C6E388 v1
18.19.1 Identification GUID-B9C23419-0B94-4D72-B88D-4FB7C8C6E388 v1

Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL - -
18.19.2 Functionality GUID-B5E646B7-07AC-448E-B75E-773452157369 v1
The converter integer to real (INT_REAL) function can be used to convert integer to real values.
18.19.3 Function block GUID-B4606AFC-9B6D-4452-9DD2-6258CBE7A571 v1
INT_REAL
INT_REAL
INT REAL
Figure 404: INT_REAL function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.19.4 Signals
Table 656: INT_REAL Input signals

INT INTEGER 0 Integer input
Table 657: INT_REAL Output signals

REAL REAL Real output
18.20 Definable constant for logic function CONST_INT GUID-67FDADEA-EF3B-4759-8FD2-6BDE6C757C22 v1
18.20.1 Identification GUID-67FDADEA-EF3B-4759-8FD2-6BDE6C757C22 v1

Definable constant for logic function CONST_INT - -
18.20.2 Functionality GUID-4EF2869F-48F1-4B7B-B99B-FEAAC9431A9B v1
The definable constant for logic function CONST_INT can be used to provide a constant output in an
integer format based on the set value in PST.
18.20.3 Function block GUID-BAADB2EE-4C9F-40EA-BE40-F14490E1C3D2 v1
CONST_INT
CONST_INT
OUT
Figure 405: CONST_INT function block
18.20.4 Signals
Table 658: CONST_INT Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output
18.20.5 Settings
Table 659: CONST_INT Non group settings (basic)

Constant -999999 - 999999 - 1 0.1 Constant value

Technical manual
Logic
18.21 Analog input selector for integer values INTSEL GUID-1B14ACDB-43FD-4B87-B714-B661A5B90C75 v1
18.21.1 Identification GUID-1B14ACDB-43FD-4B87-B714-B661A5B90C75 v1

Analog input selector for integer values INTSEL - -
18.21.2 Functionality GUID-567B1181-BDE7-497B-8020-FDB798F0FCB5 v1
Analog input selector for integer values (INTSEL) selects one out of eight possible integer inputs.
Each input (INPUTx) has its dedicated select input (SELx). The function provides the output for the
value of the selected input, and its respective select number (INSEL).
If more than one input is selected, the output will be the lowest in order INPUT value. If inputs are not
selected, the select value number shall be 0.
18.21.3 Function block GUID-94FEDCA6-DABD-4D20-A6F3-A95DED7C3777 v1
INTSEL
INTSEL
INPUT1 VALUE
INPUT2 INSEL
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
SEL1
SEL2
SEL3
SEL4
SEL5
SEL6
SEL7
SEL8
Figure 406: INTSEL function block
18.21.4 Signals
Table 660: INTSEL Input signals

INPUT1 INTEGER 0 Input 1

Technical manual
Logic

SEL1 BOOLEAN 0 Selector 1
Table 661: INTSEL Output signals

VALUE INTEGER Value
INSEL INTEGER Selector
18.22 Definable limiter LIMITER GUID-8C44B106-7C1F-452F-B8C5-0C7B889C08F2 v1
18.22.1 Identification GUID-8C44B106-7C1F-452F-B8C5-0C7B889C08F2 v1

Definable limiter LIMITER - -
18.22.2 Functionality GUID-BD0E0AB5-03AD-469E-AE25-D92BD9555FC5 v1
The definable limiter (LIMITER) function can be used to limit the output values within the minimum
and maximum limits set in the PST. If the input is outside the set range then the value OUTLIMIT is
set to 1 to indicate the output value is limited.
18.22.3 Function block GUID-A64AFC93-0840-4828-949A-84180D485B81 v1
LIMITER
LIMITER
IN OUT
OUTLIMIT
Figure 407: LIMITER function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.22.4 Signals
Table 662: LIMITER Input signals

IN REAL 0 Input value
Table 663: LIMITER Output signals

OUT REAL Output value
OUTLIMIT BOOLEAN Input is out of limit
18.22.5 Settings
Table 664: LIMITER Non group settings (basic)

MinLim -999999.9 - - 0.1 -1.0 Minimum limit
999999.9
MaxLim -999999.9 - - 0.1 1.0 Maximum limit
999999.9
18.23 Absolute value ABS GUID-D0CC5BFF-4F4F-41A9-9C5F-615496D010B0 v1
18.23.1 Identification GUID-D0CC5BFF-4F4F-41A9-9C5F-615496D010B0 v1

Absolute value ABS - -
18.23.2 Functionality GUID-A5BF20EF-F04B-4546-B6D0-C1343A56ED72 v1
The absolute value (ABS) function gives the absolute value of the input.
18.23.3 Function block GUID-17CD947C-B18A-429C-BDE8-763065C1CD6F v1
ABS
ABS
IN OUT
Figure 408: ABS function block

Technical manual
Logic
18.23.4 Signals
Table 665: ABS Input signals

IN REAL 0 Input
Table 666: ABS Output signals

OUT REAL Output
18.24 Polar to rectangular converter POL_REC GUID-EFB73717-DE3D-4C41-801A-82A8A30821E6 v1
18.24.1 Identification GUID-EFB73717-DE3D-4C41-801A-82A8A30821E6 v1

Polar to rectangular converter POL_REC - -
18.24.2 Functionality GUID-C2265D29-5169-4E04-B706-15B8A42F1D3E v1
The polar to rectangular converter (POL_REC) function gives the possibility to convert an input
values in polar form to a rectangular form.
18.24.3 Function block GUID-BD520B52-92ED-4690-A6E8-0DA821FDB6DB v1
Figure 409: POL_REC function block
18.24.4 Signals
Table 667: POL_REC Input signals

MAG REAL 0 Magnitude
ANGLE REAL 0 Angle in radians
Table 668: POL_REC Output signals

REAL REAL Real component
IMAG REAL imaginary component

Technical manual
Logic
18.25 Radians to degree angle converter RAD_DEG GUID-85E9D856-B4BB-4875-9042-46AA6F398955 v1
18.25.1 Identification GUID-85E9D856-B4BB-4875-9042-46AA6F398955 v1

Radians to degree angle converter RAD_DEG - -
18.25.2 Functionality GUID-40A32941-6633-4ABE-B123-9CCAAACC093A v1
The radians to degree angle converter (RAD_DEG) function gives the possibility to convert an input
value from radian angles to degree angles.
18.25.3 Function block GUID-5FA30AD4-77B9-4CD1-801C-3406A1892394 v1
RAD_DEG
RAD_DEG
RAD DEG
Figure 410: RAD_DEG function block
18.25.4 Signals
Table 669: RAD_DEG Input signals

RAD REAL 0 Angle in radians
Table 670: RAD_DEG Output signals

DEG REAL Angle in degree

Table 671: RAD_DEG Monitored data

DEG REAL - deg Angle in degree

Technical manual
Logic
18.26 Definable constant for logic function CONST_REAL GUID-98C89599-1535-44A5-9773-D755D9362DA0 v1
18.26.1 Identification GUID-98C89599-1535-44A5-9773-D755D9362DA0 v1

Definable constant for logic function CONST_REAL - -
18.26.2 Functionality GUID-3B03B1AD-54AF-4FC7-9472-4295D920BA4A v1
The definable constant for logic function (CONST_REAL) can be used to provide a constant output in
an real format based on the set value in PST.
18.26.3 Function block GUID-9E9A4FA6-498F-4D8F-AA47-47D49AE840A8 v1
CONST_REAL
CONST_REAL
OUT
GUID-6A878306-1E98-469E-9E4F-1B0C46381ADE V1 EN-US
Figure 411: CONST_REAL function block
18.26.4 Signals
Table 672: CONST_REAL Output signals

OUT REAL Output
18.26.5 Signals
Table 673: CONST_REAL Non group settings (basic)

Constant -999999.9 - - 0.1 1.0 Constant value
999999.9
18.27 Analog input selector for real values REALSEL GUID-FF9DD985-AF26-48B1-80F9-8A7C70189A77 v1
18.27.1 Identification GUID-FF9DD985-AF26-48B1-80F9-8A7C70189A77 v1

Analog input selector for real values REALSEL - -

Technical manual
Logic
18.27.2 Functionality GUID-CDE0D96C-B328-4B10-A88C-1648D1E9A521 v1
Analog input selector for real values (REALSEL) function selects one out of eight possible real
inputs. Each input (INPUTx) has its dedicated select input (SELx).
The function provides the output for the value of the selected input and its respective select number
(INSEL). If more than one input is selected, the output will be the lowest in order INPUT value. If
inputs are not selected, the select value number shall be 0.
18.27.3 Function block GUID-C8C6B16A-FDDE-4315-A07F-7D5AB8C969B9 v1
REALSEL
REALSEL
INPUT1 VALUE
INPUT2 INSEL
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
SEL1
SEL2
SEL3
SEL4
SEL5
SEL6
SEL7
SEL8
Figure 412: REALSEL function block
18.27.4 Signals
Table 674: REALSEL Input signals

INPUT1 REAL 0 Input 1

Technical manual
Logic

Table 675: REALSEL Output signals

VALUE REAL Value
INSEL INTEGER Selector
18.28 Store value for integer inputs STOREINT GUID-7DF1E9B4-C065-4905-99AF-EDAAB2AF4F80 v1
18.28.1 Identification GUID-7DF1E9B4-C065-4905-99AF-EDAAB2AF4F80 v1

Store value for integer inputs STOREINT - -
18.28.2 Functionality GUID-48902D3D-BE8B-4159-B8A2-A596912BAE76 v1
The store value for integer inputs (STOREINT) function can be used to store the integer value upon
the trigger, the minimum trigger duration for it to be stored is 100ms. The stored value is reset to 0
when the RESET input is set to 1.
18.28.3 Function block GUID-314823EB-C9E0-498D-958E-0FA32DE941BF v1
GUID-4AF5186E-2BF2-4D6D-AEAC-D1854A0D04EB V1 EN-US
Figure 413: STOREINT function block
18.28.4 Signals
Table 676: STOREINT Input signals

INPUT INTEGER 0 Input
TRIGGER BOOLEAN 0 Trigger, if high for more than 100 ms the input value is stored
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset stored value
Table 677: STOREINT Output signals

STOREDVAL INTEGER Stored value

Technical manual
Logic
18.29 Store value for real inputs STOREREAL GUID-B44812FC-7808-4AF5-A8C3-140A9365A72A v1
18.29.1 Identification GUID-B44812FC-7808-4AF5-A8C3-140A9365A72A v1

Store value for real inputs STOREREAL - -
18.29.2 Functionality GUID-A3DF152A-7BAA-4BBE-BBB8-12F513C92317 v1
The store value for real inputs (STOREREAL) function can be used to store the real value upon the
trigger, the minimum trigger duration for it to be stored is 100ms. The stored value is reset to 0 when
the RESET input is set to 1.
18.29.3 Function block GUID-4AF2FAEA-97E0-40C3-9503-6AED8066E8BB v1
STOREREAL
STOREREAL
IN STOREDVAL
TRIGGER
RESET
Figure 414: STOREREAL function block
18.29.4 Signals
Table 678: STOREREAL Input signals

IN REAL 0 Input
TRIGGER BOOLEAN 0 Trigger, if high for more than 100 ms the input value is stored
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset stored value
Table 679: STOREREAL Output signals

STOREDVAL REAL Stored value
18.30 Degree to radians angle converter DEG_RAD GUID-D6D9BCBF-799F-465E-8AB7-480DB0124081 v1
18.30.1 Identification GUID-D6D9BCBF-799F-465E-8AB7-480DB0124081 v1

Degree to radians angle converter DEG_RAD - -

Technical manual
Logic
18.30.2 Functionality GUID-51608C56-7ED9-4FAD-A5BF-5EA4991F83D2 v1
The degree to radians angle converter (DEG_RAD) function gives the possibility to convert an input
value from degree angles to radian angles.
18.30.3 Function block GUID-933FD746-C986-4774-A4C3-B8C19357DF09 v1
DEGTORAD
DEG_RAD
DEG RAD
Figure 415: DEG_RAD function block
18.30.4 Signals
Table 680: DEG_RAD Input signals

DEG REAL 0 Angle in degree
Table 681: DEG_RAD Output signals

RAD REAL Angle in radians

Table 682: DEG_RAD Monitored data

RAD REAL - deg Angle in radians

Technical manual
Monitoring
Section 19 Monitoring
19.1 Measurements IP14593-1 v4
19.1.1 Function revision history GUID-D462FD8B-5BC4-40A4-93C7-6CCC4F77FBC3 v1
19.1.2 Function revision history GUID-8EAA18E2-28AF-498A-889A-24AB7518ADDA v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
L
M
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US
Phase current measurement CMMXU -
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Technical manual
Monitoring

Current sequence component CMSQI -
measurement
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US
Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US
Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the
local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850. The
possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents,
voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of
electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of
the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs and
VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other
independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified.
Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent
protection function.
The available measured values from an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit, high
limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the measured value
below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in
measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value
updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting.
Main menu /Measurement /Monitoring /Service values /CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical quantities:
• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)

Technical manual
Monitoring
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency
phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The measured power quantities
are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of
time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This
is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at
100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and
the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
Figure 416: CVMMXN function block
CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
Figure 417: CMMXU function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
Figure 418: VMMXU function block
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
Figure 419: CMSQI function block
VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
Figure 420: VMSQI function block
VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
Figure 421: VNMMXU function block
19.1.6 Signals
Table 683: CVMMXN Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 684: CVMMXN Output signals

S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range
Table 685: CMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 686: CMMXU Output signals

IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 687: VMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 688: VMMXU Output signals

UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 689: CMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 690: CMSQI Output signals

3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 691: VMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 692: VMSQI Output signals

3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Technical manual
Monitoring

U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 693: VNMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 694: VNMMXU Output signals

The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the
actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in the first
setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
• UBase (UB): Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It
can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object.
• IBase (IB): Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can
be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised object.
• SBase (SB): Base setting for power values in MVA.
Table 695: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
On

Technical manual
Monitoring

Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
measurement, U and I
Table 696: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

SDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
PDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
QDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
PFDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%

Technical manual
Monitoring

PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 500 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
IDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
FrDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 10 100 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
30% of Ur
100% of Ur

Technical manual
Monitoring

IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
30% of Ir
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
Table 697: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

IL1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
Value groups
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 698: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
5% of Ir
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
100% of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
0,001% of range
for all limits
0,001% of range
for all limits
Table 699: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

UL12DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Value groups
UL12AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Table 700: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
100% of Ur
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits

Technical manual
Monitoring

for all limits
for all limits
Table 701: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3I0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
On
I1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
I2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Table 702: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
Table 703: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3U0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Value groups
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
On

Technical manual
Monitoring

U1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
U2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
at 30% of Ur
at 100% of Ur
Table 704: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
Table 705: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

On
0,001% of range
Value groups
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
for all limits
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
for all limits
0,001% of range

Technical manual
Monitoring

Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
for all limits
Table 706: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

100% of Ur

Table 707: CVMMXN Monitored data

S REAL - MVA Apparent Power magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude of deadband
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power magnitude of deadband
value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude of deadband
value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude of
deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude of
deadband value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude of
deadband value

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 708: CMMXU Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
value
value
Table 709: VMMXU Monitored data

UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
value
value
value
value
Table 710: CMSQI Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 711: VMSQI Monitored data

3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value

Technical manual
Monitoring

U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 712: VNMMXU Monitored data

value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
value
value
19.1.9.1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v4
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process
information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of
processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function
Phase angle reference SEMOD54417-303 v5

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting
parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".
Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-137 v4

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input
signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S,
P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement
supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXN.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v5

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by means of
four defined operating thresholds, see figure 422. The monitoring has two different modes of
operating:
• Overfunction, when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit
(XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-
low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 422.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Y = Magnitude of the Measured Quantity
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
Figure 422: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded,
2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit).
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 422.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating
and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The
hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v5

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is
continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels
depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available:
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
• Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic
• Dynamic Amplitude Deadband
• Dynamic Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The
measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured value
passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Y
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
Figure 423: Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than
the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt), then the measuring channel reports the
new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 424
shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is
not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each
other.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1
Figure 424: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new
value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 425, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a
time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 425 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by
the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until
the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base
for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations
that can last for relatively long periods.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
Figure 425: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
19.1.9.2 Measurements CVMMXN SEMOD54417-172 v3
Mode of operation SEMOD54417-174 v7

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input
in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned
quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end
user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall
be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when three phase-to-
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 earth voltages are available
EQUATION1385 V1 EN-US (Equation 118) I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3

2 Arone Used when two phase-to-
S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 phase voltages are available
(Equation 120)
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
3 PosSeq Used when only symmetrical
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq three phase power shall be
measured
(Equation 122)
I = I PosSeq

Technical manual
Monitoring
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 124)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2

S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 126)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2

S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 128)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2

7 L1 Used when only UL1 phase-
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 to-earth voltage is available
(Equation 130)
I = I L1

S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 to-earth voltage is available
(Equation 132)
I = IL2

S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 to-earth voltage is available
(Equation 134)
I = I L3

* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement function
calculates the three-phase power accurately. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it
calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once
the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with
the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
Q = Im( S )
S = S = P2 + Q2

Technical manual
Monitoring
PF = cosj = P
S
Additionally to the power factor value, the two binary output signals from the function are provided
which indicates the angular relationship between the current and voltage phasors. Binary output
signal ILAG is set TRUE when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal
ILEAD is set TRUE when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is
an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD54417-293 v5

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get 0.5 class

The first current and voltage phase signal, in the group signals will be used as reference. The
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for other related input signals.
Low pass filtering SEMOD54417-233 v4

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce
the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will
make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is
performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

Technical manual
Monitoring
X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0,
the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application.
Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-250 v5

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is
possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement
UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero
automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as
well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values
the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point
clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility SEMOD54417-253 v5

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain
(CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on site
calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is
then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This
constant is set as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting
parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex constant has default
value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can
be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power meter
with high accuracy class available.
Directionality SEMOD54417-256 v7
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will
be always measured towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 427.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Busbar
IED
P Q
Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN-US
Figure 427: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the
busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the
protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power
transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite
directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by
setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive
power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency SEMOD54417-261 v2
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-
processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
19.1.9.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417-264 v7
The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current input
in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get
better then 0.5 class measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is
achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The
compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 426.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in
the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.1.9.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU SEMOD54417-268 v6
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be
operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations,
see above.
The voltages (phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
19.1.9.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI SEMOD54417-299 v6
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage (VMSQI)
input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are calculated within
the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from
the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and
current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

M12386-1 v17
Table 713: Power system measurement CVMMXN technical data

Frequency (0.8-1.2) x fr ±5.0 mHz for U at 0.2 × Ur ≤ U < 0.5 × Ur
±3.0 mHz for U at 0.5 × Ur ≤ U < 1.0 × Ur
±2.0 mHz for U at U ≥ Ur
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ > 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ < 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir
(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Technical manual
Monitoring
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6
Table 714: CMMXU technical data

Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5
Table 716: CMSQI technical data

Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6
Table 718: VNMMXU technical data

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v4
19.2.1 Function revision history GUID-7F31EFA5-F8D8-4D8D-85DA-3418F70ABE94 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 Binary quality inputs SENPRESQ and SENTEMPQ have been added for pressure and
temperature sensor signals in order to control alarm and lockout signals. Whenever there
is no sensor, the quality of the binary input will be low. If sensor quality is low, then
lockout and alarm signals will get reset.
L 2.2.5 -
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v5

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63
19.2.3 Functionality GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v8
Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker can be used as input to the
function. In addition, the function can be used with an analog value of gas pressure and temperature
of the insulation medium and binary inputs. The SSIMG function generates alarms based on the
received information.

GUID-94B75A6D-973D-4F1F-8643-F2128AD31CC4 v4
SSIMG
BLOCK LOCKOU T
BLKALM PRESLO
SENPRES TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENPRESQ PRESALM
SENTEMP Q TEMPALM
SENPRESALM PRESSURE
SENPRESLO TEMP
SETP LO
SETTLO
RESETLO
Figure 428: SSIMG function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.2.5 Signals
GUID-89749F71-CAEB-4A57-A1F0-148CCF68E97E v3
Table 719: SSIMG Input signals

BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
SENPRES REAL 0.0 Pressure input from transformer
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from transformer
SENPRESQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of pressure
SENTEMPQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of temperature sensor signals
SENPRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
SENPRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SETPLO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout
Table 720: SSIMG Output signals

LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level or temperature above lockout level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level or temperature above alarm level
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
19.2.6 Settings
Table 721: SSIMG Group settings (basic)

On
PresAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PresLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout
indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm

Technical manual
Monitoring

tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPresAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPresLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout

Table 722: SSIMG Monitored data

PRESSURE REAL - - Pressure service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the insulation medium
19.2.8 Operation principle GUID-359458EA-FFAA-4A44-A8E8-9469CA069C80 v9
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit breaker and
temperature of the medium. The gas pressure is monitored to detect low pressure. Binary inputs of
gas density SENPRESALM, SENPRESLO, and gas pressure signal SENPRES, are considered to
initiate the gas pressure alarm PRESALM and the gas pressure lockout PRESLO.
If any gas pressure sensor measurement is available and connected to the function input, then gas
pressure sensor quality input also considered for pressure alarm and lockout detections.
Gas pressure alarm PRESALM is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENPRESALM is high.

• If gas pressure SENPRES goes below the setting PresAlmLimit and quality input SENPRESQ is
high.
Gas pressure lockout PRESLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENPRESLO is high or binary input SETPLO is high.

• If gas pressure SENPRES goes below the setting PresLOLimit and quality input SENPRESQ is
high.
Thus, the function can be used without any sensor inputs and allowing alarm and lockout outputs
based on binary inputs.
To avoid false alarms due to a sudden change in gas pressure, two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO are included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than these time delays,
the corresponding alarm PRESALM or lockout PRESLO will be initiated. The SETPLO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout PRESLO. The PRESLO output retains the last value until it
is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the
alarms, and the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature SENTEMP. The signal is
monitored to detect high temperature. If any gas temperature sensor measurement is available and
connected to the function input, then gas temperature sensor quality input also considered for
temperature alarm and lockout detections.
Temperature alarm TEMPALM is activated if temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting
TempAlarmLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is high.
Temperature lockout TEMPLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,

Technical manual
Monitoring
• If binary input SETTLO is high.

• If temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting TempLOLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is
high.
To avoid false alarm due to the sudden change in temperature, two time delays tTempAlarm or
tTempLockOut are included. If the temperature goes below the settings for more than these time
delays, the corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be initiated. The SETTLO binary
input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout TEMPLO. The TEMPLO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to
block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature alarm condition
exists. The output ALARM can be blocked by activating BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.
The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the temperature lockout
condition exists and it gets reset by activating binary input RESETLO. The output LOCKOUT can be
blocked by activating BLOCK input.

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v10
Table 723: SSIMG Technical data

Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v4
19.3.1 Function revision history GUID-751C8C78-891D-423B-825A-0774D0B6C658 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 Binary quality inputs SENLVLQ and SENTEMPQ have been added for pressure and
temperature sensor signals in order to control alarm and lockout signals. Whenever there
is no sensor, the quality of the binary input will be low. If sensor quality is low, then
lockout and alarm signals will get reset.
L 2.2.5 -
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v4

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71
19.3.3 Functionality GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v8
Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used for monitoring the oil insulated device
condition. For example, transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. Binary information based on the
liquid level in the circuit breaker can be used as input to the function. In addition, the function can be
used with an analog value of liquid level and temperature of the insulation medium and binary inputs.
The function generates alarms based on the received information.
19.3.4 Function block GUID-AC82A86C-495D-4CBD-9BF9-3CC760591AA9 v3
SSIML
BLOCK LOCKOU T
BLKALM LVLLO
SENLEVEL TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENLVLQ LVLALM
SENTEMP Q TEMPALM
SENLVLALM LEVEL
SENLVLLO TEMP
SETLLO
SETTLO
RESETLO
Figure 429: SSIML function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.3.5 Signals
GUID-0C378BB3-2104-417F-94B5-16EFC55151FE v3
Table 724: SSIML Input signals

SENLEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from transformer
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from transformer
SENLVLQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of pressure
SENTEMPQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of temperature sensor signals
SENLVLALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
SENLVLLO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SETLLO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout
Table 725: SSIML Output signals

LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Level below lockout level or temperature above lockout level
LVLLO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level or temperature above alarm level
LVLALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
LEVEL REAL Level service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
19.3.6 Settings
Table 726: SSIML Group settings (basic)

On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout

Technical manual
Monitoring

tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout

Table 727: SSIML Monitored data

LEVEL REAL - - Level service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the insulation medium
19.3.8 Operation principle GUID-F4340B59-90D0-4EA7-9FD8-F21D425C884A v9
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level and temperature of oil in the oil
insulated devices. The liquid level is monitored to detect low liquid level. Binary inputs of oil level
SENLVLALM, SENLVLLO, and gas pressure signal SENLEVEL are considered to initiate the liquid
level alarm LVLALM and the liquid level alarm lockout LVLLO.
If any gas pressure sensor measurement is available and connected to the function input, then gas
pressure sensor quality input also considered for pressure alarm and lockout detections.
Liquid level alarm LVLALM is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENLVLALM is high.

• If liquid level SENLEVEL goes below the setting LevelAlmLimit and quality input SENLEVELQ is
high.
Liquid level lockout LVLLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENLVLLO is high or SETLLO input is high.

• If liquid level SENLEVEL goes below the setting LevelLOLimit and quality input SENLEVELQ is
high.
Thus, the function can be used without any sensor inputs and allowing alarm and lockout outputs
based on binary inputs.
To avoid false alarm due to the sudden change in the oil level, two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut are included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than these time delays,
the corresponding alarm LVLALM or lockout LVLLO will be initiated. The SETLLO binary input is
used for setting the liquid level lockout LVLLO. The LVLLO output retains the last value until it is reset
by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms, and
the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal is monitored
to detect high temperature. If any gas temperature sensor measurement is available and connected
to the function input, then gas temperature sensor quality input also considered for temperature
alarm and lockout detections.
Temperature alarm TEMPALM is activated if temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting
TempAlarmLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is high.
Temperature lockout TEMPLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,

Technical manual
Monitoring
• If binary input SETTLO is high.

• If temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting TempLOLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is
high.
To avoid false alarm due to the sudden change in the temperature, two time delays tTempAlarmor
tTempLockOut are included. If the temperature goes below the settings for more than these time
delays, the corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be initiated. The SETTLO binary
input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout TEMPLO. The TEMPLO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to
block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature alarm condition
exists. The output ALARM can be blocked by activating BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.
The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the temperature lockout
condition exists and it gets reset by activating binary input RESETLO. The output LOCKOUT can be
blocked by activating BLOCK input.

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v9
Table 728: SSIML Technical data

Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
19.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR
19.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.4.2 Functionality GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v14
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations reaches a
predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit
breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles
and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing periods. Each SCCBR function instance is made
to be used with a 1-pole, 1-phase breaker.
19.4.3 Function block GUID-B002ED61-5092-4E9E-AEB6-E4A4310BDAF2 v11
SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO
Figure 430: SSCBR function block
19.4.4 Signals
Table 729: SSCBR Input signals

SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 730: SSCBR Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds
alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds
lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
19.4.5 Settings
Table 731: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)

On
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation
Trip Signal selection
CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation

Technical manual
Monitoring

AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter
Table 732: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

Table 733: SSCBR Monitored data

TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during opening
operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during closing
operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB has been
inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated I^CurrExponent integrated
over CB open travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the CB spring

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.4.7 Operation principle GUID-3902D69C-1858-40DD-AD63-C33C381697BA v13
The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The subfunctions
can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are On
and Off.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in figure 431. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

Technical manual
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER
CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT
CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
Figure 431: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time GUID-3AF0EE8D-AA8E-4F83-9916-61B5D0D6B05B v13
The circuit breaker contact travel time sub function calculates the breaker contact travel time for
opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact travel time measurement is
described in figure432.
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT
TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
Figure 432: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time
Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of change of
auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE and
closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly, the closing travel time is measured between
the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation
factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the
actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.
Main Contact
1
0
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
1
t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4
tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

Figure 433: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2 between the time when the
POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, a correction
factor needs to be added to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr
(t1+t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4)
setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL) are given as
service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input RSTCBWR.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm setting, the
TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing travel time is longer than the
value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL output is activated.
It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating the BLKALM
input.
19.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status GUID-390A1250-B258-4023-9A7D-0D7E19E13A6C v12
The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the
breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is described in figure 434.
Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check
OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS
Figure 434: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If the current in
the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact position indicator module as
closed circuit breaker.
Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the POSOPEN
input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr value. The circuit breaker is
closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error
state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS
for open, closed and error position respectively.
19.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker GUID-C347406A-2B6F-42BD-B70B-51489AB51EAE v13
The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the wear and tear of
the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to
wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted current. The remaining life of the breaker is
estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is
decreased by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining life of
circuit breaker subfunction is described in figure 435.

Technical manual
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM
Figure 435: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the RatedOperCurr setting,
the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one operation. If the interrupted current is
more than the rated fault current set using the RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the
circuit breaker are reduced by the set OperNoRated divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the
tripping current is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is calculated
based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer. The OperNoRated parameter
sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current. The OperNoFault
parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated fault current.
Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the life
alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLKALM.
The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or by activating
the input RSTCBWR.
19.4.7.4 Accumulated energy GUID-0163FF0F-6E18-4CDC-87AA-578304E0872E v12
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on current
samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation is described in
figure 436.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit TRIND is
high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND
LRSTIPOW
IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
Figure 436: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Technical manual
Monitoring
Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the AccSelCal
parameter value accordingly.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when the RMS
current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.
The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the time the main
contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has
opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is
negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary
contact opened.
Main Contact Main Contact

close close
open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1
0 0
Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts
ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
Figure 437: Significance of correction factor setting

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output. TRIND is
used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip initiation and the
opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be reset by
enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.
Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value
AlmAccCurrPwr.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the LOAccCurrPwr
setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
19.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles GUID-D3481D26-2E42-455E-8DB2-91538421F3B1 v10
The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-opening sequences of
the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each closing-opening sequence. The
operation is described in figure438.

Technical manual
Monitoring
POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR
OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
Figure 438: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the auxiliary
contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by
Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.
Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the OperAlmLevel
threshold setting.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the OperLOLevel setting,
the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is activated.
19.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID-6DAE4C6B-BD66-49CD-817D-08E4EBF47DE0 v9
The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of the circuit breaker
and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level. The operation of the circuit
breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure 439.
POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN
Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
Figure 439: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained in the
same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and
POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number of inactive
days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit value defined by
the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal MONALM can be blocked by activating
the binary input BLKALM.
19.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring GUID-F850A940-7890-4C37-8B31-6C7D5B30E582 v12
The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring charging time. The
operation is described in figure 440.
SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT
Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
Figure 440: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication
Spring charging time measurement

Spring charging time calculation will be initiated as soon as the circuit breaker is closed and charging
motor starts (NO contact of the device is connected to SPRCHRST) to store the energy in the close
spring. An indicator provided in the circuit breaker is displayed when the spring is completely
charged. This status is taken through NO contact and then connected to SPRCHRD.
The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging time. SPRCHRD
indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring charging time is calculated from the
difference of these two signal timings. Spring charging indication is described in figure 440.
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The spring charging
time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT.
Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime setting,
the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary input.
19.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication GUID-9D070D52-B499-4D45-9195-60181819184E v10
The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber. The operation is described in figure 441.
PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM
BLKALM
tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
Figure 441: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure indication

Technical manual
Monitoring
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a time delay
set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high, activating the
lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm
can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input
deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function can be blocked
by activating the binary input BLKALM.

GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9
Table 734: SSCBR Technical data

Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -
Independent time delay for spring charging (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening and ±3 ms
closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater
19.5 Event function EVENT SEMOD120002-1 v2
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events
can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from
any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). The EVENT function
block is used for LON and SPA communication.
Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
EVENT
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 442: EVENT function block
19.5.4 Signals IP11335-1 v2
Table 735: EVENT Input signals

INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
19.5.5 Settings IP11336-1 v2
Table 736: EVENT Non group settings (basic)

SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

Technical manual
Monitoring

OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1

Technical manual
Monitoring

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or value of
any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event
generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the
Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also
intended for double indication events. For double indications, only the first eight inputs, 1–8, must be
used. Inputs 9–16 can be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block.
The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input
channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. Time-tagging of the events that are originated
from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source
application. Time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution
of 1 ms.
The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the
station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by
the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If
new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and
an overflow alarm appears.
Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both
the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set individually for each input channel.
These settings are available:
• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask. For each
communication type these settings are available:
• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16
For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is also possible to set
a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel.

Technical manual
Monitoring
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the EVENT
function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input
creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the
channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated
quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.
19.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2
19.6.1 Function revision history GUID-85FF8EB6-0D47-4776-8E1A-2F8F978B5F00 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 Increased the total number of recordings to 200 and events to 5000. Total number of
recordings (MaxNoStoreRec setting) is no longer configurable. MemUsed output is now
based on number of recordings to total number of recordings. Old disturbance records
won’t be deleted based on the memory consumption.
L 2.2.5 -
M16055-1 v9
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system
together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected
analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a maximum of 40 analog and
352 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

Technical manual
Monitoring
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
• Fault locator
• Settings information
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,

which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-fault time to
the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording. Disturbance record will have visible
settings from all function instances that are configured in the application configuration tool.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard COMTRADE format. In the
COMTRADE1999 format it is saved as a header file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file
DAT. In the COMTRADE2013 format, it is saved as CFF single file format. The same applies to all
events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about
the recordings. The disturbance report files can be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using
the disturbance handling tool.
19.6.4 Function block IP806-1 v1
M12510-3 v3
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
Figure 443: DRPRDRE function block

SEMOD54837-4 v4
A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10
Figure 444: A1RADR function block example for A1RADR-A3RADR

Technical manual
Monitoring
SEMOD54843-4 v3
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
Figure 445: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

SEMOD54845-4 v6
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 446: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B22RBDR
19.6.5 Signals
Table 737: DRPRDRE Output signals

DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
GUID-48019111-7303-40FE-A292-65FDFB6AE686 v2
MEMUSED is indicated based on the percentage of number of recordings to total

number of recordings (200 records). When the number of recordings reaches the
maximum limit, the oldest record will be deleted.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 738: A1RADR Input signals

GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GUID-D025D5D9-A0F3-4A00-891A-63AD5F609A77
v6
Table 739: A4RADR Input signals

INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
Table 740: B1RBDR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1

Technical manual
Monitoring

GUID-D3A8067F-80F8-4174-BD2D-4C43F4B99020 v3
B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR but with
different numbering:
• B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)

19.6.6 Settings
Table 741: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

On
COMTRADEFormat 1999(Int16) - - 2013(Float32) COMTRADEFormat
2013(Int16)
2013(Float32)
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On

Technical manual
Monitoring

ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On
SetInfoInDRep Disable - - Enable Enable Disturbance report settings
Enable functionality
Table 742: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Table 743: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal

Technical manual
Monitoring

in % of signal
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal

Technical manual
Monitoring

% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
GUID-E05EEC82-CB90-4E73-B9C9-4C16FD95FCBF v1
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR but with
different numbering:
• A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as A1RADR but with
different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

Table 744: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On

Technical manual
Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On

Technical manual
Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)

Technical manual
Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Table 745: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
Show

Technical manual
Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

Technical manual
Monitoring

Show
Show
GUID-8702C5B9-05A3-4E61-8952-C66483FFDFE2 v4
B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR but with
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as B1RBDR but with
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)


Technical manual
Monitoring

Table 746: DRPRDRE Monitored data

MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

M12155-6 v14
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,
analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
• Event list (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Fault locator (FL)
• Settings information
Figure 447 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks.
Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) use information from the binary input
function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder (TVR) use analog information from the analog input
function blocks (AxRADR) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. Disturbance recorder
DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

Technical manual
Monitoring
AxRADR Disturbance Report
DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator
BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder
Binary signals
Event list
Event recorder
Indications
Figure 447: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data
coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously,
independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. Settings information function
contains all the visible settings, parameter information of components configured in ACT, runtime
status and IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance record header file. These settings
information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for each function instance in the HDR file.
The function, setting names and Enum values are same as in the HMI and can be translated to the
selected HMI language. All setting values are updated along with the units. If the setting values are
related to the global base value, then the setting value is scaled and updated with corresponding
global base unit. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.
This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an
identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+200
General dist.
Trip Event Disturbance
Information & Setting Indications Fault locator Event list
values recordings recording
infotrmation
Figure 448: Disturbance report structure

Up to 200 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the
maximum recording limit is reached, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.

Technical manual
Monitoring
The IED flash disk should not be used to store any user files. This causes lack of
space for new disturbance recordings.
Disturbance information M12155-175 v4

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are
available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC and -
either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be
connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND) M12155-87 v5

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance
(not time-tagged).
Event recorder (ER) M12155-89 v6

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during
the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600.
Event list (EL) M12155-177 v8

The event list may contain a list of totally 5000 time-tagged events. The list information is
continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The
logged signals may be presented via the local HMI or PCM600.
Trip value recorder (TVR) M12155-91 v5

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the
fault.
Disturbance recorder (DR) M12155-97 v5

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault.
Settings information GUID-892F72ED-CC6C-469B-90CA-73E9E1181187 v2

For each disturbance recording, the setting values of the configured components are read twice;
once during the trigger of disturbance record and again during post processing of the disturbance
record.
During post processing of the disturbance record, the header file is updated with a section called
Settings . Settings has complete setting values of the configured components that are read during
the trigger time. The setting values, runtime status and the behavior of each component are
compared between the trigger and the post processing time. If there are any differences, then it will
be added in the header file under section Changed_settings.
In the HDR file, section tag Settings has an attribute tag called function which includes parameters
that are grouped based on the function instance. The function tag has content called name which is
the function name provided together with the user-defined name in brackets similar to the HMI.
Status content will indicate the runtime status of the function and beh content will indicate the
IEC61850 behavior of the components, if supported. Non runtime components will not have status
and beh tag contents.
Parameters of the function are listed as a child tag Set with contents name, value and unit:
• name — parameter name same as HMI

• value — actual parameter value
• unit — parameter unit
The changed_settings attribute tag is similar to the settings section. It contains functions which have
changes in parameter value or runtime status or IEC61850 behavior when compared with trigger and
post-processing settings values.
Fault locator (FL) M12155-186 v4

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Time tagging M12155-194 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within
the disturbance report
Recording times M12155-99 v5

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame.
The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder (DR), event
recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the
total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
Figure 449: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the
trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger
condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers
are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered.
The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a
reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents
subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals M12155-160 v9

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of
the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals from
analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing
function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals,
phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

Technical manual
Monitoring
SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
Figure 450: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as
an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The information is saved
at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are
updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed
than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is
the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured
IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the
three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as a group
signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-
input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated
output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder.
The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off.
Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the
current signals.
If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However, Trip
value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be used to
trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire
disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Binary signals M12155-162 v10

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can be
selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded
when:
• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 352 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = On). A
binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (SetLED = On ).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording.
But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also
selected from these 352 signals with local HMI IndicationMask = Show/Hide.
Trigger signals M12155-164 v3

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs
continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is
recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no
indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger M12155-167 v5

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus (IEC
61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is
especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger M12155-169 v4

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger ( Triglevel =
Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the
selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger M12155-171 v6

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance
recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute
average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold
level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with
the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this
trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for
each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset
in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz
network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Technical manual
Monitoring

M12760-1 v13
Table 747: DRPRDRE technical data

Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 200, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 996
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 352 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording 1056 -
per recording
Maximum number of events in the Event list 5000, first in - first out -
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
19.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2
19.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -
19.7.2 Functionality GUID-A72E490D-01F7-4874-B010-8BDE38391D88 v3
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA master to poll
signals from various other functions.

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.7.3 Function block GUID-BA0A5BC3-493B-4FE3-B4A9-14F60A88A22F v2
BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
ÎNPUT1 OUTPUT2
ÎNPUT2 OUTPUT3
ÎNPUT3 OUTPUT4
ÎNPUT4 OUTPUT5
ÎNPUT5 OUTPUT6
ÎNPUT6 OUTPUT7
ÎNPUT7 OUTPUT8
ÎNPUT8 OUTPUT9
ÎNPUT9 OUTPUT10
ÎNPUT10 OUTPUT11
ÎNPUT11 OUTPUT12
ÎNPUT12 OUTPUT13
ÎNPUT13 OUTPUT14
ÎNPUT14 OUTPUT15
ÎNPUT15 OUTPUT16
ÎNPUT16
Figure 451: BINSTATREP function block
19.7.4 Signals
Table 748: BINSTATREP Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 749: BINSTATREP Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
19.7.5 Settings
Table 750: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)

t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function
19.7.6 Operation principle GUID-537921CA-82B9-4A02-BAD1-67E3AC61AE96 v3
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output
status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal remains
set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t t
Figure 452: BINSTATREP logical diagram
19.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

Technical manual
Monitoring
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All
measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and
high-high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can be
used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
Figure 453: RANGE_XP function block
Table 751: RANGE_XP Input signals

RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range
Table 752: RANGE_XP Output signals

HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block (CVMMXN,
CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The function block converts the input
integer value to five binary output signals according to table 753.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 753: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised below low- between low‐ between low between above high-high limit
value is: low limit low and low and high limit high-high and
Output: limit high limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
19.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1
GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v3

Limit counter L4UFCNT -
19.9.2 Functionality GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6
The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent limits where the
number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the setting values
for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

GUID-4D58423F-329C-4553-9FAF-E55A368849A5 v2
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the binary input
signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated value is equal or
greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of
each limit and remain activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is
stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
19.9.3.1 Design GUID-B643C994-D0BA-4BE9-BACB-ADEA0197CAE4 v1
Figure 454 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check
CounterLimit1...4
Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue
Figure 454: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the function. The
function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities after reaching the
maximum counted value are:
• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as illustrated in figure
455.
Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...
Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...
Figure 455: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial value setting(s)
greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and all the outputs except the
error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains until the correct settings for counter
limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not counted and
outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be initialized after reset of the
function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states until the release of the block input.
19.9.3.2 Reporting GUID-7DF874A7-F7DA-48DD-8760-5E4CF05FD870 v2
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for example from a
IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI graphical
display.
19.9.4 Function block GUID-C90E7375-F3CC-414A-93FC-9AC4A9156FFC v1
L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
Figure 456: L4UFCNT function block
19.9.5 Signals
Table 754: L4UFCNT Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 755: L4UFCNT Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
VALUE INTEGER Counted value
19.9.6 Settings
Table 756: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)

On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit

Technical manual
Monitoring

CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

Table 757: L4UFCNT Monitored data

VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v4
Table 758: L4UFCNT technical data

Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -
19.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
19.10.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1

Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -
19.10.2 Functionality GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when
a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 457.

Technical manual
Monitoring
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Accumulation ACC_HOUR
ADDTIME with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
q-1
OVERFLOW
a
&
a>b
99 999.9 h b
WARNING
a
&
a>b
tWarning b
ALARM
a
&
a>b
tAlarm b
Figure 457: TEILGAPC logics

The main features of TEILGAPC are:
• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 hours)

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time
19.10.3 Function block GUID-D0E9688B-C9D9-44B7-BD95-81132CCA5E4F v1
TEILGAPC
BLOCK ALARM
IN WARNING
ADDTIME OVERFLOW
RESET ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY
IEC15000323.vsdx
Figure 458: TEILGAPC function block
19.10.4 Signals
Table 759: TEILGAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time, when
its value is high
ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 760: TEILGAPC Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached warning limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow limit
ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days
19.10.5 Settings
Table 761: TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
tAlarm 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 90000.0 Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 50000.0 Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime 0.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 0.0 Time to add to the accumulation
19.10.6 Operation principle GUID-C7F91D4E-5942-4006-B7C8-4F499E7DC49D v3
Figure 459 describes the simplified logic of the function.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ADDTIME ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
Loop Delay
IEC15000322.vsd
Figure 459: TEILGAPC Simplified logic

TEILGAPC main functionalities
• IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high

Technical manual
Monitoring
• applicable to very long time accumulation (≤99999.9 hours)

• output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY presents
accumulated value in days
• accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
• any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• independent of the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero.
Note that the nonvolatile memory will not reset to zero if the input IN is high during the
reset.
• reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
• the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime
• time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
• independent of the input IN value
• BLOCK request overrides RESETrequest
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours
• alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
• warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning
The ACC_HOURoutput represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY output
represents the accumulated time in days.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also independent of
each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.
tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours (6
minutes).
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and the
accumulated time will reset and start from zero if an overflow occurs.
19.10.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-B6FBEFD7-17C8-41C6-B5D5-32E1205E6752 v1
The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors
• the pulse length

• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.
19.10.6.2 Memory storage GUID-B49698FF-0AB2-4792-A7CB-5534313B6CA0 v2
The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,
• at every falling edge of the input IN

• at every even 6 minutes, after a rising edge of the input IN
• after a manual addition of time

Technical manual
Monitoring
Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time between actual
time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1
Table 762: TEILGAPC Technical data

Time limit for alarm supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tAlarm
Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%
19.11 Estimation of transformer insulation life LOLSPTR GUID-D9D1F036-EC75-40A8-860F-192CF1F6F759 v1
GUID-A3D72F4B-9567-4DF0-867A-9F657A7E9291 v1

Estimation of transformer winding LOLSPTR 26/49HS
insulation life 3Ihp>T
19.11.2 Functionality GUID-CDE89397-8E99-4873-9701-FF642101A308 v2
Estimation of transformer winding insulation life (LOLSPTR) is used to calculate transformer winding
hot spot temperature using the empirical formulae. It is also used to estimate transformer loss of life
from the winding hot spot temperature value. The transformer winding insulation is degraded when
the winding hot spot temperature exceeds certain limit. LOLSPTR gives warning and alarm signals
when the winding hot spot temperature reaches a set value.
Hot spot temperature calculation requires top oil temperature at a given time. This value can either
be a measured value taken through sensors or the one calculated by the function. This decision is
made based on the top oil temperature sensor quality. Top oil temperature calculation is done using
the method explained in IEC 60076-7 standard.
Inputs required for hot spot temperature calculation are:
• Transformer oil time constant

• Winding time constant
• Loss ratio at different tap positions
• Ambient temperature around the transformer
The oil and winding time constants can be calculated by the function based on transformer
parameters if the inputs are not available from the transformer manufacturer.
Ambient temperature to the function can either be provided through the sensor or monthly average
ambient temperature settings. This decision is made based on the ambient temperature sensor
quality. Additionally, LOLSPTR function provides difference between measured value and calculated
value of the top oil temperature.
Additionally, the function calculates loss of life in form of days and years. This information is updated
at settable intervals, for example, hourly or daily. Transformer winding percentage loss of life is

Technical manual
Monitoring
calculated every day and the information is provided as total percentage loss of life from the
installation date and yearly percentage loss of life.
19.11.3 Function block GUID-AFF859BC-6D00-4874-A0A6-4981C04168C6 v1
LOLSPTR
I3PW1* ALARM1
I3PW2* ALARM2
I3PW3* WARNING1
BLOCK WARNING2
BLKALM HPCALERR
BLKWRN
TOTVALID
AMBVALID
TCPOS
COOLTYPE
TOTEMP
AMBTEMP
LOLRST
REFRESH
Figure 460: LOLSPTR function block
19.11.4 Signals
Table 763: LOLSPTR Input signals

I3PW1 GROUP - Group signal for winding 1 currents
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Forces the alarm binary outputs to Zero
BLKWRN BOOLEAN 0 Forces the warning binary outputs to Zero
TOTVALID BOOLEAN 0 Status of top oil temperature sensor
AMBVALID BOOLEAN 0 Status of ambient temperature sensor
TCPOS INTEGER 1 Tap changer position
COOLTYPE INTEGER 1 Type of transformer cooling method (1 - ONAN, 2 - ONAF, 3 -
OFAF/OFWF, 4 - ODAF/ODWF)
TOTEMP REAL 0.0 Measured top oil temperature
AMBTEMP REAL 0.0 Measured ambient temperature
LOLRST BOOLEAN 0 Resets to initial loss of life value
REFRESH BOOLEAN 0 Refreshes the loss of life output values

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 764: LOLSPTR Output signals

ALARM1 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 1 alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 2 alarm signal
WARNING1 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 1 warning signal
WARNING2 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 2 warning signal
HPCALERR BOOLEAN Status of hot spot temperature calculation
19.11.5 Settings
Table 765: LOLSPTR Group settings (basic)

On
WrnHPTempLev1 50.0 - 700.0 - 0.1 100.0 Hot spot temperature set level for
warning 1
tDelayToAlarm1 0.0 - 60000.0 s 0.1 1800.0 Time delay to generate level 1 alarm
WrnHPTempLev2 50.0 - 700.0 - 0.1 105.0 Hot spot temperature set level for
warning 2
tDelayToAlarm2 0.0 - 60000.0 s 0.1 900.0 Time delay to generate level 2 alarm
EnaAgeCalc Disable - - Enable Activate ageing calculation
Enable
AgeingRateMeth IEEE - - IEC Ageing rate calculation method
IEC
TimeToUpdate 1 Hour - - 1 Hour Loss of life calculation outputs update
2 Hour time interval
4 Hour
8 Hour
12 Hour
24 Hour
JanAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in January month
FebAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in February month
MarchAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in March month
AprilAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in April month
MayAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in May month
JuneAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in June month
JulyAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in July month
AugAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in August month
SepAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in September
month
OctAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in October month
NovAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in November
month
DecAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in December
month

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 766: LOLSPTR Group settings (advanced)

TrafoRating 0.001 - 9999.999 MVA 0.001 40.000 Rated power of the transformer
TrafoType Single Phase Trafo - - Three Phase Number of phases in transformer
Three Phase Trafo Trafo
NoOfWindings Two winding - - Three winding Number of windings in transformer
Three winding
AvailableCT Winding 1 - - All Windings Available CT connection for the
Winding 2 transformer
Winding 1&2
Winding 1&3
Winding 2&3
All Windings
PowerInWinding Winding 1 - - Winding 1 Winding which has input power
Winding 2
Winding 3
TapWinding No Tap changer - - No Tap changer Winding which has tap changer
Winding 1
Winding 2
Winding 3
TopOilTempRise 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 27.5 Top oil temperature rise from the heat
run test
RatedVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Number of tap position at rated voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Number of tap position at maximum
voltage
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Number of tap position at minimum
voltage
UPerTap 0.01 - 50.00 kV 0.01 2.25 Voltage increment/decrement per tap
position
ConstSelection IEEE - - IEC Transformer parameter selection
IEC
CurrSelectMode Average Method - - Maximum Method Current selection method
Maximum Method
OilTmConstMode Standard - - Standard Oil time constant selection mode
User defined
Calculated
OilTimeConst 100.0 - 20000.0 s 0.1 8000.0 User defined oil time constant
AvgOilTempRise 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 25.0 Average oil temperature rise from the
heat run test
WdgTmConstMode Standard - - Standard Winding time constant selection mode
User defined
Calculated
ConductorType Aluminum - - Copper Transformer conductor material selection
Copper
TempUnitMode Deg F - - Deg C Temperature unit selection
Deg C
LoadLoss 0.1 - 1000.0 kW 0.1 50.0 Transformer rated load losses
NoLoadLoss 0.1 - 500.0 kW 0.1 25.0 Transformer no-load losses
TTLoadLoss 0.1 - 1000.0 kW 0.1 50.0 Transformer load losses from the type
test
TTNoloadLoss 0.1 - 500.0 kW 0.1 25.0 Transformer no-load losses from the
type test
RLRated 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 6.0 Load to no load ratio at rated voltage tap

Technical manual
Monitoring

RLHighRated 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 7.0 Load to no load ratio at next higher tap
to rated voltage tap
RLMaxTap 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 8.0 Load to no load ratio at maximum
voltage tap
RLMinTap 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 11.0 Load to no load ratio at minimum voltage
tap
RatedCurrW1 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 105.0 RMS value of the rated current for the
winding 1
RatedVoltW1 0.01 - 1000.00 kV 0.01 150.00 Rated voltage of winding 1
CurrTypeTestW1 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 105.0 RMS value of the current applied for the
winding 1 during type test
HPTempRiseW1 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 38.0 Winding 1 hot spot temperature rise
value from the heat run test
CuLossW1 0.01 - 1000.00 kW 0.01 95.00 Copper loss of winding 1
MassW1 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 10.0 Mass of winding 1
WdgToOilGrad1 0.1 - 500.0 - 0.1 20.0 Winding 1 to oil gradient at rated load
WdgTimeConst1 10.0 - 5000.0 s 0.1 500.0 User defined winding time constant for
winding 1
winding 2
winding 2
winding 3
winding 3
CoilCoreMass 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 45.0 Coil and core mass of the transformer
OilMass 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 21.0 Oil mass of the transformer
TankMass 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 10.0 Mass of the tank in contact with the
heated oil

Technical manual
Monitoring

ThermalUpgrade Normal - - Normal Thermally upgraded paper insulation for
Upgraded transformer
ExpectedLife 1.0 - 50000.0 Days 0.1 7300.0 Expected life duration of transformer
InitialLife 0.0 - 50000.0 Days 0.1 0.0 Initial value for transformer loss of life

Table 767: LOLSPTR Monitored data

MAXHPWDG INTEGER - - Indicates winding number which has
maximum hot spot temperature
TOTCALC REAL - - Calculated transformer top oil
temperature
HPTEMPW1 REAL - - Calculated winding 1 hot spot
temperature
temperature
temperature
HPTEMPMAX REAL - - Maximum hot spot temperature
AGERATE REAL - - Insulation ageing rate
LOLINDAY REAL - - Transformer loss of life in days
LOLINYRS REAL - - Transformer loss of life in years
REMLIFE REAL - - Transformer remaining life in hours
PLOLINYR REAL - % Percent loss of life calculated for the last
year
PLOLTOT REAL - % Total percent loss of life
TEMPAMP REAL - - Ambient temperature used
TEMPTO REAL - - Top oil temperature used for hot spot
temperature calculation
W1CURR REAL - A Winding 1 current used
19.11.7 Operation principle GUID-50A9C14B-D224-46F1-A8BF-90577371262B v1
LOLSPTR function is used to calculate the transformer winding hot spot temperature using the
empirical formulae provided in IEC 60076-7 standard. Additionally, LOLSPTR is used to estimate the
transformer loss of life from the winding hot spot temperature value.
When the winding hot spot temperature exceeds certain limit, it causes degradation of the
transformer winding insulation. The function gives warning and alarm signals when the winding hot
spot temperature reaches the set value.
19.11.7.1 Hot spot temperature calculation GUID-31E07C98-C9DC-4ED3-98C6-89D51D304112 v1
Transformer thermal model using heat transfer differential equations are designed by the IEC 60076–
7 standard. This thermal model can be applied to time varying load factor (K) and time varying

Technical manual
Monitoring
ambient temperature (θa). The differential equations computation is required at each time step (n)
and the hot spot temperature rise for the nth time step is solved using:
h( n)  h1( n)  h 2( n)

Where:
K = Load factor
θa = Ambient temperature
n = Time step
 h1( n )   h1( n1)  D h1( n)

 h 2( n)   h 2( n1)  D h 2( n )
Differential equation 142 represents the fundamental hot spot temperature rise before the effect of oil
flow varying rate past the hot spot of the winding and the time derivative function is:
D h1( n ) 
Dt
k22  w 

 k21   hr  K y   h1( n1) 
Differential equation 143 represents the oil flow varying rate past the hot spot of the winding and the
time derivative function is:
D h 2( n ) 
Dt
 1  

 k21  1  hr  K y   h 2( n1) 
  k   o 
  22  
Where:
τ w = Winding time constant
τ o = Oil time constant
Δθ hr = Hot spot to top oil temperature gradient
y = Empirically derived exponent account for the effect of change in resistance and oil viscosity with
change in load.
K 11 , K 21 and K 22 are constants.
Combined effect of differential equations 142 and 143 represents the hot spot temperature rise after
sudden change in the load. The initial conditions are calculated by setting the time derivative equal to
zero in DΔθ h1(n) and DΔθ h2(n) equations.
The winding hot spot temperature depends on:
• Oil temperature inside the winding

• Load losses in the winding
• Cooling type
• Ambient temperature

Technical manual
Monitoring
Oil temperature inside a winding is difficult to measure for most transformers in service. On the other
hand, top oil temperature at top of the tank is well known, either by measurement or by calculation.
The winding hot spot temperature is calculated as:
h( n)  o( n)  h( n)

Where:
θ h(n) = Hot spot temperature at nth time step
θ o(n) = Top oil temperature at nth time step
Δθ h(n) = Hot spot temperature rise above top oil temperature at nth time step
The hot spot temperature rise above top oil temperature (Δθ h ) is calculated from the hot spot to top
oil temperature gradient (Δθ hr ) and it should be calculated for each winding. Equation for the hot
spot to top oil temperature gradient calculation is:
 hr  THR  TTOR  it ir 

y
Where:
THR = Hot spot temperature rise (HPTmpRiseWX)
TTOR = Top oil temperature rise (TopOilTmpRise)
it = Current measured in the winding during type test (CurrTypeTestWX). Here, X indicates the
winding number.
ir = Winding rated current (RatedCurrWX)
Top oil temperature rise and hot spot temperature values are taken from heat run
test.
Hot spot temperature calculations for loading should be made on both low voltage and high voltage
windings since test data indicates that the time constants are different. Hence, LOLSPTR function
calculates the hot spot temperature (HPTEMPWx) winding wise.
The maximum winding hot spot temperature is used for calculation of winding insulation loss of life
and also for warning and alarm signals. The winding with maximum hot spot temperature is provided
by the output MAXHPWDG in the form of winding number. If the given transformer is a two winding
transformer, then HPTEMPW3 will be zero.
19.11.7.2 Top oil temperature calculation GUID-C2E9B6F6-AB75-4A55-9A2F-2B6D2A9194A6 v1
Hot spot temperature is calculated by measuring the top oil temperature using sensors or otherwise
the function will use the calculated top oil temperature. IEC standard has developed a differential
equation for the top oil temperature calculation. Equation for the nth time step is:
 0( n)   0( n 1)  D 0( n)
and,

Technical manual
Monitoring
D 0( n ) 
Dt


 1  K 2  R
tap  x
 


   or   o ( n1)   a 
k11  o   1  Rtap
 
 
Where,
R (tap) = Loss ratio at the current tap position
Δθ or = Top oil temperature rise
x = Empirically derived exponent account for the effect of change in resistance with change in load.
LOLSPTR function can be sensor usage less function based on the following logics:
Input logic for the calculation of hot spot temperature:
1. If the top oil temperature sensor status TOTVALID is high, then the direct measured top oil
temperature TOTEMP will be used for hot spot temperature calculation. Status of hot spot
temperature calculation HPCALERR will be low.
2. If the top oil temperature sensor status TOTVALID is low, then the calculated top oil temperature
TOTCALC will be used for hot spot temperature calculation. Status of hot spot temperature
calculation HPCALERR will be high.
3. If the status binary input of the top oil temperature sensor TOTVALID goes back to high from
low, then the direct measured top oil temperature TOTEMP will be used for calculation.
Input logic for the calculation of top oil temperature:
1. If the ambient temperature sensor input status AMBVALID is high, then the direct measured
ambient temperature AMBTEMP will be used for top oil temperature calculation.
2. If the ambient temperature sensor input status AMBVALID is low, then the monthly model
(average) ambient temperature will be used for top oil temperature calculation.
3. If the ambient temperature sensor status AMBVALID goes back to high from low, then the
sensed ambient temperature AMBTEMP will be used to calculate the top oil temperature.
The ambient temperatures are defined every month using the JanAmbTmp to DecAmbTmp settings.
This monthly model of ambient temperature is taken for the top oil temperature calculation based on
the month of the year.
LOLSPTR handles top oil temperature calculation even though the direct measurement of top oil
temperature is available.
19.11.7.3 Transformer parameters selection GUID-956B41AB-F446-424F-9562-A0CEEB7BD9D8 v1
Transformer parameters for the entire calculation of the function are selected according to:
• Transformer type
• Rated power
• Cooling medium used
Transformer type can be selected as either Three Phase Trafo or Single Phase Trafo using TrafoType
setting. Rated power can be set using the TrafoRating setting.
Cooling medium of the transformer is available to the function as an integer input COOLTYPE. The
cooling medium can be any of the following:
• ONAN
• ONAF
• ODAF

Technical manual
Monitoring
• OFAF
• OFWF
• ODWF
User can select the transformer parameters either from IEC 60076-7 standard or IEEE C57.96-1995
standard using ConstSelection setting to IEC or IEEE respectively.
19.11.7.4 Calculation of constants and losses GUID-8F9461C8-8AC5-4AE4-8F42-5945F7F826AD v1
Winding time constant, oil time constant and loss ratios at different tap positions are calculated
internally to improve the accuracy of the temperature calculations based on the user selection.
Winding time constant selection GUID-DB0D77CB-8D30-44D9-8506-A7D82DD37283 v1

LOLSPTR has three options to select the winding time constant using WdgTmConstMode setting:
• If WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as Standard, then the time constant is taken from either
IEC or IEEE standard based on ConstSelection setting.
• If WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined, then the time constant is taken from
user through WdgTimeConstx setting. This is different for each winding.
• If WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as Calculated, then the time constant is calculated by
the function for each winding.
Winding time constant at rated load is calculated as:
W 
mw  C  g 
1000  Pw
where,
mw = Winding mass (MassWX)
C = Conductor material specific heat
g = Winding to oil gradient (WdgToOilGradX) at rated load
Pw = I2R loss (CuLossX) of a winding at rated load and rated temperature
The conductor specific heat is based on conductor type. The conductor type selection, either
Aluminum or Copper, can be done through ConductorType setting.
Oil time constant selection GUID-A378369E-5E08-4C85-AAC0-9DE49AADCF7C v1

LOLSPTR has three options to select the oil time constant using OilTmConstMode setting:
• If OilTmConstMode setting is selected as Standard, then the time constant is taken from either
IEC or IEEE standard based on ConstSelection setting.
• If OilTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined, then the time constant is taken from
user through OilTimeConst setting.
• If OilTmConstMode setting is selected as Calculated, then the time constant is calculated by the
function.
Oil time constant at rated load is calculated as:
o 
3.6  C  om 
P
where,
C = Thermal capacity based on the cooling medium

Technical manual
Monitoring
Δθom = Average oil temperature rise at the load considered
P = Supplied losses (NoloadLoss + LoadLoss)
Average oil temperature rise (Δθom) at the load considered is calculated using settings:
• Average oil temperature (AvgOilTmpRise) from the heat run test

• Transformer rated no-load and load losses (NoloadLoss and LoadLoss)
• No-load and load losses from type test (TTNoloadLoss and TTLoadLoss)
Thermal capacity for different cooling mediums are calculated using settings:
• Mass of the coil and core (CoilCoreMass)

• Mass of the oil (OilMass)
• Mass of the tank (TankMass) in contact with heated oil.
Ratio loss calculation GUID-A5C83CF6-3766-484B-B49D-D87EFC82EFA8 v1

Changes in the oil temperature rise, losses and winding gradients values are depends on the
transformer tap position. Transformer top oil temperature rise is a function of the ratio loss (R) and
ratio loss is a function of the tap position.
The tap changer position from TCPOS input is used to calculate the ratio loss using linear
approximation model. This calculation requires:
• Tap positions at rated voltage (RatedVoltTap)

• Minimum voltage (LowVoltTap)
• Maximum voltage (HighVoltTap)
• Related loss ratios (RLRated, RLMinTap and RLMaxTap)
Tap changer position input is also required to get the ratio loss at next higher voltage tap position
after rated voltage tap position (RLHighRated).
Tap changer position can be made available to the LOLSPTR function from the TCLYLTC function
block, see Figure 461.
TCLYLTC LOLSPTR
TCPOS TCPOS
Figure 461: Tap changer position from TCLYLTC function to LOLSPTR function
19.11.7.5 Load factor calculation GUID-D48FB2EA-D161-4DF4-90D5-5108D450D7D0 v1
Top oil temperature and hot spot temperature calculations are based on transformer loading. Load
factor is the ratio between actual current and rated current. The function takes only one phase
current from each windings as inputs to calculate load factor.
Rated current for each winding is set through RatedCurrWX setting. Selection of one phase current
from each winding for load factor calculation is decided using CurrSelectMode setting.
If CurrSelectMode setting is set to Average, then average of all phase currents is considered for load
factor calculation. If CurrSelectMode is set to Maximum, then the maximum current out of the all
phase current is considered for calculation.

Technical manual
Monitoring
LOLSPTR can be used for the following transformer types:
• Two and three winding transformers (is selected using NoOfWindings) setting
• Single phase and three phase transformers (is selected using TrafoType) setting
19.11.7.6 Function handling with less CT’s GUID-B5EEEA35-6BD3-47DF-8B3B-0C8B249B5B85 v1
LOLSPTR can work with (n-1) winding CT availability. That is, if the given transformer has three
windings and it has CT’s only in two windings, then the function will calculate the missing winding
current based on voltage transformation ratio. The CT availability can be set using AvailableCT
setting.
Table 768 shows options available for CT selection:
Table 768: CT selection options
Transformer type Available options

• Winding 1
• Winding 2
Two winding transformer
• All Windings
• Winding 1&2
• Winding 1&3
Three winding transformer • Winding 2&3
• All Windings
The voltage transformation ratio is calculated from winding voltages by considering the primary
winding set by the user in PowerInWinding setting. PowerInWinding setting has three options to
select which winding is primary. The winding voltages are taken from WindingXNkV setting. This
calculation is valid when the winding has tap changer and the user can set the winding which has tap
changer using TapWinding setting.
Voltage rise between two adjacent tap winding is also considered in the calculation and it is set using
UPerTap setting.
19.11.7.7 Temperature unit selection GUID-87F83046-3E7A-49B7-84EA-10D141AAF78D v1
The user can select temperature unit to be used for function interface by the TempeUnitMode setting.
If the selection is °F, then all temperature inputs are converted into °C and used for calculation, since
all calculation formulae needs temperature values in °C and finally the temperature outputs will be
converted to °F.
If the selection is °C, then all temperature inputs will be taken as it is and the output is given in °C.
19.11.7.8 Insulation loss of life calculation GUID-2601EEC8-84EF-4F20-9C23-49A2696B4BC3 v1
The temperature distribution in transformer is not uniform and the part which is operating at the
highest temperature will normally deteriorate more. Therefore, rate of ageing is referred to winding
hot-spot temperature (HPTMPMAX). When EnaAgeCalc is set to high, LOLSPTR will calculate the
ageing rate of the transformer winding insulation and accumulates the transformer loss of life.
Ageing rate calculation can be done using two formulas derived by IEEE (VIEEE) and IEC (VIEC)
standards. The calculation method selection is based on ThermalUpgrade and AgeingRateMeth
settings. The ThermalUpgrade Setting has two options, Normal and Upgraded. Similarly,
AgeingRateMeth setting has two options, IEEE and IEC.

Technical manual
Monitoring
IEC standard (Equation 152) is used for ageing rate calculation only when the ThermalUpgrade
setting is set to Normal and AgeingRateMeth setting is set to IEC. IEEE standard (Equation 153) is
used for all other combinations.
VIEC  2 h max 98 6

 15, 000 15, 000 

 
 110 273   
h max  273 
VIEEE  e 
where,
θ hmax = Maximum winding hot spot temperature in °C irrespective of TempeUnitMode setting.
The computed loss of life over a certain period from aging rate is added to the initial loss of life.
Transformer loss of life value information is provided in days and years and presented in LOLINDAY
and LOLINYRS outputs respectively. Hence, total transformer loss of life value should be considered
from both outputs. The updating time of the outputs depends on TimeToUpdate setting. These values
can be viewed at any time by activating REFRESH from local HMI reset menu without affecting the
set update time.
Initial condition for the loss of life is taken from InitialLife setting. If the calculation purpose is to find
out the loss of life for a particular overload occurrence or new transformer installation, then InitialLife
value for the transformer should be chosen as zero. The user should pre-determine the consumed
transformer life in hours and the value should be filled in InitialLife setting in case of previously
installed transformers. The user can reset the initial loss of life value by activating LOLRST from local
HMI reset menu. Transformer winding insulation remaining life REMLIFE is calculated from the
transformer loss of life and expected life value (ExpectedLife).
LOLSPTR calculates the percent loss of life from the relative ageing rate. Percent loss of life in a day
is calculated with time period of 24 hours. Daily rate of percent loss of life is summarized at 00:00 h
and displayed for the next 24 hour period in PLOLTOT. Cumulative sum of percent loss of life in a
day is calculated up to the year end and it is updated at every year end in the output PLOLINYR. All
the latest calculated loss of life values and percentage loss of life values are stored in non-volatile
memory. Therefore, the values can be restored even after a power loss.
19.11.7.9 Warning and alarm GUID-81F811FA-F49B-4EEB-928B-657B6360DCC4 v1
LOLSPTR provides warnings and alarms for the transformer thermal overload, if the maximum hot
spot temperature (HPTMPMAX) exceeds the set value. There are two settable warning levels of the
hot spot temperature with separate outputs. If warning level exceeds for the set time, an alarm is
generated. Criteria for warning and alarm are:
• If HPTMPMAX is greater than or equal to WrnHPTmpLev1 setting, then output WARNING1 is

high. If the WARNING1 becomes high and sustained for a time which is given by
tDelayToAlarm1 setting, then ALARM1 becomes high.
• If HPTMPMAX is greater than or equal to WrnHPTmpLev2 setting, then output WARNING2 is
high. If the WARNING2 becomes high and sustained for a time which is given by
tDelayToAlarm2 setting, then ALARM2 becomes high.
• If input BLKWRN is activated, then the above warning signals will be blocked until it is
deactivated. If input BLKALM is activated, then the above alarm signals will be blocked until it is
deactivated.
To avoid oscillations of the warning and alarm outputs, a hysteresis has been added with
HPTMPMAX value for comparison with the set value.

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.11.7.10 Blocking the function GUID-6DA73EF3-428E-42A9-B335-760CC39DD822 v1
The functionality can be blocked using BLOCK input. When the BLOCK input is activated, the binary
outputs from the function will reset and all analogue outputs will hold the previous values till BLOCK
input is deactivated. During blocking, all the calculations (Loss of life, percentage loss of life, etc.) will
be stopped. Once the block input is deactivated, the calculations will start from previous calculated
values.
Hot spot tempera ture

I3P1 calculation
I3P2 HPCALERR
Hot spot to to p oi l
I3P3 temperature WARNING1
grad ient
calculation ALARM1
MAX/AVG Top oil tempe ratu re WARNING2
calculation
ALARM2
Ratio lo ss
AMBVALID
calculation Oil time constant MAXHPWDG
calculation
AMBTEMP Top oil HPTEMPW1
temperature
TCPOS calculation using HPTEMPW2
monthly mode l of
ambien t
HPTEMPW3
BLOCK Windin g time
temperture
constan t TOTCALC
calculation
BLKWRN
HPTMPMAX
BLKALM
Transfo rmer
TOTVALID Warnin g a nd alarm AGERATE
winding lo ss o f life
TOTEMP logi c calculation
LOLIDAY
Loss of life
esti mation
LOLINYRS
REMLIFE
LOLRST Per cen t loss of PLOLINYR
life calcula tion
REFRESH PLOLTOT
Figure 462: Simplified logic diagram for transformer loss of life

GUID-F6B6ED6B-2488-483C-B068-3F4631F34DC8 v1
Table 769: LOLSPTR technical data

Service value, hot spot temperature – ±2.0% of expected value
Service value, top oil temperature – ±2.0% of expected value
Service value, loss of life – ±2.0% of expected value
Operate level , Warning level 1 and 2 (50 - 700)°C/°F of hot spot ±2.0% of hot spot temperature
temperature
Operate time, Warning level 1 and 2 (50 - 700)°C/°F of hot spot ±200 ms typically
temperature
Operate time, definite time function (0.0 - 6000.0) s ±250 ms typically
(ALARMx)
19.12 Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR GUID-7AE60CB5-3CD5-4FE2-8D54-664AA78DD2DE v1
GUID-B62A30E5-C1F3-4E1F-B351-4F4CC60BA53F v1

Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR - 51TF

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.12.2 Functionality GUID-D5A0DC68-B3FD-4EBE-A5ED-68BE7DA20245 v2
The through fault monitoring function PTRSTHR is used to monitor the mechanical stress on a
transformer and place it against its designed withstand capability. During through faults, the fault-
current magnitude is higher as the allowed overload current range. At low fault current magnitudes
which are below the overload capability of the transformer, mechanical effects are considered less
important unless the frequency of fault occurrence is high. Since through fault current magnitudes
are typically closer to the extreme design capabilities of the transformer, mechanical effects are more
significant than thermal effects.
For other power system objects, for example, an over-head line, this function can be used to make a
log of primary quantities of a protected line.
19.12.3 Function block GUID-EB4C73B5-6A8E-4F4F-AC37-390CD1A0AD2A v1
PTRSTHR
I3PW1* ALARM
I3PW2* W1L1ALM
I3PW3* W1L2ALM
U3P* W1L3ALM
BLOCK W2L1ALM
ACCFREEZE W2L2ALM
EXTTRIG W2L3ALM
INHIBIT W3L1ALM
RSTTFCNT W3L2ALM
RSTCMLI2T W3L3ALM
TAPOLTC1 MTFWRN
TAPOLTC2 I2TALM
CMLI2TALM
REPMADE
Figure 463: PTRSTHR function block
19.12.4 Signals
Table 770: PTRSTHR Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
ACCFREEZE BOOLEAN 0 Block accumulation values from incrementing
EXTTRIG BOOLEAN 0 External trigger to force fault (I^2)t calculation
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Inhibit fault calculation, e.g. when transformer is energized
RSTTFCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset all counters to initial value for all windings and phases
RSTCMLI2T BOOLEAN 0 Reset cumulated (I^2)t value to initial value for all windings and
phases
TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Present tap position reading on OLTC 1
TAPOLTC2 INTEGER 1 Present tap position reading on OLTC 2

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 771: PTRSTHR Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN General fault detection alarm
W1L1ALM BOOLEAN Fault detection alarm of winding 1, phase L1
MTFWRN BOOLEAN Multiple faults detected in short time
I2TALM BOOLEAN General fault (I^2)t alarm for an event
CMLI2TALM BOOLEAN General cumulative fault (I^2)t alarm
REPMADE BOOLEAN Report is ready for file transfer
19.12.5 Settings
Table 772: PTRSTHR Non group settings (basic)

GlobalBaseSelW1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Table 773: PTRSTHR Group settings (basic)

On
W1I> 50 - 1000 %IB 1 350 Current start value for fault detection in
% of IBase of winding 1
tMin 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum duration of fault to start any
calculation
MaxI2tW1 1.000 - (kA)²s 0.001 60.000 (I^2)t threshold limit for alarm of
360000.000 individual fault event in winding 1 per
phase
phase

Technical manual
Monitoring

phase
MaxI2tCmlW1 1.000 - (kA)²s 0.001 600.000 Cumulative (I^2)t threshold limit for alarm
1000000.000 of all fault events in winding 1 per phase
tMultiThroFlt 1 - 86400 s 1 3600 Time window to detect multiple faults
tPulse 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.2 Pulse duration for alarm signals
Table 774: PTRSTHR Non group settings (advanced)

InitTFCnt 0 - 1000 - 1 0 Initial value of overall fault counter
InitTFCntW1L1 0 - 1000 - 1 0 Initial value of fault counter of winding 1
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
InitCmlI2tW1L1 0.000 - (kA)²s 0.001 0.000 Initial value of cumulative (I^2)t value of
1000000.000 winding 1 phase L1

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 775: PTRSTHR Group settings (advanced)

NoOfWindings Two winding - - Two winding Number of transformer windings
Three winding
ConnTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1
Delta (D)
ConnTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2
Delta (D)
ConnTypeW3 WYE (Y) - - Delta (D) Connection type of winding 3
Delta (D)
ZSCurrCor Off - - Off Enable or disable the zero sequence
On current correction for a single delta
winding
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 & W1,
1 [30 deg lag] hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ClockNumberW3 0 [0 deg] - - 5 [150 deg lag] Phase displacement between W3 & W1,
1 [30 deg lag] hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
OLTCWinding Not in use - - Not in use Transformer winding where OLTC1,
W1 OLTC2 is located
W2
W3
W1, W2
W1, W3
W2, W1
W2, W3
W3, W1
W3, W2
RatedTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated voltage tap position
designation
HighTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC1 number of tap position at
maximum voltage
LowTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC1 number of tap position at
minimum voltage
StepSizeOLTC1 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC1 step in
percent of rated voltage
RatedTapOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated voltage tap position
designation

Technical manual
Monitoring

HighTapOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC2 number of tap position at
maximum voltage
LowTapOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC2 number of tap position at
minimum voltage
StepSizeOLTC2 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC2 step in
percent of rated voltage

Table 776: PTRSTHR Monitored data

TFDUR REAL - s Last fault duration
TFCNT INTEGER - - Overall number of faults detected since
last reset
W1IP REAL - A Maximum peak current of winding 1
among all phases of the last event
W1IRMS REAL - A Maximum RMS current of winding 1
I2TP REAL - % Maximum through fault (I^2)t in % of set
limit among all windings and phases of
last event
W1CMLIP REAL - A Maximum cumulative peak current of
winding 1 among all phases
CMLI2TP REAL - % Maximum cumulative through fault(I^2)t
in % of set limit among all windings and
phases
L1URMS REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage, phase L1
W1L1MIRMS REAL - A Measured RMS current of winding 1,
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
phase L1

Technical manual
Monitoring

phase L2
phase L3
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
19.12.7 Operation principle GUID-55C86B69-66D5-4BB9-9C11-049BD7199F78 v1
The PTRSTHR function monitors the transformer during through fault and predicts the degradation of
its withstand capability. It detects the fault when the measured RMS current is above the set
threshold current limit. When the fault is detected, it calculates the I2t value for the through fault
duration with the calculated winding current. This calculation is triggered for all individual events of
through fault, winding-wise and in all phases. The function compares the calculated I2t for each fault
event with the set limit of I2t and an alarm is raised when the limit is exceeded.
Similarly, the cumulative effect of through faults with the accumulated I2t is calculated throughout the
transformer lifetime. This cumulative I2t is compared with the set limit of ΣI2t and an alarm is raised
when the limit is exceeded.
Additionally, the function monitors the time between subsequent through faults against the set time. If
this time is shorter than the set time, then the multi-through faults in short time detection warning is
raised.
The function also reports the below monitoring parameters of each winding and phases:
• The maximum peak current during the fault

• The maximum RMS current during the fault
• The maximum peak current during all through fault duration
• Percentage degradation of transformer withstand capability with respect to the calculated I2t
• Total percentage degradation of transformer withstand capability with respect to the calculated
ΣI2t
• Difference between subsequent through fault I2t values
• Number of through faults detected
This function can be used for both 2-winding and 3-winding transformer configurations with maximum
two on-line load tap changers. It calculates all required parameters for each through faults and
produces an individual report per event.
19.12.7.1 Transformer winding currents calculation GUID-F0DD5908-B7A0-4DB3-9096-8392C2A2FE04 v1
Generally, line currents are measured by current transformers at the transformer terminals. However,
the winding current should be calculated and used to estimate the degradation of withstand capability
due to through faults. Winding currents calculation from line currents depend upon the transformer
connection type and the phase displacement between winding currents. Therefore, winding current
calculation is required to protect the transformer within its capacity. On the other hand, CT
measurements done at the windings do not require any further derivations of the winding current.
Consider the Dy11 transformer configuration shown in Figure 464, where ia, ib and ic are delta
winding side line currents and iA, iB and iC are star winding side line currents.

Technical manual
Monitoring
ia iA
ic iB
ibc
ib iC
Figure 464: Transformer configuration Dy11

In this example, both line currents and winding currents (phase) are equal in the star winding side.
The delta winding currents iac, ibc and ica are derived from the line currents ia, ib and ic. Line currents
at the delta side do not have zero sequence currents, which are present at the star winding side in
case of earth faults. In order to calculate the transformer through fault withstand capability, these
delta side winding currents are required to be calculated from the measured currents. To perform this
calculation, the number of windings is selected by the NoOfWindings setting and the transformer
winding configuration is selected by the ConnTypeWx (where, x = winding number 1, 2 or 3) setting.
The winding current calculation requires voltage ratio information, which is dynamically calculated
from the present OLTC tap position. The tap position inputs TAPOLTC1 and TAPOLTC2 can be
driven from the tap changer supervision function (YLTC). The RatedVoltageWx (where, x = winding
number 1, 2 or 3) settings and settings corresponding to OLTC1 and OLTC2 are required to calculate
the voltage ratio. The placement of OLTC1 and OLTC2 are selected using the OLTCWinding setting.
Table 777: Corresponding settings for OLTC parameters
Parameter Setting
Rated tap position RatedTapOLTC#1)
Minimum voltage tap position HighTapOLTC#
Maximum voltage tap position LowTapOLTC#
Step size StepSizeOLTC#
1) # = OLTC number 1 or 2
Phase displacement between the windings decides the direction of circulating zero sequence current.
The clock position of the phase displacement between winding 1 and winding 2 is set using the
ClockNumberW2 setting. Similarly, the clock position between winding 1 and winding 3 is set using
the ClockNumberW3 setting.
The zero sequence current correction can be enabled or disabled by selecting the ZSCurrCor setting.
If the ZSCurrCor setting is selected as On, then the zero sequence current which circulates internally
in the delta winding is estimated from the available winding currents and used for further calculations.
If the ZSCurrCor setting is selected as Off, then the zero sequence current is considered as zero.
The utility can select the ZSCurrCor setting as Off when:
• All the windings are in WYE (Y) configuration

• Transformer has two or more windings in the delta configuration
• Winding current transformers are used (In this case, the ConnTypeWx settings should be set as
WYE)
The function internally calculates the winding RMS current and peak current from the measured
current samples and used for further calculations.

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.12.7.2 Through fault detection GUID-6F61907D-3B6C-45F7-A99F-128414DE34AD v1
Through faults are detected if the measured RMS current in any phase among all windings is above
the set limit. The user can set the limit with reference to the IEEE standard (3.5 times Irated) or
according to the transformer manufacturer specification. The settings for the through fault detection
threshold (W1I>, W2I> and W3I>) are given winding-wise.
In addition to the limit check, through fault detection is verified against the INHIBIT binary input. The
INHIBIT input can be connected, for example, from the transformer differential protection TxWPDIF
function which blocks the through fault detection in case of an internal fault. Similarly, the function
can be blocked during transformer energization inrush by connecting the second harmonic blocking
to the INHIBIT input.
If both conditions are through, then the persistence of the signal is checked for set minimum time
tMin value. Through fault is declared only when the signal persists for the minimum duration and
BLOCK or INHIBIT input are not high. The function resets the through fault detection alarm output
when the measured current goes below the set limit including hysteresis limits.
The through fault detection alarm outputs, WxLyALM (x = winding number 1 to 3 and y = phase L1,
L2 or L3) are given for all windings phase-wise. Additionally, the function has a general alarm to
indicate through fault detection. Once the through fault detection alarm has raised, the function starts
to calculate the I2t.
Besides this, the binary input EXTTRIG is used to trigger the through fault withstand capability
calculations.
W1L1ALM
tMin
W1L1IRMS
OR t CalculationStart
OR
W1I>
tMin
EXTTRIG
Figure 465: Through fault detection logic

In order to avoid the I2t calculation during any unwanted conditions, either the BLOCK or INHIBIT
inputs should be activated. Below cases describes the interoperability between BLOCK, INHIBIT and
I2t calculation:
• If BLOCK or INHIBIT input is activated first and a fault is detected, then that particular fault is
discarded.
• If BLOCK or INHIBIT input is activated first and deactivated before confirming the detected fault,
then that particular fault is considered.
• If BLOCK or INHIBIT input is activated after the fault confirmation, then that particular fault is not
discarded.
19.12.7.3 Through fault duration and count of occurrence calculation GUID-362E172E-D08B-4939-AFE5-810F90FB4CB4 v1
The through fault withstand capacity is decided based on the fault current magnitude and duration of
the fault. The fault duration is calculated from the instant the measured RMS current crosses the set
threshold current limit to the through fault detection reset. The TFDUR output gives the duration of
through fault in seconds. The through fault detection alarm is picked up after confirming the fault with
a time delay of tMin. If the fault is not confirmed, then the TFDUR output will not be updated.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Additionally, the function measures the time between transformers subsequent through fault events.
When this time difference is smaller than the tMultiThroFlt setting, then the function issues a warning
signal MTFWRN. The transformer manufacturer may indicate the maximum number of through fault
per time period in order to set the tMultiThroFlt setting.
The function counts the number of through faults for all windings and phases whenever a through
fault is detected. Also, the overall transformer through fault count is incremented by one if any
winding phase detects the fault. The fault count increment occurs after each fault has been cleared.
The through fault counts can be reset to the default value by activating either the RSTTFCNT binary
input or the command input. The default values for each individual winding phase and the overall
transformer is set through the InitCmlTFCnt and InitTFCntWxLy parameters respectively.
The binary input ACCFREEZE can be activated to stop incrementing through fault counters. In order
to control the function during the test mode, connect the PTRSTHR function block with the
TESTMODE function block, as shown in Figure 466.
PTRSTHR
I3PW1* ALARM
I3PW2* W1L1ALM
I3PW3* W1L2ALM
TESTMODE U3P* W1L3ALM
IED_TEST TEST BLOCK W2L1ALM
IED_TEST ACCFREEZE W2L2ALM
BLOCK EXTTRIG W2L3ALM
NOEVENT INHIBIT W3L1ALM
INPUT RSTTFCNT W3L2ALM
SETTING RSTCMLI2T W3L3ALM
IEC61850 TAPOLTC1 MTFWRN
TAPOLTC2 I2TALM
CMLI2TALM
REPMADE
Figure 466: ACT configuration for test mode connection
19.12.7.4 Through fault withstand capability calculation GUID-6F0B19EF-434C-47F2-9783-50EFB5762ED7 v1
The transformer is subjected to electrical and mechanical stress when a fault current flows through it,
which is more than the transformer overload current. In general, stress reduces the transformer life
and it becomes even worse when stress occurs due to through faults. Stress can cause insulation
damages, conductor displacement and overall it weakens the windings and collapses their structure.
Therefore, stress reduces the transformer withstand capability throughout its lifetime. Degradation of
the transformer withstand capability can be predicted using the equation:
Where,
I = Short circuit current
t = Duration of fault
k = Constant
Once the function detects a through fault based on the measured RMS current, it starts to calculate
I2t. The I2t calculation is based on the fault current instantaneous sample value and the duration of
the fault. If the fault is confirmed after the minimum time delay, then the I2t calculation will be carried-

Technical manual
Monitoring
out until the fault is cleared. If the fault is cleared before minimum time delay, then the calculated I2t
is discarded. This calculation is done for all windings and phases individually and repeats for all
individual faults.
The calculated I2t value is used to check whether the transformer is within its withstand capability or
not. This is monitored with respect to the maximum withstand capability set limit. The I2t limits can be
set winding-wise using MaxI2tW1, MaxI2tW2 and MaxI2tW3 settings and this limit is applicable for all
phases of the respective winding. If the calculated I2t value of any winding crosses the corresponding
set limit, then a general alarm I2TALM is raised. Once the I2TALM alarm is raised, it resets after the
set time tPulse.
Transformer through faults produces physical forces that cause insulation compression, insulation
wear, and friction-induced displacement in the winding. These effects are cumulative and should be
considered throughout the transformer lifetime. The damage intensity from through faults depends on
the current magnitude, fault duration, and the total number of fault occurrences. Therefore, the
function accumulates the calculated I2t value over all through faults for winding and phase-wise.
The calculated cumulative ƩI2t values are used to check whether the transformer is within its
withstand capability or not. This is monitored with respect to the maximum cumulative withstand
capability set limit. The ƩI2t limits can be set winding-wise using MaxI2tCmlW1, MaxI2tCmlW2 and
MaxI2tCmlW3 settings and this limit is applicable for all phases of the respective winding. If the
calculated ƩI2t values of any winding cross the corresponding set limit, then a general alarm
CMLI2TALM is raised. Once the CMLI2TALM alarm is raised, it resets only if the cumulative I2t
values are reset to value below the set limit. In order to reset the ƩI2t values to default, activate either
the RSTCMLI2T binary input or the command input. Default values for each individual winding phase
is set using InitCmlI2tWxLy parameters.
WxL1zRMS tMin
a≥b t Time TFDUR
OR
WxI> accumulation
1 T WxLzTFCNT
tMin Ʃ
0 F
EXTTRIG
RSTTFCNT
InitTFCntWxLz T
F
WxLzISAMPLES q‐1
a2
T WxLzI2T
Ʃ
SAMPLINGRATE F
0.0 T 0.0
F q‐1
I2TALM
a≥b
MaxI2tWx
÷ WxLzI2TP
100.0 WxLzCI2T
RSTTFCNT Ʃ
InitTFCntWxLz T
F
q‐1 CMLI2TALM
a≥b
MaxCmlI2tWx
÷ WxLzCI2TP
100.0
x – winding 1, 2 and 3
z – Phase L1, L2 and L3
Figure 467: Through fault withstand capability calculation

Both I2t and ƩI2t values are limited to 3.6 e12 and the maximum fault duration for I2t calculation is
limited to 1 min. Additionally, the function performs a plausibility check on the measured current
samples prior to the calculation, which limits the maximum sample value as ±1e6 A.

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.12.7.5 Preparation of data for reporting GUID-75426B18-64EE-44A7-8EB4-21B8D8378CAD v1
The function monitors the following parameters which are related to through fault for all windings and
phases:
• Fault peak current

• Cumulative maximum peak fault current
• Fault RMS current
• Delta value of I2t between two subsequent through faults
The peak and RMS current are measured during the interval of through fault period.
Additionally, the function gives the percentage degradation of withstand capability for individual
through faults and all faults as a cumulative effect.
The percentage degradation of withstand capability for the individual through fault event is calculated
as:
I 2 teventwise
Event-wise % degradation of withstand capability= 100
MaxI 2tWx
Where,
I2teventwise = Calculated I2t for an event of through fault
MaxI2Wx = xth winding maximum allowable withstand capability degradation during through fault.
The total percentage degradation of withstand capability for the transformer is calculated as:
 I 2t
Total % degradation of withstand capability  100
MaxI 2tCmlWx
Where,
ΣI2t = Calculated ΣI2t over all through faults
MaxI2tCmlWx = xth winding maximum allowable withstand capability degradation over all through
faults.
The function provides general outputs from all windings and phases, which is displayed in the local
HMI and monitoring tool apart from the through fault monitoring report. The general data are
calculated as the maximum value out of all available data. The maximum fault peak current,
maximum cumulative fault peak current, and maximum fault RMS current outputs are derived for
each winding as the maximum of respective winding all phase values. The event wise % degradation
and total % degradation of withstand capability outputs are derived as the maximum value of all
winding and phase values. In the through fault monitoring report, the data is divided into two parts;
general and winding wise for maximum 3 windings.
The function provides service values of measured current RMS values for each phase of all
windings. Also, it displays the measured RMS phase-to-earth voltage values for any one of the
windings (which is connected to the function block). The instantaneous RMS voltage values are
captured at one and a half power cycle delayed from the point of detected fault or the fault detection
reset, whichever is earlier. In order to indicate the report is ready for file transfer, the function
provides a binary output REPMADE, see Figure 468. The outputs given as ‘general data’ and
‘winding wise for all phases’ in the through fault monitoring report are shown in Table 778.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 778: Through fault monitoring report outputs
General data Winding wise for all phases

• Test mode status • Cumulative maximum peak • Number of faults
• Fault duration in current W1 • Event wise maximum peak current
seconds • Cumulative maximum peak • Event wise RMS current
• Overall number of faults current W2 • Event wise I2t
• Event wise maximum • Cumulative maximum peak • Event wise I2t in % of set limit
peak current W1 current W3 • Delta I2t compared to prior fault
• Event wise maximum • Cumulative I2t in % of set • Cumulative maximum peak current
peak current W2 limit • Cumulative I2t
• Event wise maximum • Event wise RMS voltage L1 • Cumulative I2t in % of set limit
peak current W3 (The winding is based on the
• Event wise RMS input connection to U3P)
current W1 • Event wise RMS voltage L2
• Event wise RMS (The winding is based on the
current W2 input connection to U3P)
• Event wise RMS • Event wise RMS voltage L3
current W3 (The winding is based on the
• Event wise I2t in % of input connection to U3P)
set limit • Multiple faults warning
The winding-wise data shows the fault phase values as calculated but other healthy phases will show
zero except peak and RMS values as calculated.
If two-winding configuration is used, then only winding 1 and winding 2 information are shown in the
report (winding 3 information will be hidden in the report). However, the general information shows all
windings data and it will show winding 3 data as zero in the case of two-winding configuration.
U3P
I3PWx
TAPOLTC1
TAPOLTC2
NoOfWindings
ConnTypeWx
ZSCurrCor ALARM
Winding current WxLzALM
ClockNumberW2
calculation MTFWRN
ClockNumberW3 I2TALM
OLTCWinding CMLI2TALM
REPMADE
RatedTapOLTCy
WxLzMIRMS
HighTapOLTCy WxIP
LowTapOLTCy WxIRMS
I2TP
StepSizeOLTCy
WxCIP
CI2TP
Fault I2t TFTIME
EXTTRIG
calculation TFCNT
INHIBIT
WxLzTFCNT
WxI> WxLzIP
Through fault WxLzIRMS Through fault
tMin
detection WxLzI2T report
BLOCK
WxLzI2TP
tPulse
WxLzDI2T
tMultiThroFlt WxLzCIP
WxLzCI2T
WxLzCI2TP
TFDUR
LzURMS
MaxI2tWx
MaxI2tCmlWx
InitCI2TWxLz
InitTFCntWxLz
RSTTFCNT
RSTCMLI2T
x – Winding 1, 2 and 3
z – Phase L1, L2 and L3
Figure 468: Simplified logic diagram for through fault monitoring PTRSTHR
Through fault reports can be viewed using the local HMI. As shown in Figure 469, the list of saved
through fault reports those are grouped based on the instance can be found on the local HMI under
Main menu/Measurements/Through fault reports .

Technical manual
Monitoring
Figure 469: List of saved through fault reports

The local HMI mapped inputs can be displayed by entering each through fault report, see Figure 470.
Figure 470: Report for one event

The through fault monitoring report can also be viewed in PCM600, using the through fault
monitoring tool, see Figure 471.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Figure 471: Through fault monitoring tool

GUID-3763D0D6-AD44-4C9B-91E4-050C0B63C7EA v1
Table 779: PTRSTHR technical data

Operate current (50-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (50-1000)% of IBase –
19.13 Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI GUID-692151F8-812B-4B32-AE86-E7A4E4B0101B v1
19.13.1 Function revision history GUID-5883ADA7-549A-464B-AC60-082A50165A2B v1

revision revision
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 Updated monitoring till 9th order current harmonics. Refer to document revision M for
monitoring till 5th order current harmonics.
GUID-C7863D78-34DB-42E5-90FE-6483EDAAF319 v1

Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI ITHD ITHD

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.13.3 Functionality GUID-CD97D6CF-7343-416B-82D3-8352FFF9D73E v2
Current harmonic monitoring function CHMMHAI is used to monitor the current part of the power
quality of a system. It calculates the total harmonic distortion (THD) with respect to fundamental
signal amplitude, and the total demand distortion (TDD) with respect to maximum demand load
current. These indices indicate the current signal quality factor.
Additionally, the function is used to calculate the numerical multiple of rated frequency harmonics
amplitude and harmonic distortion up to 9th order. It helps the user to know the predominant
harmonic frequencies order and their amplitudes present in the system. The function also calculates
the crest factor to indicate the effectiveness of the signal. All calculations in the harmonic monitoring
function are based on IEEE 1459 and IEEE 519-2014 standards.
The current harmonic function monitors the harmonic distortion and demand distortion values
constantly. Whenever these value crosses their set limit levels, a warning signal will be initiated. If the
warning signal persists continuously for the set time, an alarm signal will be generated.
19.13.4 Function block GUID-5165010F-A903-4D0F-8DE2-7AE03D80C94E v1
CHMMHAI
I3P* THDALM
BLOCK TDDALM
BLKALM 2NDHDALM
BLKWRN 3RDHDALM
4THHDALM
5THHDALM
6THHDALM
7THHDALM
8THHDALM
9THHDALM
THDWRN
TDDWRN
2NDHDWRN
3RDHDWRN
4THHDWRN
5THHDWRN
6THHDWRN
7THHDWRN
8THHDWRN
9THHDWRN
TRMSL1
TRMSL2
TRMSL3
TRMSN
FUNDL1
FUNDL2
FUNDL3
FUNDN
DCAMPL1
DCAMPL2
DCAMPL3
DCAMPN
Figure 472: CHMMHAI function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.13.5 Signals
Table 780: CHMMHAI Input signals

SIGNAL
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm signals
BLKWRN BOOLEAN 0 Block warning signals
Table 781: CHMMHAI Output signals

THDALM BOOLEAN General alarm signal for total harmonic distortion
TDDALM BOOLEAN General alarm signal for total demand distortion
2NDHDALM BOOLEAN 2nd order harmonic distortion alarm signal (Max of 3 phase)
3RDHDALM BOOLEAN 3rd order harmonic distortion alarm signal (Max of 3 phase)
4THHDALM BOOLEAN 4th order harmonic distortion alarm signal (Max of 3 phase)
THDWRN BOOLEAN General warning signal for total harmonic distortion
TDDWRN BOOLEAN General warning signal for total demand distortion
2NDHDWRN BOOLEAN 2nd order harmonic distortion warning signal (Max of 3 phase)
3RDHDWRN BOOLEAN 3rd order harmonic distortion warning signal (Max of 3 phase)
4THHDWRN BOOLEAN 4th order harmonic distortion warning signal (Max of 3 phase)
TRMSL1 REAL True RMS value of phase L1
TRMSN REAL True RMS value of neutral
FUNDL1 REAL Fundamental amplitude of phase L1
FUNDN REAL Fundamental amplitude of neutral
DCAMPL1 REAL DC Component value of phase L1

Technical manual
Monitoring

DCAMPN REAL DC Component value of neutral
19.13.6 Settings
Table 782: CHMMHAI Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 783: CHMMHAI Group settings (basic)

On
MaxLoadCurr 10.0 - 200.0 %IB 0.1 100.0 Maximum demand load current at PCC
for total demand distortion calculation
WrnLimitTHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 5.0 Warning limit for percentage total
harmonic distortion value
tDelayAlmTHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for
total harmonic distortion
WrnLimitTDD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 5.0 Warning limit for percentage total
demand distortion value
tDelayAlmTDD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for
total demand distortion
WrnLimit2ndHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 3.5 Warning limit for percentage 2nd order
tDelayAlm2ndHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for 2nd
order harmonic distortion
WrnLimit3rdHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 3.0 Warning limit for percentage 3rd order
tDelayAlm3rdHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for 3rd
WrnLimit4thHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 2.5 Warning limit for percentage 4th order
tDelayAlm4thHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for 4th

Technical manual
Monitoring


Table 784: CHMMHAI Monitored data

THDL1 REAL - % Total harmonic distortion of phase L1
THDN REAL - % Total harmonic distortion of neutral
TDDL1 REAL - % Total demand distortion value of phase
L1
L2
L3
TDDN REAL - % Total demand distortion value of neutral
2NDHD REAL - % 2nd order harmonic distortion (Max of 3
phase)
3RDHD REAL - % 3rd order harmonic distortion (Max of 3
phase)
4THHD REAL - % 4th order harmonic distortion (Max of 3
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
CFL1 REAL - - Crest factor of phase L1
CFN REAL - - Crest factor of neutral
TRMSL1 REAL - A True RMS value of phase L1

Technical manual
Monitoring

TRMSN REAL - A True RMS value of neutral
MEASFREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency
FUNDL1 REAL - A Fundamental amplitude of phase L1
FUNDN REAL - A Fundamental amplitude of neutral
HAAMPL1 REAL - A Harmonic RMS value of phase L1
HAAMPN REAL - A Harmonic RMS value of neutral
DCAMPL1 REAL - A DC Component value of phase L1
DCAMPN REAL - A DC Component value of neutral
HA2NDAMP REAL - A 2nd order Harmonic RMS value (Max of
3 phase)
HA3RDAMP REAL - A 3rd order Harmonic RMS value (Max of
3 phase)
HA4THAMP REAL - A 4th order Harmonic RMS value (Max of 3
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
19.13.8 Graphical display configurable data

GUID-F669DFF5-D999-4D6A-8BC7-4A0EA5870178 v1
Table 785: CHMMHAI Graphical display configurable data
Name Description
2NDHD 2nd order harmonic distortion
3RDHD 3rd order harmonic distortion
4THHD 4th order harmonic distortion
HAAMPL1 Harmonic RMS value of phase L1
HAAMPN Harmonic RMS value of neutral
MEASFREQ Measured frequency

Technical manual
Monitoring
Name Description
TDDL1 Total demand distortion value of phase L1
TDDN Total demand distortion value of neutral
THDL1 Total harmonic distortion of phase L1
THDN Total harmonic distortion of neutral
TRMSL1 True RMS value of phase L1
TRMSN True RMS value of neutral
FUNDL1 Fundamental amplitude of phase L1
FUNDN Fundamental amplitude of neutral
19.13.9 Operation principle GUID-C9E8E0EA-DED7-40F3-9520-2276398881DF v2
The current harmonic monitoring function calculates the following power quality indices based on the
current input signal:
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in percentage of fundamental component

• Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD) in percentage of fundamental component
• Total Demand Distortion (TDD) in percentage of maximum load demand current
• Crest Factor (CF)
The harmonic function calculates fundamental signal magnitude and specific harmonic values from
2nd to 9th orders of the given signal using FFT filter.
The main functionality of the harmonic monitoring function is to find the total harmonic distortion
(THD) for current signals. If the distorted voltage and current waveforms consist of only harmonics, a
measurement time interval kT (T = Cycle Time) enables the correct measurement of RMS value. If
the monitored waveform contains an interharmonic, then the measurement time interval kT should be
designed according to the minimum frequency signal measurement.
The time interval, which is required for an accurate measurement of RMS values and power, is the
least common multiple of the periods of the fundamental component and the interharmonic
component (that is, kT = mTi ; Ti =1 / fi , where ‘fi’ is the interharmonic frequency and ‘k’, ‘m’ are
integer numbers). When the measurement time interval kT does not include an integer number of
periods Ti (that is, kT ≠ mTi), the RMS value of the interharmonic is inaccurate. This error is also
reflected in the measurement accuracy of the total RMS value. If at least one of the interharmonics of
order h is an irrational number, then the observed waveform is not periodic, commonly known as
Nearly Periodic. In such a case, the measurement time interval kT should be infinitely large in order
to have a correct measurement of the RMS value or power. The larger the measurement time kT, the
lesser the significance of errors caused by interharmonics.
Figure 473 shows the envelopes of the maximum errors made when the RMS value of an
interharmonic is measured in function of the number of cycle’s m. For example, if m = 20, the RMS
value of the interharmonic will be measured with a maximum error of ± 0.2%. For the accurate
measurement of true RMS value and harmonic components amplitude, FFT filter design is used for
harmonic monitoring functionality.

Technical manual
Monitoring
2
1.6
1.2
MAXIMUM ERROR (%)
0.8
0.4
0
‐0.4
‐0.8
‐1.2
‐1.6
‐2
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
NUMBER OF CYCLES m
Figure 473: Percent maximum error of RMS measurement versus number of cycles
Individual harmonic distortion is calculated only for 2nd to 9th harmonic orders. For simplicity,
maximum harmonic amplitude out of all phases is considered for monitoring and the same value is
considered for harmonic distortion calculation, warning and alarm conditions. Phase wise harmonic
values are available in the IEC 61850 data model. The overview diagram of harmonic monitoring
function is shown in Figure 474.
A FFT filter is used to calculate complex amplitude and frequency for the rated frequency, and its
harmonic components up to 9th order include DC component. The filter length is fixed to 1 second,
which is 1024 samples at 1 kHz sampling for calculation in each execution of the FFT filter. This
gives an increased resolution on true RMS calculation upto interharmonic level.
The function calculates THD, IHD, TDD and CF using the derived quantities of the given signal. The
FFT filter tries to find the fundamental frequency in a frequency search range of ± 5 Hz from the
system rated frequency. If the fundamental frequency is not able to identify from the measured
signal, then it will not do any calculation.
In many cases, the traditional instrument transformers which are only designed to
have a high accuracy at rated frequency are used for harmonic measurements. This
questions accuracy of the harmonic measurements and the reliability of any
compliance assessment. In this function, the measurement accuracy level of
instrument transformers is not considered.
The following sections describe how each power quality indices are calculated.
19.13.9.1 Total harmonic distortion (THD) GUID-49B95C3B-76CB-4F99-AA63-720FD3A7C619 v2
The overall deviation of a distorted wave from its fundamental can be estimated using total harmonic
distortion (THD).
The total harmonic distortion of the current is as follows:

Technical manual
Monitoring
 Hmax 
 2 
IH   Ih  
%THDI      *100
I1   I1  
 h2 
 
Where,
I1 = Current fundamental DFT magnitude
IH = Total current harmonic magnitude (integer harmonics h = 2, 3...9)
Ih = Current harmonic magnitude for each order h (integer harmonics h = 2, 3…9)
Hmax = Maximum integer harmonic which is monitored (9th harmonic in this application)
FFT Filter MEASFREQ

I3P (Input from SMAI) FREQ
I3P TRMS THDx
HAAMPx Total Harmonic
Distortion
FUND Calculation #HD
FundDFT
nd
Harm 2
Harm 3rd
th
Harm 4
Harm 5th Individual THDALM
Harmonic #HDALM
Harm 6th Distortion
th Calculation THDWRN
Harm 7 Blocking , Alarm
Harm 8
th
and Warning
#HDWRN
th logic TDDALM
Harm 9
TDDWRN
Peak
DCComp
Total Demand
Distortion
Calculation
MaxLoadCurr
TDDx
Crest Factor CFx

PEAK Calculation
DCAMPx
BLOCK
WrnLimit#HD
WrnLimitTHD
tDelayAlm#HD Harmonic RMS Values HAAMPx
tDelayAlmTHD Individual Harmonic HA#AMP
RMS Values
WrnLimitTDD
Fundamental FUNDx
tDelayAlmTDD Values
BLKALM True RMS TRMSx
Values
BLKWARN
x – Phase to ground outputs (L1 , L2, L3 and N)

nd rd th th th th th th
# – Harmonic order (2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 and 9 )
Figure 474: Simplified logic diagram for current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI
19.13.9.2 Individual harmonic distortion (IHD) GUID-2B5D203F-9722-4F5F-A2E9-0743D6197A95 v2
The individual harmonic distortion is defined as the percentage of harmonics for order h with respect
to the fundamental frequency.
The individual harmonic distortion of the current for order h is as follows:
Ih
% IHDI h  *100
I1

Technical manual
Monitoring
Where,
Ih = Current harmonic magnitude for the order h
I1 = Current fundamental DFT magnitude
Additionally, it calculates the maximum individual harmonic distortion value as the maximum of all
phase signals harmonic distortion. The individual harmonic distortion is used further in warning and
alarm logic.
19.13.9.3 Total demand distortion (TDD) GUID-753B43A5-133E-4F55-B610-7E9FFC34A03D v2
According to IEEE 519-1992 standard, the total effect of distortion in the current waveform at the
Point of Common Coupling PCC is measured by the index called total demand distortion (TDD), as a
percentage of the maximum demand current at the PCC. In other words, it is defined as the ratio of
the root-mean-square of the harmonic content, to the root-mean-square of the maximum demand
load current at the PCC. It is expressed as the percentage of maximum demand load current.
 Hmax 
 
2
  Ih  
%TDD      *100
  IL  
 h 0 
 
Where,
IL = Maximum demand load current
Ih = Current harmonic magnitude for each order h (integer harmonics h = 2, 3…9)
When the PCC is considered at the service entrance or utility metering point, the IEEE 519-2014
standard recommends that the maximum demand load current (IL) be calculated as the average
current of the maximum demand for the preceding 12 months.
19.13.9.4 Crest factor (CF) GUID-C9ED45F0-F780-4E32-B117-7F6B11710D5C v2
Crest factor is the ratio between value of the peak current and its RMS value.
The crest factor of current is as follows:
I Peak
CFI 
I RMS
Where,
IPeak = Current peak amplitude
IRMS = Current true RMS

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.13.9.5 Blocking and alarm logic GUID-800D9E0F-F89D-4FCD-BEBA-F2C83F28409F v2
It is possible to set warning limits for each individual harmonic order. If the calculated individual
harmonic distortion exceeds beyond the warning limit, an individual harmonic warning will be raised.
Also, the user can set a time delay to alarm for an individual harmonic distortion value. If the IHD
value sustains above the warning limit for the set time, an alarm signal will be raised.
Similarly, total harmonic distortion and total demand distortion have separate settings for warning
limit and alarm time delay. Once the THD or TDD value exceeds beyond set warning limit, a separate
warning signal will be raised. If the warning signal sustains above the time set at alarm time delay
setting, an individual alarm signal will be raised.
The phase-wise alarm and warning signals with respect to total harmonic distortion is provided
through IEC 61850 communication protocol (general alarm and general warning are also provided).
Warning and alarm based on individual harmonic distortion are activated for specific harmonic order
outputs of alarm and warning. To avoid oscillations of warning signals at boundary conditions, a
hysteresis has been included.
When the BLOCK input is activated, all binary outputs will be forced to reset. Also, the alarm outputs
and warning outputs can be separately blocked by activating the BLKALM and BLKWRN inputs,
respectively.
BLOCK
BLKWARN
BLKALM
Total Harmonic
Distortion
a
a >b AND
THDWRN
b
WrnLimitTHD tOff
t AND
THDALM
tDelayAlmTHD
Individual Harmonic
Distortion
(Max of phase wise
a
a >b AND
#HDWRN
harmonic distortion) b
WrnLimit#HD tOff
#HDALM
t AND
tDelayAlmIHD #
Total Demand
Distortion
a
a >b AND
TDDWRN
b
WrnLimitTDD tOff
t AND
TDDALM
tDelayAlmTDD
Figure 475: Simplified logic diagram for warning and alarm

Technical manual
Monitoring

GUID-09EC65AC-C60B-4256-A601-FE2CC90D26EC v3
Table 786: CHMMHAI (50/60 Hz) technical data

Fundamental Harmonic
Frequency (0.95 to 1.05) X fr 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±2 mHz
True RMS (0.2 to 2) X Ir None ±0.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

(0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

(0.2 to 2) X Ir 6th order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Fundamental (0.2 to 2) X Ir None ±0.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

(0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±0.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Crest Factor (0.2 to 2) X Ir None ±2.0%
Harmonic (0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±2.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Amplitude ±4.0% of IH at I > Ir
Total Demand (0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±5.0% at I ≤ Ir
Distortion (TDD) ±5.0% of ITDD at I > Ir
Total Harmonic (0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±5.0%
Distortion (ITHD)
19.14 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI GUID-B2F24353-AAEA-4520-BB1C-5FD5FFCFC67B v1
19.14.1 Function revision history GUID-E828F930-88FF-4D5B-8304-2BD3B89919B8 v1

revision revision
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 Updated monitoring till 9th order voltage harmonics. Refer to document revision M for
monitoring till 5th order voltage harmonics.
GUID-BF90E93F-C0F4-43F7-BDD5-F3C289B5535B v1

Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI UTHD VTHD

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.14.3 Functionality GUID-868ED1BB-A921-45DE-94C4-0CF23ECD9ADA v2
Voltage harmonic monitoring function VHMMHAI is used to monitor the voltage part of the power
quality of a system. It calculates the total harmonic distortion (THD) with respect to the fundamental
signal amplitude which indicates the voltage signal quality factor.
Additionally, the function is used to calculate the numerical multiple of rated frequency harmonics
amplitude and harmonic distortion upto the 9th order. It helps the user to know the predominant
harmonic frequencies order and their amplitudes present in the system. The function also calculates
the crest factor to indicate the effectiveness of the signal. All calculations in the harmonic monitoring
function are based on IEEE 1459 and IEEE 519-2014 standards.
The voltage harmonic function monitors the harmonic distortion value constantly. Whenever these
value crosses their set limit levels, a warning signal will be initiated. If the warning signal persists
continuously for the set time, an alarm signal will be generated.
19.14.4 Function block GUID-60BEA940-7577-471C-A7E3-64D1E65CA824 v1
VHMMHAI
U3P* THDALM
BLOCK 2NDHDALM
BLKALM 3RDHDALM
BLKWRN 4THHDALM
5THHDALM
6THHDALM
7THHDALM
8THHDALM
9THHDALM
THDWRN
2NDHDWRN
3RDHDWRN
4THHDWRN
5THHDWRN
6THHDWRN
7THHDWRN
8THHDWRN
9THHDWRN
TRMSL1
TRMSL2
TRMSL3
TRMSN
TRMSL1L2
TRMSL2L3
TRMSL3L1
FUNDL1
FUNDL2
FUNDL3
FUNDN
FUNDL1L2
FUNDL2L3
FUNDL3L1
DCAMPL1
DCAMPL2
DCAMPL3
DCAMPN
DCAMPL1L2
DCAMPL2L3
DCAMPL3L1
Figure 476: VHMMHAI function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.14.5 Signals
Table 787: VHMMHAI Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltagee input
SIGNAL
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm signals
BLKWRN BOOLEAN 0 Block warning signals
Table 788: VHMMHAI Output signals

THDALM BOOLEAN General alarm signal for total harmonic distortion
2NDHDALM BOOLEAN 2nd order harmonic distortion alarm signal (Max of 3 phase)
3RDHDALM BOOLEAN 3rd order harmonic distortion alarm signal (Max of 3 phase)
THDWRN BOOLEAN General warning signal for total harmonic distortion
2NDHDWRN BOOLEAN 2nd order harmonic distortion warning signal (Max of 3 phase)
3RDHDWRN BOOLEAN 3rd order harmonic distortion warning signal (Max of 3 phase)
TRMSN REAL True RMS value of neutral
TRMSL1L2 REAL True RMS value of phase to phase L1L2
FUNDN REAL Fundamental amplitude of neutral
FUNDL1L2 REAL Fundamental amplitude of phase to phase L1L2

Technical manual
Monitoring

DCAMPN REAL DC Component value of neutral
DCAMPL1L2 REAL DC Component value of phase to phase L1L2
19.14.6 Settings
Table 789: VHMMHAI Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 790: VHMMHAI Group settings (basic)

On
WrnLimitTHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 5.0 Warning limit for percentage total
tDelayAlmTHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for
total harmonic distortion
WrnLimit2ndHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 3.5 Warning limit for percentage 2nd order
tDelayAlm2ndHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for 2nd
WrnLimit3rdHD 2.5 - 100.0 % 0.1 3.0 Warning limit for percentage 3rd order
tDelayAlm3rdHD 0.0 - 600.0 s 1.0 300.0 Time delay to alarm after warning for 3rd

Technical manual
Monitoring


Table 791: VHMMHAI Monitored data

THDN REAL - % Total harmonic distortion of neutral
THDL1L2 REAL - % Total harmonic distortion of phase to
phase L1L2
phase L2L3
phase L3L1
2NDHD REAL - % 2nd order harmonic distortion (Max of 3
phase)
3RDHD REAL - % 3rd order harmonic distortion (Max of 3
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
phase)
CFN REAL - - Crest factor of neutral
CFL1L2 REAL - - Crest factor of phase to phase L1L2

Technical manual
Monitoring

TRMSL1 REAL - kV True RMS value of phase L1
TRMSN REAL - kV True RMS value of neutral
TRMSL1L2 REAL - kV True RMS value of phase to phase L1L2
MEASFREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency
FUNDL1 REAL - kV Fundamental amplitude of phase L1
FUNDN REAL - kV Fundamental amplitude of neutral
FUNDL1L2 REAL - kV Fundamental amplitude of phase to
phase L1L2
phase L2L3
phase L3L1
HAAMPL1 REAL - kV Harmonic RMS value of phase L1
HAAMPN REAL - kV Harmonic RMS value of neutral
HAAMPL1L2 REAL - kV Harmonic RMS value of phase to phase
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
DCAMPL1 REAL - kV DC Component value of phase L1
DCAMPN REAL - kV DC Component value of neutral
DCAMPL1L2 REAL - kV DC Component value of phase to phase
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
HA2NDAMP REAL - kV 2nd order Harmonic RMS value (Max of
3 phase)
HA3RDAMP REAL - kV 3rd order Harmonic RMS value (Max of
3 phase)
HA4THAMP REAL - kV 4th order Harmonic RMS value (Max of 3
phase)

Technical manual
Monitoring

HA5THAMP REAL - kV 5th order Harmonic RMS value (Max of 3
phase)
phase)
phase)
19.14.8 Graphical display configurable data

GUID-4C6C76EC-9E19-4A78-B2F5-6B6FEC6DF165 v1
Table 792: VHMMHAI Graphical display configurable data
Name Description
2NDHD 2nd order harmonic distortion
3RDHD 3rd order harmonic distortion
HAAMPN Harmonic RMS value of neutral
HAAMPL1L2 Harmonic RMS value of phase to phase L1L2
MEASFREQ Measured frequency
THDN Total harmonic distortion of neutral
THDL1L2 Total harmonic distortion of phase to phase L1L2
TRMSN True RMS value of neutral
TRMSL1L2 True RMS value of phase to phase L1L2
FUNDN Fundamental amplitude of neutral

Technical manual
Monitoring
Name Description
FUNDL1L2 Fundamental amplitude of phase to phase L1L2
19.14.9 Operation principle GUID-2799ED97-DBA6-447A-BCFA-C4AF0BE6964E v2
The voltage harmonic monitoring function calculates the following power quality indices based on the
voltage input signal:
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in percentage of fundamental component

• Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD) in percentage of fundamental component
• Crest Factor (CF)
The harmonic function calculates fundamental signal magnitude and specific harmonic values from
2nd to 9th orders of the given signal using a FFT filter.
The main functionality of the harmonic monitoring function is to find the total harmonic distortion
(THD) for voltage signals. If the distorted voltage and current waveforms consist of only harmonics, a
measurement time interval kT (T = Cycle Time) enables the correct measurement of RMS value. If
the monitored waveform contains an interharmonic, then the measurement time interval kT should be
designed according to the minimum frequency signal measurement.
The time interval, which is required for an accurate measurement of RMS values and power, is the
least common multiple of the periods of the fundamental component and the interharmonic
component (that is, kT = mTi ; Ti =1 / fi , where ‘fi’ is the interharmonic frequency and ‘k’, ‘m’ are
integer numbers). When the measurement time interval kT does not include an integer number of
periods Ti (that is, kT ≠ mTi), the RMS value of the interharmonic is inaccurate. This error is also
reflected in the measurement accuracy of the total RMS value. If at least one of the interharmonics of
order h is an irrational number, then the observed waveform is not periodic, commonly known as
Nearly Periodic. In such a case, the measurement time interval kT should be infinitely large in order
to have a correct measurement of the RMS value or power. The larger the measurement time kT, the
lesser the significance of errors caused by interharmonics.
Figure 477 shows the envelopes of the maximum errors made when the RMS value of an
interharmonic is measured in function of the number of cycle’s m. For example, if m = 20, the RMS
value of the interharmonic will be measured with a maximum error of ± 0.2%. For the accurate
measurement of true RMS value and harmonic components amplitude, FFT filter design is used for
harmonic monitoring functionality.

Technical manual
Monitoring
2
1.6
1.2
MAXIMUM ERROR (%)
0.8
0.4
0
‐0.4
‐0.8
‐1.2
‐1.6
‐2
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
NUMBER OF CYCLES m
Figure 477: Percent maximum error of RMS measurement versus number of cycles
Individual harmonic distortion is calculated only for 2nd to 9th harmonic orders. For simplicity,
maximum harmonic amplitude out of all phases is considered for monitoring and the same value is
considered for harmonic distortion calculation, warning and alarm conditions. Phase wise harmonic
values are available in the IEC 61850 data model. The overview diagram of harmonic monitoring
function is shown in Figure 478.
A FFT filter is used to calculate complex amplitude and frequency for the rated frequency, and its
harmonic components up to 9th order includes DC component. The filter length is fixed to 1 second,
which is 1024 samples at 1 kHz sampling for calculation in each execution of the FFT filter. This
gives an increased resolution on true RMS calculation upto interharmonic level.
The function calculates THD, IHD and CF using the derived quantities of the given signal. The FFT
filter tries to find the fundamental frequency in a frequency search range of ± 5 Hz from the system
rated frequency. If the fundamental frequency is not able to identify from the measured signal, then it
will not do any calculation.
In many cases, the traditional instrument transformers which are only designed to
have a high accuracy at rated frequency are used for harmonic measurements. This
questions accuracy of the harmonic measurements and the reliability of any
compliance assessment. In this function, the measurement accuracy level of
instrument transformers is not considered.
The following sections describe how each power quality indices are calculated.
19.14.9.1 Total harmonic distortion (THD) GUID-037ED9E1-8E21-455B-9DA0-F7914A97B3D7 v2
The overall deviation of a distorted wave from its fundamental can be estimated using total harmonic
distortion (THD).
The total harmonic distortion of the voltage is as follows:

Technical manual
Monitoring
 Hmax 
  2
VH   Vh  
%THDV      *100
V1   V1  
 h2 
 
Where,
V1 = Voltage fundamental DFT magnitude
VH = Total voltage harmonic magnitude (integer harmonics h = 2, 3...9)
Vh = Voltage harmonic magnitude for each order h (integer harmonics h = 2, 3…9)
FFT Filter MEASFREQ

V3P (Input from SMAI) FREQ
V3P TRMS
THDx
HAAMPx Total Harmonic
THDxx
Distortion
FUND Calculation #HD
FundDFT
nd
Harm2
Harm3rd
th
Harm4
Harm5th Individual THDALM
th
Harm6 Harmonic #HDALM
th Distortion
Harm7 THDWRN
Calculation
Harm8th Blocking, Alarm
#HDWRN
Harm9th and Warning
logic
Peak
DCComp
CFx
Crest Factor
PEAK Calculation CFxx
DCAMPx
DCAMPxx
BLOCK
WrnLimit#HD
HAAMPx
Harmonic RMS Values
WrnLimitTHD HAAMPxx
tDelayAlmIHD# Individual Harmonic HA #AMP
RMS Values
tDelayAlmTHD FUNDx
Fundamental
Values FUNDxx
BLKALM TRMSx
True RMS
BLKWARN Values TRMSxx
x – Phase to ground outputs (L1 , L2 , L 3 andN)

xx – Phase to phase outputs (L1L2, L2L3 and L3L1)
nd rd th th th th th th
# – Harmonic order (2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 and 9 )
Figure 478: Simplified logic diagram for voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI
19.14.9.2 Individual harmonic distortion (IHD) GUID-8DFC8603-2C3B-402F-9774-93D9E166938B v3
The individual harmonic distortion is defined as the percentage of harmonics for order h with respect
to the fundamental frequency.
The individual harmonic distortion of the voltage for order h is as follows:

Vh
% IHDV h  *100
V1

Technical manual
Monitoring
Where,
Vh = Voltage harmonic magnitude for the order h
V1 = Voltage fundamental DFT magnitude
Additionally, it calculates the maximum individual harmonic distortion value as the maximum of three
phase signals harmonic distortion.Additionally, it calculates the maximum individual harmonic
distortion value as the maximum of two phase signals harmonic distortion. The individual harmonic
distortion is used further in warning and alarm logic.
19.14.9.3 Crest factor (CF) GUID-11E60216-E7DB-42DB-872C-8B1E53D7D30A v2
Crest factor is the ratio between value of the peak voltage and its RMS value.
The crest factor of voltage is as follows:

VPeak
CFV 
VRMS
Where,
IPeak = Voltage peak amplitude
IRMS = Voltage true RMS
19.14.9.4 Blocking and alarm logic GUID-56FFB124-6F86-41FA-B34F-61C7D4CD5720 v2
It is possible to set warning limits for each individual harmonic order. If the calculated individual
harmonic distortion exceeds beyond the warning limit, an individual harmonic warning will be raised.
Also, the user can set a time delay to alarm for an individual harmonic distortion value. If the IHD
value sustains above the warning limit for the set time, an alarm signal will be raised.
Similarly, total harmonic distortion has separate settings for warning limit and alarm time delay. Once
the THD value exceeds beyond set warning limit, a separate warning signal will be raised. If the
warning signal sustains above the time set at alarm time delay setting, an individual alarm signal will
be raised.
The phase-wise alarm and warning signals with respect to total harmonic distortion is provided
through IEC 61850 communication protocol (general alarm and general warning are also provided).
In case of phase-to-phase measurement, once the THD exceeded the limits, both phase warning and
alarm signals will be activated. Warning and alarm based on individual harmonic distortion are
activated for specific harmonic order outputs of alarm and warning. To avoid oscillations of warning
signals at boundary conditions, a hysteresis has been included.
When the BLOCK input is activated, all binary outputs will be forced to reset. Also, the alarm outputs
and warning outputs can be separately blocked by activating the BLKALM and BLKWRN inputs,
respectively.

Technical manual
Monitoring
BLOCK
BLKWARN
BLKALM
Total Harmonic
Distortion
a
a >b AND
THDWRN
b
WarnLimitTHD tOff
t AND
THDALM
tDelayAlmTHD
Individual Harmonic
Distortion
a #HDWRN
(Max of phase wise a >b AND
harmonic distortion) b
WarnLimitIHD# tOff
#HDALM
t AND
tDelayAlmIHD #
Figure 479: Simplified logic diagram for warning and alarm

GUID-2068BBA0-9026-48D0-9DEB-301BCB3C600C v3
Table 793: VHMMHAI (50/60 Hz) technical data

Fundamental Harmonic
Frequency (0.95 to 1.05) X fr 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ±2 mHz
True RMS (10 to 150) V None ±0.5% of U

(10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ±2.0% of U
(10 to 150) V 6th order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ±5.0% of U
Fundamental (10 to 150) V None ±0.5% of UF
(10 to 150) V 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ±0.5% of UF
Crest Factor (10 to 150) V None ±2.0%

Harmonic (10 to 150) V 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ±4.0% of UH
Amplitude
Total Harmonic (10 to 150) V 2nd order to 9th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ±3.0%
Distortion (VTHD)
Note:
UF - Applied Voltage Fundamental
UH - Applied Voltage Harmonic (of respective harmonics)
U - Actual Voltage = RMS (UF and UH)

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.15 Fault current and voltage monitoring function

FLTMMXU GUID-B976D374-CB18-441E-9A12-D4B351D6BF7F v1
19.15.1 Function revision history GUID-0AA99E78-0C76-48B5-AA00-8E3201C0D263 v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
M 2.2.4 -
N 2.2.5 New function release
19.15.2 Identification GUID-A5B9E605-328B-4168-BEE3-7BF30BC7E701 v1
number
Fault current and voltage FLTMMXU - -
monitoring function
19.15.3 Functionality GUID-2EC2A5A0-CFA9-4241-90F3-706F5269435A v1
The fault current and voltage monitoring function (FLTMMXU) monitors and reports the maximum
peak current per phase, maximum RMS current per phase, DFT values of current per phase and
three phase to ground voltages, as well as DFT values of neutral current and neutral voltage upon a
trip event occurrence.
The FLTMMXU function monitors the voltage and current data for a predefined time window and
stores their values when the binary input TRIGFLTUI becomes active. The trip signal from any
protection/monitoring function should be connected to TRIGFLTUI input for the data monitoring. The
time window for calculation of maximum peak and RMS current of individual phases can be set using
the setting parameters PreTrig and PostTrig .

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.15.4 Function block GUID-8769C5A2-5164-4EE9-9DE8-B04869DA8C54 v1
FLTMMXU
I3P* FLTIL1MAG
U3P* FLTIL1ANG
BLOCK FLTIL2MAG
TRGFLTUI FLTIL2ANG
RSTFLTUI FLTIL3MAG
FLTIL3ANG
FLTINMAG
FLTINANG
FLTUL1MAG
FLTUL1ANG
FLTUL2MAG
FLTUL2ANG
FLTUL3MAG
FLTUL3ANG
FLTUNMAG
FLTUNANG
IMAX
IL1MAXPK
IL2MAXPK
IL3MAXPK
IL1MAX
IL2MAX
IL3MAX
Figure 480: FLTMMXU function block
19.15.5 Signals GUID-08275B60-9D37-449B-9970-63FA6853AF0A v1
Table 794: FLTMMXU Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group input for three-phase current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group input for three-phase voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the function
TRGFLTUI BOOLEAN 0 Trigger fault record
RSTFLTUI BOOLEAN 0 Reset last fault values
Table 795: FLTMMXU Output signals

FLTIL1MAG REAL Fundamental DFT magnitude of current of phase L1 of the last
event
FLTIL1ANG REAL Fundamental DFT angle of current of phase L1 of the last event
event
event
FLTINMAG REAL Fundamental DFT magnitude of neutral current of the last event
FLTINANG REAL Fundamental DFT angle of neutral current of the last event

Technical manual
Monitoring

FLTUL1MAG REAL Fundamental DFT magnitude of voltage of phase L1 of the last
event
FLTUL1ANG REAL Fundamental DFT angle of voltage of phase L1 of the last event
event
event
FLTUNMAG REAL Fundamental DFT magnitude of neutral voltage of the last event
FLTUNANG REAL Fundamental DFT angle of neutral voltage of the last event
IMAX REAL Maximum RMS current of all phases of the last event
IL1MAXPK REAL Maximum peak current of phase L1 of the last event
IL1MAX REAL Maximum RMS current of phase L1 of the last event
19.15.6 Settings GUID-84784563-FCA9-46D2-B921-5F50741178E2 v1
Table 796: FLTMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 797: FLTMMXU Group settings (basic)

On
PreTrig 0 - 10 cycles 1 5 The number of power cycles considered
for fault data calculation prior to positive
edge of the binary input TRIGFLTUI
PostTrig 1 - 50 cycles 1 5 The number of power cycles considered
for fault data calculation post to positive
edge of the binary input TRIGFLTUI

Technical manual
Monitoring

Table 798: FLTMMXU Monitored data

TRIGTIME GROUP - - Date and time at instant of input
SIGNAL TRIGFLTUI input active
TRIGDUR REAL - ms Indicates pulse duration of TRIGFLTUI
input
FLTIL1MAG REAL - A Fundamental DFT magnitude of current
of phase L1 of the last event
FLTIL1ANG REAL - deg Fundamental DFT angle of current of
phase L1 of the last event
FLTINMAG REAL - A Fundamental DFT magnitude of neutral
current of the last event
FLTINANG REAL - deg Fundamental DFT angle of neutral
current of the last event
FLTUL1MAG REAL - kV Fundamental DFT magnitude of voltage
FLTUL1ANG REAL - deg Fundamental DFT angle of voltage of
FLTUNMAG REAL - kV Fundamental DFT magnitude of neutral
voltage of the last event
FLTUNANG REAL - deg Fundamental DFT angle of neutral
voltage of the last event
IMAX REAL - A Maximum RMS current of all phases of
the last event
IL1MAXPK REAL - A Maximum peak current of phase L1 of
the last event
the last event
the last event
IL1MAX REAL - A Maximum RMS current of phase L1 of
the last event

Technical manual
Monitoring

the last event
the last event
IL1 REAL - A Measured RMS current of phase L1
UL1 REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage of phase L1
19.15.8 Operation principle GUID-99D2F5E9-0C83-4EAC-824B-38916832AC21 v1
The overall functionality of FLTMMXU function is shown in Figure 481.
I3P
U3P ILx
BLOCK ULx
TRIGFLTUI ILxMAXPK
Maximum RMS current ILxMAX
and maximum peak
IMAX
current calculation
RSTFLTUI TRIGTIME
TRIGDUR
PreTrig
PostTrig
FLTILxMAG
FLTILxANG
Fundamental DFT FLTINMAG
current and voltage
FLTINANG
values snapshot
captured at the time of FLTULxMAG
TRIGFLTUI signal FLTULxANG
becomes TRUE FLTUNMAG
FLTUNANG
Where Lx = Phase L1, L2 and L3

Figure 481: Overall functionality of FLTMMXU

The FLTMMXU function should be connected to SMAI functions for U3P and I3P signals. The
TRIGFLTUI signal should be connected to general trip signal of protection/ monitoring function in the
ACT configuration.
The function is triggered when the TRIGFLTUI binary input of the function is TRUE, for example, if
TRIGFLTUI is connected to general TRIP signal of SMPPTRC function. The duration for calculation
of maximum peak current for each phase and maximum RMS current for each phase is set using the
setting parameters PreTrig and PostTrig as shown in Figure 482.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Instantaneous samples
Peak value(SMAI o/p)
RMS value(SMAI o/p)
PreTrig PostTrig
TRIGFLTUI
Time duration for maximum peak and
RMS current calculation
IL1MAXPK
IL1MAX
FLTIL1MAG
IL1
IL2MAXPK
IL2MAX
FLTIL2MAG
IL2
IL3MAXPK
IL3MAX
FLTIL3MAG
IL3
Figure 482: Maximum peak and RMS current calculation

The maximum peak and RMS current in individual phases are evaluated for the time duration from
PreTrig to PostTrig. At the end of PostTrig, the maximum peak and RMS current of each phase are
reported to IEC 61850, LHMI and monitoring tool.
The fundamental DFT magnitude and angle of phase currents (FLTILxMAG/FLTILxANG), phase
voltages (FLTULxMAG/FLTULxANG), neutral current (FLTINMAG/FLTINANG) and neutral voltage

Technical manual
Monitoring
(FLTUNMAG/FLTUNANG) are read and stored at the positive edge of the binary input TRIGFLTUI.
These values are also reported to IEC 61850, LHMI, monitoring tool at the end of PostTrig.
The reference for the angle outputs can be set by DFTReference setting parameter
in SMAI function.
The reported outputs (ILxMAXPK, ILxMAX, IMAX, FLTILxMAG/FLTILxANG, FLTULxMAG/

FLTULxANG, FLTINMAG/FLTINANG, and FLTUNMAG/FLTUNANG ) show the previous event values
till a new positive edge trigger is received by TRIGFLTUI input.
The output TRIGTIME shows the date and time of the instant when TRIGFLTUI input has changed
the state to TRUE from FALSE.
TRIGDUR output indicates the time duration of TRIGFLTUI input active in ms.
A reset command input RSTFLTUI is provided to reset all the monitored/reported output values to
zero.
If the RSTFLTUI signal remains TRUE and a new trigger for TRIGFLTUI input is
received, the FLTMMXU will report the new set of values. Only the positive edge of
the RSTFLTUI input is considered to reset the values which were reported/monitored
in the previous event.
BLOCK input is provided to stop the internal calculations. When BLOCK input is active, activation of
TRIGFLTUI input will not trigger the fault data calculations. The ILxMAXPK, ILxMAX, IMAX,
FLTILxMAG/FLTILxANG, FLTULxMAG/FLTULxANG, FLTINMAG/FLTINANG and FLTUNMAG/
FLTUNANG outputs will retain the previous fault event values.
GUID-BC49359C-0C9B-4A0F-A2D7-F79A97F9A9D4 v1
IEC 61850 reporting

If the monitored value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than
the ±ΔY pre-defined limits, then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This
limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 483 shows an example with the amplitude
dead-band supervision. The process is not continuous, but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1
Figure 483: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

Following measured values from the FLTMMXU function are reported over IEC 61850 with amplitude
dead-band supervision:
• Maximum RMS current of all phases during the trip event (IMAXRMS)
• Fundamental DFT current magnitude and angle of individual phases at the instant of triggering
the function via input TRIGFLUI (FLTILxMAG and FLTILxANG, where Lx = phase L1, L2 and L3)
• Fundamental DFT neutral current magnitude and angle at the instant of triggering the function
via input TRIGFLUI (FLTINMAG and FLTINANG)
• Fundamental DFT voltage magnitude and angle of individual phases at the instant of triggering
the function via input TRIGFLUI (FLTULxMAG and FLTULxANG, where Lx = phase L1, L2 and
L3)
• Fundamental DFT neutral voltage magnitude and angle at the instant of triggering the function
via input TRIGFLUI (FLTUNMAG and FLTUNANG)

GUID-74F6F38A-8DF9-4343-910D-4E0594C6E21F v1
Table 799: FLTMMXU technical data - 50/60 Hz (8 ms application thread)

Voltage, FLTULxMAG (1 to 300) V ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Current, FLTILxMAG (0.1-10.0) x Ir ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Phase angle, FLTULxANG (1 to 300) V ±2 degrees at U ≤ 5 V

Phase angle, FLTILxANG (0.1-10.0) x Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 10.0 × Ir

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.16 Fault locator LMBRFLO IP14592-1 v2
19.16.1 Function revision history GUID-1740AA05-417C-4474-ABE7-F15CB4D16019 v3

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.2 -
D 2.2.2 -
E 2.2.2 -
F 2.2.3 -
G 2.2.3 -
H 2.2.3 -
J 2.2.4 -
K 2.2.4 Added FLINVAL, FLT_DIST, FLT_R, and FLT_LOOP outputs in the ACT function block.
L 2.2.5 -
M14892-1 v3

Fault locator LMBRFLO - -
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent fault
and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault in km, miles or
% of line length. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current
and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution
of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with recorded load (pre-
fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new
source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees
apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.

Technical manual
Monitoring
LMBRFLO
PHSELL1* CALCMADE
PHSELL2* FLINVAL
PHSELL3* FLT_DIST
CALCDIST* FLT_X
FLT_R
FLT_LOOP
BCD_80
BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1
Figure 484: LMBRFLO function block
19.16.5 Signals
Table 800: LMBRFLO Input signals

PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)
Table 801: LMBRFLO Output signals

CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLINVAL BOOLEAN Fault location invalid
FLT_DIST REAL Distance to fault in line length unit
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER Fault loop
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.16.6 Settings
Table 802: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL1
current, IL2
current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording
residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on
parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL1
voltage, UL2
voltage, UL3
UL1Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L1
magnitude L2
magnitude L3
Table 803: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)

R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 km 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Technical manual
Monitoring

Table 804: LMBRFLO Monitored data

FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 1=L1-N - Fault loop
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=Others

M14982-4 v7
The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions,
since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high accuracy.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected
from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among
those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is
performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault
resistance.
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
Figure 485: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault
location-measuring function
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant
manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching state
in the immediate network, power generation out of order, and so on), new values can be entered via
the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm
described below. It’s also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the
fault can be achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or
miles according to the setting LineLengthUnit. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance
report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the local HMI or PCM600.

Technical manual
Monitoring
19.16.8.1 Measuring Principle M14983-4 v2
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the
currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will
vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end infeed,
additional fault resistance and load current.
M14983-5 v1
19.16.8.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault M14983-7 v6
Figure 486 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with
source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a distance F from IED A on a line with
the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for
better clarification of the algorithm.
A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB
IF
UA RF
xx01000171.vsd
Figure 486: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From Figure 486 it is evident that:
U A = I A × p × Z L + IF × R F
Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF is the fault current and
p is a relative distance to the fault
The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

Technical manual
Monitoring
IF A
IF = --------
DA
Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and
DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault
current.
For a single line, the value is equal to:
( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA
U A = I A × p × Z L + -------- × R F
DA
Table 805: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N U L1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- ´ D ( I L 1 A – I 0A )
2
L2-N U L2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L2A – I 0A )
2
L3-N U L3A IL3A + KN x INA 3

--- ´ D ( I L3A – I0A )
2
L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A

DIL 1 L 2 A
N
L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A DIL2L3A

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations,
because this is the value used in the algorithm.
For double lines, the fault equation is:

Technical manual
Monitoring
I FA
U A = I A × p × Z 1L + -------- × RF + I 0P × Z 0M
DA
Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and
DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:
( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B
The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:
Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - × -------
- + ----------------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a
single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases.
Because the DA distribution factor according to Equation 167 or Equation 169 is a function of p, the
general equation Equation 169 can be written in the form:
2
p – p × K1 + K2 – K3 × RF = 0
Where:
UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------- + --------------------------- + 1
I A × ZL Z L + ZA DD
UA ZB
K2 = --------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
IA × Z L Z L + Z A DD
I F A æ Z A + ZB
- × --------------------------- + 1ö
K 3 = ---------------
I A × Z L è Z 1 + ZA DD ø
and:
• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to Equation 171.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, Equation 172 applies to both single and parallel lines.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Equation 172 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
2
p – p × Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F × Re ( K 3 ) = 0
– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to Equation 177, and then inserted
to Equation 176. According to Equation 176, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of
a quadratic equation.
Equation 176 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified
load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault,
is used to establish the value that should be selected.
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less
accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.
19.16.8.3 The non-compensated impedance model M14983-121 v4
In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:
U A = p × Z 1 L × IA + R F × IA
Where:
IA is according to Table 805.
The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is
influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models
do not function.
19.16.8.4 Exception handling GUID-62D8C6CE-0269-4B6F-B2F1-C3A86B52EAB4 v1
If in case the roots of the quadratic equation is not within the given line length, then the fault location
is as follows:
For the following conditions, FLINVAL is set as TRUE.
1. If the fault distance estimated is between -1 p.u. and 0 p.u. or 1 p.u. and 2 p.u., then fault
distance is sealed to the closest value.
2. If the fault distance estimated is < -1 p.u. and >2.0 p.u., then fault distance is set as -1000.
19.16.8.5 IEC 60870-5-103 M14983-135 v4
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information from the
IED to a master (that is station HSI). The output CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a new
fault location is updated on FLT_X, FLT_R, FLT_DIST. The FLTINVAL is a binary output to indicate
the fault location estimated is invalid.

Technical manual
Monitoring
The CALCMADE and FLTINVAL must be connected to inputs to the function block I103USRDEF as
shown in Figure 487. The FLT_DIST, FLT_R, and FLT_X outputs are connected to the function block
I103MEASUSR.
Figure 487: ACT Configuration for connecting the LMBRFLO on 103

M14987-1 v8
Table 806: LMBRFLO technical data
Function Value or range Accuracy

Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Phase selection According to input signals -

Technical manual
Metering
Section 20 Metering
20.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3
M14879-1 v4

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -
S00947 V1 EN-US
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance
pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The
pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled
service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse
counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
Figure 488: PCFCNT function block
20.1.4 Signals
Table 807: PCFCNT Input signals

BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Technical manual
Metering
Table 808: PCFCNT Output signals

INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information
20.1.5 Settings
Table 809: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)

On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

Table 810: PCFCNT Monitored data

SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and status
information
M13397-3 v5
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input
channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI
with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is synchronized
with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a
command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the
LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Technical manual
Metering
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental counters. That
means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value
is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the
IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value (pulse count x
scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:
• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. PCFCNT updates
the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in
the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and
transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is specially
adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.
M13399-3 v9
Figure 489 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT
SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
Figure 489: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set,
the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading
per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module
(BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an
Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The
SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block.

Technical manual
Metering
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter
input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a
complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message after
deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two
reasons why the counter is blocked:
• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last
report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and status
information.
M13404-2 v5
Table 811: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy

Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value
20.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling
20.2.2 Functionality GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3
Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as reactive power
values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling (ETPMMTR) uses measured active
and reactive power as input and calculates the accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in
forward and reverse direction. Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand
power values are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations,
integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy
values and maximum power demand, can be found.

Technical manual
Metering
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by integrating
them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive energy values will happen
in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are available as output signals and also
as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time interval tEnergy
and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The active and reactive
maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and reverse direction and these
values can be reset with RSTDMD input.
ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
Figure 490: ETPMMTR function block
20.2.4 Signals
Table 812: ETPMMTR Input signals

P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading
Table 813: ETPMMTR Output signals

ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse

Technical manual
Metering

EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reverse reactive power demand value for set interval
20.2.5 Settings
Table 814: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)

On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

Technical manual
Metering
Table 815: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active
Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

Table 816: ETPMMTR Monitored data

EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active energy
value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active energy
value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive energy
value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy
value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active power demand
value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive power
demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reverse reactive power
demand value for set interval
20.2.7 Operation principle GUID-4A46757C-EC5D-4BCE-9D09-C8152B062CE1 v3
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements function
CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy.
Figure 491 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation and demand handling function
ETPMMTR.

Technical manual
Metering
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
Figure 491: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the STARTACC
and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is
low. Figure 492 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the
STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the
active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is
deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &
q-1
RSTACC

Figure 492: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and also as
pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to a pulse counter.
Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated
energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI
reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 493 shows the logic for integration of energy in
active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive forward and
reactive reverse is done.

Technical manual
Metering
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
 T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F
&
q-1
1000 GWh T
-1 F
q 0.0
a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
Figure 493: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values and energy
per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided by the energy-per-
pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating
RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the
settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 494 shows the logic for pulse output generation for
the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for integrated
energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a Counter q-1
a>b CU
1000 GWh b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1
0
÷ X
 R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
q-1 = unit delay

Figure 494: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time interval
tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active

Technical manual
Metering
and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local
HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the periodic
energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 495 shows the logic of alarm for active forward
energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly, the maximum
power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is implemented.
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F
q-1
q-1 = unit delay
Figure 495: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

SEMOD153707-2 v6
Table 817: ETPMMTR technical data

Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Export/Import Input from CVMMXN. No extra
error at steady load

Technical manual
Ethernet
Section 21 Ethernet
21.1 Access point
21.1.1 Introduction GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v3
An access point is an Ethernet communication interface for single or redundant station

communication. Each access point is allocated with one physical Ethernet port, two physical Ethernet
ports (marked A and B) are allocated if redundant communication is activated for the access point.
Device 1 Device 1
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3

SFP_301 SFP_302
SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 A B SFP_303
Figure 496: Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant communication (right)
DHCP is available for the front port, and a device connected to it can thereby obtain an automatically
assigned IP-address.
21.1.2 Settings
Table 818: AP_1 Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the access point
On
Redundancy None - - None Ethernet redundancy mode
PRP-0
PRP-1
HSR
RSTP
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.1.10 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 Station bus User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PTP Off - - Off Precision time protocol
On
Slave only
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On

Technical manual
Ethernet

DNP3 Off - - On DNP3 slave
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
C37.118TCP Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 TCP server
On
C37.118UDP1 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address
Table 819: AP_FRONT Non group settings (basic)

IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 10.1.150.3 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 FrontPort User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On
DNP3 Off - - On DNP3 slave
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP Server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
C37.118TCP Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 TCP server
On

Technical manual
Ethernet

DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address
Table 820: DHCP Non group settings (basic)

DHCPServer Off - - Off Access point front DHCP server
On operation
Table 821: AP_1 Monitored data

Physical ports INTEGER -1= - Physical ports
0=ETH_Front
1=SFP_301
2=SFP_302
3=SFP_303
4=SFP_304
5=SFP_3061
6=SFP_3062
101=SFP_301+
SFP_302
103=SFP_303+
SFP_304
105=SFP_3061+
SFP_3062
21.2 Access point diagnostics
21.2.1 Functionality GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v3
The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH, SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS)
supervise communication. SCHLCCH is used for communication over the rear Ethernet ports,
RCHLCCH is used for redundant communications over the rear Ethernet ports and FRONTSTATUS
is used for communication over the front port. All access point function blocks include output signal
for denial of service. To get this denial of service, that is reported on the communication, the
DOSALARM output from these blocks must be connected to a communication function.
For RSTP, the frame error rate on an individual link cannot be extrapolated
accurately to that of which is received by the IED. Hence, the frame error rate on link
A (LCCH.FerCh) and the frame error rate on link B (LCCH.RedFerCh) cannot be
calculated and are 0 always.

Technical manual
Ethernet
21.2.2 Function block GUID-727BF536-1D60-4060-A674-5D73F252CCB7 v2
SCHLCCH
LINKUP
DOSALARM
Figure 497: SCHLCCH Function block
RCHLCCH
REDLINKA
REDLINKB
DOSALARM
Figure 498: RCHLCCH Function block
FRONTSTATUS
LINKUP
DOSALARM
Figure 499: FRONTSTATUS Function block
21.2.3 Signals
Table 822: SCHLCCH Output signals

LINKUP BOOLEAN Access point link status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm
Table 823: RCHLCCH Output signals

REDLINKA BOOLEAN Channel A redundancy status
REDLINKB BOOLEAN Channel B redundancy status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm (A + B)
Table 824: FRONTSTATUS Output signals

LINKUP BOOLEAN Link status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm

Technical manual
Ethernet

Table 825: SCHLCCH Monitored data

GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
Table 826: RCHLCCH Monitored data

1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
Table 827: FRONTSTATUS Monitored data

1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
21.3 Redundant communication
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless HSR - -
redundancy
Access point diagnostic for redundant RCHLCCH - -
Ethernet ports
21.3.2 Functionality GUID-494FACF7-4BE0-4B9F-A18F-47CD1E92C0F9 v3
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1, PRP-0, and IEC 62439-3 Edition 3,
PRP-1, parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. PRP
according to IEC 62439-3 uses two optical/Galvanic(RJ45) Ethernet ports.
IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 3, High-availability
seamless redundancy (HSR) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus
communication according to 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.

Technical manual
Ethernet
21.3.3 Operation principle GUID-73DB23CD-A924-4B89-8AAB-1E79D44DE429 v1
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted on both
channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is compared with data
package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last package is discarded.
The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If no
data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output LinkAUp
and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.
Device 1 Device 2
AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB
Switch A Switch B

AP1 AP1
Device 3 Device 4
Figure 500: Redundant station bus
IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

HSR applies the principle of parallel operation to a single ring.
For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the frames
circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives from one
port to another to reach the next node. When the originating sender node receives the frame it sent,
the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops
The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If no
data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output LinkAUp
and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.
If IEEE1588 (PTP) is used an accuracy of 1 µs can be guaranteed for up to 15 devices in one HSR-
ring.

Technical manual
Ethernet
Device 1 Device 2
AP1 AP1
PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1
Device 3 Device 4
Figure 501: HSR ring
21.4 Merging unit
21.4.1 Introduction GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1
The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to communicate
with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as Merging Units (MU).
The rear access points are used for the communication.
The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more
measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients (or
subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data from classical measuring
transformers, others from non-conventional measuring transducers and yet others can pick up data
from both types.
21.4.2 Settings
Table 828: MU1 Non group settings (basic)

SampleValueID 0 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 Sample Value ID (SVID) for the merging
unit [0-34 char]
APConnection None - - None Access point connection for the merging
AP1 unit
AP2
AP3
AP4
SvCBRef 0 - 16 - 1 Reference to the subscribed SV control
block [1-16 char]

Technical manual
Ethernet
Table 829: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)


Table 830: MU1_HW Monitored data

MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data loss
1=Error
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to same clock as
1=Error IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 0=No - Sample lost
1=Yes
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in MU
1=Error
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 0=No - MU in test mode
1=Yes
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 0=No - Simulation mode
1=Yes
BadReference BOOLEAN 0=No - BadReference indication output for I1
1=Yes
Derived BOOLEAN 0=No - Derived indication output for I1
1=Yes
Failure BOOLEAN 0=No - Failure indication output for I1
1=Yes
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 0=No - Inaccurate indication output for I1
1=Yes
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 0=No - Inconsistent indication output for I1
1=Yes
OldData BOOLEAN 0=No - OldData indication output for I1
1=Yes
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 0=No - OperatorBlocked indication output for I1
1=Yes
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 0=No - Oscillatory indication output for I1
1=Yes
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 0=No - OutOfRange indication output for I1
1=Yes
Overflow BOOLEAN 0=No - Overflow indication output for I1
1=Yes
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output for I1
1=Substituted

Technical manual
Ethernet

Test BOOLEAN 0=No - Test indication output for I1
1=Yes
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output I1
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes

Technical manual
Ethernet

1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
BadReference BOOLEAN 0=No - BadReference indication output for U1
1=Yes
Derived BOOLEAN 0=No - Derived indication output for U1
1=Yes
Failure BOOLEAN 0=No - Failure indication output for U1
1=Yes
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 0=No - Inaccurate indication output for U1
1=Yes
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 0=No - Inconsistent indication output for U1
1=Yes

Technical manual
Ethernet

OldData BOOLEAN 0=No - OldData indication output for U1
1=Yes
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 0=No - OperatorBlocked indication output for U1
1=Yes
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 0=No - Oscillatory indication output for U1
1=Yes
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 0=No - OutOfRange indication output for U1
1=Yes
Overflow BOOLEAN 0=No - Overflow indication output for U1
1=Yes
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output for U1
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 0=No - Test indication output for U1
1=Yes
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output U1
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes

Technical manual
Ethernet

1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used

Technical manual
Ethernet
21.5 Routes
21.5.1 Introduction GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1
A route is a specified path for data to travel between the source device in a subnetwork to the
destination device in a different subnetwork. A route consists of a destination address and the
address of the gateway to be used when sending data to the destination device, see Figure 502.
Default gateway
Gateway
Source Destination
Figure 502: Route from source to destination through gateway
21.5.2 Settings
Table 831: ROUTE_1 Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the route
On
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 IP address of the gateway
Address
DestIPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Destination IP address
Address
DestSubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Destination IP subnet mask
Address
Name 1 - 18 - 1 Route1 User configurable name of the route
[1-18 char]

Table 832: ROUTE_1 Monitored data

RouteConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Route configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off

Technical manual
938
Section 22 Station communication

22.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v15
Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect to one or many
substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation
Monitoring (SM) bus.
Available communication protocols are:
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• C37.118 communication protocol
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
The LPHD.PhyHealth reflects the physical health of the IED. The status is set to
Alarm when there is an internal failure in the IED or Warning if any active
communication link fails.
22.2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID-6BC4671F-6D06-4BBD-B1FF-2F03FF16A856 v1
Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu /Diagnostics /IED status /
Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:
Diagnostic value Description

Off Protocol is turned off
Error An error has occured, refer to event list for more
information
Warning Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate data point.
Ready Protocol is ready

Technical manual
Figure 503: Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI
22.3 DNP3 protocol GUID-54A54716-23BD-4E7C-8245-DE2B4C75E8DC v1
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to communicate data
between components in process automation systems. For a detailed description of the DNP3
protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
22.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is equipped with up to six
(order dependent) optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC
61850-8-1 communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1
protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information
and simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and client-server
communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) uploading can be
done over MMS or FTP.
The front port is only intended for PCM600 communication, maintenance, training
and test purposes due to risk of interference during normal operation.

Technical manual
22.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v9
Table 833: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial

100BASE-FX (ST connector) Glass fiber (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that all ports are connected to
different subnets. For example: port 1 has IP address 198.168.101.10 with subnet
mask 255.255.255.0, and port 2 has IP address 198.168.102.10 with subnet mask
255.255.255.0.
22.4.3 Settings
Table 834: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

On
GOOSEPortEd1 AP_FRONT - - AP_1 Selection of GOOSE port (only for
AP_1 IEC61850 Ed1)
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
AP_5
AP_6
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
RemSetControlEd2 Disabled - - Disabled Changing settings over 61850 enabled
Enabled (only for IEC61850 Ed2)
ResvTmsEd2 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Reservation time (only for IEC61850
Ed2)
M15031-1 v9
Table 835: Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd

Technical manual
Function Value
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol LON
Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s
Protocol SPA
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd
22.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4
22.4.5.1 Functionality SEMOD55713-5 v8
Generic communication function for Single Point indication (SPGAPC) is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
22.4.5.2 Function block SEMOD54714-4 v4
SPGAPC
BLOCK
ÎN
Figure 504: SPGAPC function block
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
Figure 505: SP16GAPC function block
22.4.5.3 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2
Table 836: SPGAPC Input signals

IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Technical manual
Table 837: SP16GAPC Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
22.4.5.4 Settings ABBD8E283673 v4
22.4.5.5 Monitored data

Table 838: SPGAPC Monitored data

OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL
Table 839: SP16GAPC Monitored data

OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for input 1 to
SIGNAL 16
22.4.5.6 Operation principle SEMOD55725-5 v8
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point indication
(SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests
this signal. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1
communication established. For more information, refer to the Engineering manual.
22.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3
22.4.6.1 Functionality SEMOD55872-5 v10
Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also
be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit
measurement supervision on that value.
MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
ÎN RANGE
Figure 506: MVGAPC function block

Technical manual
22.4.6.3 Signals SEMOD55948-1 v2
Table 840: MVGAPC Input signals

IN REAL 0 Analog input value
Table 841: MVGAPC Output signals

VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range
22.4.6.4 Settings SEMOD55954-1 v2
Table 842: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 100000 Type 1 10000 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
MV dbType Cyclic - - Deadband Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

Technical manual
22.4.6.5 Monitored data

Table 843: MVGAPC Monitored data

VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
22.4.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD55936-5 v8
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for Measured Value
(MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. Additional
configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication
established. For more information, see Engineering manual.
The principles of zero-point clamping, range supervision, and value reporting are explained in section
19.1.9.1. For MVGAPC, the measurement range is defined by the MV min and MV max settings.
22.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV
GUID-8C11DB9A-7844-4E1F-A6BB-D97ECE350FC1 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value
22.4.7.2 Functionality GUID-1D2DBC22-4F04-4809-B34E-8939D442C185 v4
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The DPOUT output is timestamped.
If the time information is received along with Goose message at input(source of output) from the
Goose sender, the same time information is available at the output signal.
If non signal goose message is received from the sender, the goose output will have the time
information of the receiver IED at which goose message is received.
22.4.7.3 Function block GUID-ED277880-FB5D-4630-872F-9F343D449FFE v1
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
^SRCDPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 507: GOOSEDPRCV function block

Technical manual
22.4.7.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1
Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE function block are
used for GOOSE connections. These connections are visible and possible to make
only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
Table 844: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

SRCDPOUT INTEGER 0 Source to double point output
Table 845: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output
22.4.7.5 Settings
Table 846: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.7.6 Operation principle GUID-82A1C8A2-827A-40EF-8E58-F573E29E468E v4
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and
the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1
Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and communication 0 0 0 0
error

Technical manual

Receiver in test mode and incoming data Updated 1 1 0
with q= Normal
with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross or
in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled)
to receive the double point values.
The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.
22.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV
GUID-93A1E81B-1DE8-483A-BB3B-DB771EE66DC1 v1

GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value
22.4.8.2 Functionality GUID-27B1ED7A-C8E8-499E-89C1-C656FB0337F8 v4
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The INTOUT output is timestamped.
22.4.8.3 Function block GUID-56F0C9F7-98F3-4091-B071-53CA5074DC8F v1
GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ÎNTOUT
^SRCINTOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 508: GOOSEINTRCV function block

Technical manual
22.4.8.4 Signals
Table 847: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

SRCINTOUT INTEGER 0 Source to integer output
Table 848: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
22.4.8.5 Settings
Table 849: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.8.6 Operation principle GUID-5BBDF772-3B3E-4F7C-ABE9-18CE3C1A2E2D v4

Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1
Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0

Receiver in block and communication error Freeze 0 0 0

Technical manual

Receiver in test mode and incoming data with Updated 1 1 0
q= Normal
q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0
to receive the integer values.
22.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV
GUID-B1FFBE08-C823-4A58-9FE0-A9A20DA6BB44 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value
22.4.9.2 Functionality GUID-759CB016-2B4D-4D98-82E1-592044983D53 v4
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The MVOUT output is timestamped.
22.4.9.3 Function block GUID-A0B333CC-AEF4-40EA-B152-364648AB78D3 v1
GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
^SRCMVOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 509: GOOSEMVRCV function block

Technical manual
22.4.9.4 Signals
Table 850: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

SRCMVOUT REAL 0 Source to measurand value output
Table 851: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
22.4.9.5 Settings
Table 852: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.9.6 Operation principle GUID-7B24A6D3-2E5F-4961-A0A6-86436373809E v5



Technical manual

q= Normal
q= Test
in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (in case easy GOOSE engineering is
enabled) to receive the measured value.
22.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV
GUID-F2B30A70-842E-435E-8FAB-B1E58B9C0164 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value
22.4.10.2 Functionality GUID-0C99A106-C131-45D3-9B81-6B188E35EB34 v4
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The SPOUT output is timestamped.
22.4.10.3 Function block GUID-A414F31A-323F-4684-BADA-46F9C5E2B0E8 v1
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
^SRCSPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 510: GOOSESPRCV function block

Technical manual
22.4.10.4 Signals
Table 853: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

SRCSPOUT BOOLEAN 0 Source to single point output
Table 854: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
22.4.10.5 Settings
Table 855: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.10.6 Operation principle GUID-0E25A3FB-41BD-4EFE-9CA0-1262B9CD14CD v4

error

Technical manual

with q= Normal
with q= Test
to receive the binary single point values.
22.4.11 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF
GUID-CD59C2EE-F937-4CCA-83C1-181F925B8A40 v1

GOOSE VCTR configuration for send GOOSEVCTRC - -
and receive ONF
22.4.11.2 Functionality GUID-39C8760B-E4C2-4158-98D3-B3336364A10B v3
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which voltage control
information from TR8ATCC is transmitted/received to/from other IEDs via GOOSE communication.
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.
The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC via GOOSE communication:
• BusV
• LoadAIm
• LoadARe
• PosRel
• SetV
• VCTRStatus
• X2

Technical manual
22.4.11.3 Settings
Table 856: GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)

SendOperation Off - - On Send operation
On
SendInterval 0.1 - 5.0 s 0.1 0.3 Send interval
ReceiveOperation Off - - On Receive operation
On
ReceiveInterval 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.8 Receive interval
22.4.12 GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV
GUID-470735CB-59CE-4935-85A1-48E9947817DF v1

GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRR - -
CV
22.4.12.2 Functionality GUID-F733AE23-C2C7-4DEF-8629-EC89984C9F4B v3
GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE network at the user
defined rate.
This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and test mode.
Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception. Data validity also depends
upon the communication. If communication is invalid then data validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850
also checks for data validity using internal parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID
output.


q= Normal
q= Test

Technical manual
22.4.12.3 Function block GUID-14AF9617-BDEB-4C97-8FCB-7357F47BF37B v1
GOOSEVCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_RCV
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 511: GOOSEVCTRRCV function block
22.4.12.4 Signals
Table 857: GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block function
Table 858: GOOSEVCTRRCV Output signals

VCTR_RCV GROUP SIGNAL Output group connection to voltage control
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for output signals
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for output signals
22.4.13 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV SEMOD173197-1 v2
22.4.13.1 Functionality GUID-92ECE152-892C-4214-95DE-B92718689434 v3
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the IEC
61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus position
indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can also be used to
exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values between IEDs.
Outputs APPx_OP and APPx_CL are timestamped.

Technical manual
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^SRCRESREQ ^RESGRANT
^SRCRESGR ÂPP1_OP
^SRCAPP1 ÂPP1_CL
^SRCAPP2 APP1VAL
^SRCAPP3 ÂPP2_OP
^SRCAPP4 ÂPP2_CL
^SRCAPP5 APP2VAL
^SRCAPP6 ÂPP3_OP
^SRCAPP7 ÂPP3_CL
^SRCAPP8 APP3VAL
^SRCAPP9 ÂPP4_OP
^SRCAPP10 ÂPP4_CL
^SRCAPP11 APP4VAL
^SRCAPP12 ÂPP5_OP
^SRCAPP13 ÂPP5_CL
^SRCAPP14 APP5VAL
^SRCAPP15 ÂPP6_OP
ÂPP6_CL
APP6VAL
ÂPP7_OP
ÂPP7_CL
APP7VAL
ÂPP8_OP
ÂPP8_CL
APP8VAL
ÂPP9_OP
ÂPP9_CL
APP9VAL
ÂPP10_OP
ÂPP10_CL
APP10VAL
ÂPP11_OP
ÂPP11_CL
APP11VAL
ÂPP12_OP
ÂPP12_CL
APP12VAL
ÂPP13_OP
ÂPP13_CL
APP13VAL
ÂPP14_OP
ÂPP14_CL
APP14VAL
ÂPP15_OP
ÂPP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 512: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block
22.4.13.3 Signals SEMOD173205-1 v2

Technical manual
Table 859: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

SRCRESREQ BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation request
SRCRESGR BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation granted
SRCAPP1 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 1 position
Table 860: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid

Technical manual

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
Table 861: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.13.5 Operation principle GUID-7275CFBA-F1FE-496A-A9A1-724139DB2081 v2
The APPxVAL output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when at least one of the subscribed GOOSE datasets is
not received at the Function Block.

Technical manual

error
with q= Normal
with q= Test
At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by
means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled) to receive any data. Only those outputs whose source input
is linked/connected will be updated.
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the APPxVAL output will be HIGH. If
DATA then the APPxVAL output will be LOW.

Technical manual
22.4.14 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV SEMOD173158-1 v3
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ÔUT1
^SRCOUT1 DVALID1
^SRCOUT2 ÔUT2
^SRCOUT3 DVALID2
^SRCOUT4 ÔUT3
^SRCOUT5 DVALID3
^SRCOUT6 ÔUT4
^SRCOUT7 DVALID4
^SRCOUT8 ÔUT5
^SRCOUT9 DVALID5
^SRCOUT10 ÔUT6
^SRCOUT11 DVALID6
^SRCOUT12 ÔUT7
^SRCOUT13 DVALID7
^SRCOUT14 ÔUT8
^SRCOUT15 DVALID8
^SRCOUT16 ÔUT9
DVALID9
ÔUT10
DVALID10
ÔUT11
DVALID11
ÔUT12
DVALID12
ÔUT13
DVALID13
ÔUT14
DVALID14
ÔUT15
DVALID15
ÔUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 513: GOOSEBINRCV function block
22.4.14.2 Signals SEMOD173166-1 v2
Table 862: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

SRCOUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 1

Technical manual

Table 863: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1

Technical manual

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
Table 864: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.14.4 Operation principle GUID-950F2501-9183-43C0-A193-7D15124F6CCE v2
The DVALIDx output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

error
with q= Normal
with q= Test
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DVALIDx output will be HIGH. If
DATA then the DVALIDx output will be LOW.

Technical manual
22.4.15 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device

GOOSEXLNRCV
GUID-4B23D0CF-F298-4BBC-B833-1B8CC98D1604 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEXLNRCV - -
switching device
22.4.15.2 Functionality GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1
The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect information from another device’s XCBR/
XSWI logical node sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN Receive component
includes 12 different outputs (and their respective channel valid bits) with defined names to ease the
61850 mapping of the GOOSE signals in the configuration process.
22.4.15.3 Function block GUID-690FD935-5344-4D6F-AB94-F9FD5FD35B23 v1
GOOSEXLNRCV
BLOCK ^BEH
^SRCBEH BEH_VALID
^SRCLOC ^LOC
^SRCBLKOPN LOC_VALID
^SRCBLKCLS ^BLKOPN
^SRCPOS BLKOPN_VALID
^SRCOPCNT ^BLKCLS
^SRCBLK BLKCLS_VALID
^SRCSTSELD ^POSVAL
^SRCOPRCVD POSVAL_VALID
^SRCOPOK ÔPCNT
^SRCEEHLT OPCNT_VALID
^SRCOPCAP ^BLK
BLK_VALID
^STSELD
STSELD_VALID
ÔPRCVD
OPRCVD_VALID
ÔPOK
OPOK_VALID
ÊEHEALTH
EEHEALTH_VALID
ÔPCAP
OPCAP_VALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 514: GOOSEXLNRCV function block
22.4.15.4 Signals

Technical manual
Table 865: GOOSEXLNRCV Input signals

SRCBEH INTEGER 0 Source to behaviour output
SRCLOC BOOLEAN 0 Source to local control behaviour output
SRCBLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Source to block opening
SRCBLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Source to block closing
SRCPOS INTEGER 0 Source to switch position
SRCOPCNT INTEGER 0 Source to operation counter
SRCBLK BOOLEAN 0 Source to dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
SRCSTSELD BOOLEAN 0 Source to the controllable data is in the status "selected”
SRCOPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable data object
received
SRCOPOK BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable data object
accepted
SRCEEHLT INTEGER 0 Source to external equipment health
SRCOPCAP INTEGER 0 Source to operating capability
Table 866: GOOSEXLNRCV Output signals

BEH INTEGER Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Beh output
LOC BOOLEAN Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Loc output
BLKOPN BOOLEAN Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkOpn output
BLKCLS BOOLEAN Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkCls output
POSVAL INTEGER Switch position
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on PosVal output
OPCNT INTEGER Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCnt output
BLK BOOLEAN Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Blk output
STSELD BOOLEAN The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on stSeld output
OPRCVD BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opRcvd output
OPOK BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opOk output
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on EEHealth output

Technical manual

OPCAP INTEGER Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCap output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid
22.4.15.5 Settings
Table 867: GOOSEXLNRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
22.4.15.6 Operation principle GUID-903B5E3F-DC92-4D0A-B4D5-59DD01F36458 v1
The xxx_VALID outputs will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the xxx_VALID output will be HIGH. If
DATA then the xxx_VALID output will be LOW.
22.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol GUID-6814F62B-8D99-4679-A11E-68048D1AC424 v2
22.5.1 Introduction GUID-FE2AC08A-2E04-4E73-8CA4-905522B1026A v2
The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to communicate
with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as Merging Units (MU).
The rear access points are used for the communication.
22.5.2 Function block GUID-2581F3AD-7487-4C80-BDF3-9C6EC9F2E43C v3
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear
only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU) are included in the configuration with
the Ethernet configuration tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired
virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

Technical manual
22.5.3 Signals
22.5.3.1 Output signals SEMOD166622-1 v1
GUID-942C81AD-22D9-438F-95FA-1972BA2BE2E5 v1
The output signals are the same for all MUs so only the table for MU1_HW is included in this manual.
Table 868: MU1_HW Output signals

I1 STRING Analogue input I1
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, data not received, transmission errors, time-sync
issues or inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN High when IED clock is not within configured accuracy or time
domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Fatal error or recovery state after fatal error. High if any
subscribed channel has bad quality or TEST while IED not in test
mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN MU not synced or MU clock not synced to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN Quality of one or more subscribed analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN MU delivers simulated data accepted by IED
I1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I1
U1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U1

Technical manual
Table 869: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)


Table 870: MU1_HW Monitored data

MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, data not received,
1=Error transmission errors, time-sync issues or
inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - High when IED clock is not within
1=Error configured accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Fatal error or recovery state after fatal
0=No error. High if any subscribed channel has
bad quality or TEST while IED not in test
mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU not synced or MU clock not synced
1=Error to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Quality of one or more subscribed
0=No analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU delivers simulated data accepted by
0=No IED
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for I1
0=No
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output for I1
0=No
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output for I1
0=No
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication output for I1
0=No
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication output for I1
0=No
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication output for I1
0=No
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked indication output for I1
0=No
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication output for I1
0=No
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication output for I1
0=No

Technical manual

Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication output for I1
0=No
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for I1
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for U1
0=No
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output for U1
0=No
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output for U1
0=No
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication output for U1
0=No
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication output for U1
0=No

Technical manual

OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication output for U1
0=No
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked indication output for U1
0=No
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication output for U1
0=No
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication output for U1
0=No
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication output for U1
0=No
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for U1
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable

Technical manual
22.5.6 Operation principle GUID-A1D31CDA-1FE2-4BC0-A472-1B35E73CA1F2 v6
The merging units (MUs) are situated close to the primary equipment, like circuit breakers, isolators,
etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from measuring transformers, non-
conventional transducers or both. The gathered data are then transmitted to subscribers over the
process bus, utilizing the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the rear access points. For the user,
the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input module and is engineered in the very same
way.
IED
Application
Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI
MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
1PPS
TRM module
Access Point
110 V 1A 1A
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Merging 1PPS Merging 1PPS

Unit Unit
Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor
Conventional VT
IEC080000723enOriginal.vsd
Figure 515: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and conventional
CT/VT
The function has the following alarm signals:
• MUDATA:

Technical manual
• Ok[0] indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit and are
accepted.
• ERROR[1] indicates that the merging unit samples are generated by internal substitution.
• SYNCH:
• OK[0] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block, and the time quality of the hardware is within the set
value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
• when SyncLostMode = BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is within
the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [AND] IED receives global
common time[UTC] from any of the FineSyncSource like IRIG-B, PTP or GPS.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock
• ERROR[1] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block, and the time quality of the hardware is not within the
set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
• when SyncLostMode = BlockonLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is not
within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [OR] IED doesn't
receive global common time[UTC] from any of the FineSyncSource like IRIG-B,
PTP or GPS.
• SMPLLOST:
• NO[0] indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit and are
accepted
• YES[1] indicates
• when merging unit data are generated by internal substitution
• when one/more channel's Quality is not good
• when merging unit is in Testmode/detailed quality=Test, IED is not in test mode
• MUSYNCH:
• OK[0] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is
within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [AND] merging unit is
time synchronized [smpSynch flag in datastream is not equal to 0] [AND] the
hardware time matches the time in the datastream within 10 ms.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock, the merging unit samples are received
• ERROR[1] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is
not within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [OR] merging unit
is not time synchronized [smpSynch flag in datastream is equal to 0] [OR] the
hardware time is out of 10 ms from the time in the datastream.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock, the merging unit samples are not received
• TESTMODE:
• NO[0] indicates that No merging unit analog channels are in testmode
• YES[1] indicates that one/more subscribed channels are in testmode
• SIMMODE:
• NO[0] indicates that normal data is received and are accepted
• YES[1] indicates that the received datastream is tagged as simulated and are accepted
Internal substitution can happen during the following conditions:
1. Transient block after receive error (sample loss)

2. Transient block after Simulated/Real Sample value stream transition
3. Transient block after recovery from substitution
4. No data from merging unit

Technical manual
5. Bad data from merging unit

6. Merging unit report lost sync[smpSynch=0] and SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC
7. IED time quality of hardware is not good [not within set value SyncAccLevel] and SyncLostMode
= Block/BlockOnLostUTC
8. Merging unit channel reported with quality other than good
9. Merging unit channel/channels is/are in testmode and the IED is not in testmode
During Internal substitution, the functions connected to that particular merging unit will be blocked
and the merging unit channel's analog values will be forced to 0 with quality as Invalid, Substituted,
Failure.
Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the time quality is
worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is individually specified per time source (PPS,
IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section "Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN"
22.5.6.1 Conditional blocking GUID-D129543D-82BE-4F8A-9333-4C3470693F98 v1
Introduction GUID-9D9A73FA-505E-4936-BB55-E7D86AB8023B v1
Conditional blocking is a concept in the 670 series which improves resilience against errors in
network communication, time synchronization, and hardware. This is important for digital substations
where analogue data (some or even all) is sourced from the IEC61850 9-2 MUs (merging units).
Conditional blocking functionality GUID-C12A5162-7F49-4FF0-98AA-BA362BC48070 v1

The overall idea with conditional blocking is to avoid blocking of the parts of an IED which can safely
continue the operation in presence of certain error conditions (listed below).
To make conditional blocking work as intended, there are configuration rules that need to be
followed. If an incorrect configuration is deployed, the IED functionality may be blocked inadvertently,
thereby reducing the availability of protection functions. An incorrect configuration also increases the
sensitivity to single point failures.
With a proper configuration, on the other hand, only functions directly affected by an error will be
blocked, while other functions will continue to operate.
Implementation GUID-D9880430-E6D6-42EE-B315-7E9279BEC913 v1
In Figure 516, two functions are shown, F1 and F2, where F1 takes data only from MU1, while F2
takes data from both MU1 and MU2.
3Ph Group
MU1 SMAI F1
3Ph Group
MU2 SMAI F2
Figure 516: Implementation schematic

When F1 and F2 start-up, each function analyzes the analogue data which is driving it. This
information is used to determine how the function should be blocked during error conditions
separately.

Technical manual
Function F1 is independent of MU2, if MU2 is lost, this will not affect F1. It will execute its algorithms
as long as data from MU1 is available. Note that F1 will operate even with poor time synchronization.
This is possible because F1 only depends on data from a single MU.
Function F2 on the other hand, depends on the correct information and time synchronized data being
available from both MU1 and MU2. If any of the MUs fail, or if any of them indicates the loss of time
synchronization, F2 will be blocked.
Examples of error conditions GUID-AFB2C078-59A8-4DFD-AD6C-B458695E4FA5 v1

This section contains examples of error conditions that can trigger function blocking.
• Time synchronization is not available/correctly configured in the IED
• Time synchronization quality is poor
• Analogue MU data indicates bad time quality in the MU
• Analogue MU data indicates data error in the MU
• Analogue MU data is unavailable (for example, if a connection to an IEC 9-2 MU is lost)
• Hardware errors (for example, network switches and fibers, station clock failures etc.)
Depending on how the IED is configured, these kinds of errors will have a bigger or smaller impact
on how much of the IED functionality that is blocked.
Incorrect configuration GUID-7857CC4E-A7DF-4B85-BF4E-9470A02903E5 v1

As an example, consider an instance of OC4PTOC, which has four steps of functionality. In Figure
517, it is configured with two 3-phase groups, one for current and one for voltage. The analogue data
comes from two different MUs.
Figure 517: Incorrect configuration

Assume, that the user has configured one step in the OC4PTOC as non-directional, and another step
as directional. Because the analogue data comes from two different MUs, the user should
understand that the data from both MUs must be available and both must indicate that they are time
synchronized, for the directional step to operate.

Technical manual
Due to the way conditional blocking works, if one or both of the MUs indicate poor time
synchronization, then the entire function will be blocked. Unfortunately, in this example, this will also
block the non-directional over-current step, although it would be perfectly capable of operating
without time synchronization.
This shows the incorrect configuration from a conditional blocking perspective.
Correct configuration GUID-AA803422-5774-4BDE-B84E-2FCF465EE4D0 v1

In Figure 518, the configuration is changed so the user have two instances of the function, where the
non-directional over-current instance uses only currents from one MU, while the directional over-
current instance uses current and voltage from both the MUs.
Figure 518: Correct configuration

If the time synchronization is lost, or if there is an error in the voltage modules of the MU, or if the
voltage MU is lost altogether, the non-directional instance will still be operative.
This is an example of how the user needs to configure the IED to ensure conditional blocking works
as intended.
Another way to avoid conditional blocking is to take currents as well as voltages from the same MU.
Thus, the usage of multiple SMAIs in itself is not a trigger of conditional blocking, but the usage of
multiple MUs can be. This also implies that hardware-wise, one should try to not divide a 3-phase
group of currents and voltages over multiple MUs, when this is possible (this is really a consideration
for the substation hardware setup).
Functions with multiple internal steps GUID-D067CD74-43CD-480E-9A50-4F978A8DF5D8 v2

The following functions have internal steps/functions, which also can be configured incorrectly similar
to the above description.
NS4PTOC, OC4PTOC, EF4PTOC
• Each step can be set differently with respect to directionality
SDEPSDE
• Directional overcurrent, non-directional residual overcurrent, and residual overvoltage
VRPVOC
• Voltage restrained overcurrent, undervoltage

Technical manual
CVGAPC
• Each step can be set differently with respect to directionality: Overcurrent1, Overcurrent2,
Undercurrent1, Undercurrent2, Overvoltage1, Overvoltage2, Undervoltage1, Undervoltage2
Time synchronization GUID-5DD58144-76EA-4019-A8EA-354E263810FB v2

A correct configuration also has to consider how the time synchronization is set up.
To begin with, a suitable station clock must be available. Hitachi Power grids recommends that PTP
is used as a time synchronization protocol.
Further, it is recommended that at least two station clocks are connected to the substation network.
This is to avoid the single point of failure. If one clock encounters an error, or loses its connection to
the network, the other clock will seamlessly take over the time synchronization task, and thus avoid
blocking due to lost time synchronization.
It is also required that PTP is active on all ports that send or receive sampled data on all devices, to
secure that the system time is common for all devices.
Synchronization via PTP GUID-F7D9C58F-CB87-4D2A-BC64-2B34D41557A4 v1

While synchronizing a station via PTP (IEC61850-9-3), the time propagates from the clock through
the system to each IED.
This means that during a transition, for example, when a clock regains time from the GPS system
after drifting for some time, there can be different times in different parts of a substation.
Refer the following figure for a simple system:
GMC
MU2
REX 670
MU1 MU3
SAM600 - TS CT VT
Figure 519: Synchronization via PTP
If the station clock is out of order for some time and then regains good synch from, for example, the
satellite system, the correct time will reach MU2 and the 670 first. Then, it will propagate to MU1 and

Technical manual
MU3 through the boundary clock in the 670. This means, that for a short duration, MU1 and MU2 will
both appear to be synchronized, but they will in practice have different times. If the protection is not
blocked during this condition, user will get a false trip.
To fix this problem, the synch-lost signal from the merging units is prolonged for 16 seconds in the
670. The synch-lost signal is used for conditional blocking of protections which use data from the
TRM of the IED in combination with a merging unit. The maximum time frame specified by
IEC61850-9-3 to propagate the time and resynchronize is 16 seconds.
The same time frame applies for the internal synchronization of the 670. In the scenario where PTP
is used in combination with 9-2, the synch-lost signal is also prolonged with 16 seconds. Again, this
delay is needed to ensure that the correct time has propagated to all units before blocked functions
are released for operation.
22.5.6.2 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP GUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1
The quality expander component is used to display the detailed quality of an IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
analog channel. The component expands the channel quality output of a Merging Unit analog
channel received in the IED as per the IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component can be used during
the ACT monitoring to get the particular channel quality of the Merging Unit.
The expanded quality bits are visible on the outputs as per IEC 61850-7-3 standard. When written to
IED, the configuration will show the expanded form of the respective MU channel quality information
during the online monitoring in the ACT.
The validity status of the quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Good, Invalid,
Reserved and Questionable (QUEST) outputs.
The detailed quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Overflow, Out of Range
(OUTRANGE), Bad reference (BADREF), Oscillatory (OSC), Failure, old data, inconsistent
(INCONS) and inaccurate (INACC) outputs.
The source status of the quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Process and
Substituted (SUBST) outputs.
The other quality statuses (Test, Operator Blocked (OPBLKD) and Derived) are shown as they are.
The derived quality is the extension to IEC 61850-7-3. If the derived bit is set to 1, it indicates that
there is no physical sensor within the system to determine the value, but the value is derived from a
combination of values from other physical sensors. Typically, I4 or U4 are derived if they are
calculated as the sum of the three phase quantities.
The configured MU channel quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is available on LHMI. This can be
viewed under Main Menu /Diagnostics /Merging units /MUX:XXXX/XX Quality .
Figure 520: Configured MU channel quality in LHMI

Technical manual
SEMOD172236-2 v3
Table 871: IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Functions Value
Protocol IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
22.6 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the control
center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon

Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are
characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer
communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low
support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The
protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the
International Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other
addresses, refer to section Related documents.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
22.6.2 Settings IP14441-1 v2
Table 872: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
Table 873: ADE Non group settings (basic)

On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST
M15083-3 v3
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and
control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25
Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can

Technical manual
communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255
subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values,
status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The
higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data
when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to
deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit
messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status
information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of
information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct
communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master implementations. The
LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices
using the same standard of network variables.
Introduction of LON protocol M15083-8 v2

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, User’s manual
and Technical description.
LON protocol M15083-11 v1
Configuration of LON M15083-13 v4

LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions
required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool
program.
Activate LON Communication M15083-16 v3

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu /Configuration /
Communication /Station communication / LON /HORZCOMM:1 , where Operation must be set to
ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT M15083-19 v4

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from
the Hitachi Power grids LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package version 1p2
r04.
LON net address M15083-22 v3

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address
consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating
one device for each IED.
Vertical communication M15083-25 v1

Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and
control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices
as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This
communication is implemented using explicit messages.
Events and indications M15083-28 v3

Events are sent to the monitoring devices using explicit messages (message code 44H) with
unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the IED, one
message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.
Binary events M15083-31 v6

Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the IEDs. The EVENT
function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 874 shows the LON addresses to the first
input on the EVENT function blocks. Addresses to the other inputs on the EVENT function block are

Technical manual
consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on EVENT:17 function block has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications, only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used for
other types of events at the same EVENT block.
Three EVENT function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) are available
as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining EVENT function blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 run with a loop
time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run with a loop time of 100 ms. The EVENT blocks are
used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions
and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16, and 24 mA input service values
function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the IEDs.
The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 874. The formula for
calculating the LON address is:
LON Address = (EVBlkNr-1)×16 + signalNr +1023
For instance, the first pin at Event block number 2 has the address: (2-1)×16 +1 +1023 = 1040
Table 874: LON adresses for EVENT functions
Function block First LON address in

function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328
Event masks M15083-78 v4

Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under:
Settings /IED settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via parameter setting tool (PST) as
follows:

Technical manual
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria for integers has
no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
Single indication M15083-123 v3

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on
change, no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block. Other Boolean signals, for
example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the EVENT function
block.
Double indications M15083-126 v3

Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block.
• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value M15083-135 v4

All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected function if
there is a limit supervised signal. Otherwise it is taken from the EVENT function block.
Command handling M15083-80 v4

Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus
message is an explicit LON message which contains an ASCII character message following the
coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message
code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using
the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a
time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, that is the function
blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24, the SPA addresses are according to
table 875.
SEMOD116913-2 v2
Table 875: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
SELClose+ILO=11, before operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command

Technical manual

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
ExcClose+ILO=11, before operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command

Technical manual

block address

Technical manual

block address
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before
Enable
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted

Technical manual

block address
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
enable command

Technical manual

block address
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command

Technical manual

block address
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Horizontal communication M15083-86 v4

Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series IEDs.Network variables
are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs The supported network variable type
is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16
Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the information to one
value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple
command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With horizontal communication, the input
BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. These function blocks are connected using the LON
network tool (LNT). The tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables M15083-92 v3

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON network tool
(LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for example,
interlocking between two IEDs.

Technical manual
LON
BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
Figure 521: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function

blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window
select Connections / NVConnections / New .
en05000719.vsd
Figure 522: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the drag-and-drop
method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the
bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can perform it by selecting the
traditional menu, Configuration / Download .

Technical manual
en05000720.vsd
Figure 523: The download configuration window in LNT
Communication ports M15083-97 v6

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital
conversion module (ADM), and it is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP communication.
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C/D are for LON
protocol.
Figure 524: Rear view of 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Technical manual
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connectors for plastic fiber cables and ST/bayonet
connectors for glass fiber cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type of connector or a
combination of both connectors. This is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fiber to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX
transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of
fiber cables.
M11927-1 v2
Table 876: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
22.7 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other
addresses, refer to section Related documents.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
22.7.2 Design M11877-3 v7
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the following
equipment:
• Optical fibers
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC
SPA cannot be accessed via PCM600.
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-
connection cable.
SPA can be accessed via LHMI front only when using the Field Service Tool Access
(FSTACCS).

Technical manual
22.7.3 Settings IP14403-1 v2
Table 877: SPA Non group settings (basic)

SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
Table 878: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
M11880-3 v2
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even
parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on recommended
baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of
ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol M11880-7 v2

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the
master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request
required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be
performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in
write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message
containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol M11880-10 v5

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED with
the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in table 879.
Table 879: SPA addresses for the MIM function
Function block SPA address

MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527

Technical manual

MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652

Technical manual

MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in table 880.

Technical manual
Table 880: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL

PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877
I/O modules M11880-16 v4

To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used,
that is, the addresses for BI1 – BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related documents in
Product Guide.
M11880-35 v1
Single command, 16 signals M11880-51 v5

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation
system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local
HMI can also be used.
The single command, 16 signals function consists of four function blocks: SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:4 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from
the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function block, SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the
first one. For example, output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:4 are
found in table 881.
Table 881: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511

Technical manual
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529

Technical manual
Figure 525 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the
command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control. The SPA
addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown in table 881.
SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ÔUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ÔUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ÔUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ÔUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ÔUT5 AND PULSETIMER
ÔUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
ÔUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ÔUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ÔUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ÔUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT16
SYNCH OK
Figure 525: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit
breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or setable pulse
length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main Menu /Settings / IED
Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Event function EVENT M11880-82 v6

The Event function (EVENT) sends time-tagged events to the station level (for example, operator
workplace) over the station bus. On the station level, events are presented in an event list. Events
can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All the internal signals
are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged

Technical manual
directly on each I/O module. Events are produced according to a set of event masks. These masks
are treated commonly for both LON and SPA channels.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED: Terminal Restarted
(0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The status and event codes for the EVENT function are found in Table 882.
Table 882: Status and event codes
Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed Open Undefined
event ate 00 10 01 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -
EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..
These values are only applicable if the event mask is masked ≠ OFF.
Connection of signals as events M11880-311 v5

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and sent as events to the station level
over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus), are connected to the EVENT function block as specified in Figure
526.

Technical manual
EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ÎNPUT1
PSTO ÎNPUT2
UL12RANG ÎNPUT3
UL23RANG ÎNPUT4
UL31RANG ÎNPUT5
3I0RANG ÎNPUT6
3U0RANG ÎNPUT7
FALSE ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 526: Connection of protection signals for event handling
22.7.4.1 Communication ports M11880-315 v7
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital
conversion module (ADM). It is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP communication.
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C/D are for LON
protocol.
Figure 527: Rear view of 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Technical manual
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connector for plastic fiber cables and ST/bayonet
connector for glass fiber cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or connector or with a
combination of both types of connectors. This is identified with a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fiber to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX
transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of
fiber cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application manual and
Commissioning manual respectively.
M11901-1 v2
Table 883: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
22.8 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2
22.8.1 Introduction M11910-3 v3
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates with
a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC
60870-5-103 communication messages.
22.8.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
22.8.2.1 Functionality GUID-557FB587-9127-4D99-B2C6-16445E06F220 v3
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) are generated.
• 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P, Q, F are optional but
there can be no holes.
• 3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
• 3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
• 3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
• 3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).
Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

Technical manual
GUID-3E1AB624-1B68-4018-B1BA-BC2C811F8F74 v1
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -
22.8.2.3 Function block GUID-EC5F1C83-0F47-4548-86E3-FFE056571241 v2
I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
Figure 528: I103MEAS function block
22.8.2.4 Signals
Table 884: I103MEAS Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

Technical manual
22.8.2.5 Settings
Table 885: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 15.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency
22.8.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR
22.8.3.1 Functionality GUID-FC9ED4BD-F11C-4BDA-8CDB-3ACF00931D3A v1
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
Information number parameter for each block.
GUID-A9E21066-354B-453D-8D9B-E86EE31CF5F9 v1

Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103
22.8.3.3 Function block GUID-C234101E-F9B9-4DB0-874C-C51BB50588CB v1
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
Figure 529: I103MEASUSR function block

Technical manual
22.8.3.4 Signals
Table 886: I103MEASUSR Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
22.8.3.5 Settings
Table 887: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
10000000000.00 input 2
10000000000.00 input 3
10000000000.00 input 4
10000000000.00 input 5
10000000000.00 input 6
10000000000.00 input 7
10000000000.00 input 8
10000000000.00 input 9
22.8.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
22.8.4.1 Functionality GUID-7A132276-35A2-402C-9722-6259D65998F5 v1
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction.
This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is defined
for each output signal.

Technical manual
GUID-7B066282-79D7-480B-BEDE-3C04F0FCBF05 v1

Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103
22.8.4.3 Function block GUID-FAC5A3DF-73CB-4A39-A213-5C21ACA05756 v1
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
Figure 530: I103AR function block
22.8.4.4 Signals
Table 888: I103AR Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked
22.8.4.5 Settings
Table 889: I103AR Non group settings (basic)

22.8.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF GUID-F23B392E-B55D-4BC3-A0A6-B7992D551092 v1
22.8.5.1 Functionality GUID-13F90E95-7C8C-4DCB-A9D8-2489B66DB81A v2
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction. This
block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is defined for
each output signal.
GUID-033731B7-1B71-4CCC-8356-1C03CBCB23FA v1

Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103

Technical manual
22.8.5.3 Function block GUID-25B47484-2976-4063-BD81-AE02D03B08B0 v1
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
Figure 531: I103EF function block
22.8.5.4 Signals
Table 890: I103EF Input signals

51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
22.8.5.5 Settings
Table 891: I103EF Non group settings (basic)

22.8.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT
22.8.6.1 Functionality GUID-6D52F442-1592-4BA7-919C-0CD79046CAE5 v1
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the function block is
specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent signal present in
the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore
must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is triggering the
Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
GUID-55593EC4-7AED-47A0-8311-DB22D013A193 v1

Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103

Technical manual
22.8.6.3 Function block GUID-F0ED13B8-6B82-4CA7-8F22-C200C33EBB7E v2
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
83_ZONE6
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
Figure 532: I103FLTPROT function block
22.8.6.4 Signals
Table 892: I103FLTPROT Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted

Technical manual

77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
22.8.6.5 Settings
Table 893: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)

22.8.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
22.8.7.1 Functionality GUID-52AC7D0F-33C5-46FC-983E-5CB4B3517D88 v1
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block uses parameter
as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each input signal.
GUID-5EEBE11C-C8E3-4A8A-814F-840E137DB5B5 v1

IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

Technical manual
22.8.7.3 Function block GUID-421D5C37-27A5-476A-A7D9-40E70AFDFDC8 v1
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
Figure 533: I103IED function block
22.8.7.4 Signals
Table 894: I103IED Input signals

19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
22.8.7.5 Settings
Table 895: I103IED Non group settings (basic)

22.8.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
22.8.8.1 Functionality GUID-E7A28D8D-398E-437C-9B58-AE125BC38058 v1
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is
defined for each output signal.
GUID-C8113B08-3586-412C-A750-606159B1E97E v1

Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -

Technical manual
22.8.8.3 Function block GUID-69C2C974-2D64-4174-9F9A-15383C09050D v1
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
Figure 534: I103SUPERV function block
22.8.8.4 Signals
Table 896: I103SUPERV Input signals

32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm
22.8.8.5 Settings
Table 897: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)

22.8.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF
22.8.9.1 Functionality GUID-DADC9CE4-2E80-426C-A3B6-A8E8C7AC3CD4 v3
I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction. Each instance is
associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an Information Number (INF).
Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative time and how to respond to a GI request.
The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all connected
inputs. See Settings for details.

Technical manual
GUID-474FDF39-CEFC-4370-9393-13BE62159969 v2

Status for user defined signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103
22.8.9.3 Function block GUID-B8312E77-514D-4117-BB31-B9907755580C v1
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
RT_START
Figure 535: I103USRDEF function block
22.8.9.4 Signals
Table 898: I103USRDEF Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time
GUID-9E29DE39-EA74-4D62-A2BA-F8E31A3D8757 v2
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from which relative
time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the corresponding TypNo parameter is
set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit conform to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.

Technical manual
22.8.9.5 Settings
Table 899: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included

Technical manual

Included
Included
Included
GUID-86DE9DBA-BE2F-4CC9-B447-1D2D86849EFF v2
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with a FUN.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined INF.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres to the
TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2 (time-tagged
message with relative time) of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not. Refer to
the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
22.8.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD
22.8.10.1 Functionality GUID-973929FE-292B-42A5-ACF9-BC95E2B16AE1 v2
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output signals. The
signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
GUID-CFD43980-0791-40D1-9136-CF4CCC35549A v1

Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103
22.8.10.3 Function block GUID-C0680812-C488-4546-AA65-F590955DBF0C v1
I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
Figure 536: I103CMD function block
22.8.10.4 Signals
Table 900: I103CMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Technical manual
Table 901: I103CMD Output signals

16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection
22.8.10.5 Settings
Table 902: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

22.8.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
22.8.11.1 Functionality GUID-19AD44B2-21D6-4DB0-AD74-1578DA30C100 v5
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All outputs are
pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 400ms.
GUID-0D0B2477-1B0C-48F3-B047-CCF9C7A71856 v1

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -
22.8.11.3 Function block GUID-52D27CDA-8805-48FA-99BE-2E05A438B0C7 v1
I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
Figure 537: I103IEDCMD function block
22.8.11.4 Signals
Table 903: I103IEDCMD Input signals


Technical manual
Table 904: I103IEDCMD Output signals

19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
22.8.11.5 Settings
Table 905: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

22.8.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD
22.8.12.1 Functionality GUID-2989EAC8-20BE-46EE-93FE-C70188D0BC89 v1
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
Information number parameter for each output signal.
GUID-9D6D1636-36C6-4C4E-B157-2D827820DDC7 v1

Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103
22.8.12.3 Function block GUID-5EBEAED5-ABD9-4257-B879-DF7FD9F7805A v1
I103USRCMD
BLOCK ÔUTPUT1
ÔUTPUT2
ÔUTPUT3
ÔUTPUT4
ÔUTPUT5
ÔUTPUT6
ÔUTPUT7
ÔUTPUT8
Figure 538: I103USRCMD function block

Technical manual
22.8.12.4 Signals
Table 906: I103USRCMD Input signals

Table 907: I103USRCMD Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
22.8.12.5 Settings
Table 908: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
22.8.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD
22.8.13.1 Functionality GUID-729E9AFD-0468-4BBD-B54A-A6CDCC68A9B2 v3
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function has
two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double-point command
schemes.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF
outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output is pulsed with a
command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice

Technical manual
versa with command 1. Steady mode is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is
retained, and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.
GUID-1933A30C-5214-4116-8CD3-91BD975FACED v1

Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103
22.8.13.3 Function block GUID-6EC8453E-0D00-4720-95A6-156C41CA46BB v1
I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
Figure 539: I103GENCMD function block
22.8.13.4 Signals
Table 909: I103GENCMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
Table 910: I103GENCMD Output signals

CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON
22.8.13.5 Settings
Table 911: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)

PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)
22.8.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD
22.8.14.1 Functionality GUID-1E40B94D-B6A6-42F0-8757-A47B8A3FA3CD v8
I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets any
state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link. Additionally, it
listens for general interrogation (GI) requests and replies to those with a GI response message with
the current state of each connected input.

Technical manual
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However, the
intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position = Off.
See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information.
Input SELECT is a single-indication signal, and it is also GI enabled. State transitions to ON and OFF
are reported spontaneously.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
The I103POSCMD function is also equipped with three additional commands: Select, Operate and
Cancel. These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF+1, INF+2 and INF+3
respectively. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103 identifier that
associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in the IED.
GUID-ABF81C27-4605-4A15-9CF5-77FF82DE8747 v1

IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103
22.8.14.3 Function block GUID-3A31C1F2-1FB5-4DB0-A698-AD3F55738DB1 v1
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
Figure 540: I103POSCMD function block
22.8.14.4 Signals
Table 912: I103POSCMD Input signals

POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object
22.8.14.5 Settings
Table 913: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type

Technical manual
22.8.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMDV
22.8.15.1 Functionality GUID-CF04D9AC-40BE-46A3-A418-77204D2B0F27 v3
I103POSCMDV is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets any
state transition into commands sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link. Additionally, it listens
for general interrogation (GI) requests, and replies to those with a GI response message with the
current state of each connected input.
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However, the
intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position = Off.
See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function ignores GI requests and ceases all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
GUID-2249B679-03E4-43CC-B690-916246FE6A31 v1

IED direct commands with position for I103POSCMDV - -
IEC 60870-5-103
22.8.15.3 Function block GUID-031C0F49-BEBD-40FE-A33F-18F1D94BB4B0 v1
I103POSCMDV
BLOCK
POSITION
Figure 541: I103POSCMDV function block
22.8.15.4 Signals
Table 914: I103POSCMDV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
22.8.15.5 Settings
Table 915: I103POSCMDV Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type

Technical manual
22.8.16.1 General M11874-3 v5
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication

exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC
terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is
based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC
60870-5-103 communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 60870–5–103 protocol M11874-6 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of
protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation M11874-23 v4

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the protection and
control IED.
Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be considered to
ensure correct time stamping.
Commands in control direction M11874-27 v1

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD M11874-29 v6
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.

Technical manual
Table 916: I103IEDCMD supported indications
INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD M11874-53 v6

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 917: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications
INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD M11874-72 v6

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter
FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 918: I103USRCMD supported indications
INF 1) Description
1 Output signal 01
2 Output signal 02
3 Output signal 03
4 Output signal 04
5 Output signal 05
6 Output signal 06
7 Output signal 07
8 Output signal 08
1) User defined information number
Status M11874-107 v1
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED M11874-109 v7
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Technical manual
Information number is defined for each input signals.
Table 919: I103IED supported functions
INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF M11874-137 v7

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Information number is required for each input signal.
Table 920: I103USRDEF Information number default values
INF Description GI TYP COT

11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
1) * User defined information number
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV M11874-171 v7

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for output signals.
Table 921: I103SUPERV supported functions
INF Description TYP GI COT

32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9

Technical manual

38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF M11874-199 v8

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 922: I103EF supported indications
INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR M11874-363 v6

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 923: I103AR supported indications
INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103, I103FLTPROT GUID-E9DF9410-F570-4F85-9063-C76D1D4A0668 v6

Information number is defined for each input signal.
Table 924: I103FLTPROT supported functions

64 Start phase L1 2 Y 1,7,9
67 Start residual current IN 2 Y 1,7,9
68 Trip general 2 N 1,7
69 Trip phase L1 2 N 1,7

Technical manual

72 Back up trip I>> 2 N 1,7
73 Fault location in ohm 4 N 1,7
74 Forward/line 2 N 1,7
75 Reverse/busbar 2 N 1,7
76 Signal transmitted 2 N 1,7
77 Signal received 2 N 1,7
78 Zone 1 2 N 1,7
79 Zone 2 2 N 1,7
80 Zone 3 2 N 1,7
81 Zone 4 2 N 1,7
82 Zone 5 2 N 1,7
83 Zone 6 2 N 1,7
84 Start general 2 Y 1,7,9
85 Breaker failure 2 N 1,7
86 Trip measuring system phase L1 2 N 1,7
89 Trip measuring system neutral N 2 N 1,7
90 Over current trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
91 Over current trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
92 Earth-fault trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
93 Earth-fault trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
Measurands M11874-382 v2
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function,
for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS M11874-385 v8

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application Service Data
Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are
taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or
2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to
propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy.

Technical manual
Table 925: I103MEAS supported indications
INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency
Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR M11874-431 v5

Function type parameter for each block in private range.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
Table 926: I103MEASUSR supported indications
INF FUN GI TYP COT Description

*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is defined by
semantics of connected source.
<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.
Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

Technical manual
<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is, only Input1 and
Input2 will be transmitted.
Disturbance recordings M11874-467 v7

The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the
standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels
used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 128-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an
INFORMATION NUMBER.
M11874-629 v7
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported to the
master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A
successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master
again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent
to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever something has
happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for
example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a
disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the
information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault)
exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:
• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set
(hard coded) to:

Technical manual
TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is
a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN is equal to disturbance
number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection equipment
answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid
faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power
system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented).
NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
Interoperability, physical layer M11874-482 v4
Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 Yes
number of loads 32
Optical interface
glass fiber Yes
plastic fiber
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes
Interoperability, application layer M11874-524 v3
Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No

Technical manual
Supported
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command Yes
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
22.8.16.2 Communication ports M11874-626 v4
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and LON
communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and is placed assembled on the Numerical
module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables
(snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three
different types are available depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the
TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the
instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibers. The module is identified
with a number on the label on the module.
M11921-1 v4
Table 927: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

Technical manual
22.9 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3
GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals via the
interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary inputs. LON enables
these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16
binary outputs.
22.9.2 Design SEMOD119958-1 v1
22.9.2.1 General M14792-3 v3
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes: Steady
or Pulse.
• 1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
• 2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a duration of
exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary output. This means that no
connected function block may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of
the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.
SEMOD119976-5 v2
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
Figure 542: MULTICMDRCV function block

Technical manual
SEMOD120009-4 v2
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
Figure 543: MULTICMDSND function block
Table 928: MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Table 929: MULTICMDSND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1

Technical manual
Table 930: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid
Table 931: MULTICMDSND Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error
Table 932: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 933: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

Technical manual
There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8 ms cycle time)
while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary inputs, to which 16
independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the
receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the command block
of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60 instances of the MULTICMDRCV
where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV
has a supervision function, which sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not
receive any data within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).
22.10 Security events on protocols SECALARM
22.10.1 Security alarm SECALARM GUID-205B0024-DA06-4369-8707-5E1D2D035995 v2
22.10.1.1 Signals
Table 934: SECALARM Output signals

EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event
22.10.1.2 Settings
Table 935: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On
22.11 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG
22.11.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID-BED7C3D6-6BE3-4DAC-84B3-92239E819CC0 v2
ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured with IP
address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC 3164) or
Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

Technical manual
22.11.2 Settings
Table 936: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)

ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address

Technical manual
22.12 IEC61850SIM
22.12.1 IEC61850 simulation mode GUID-D31B9ECA-4C84-4CC7-BFE2-63FAFEA230EF v1
GUID-3B85BB88-0C56-45D4-B99F-62C7F2F208D2 v1
Table 937:

IEC61850 simulation mode IEC61850SIM - -
22.12.1.1 Functionality GUID-472D29F9-3C0C-43D5-8C3E-8F97BD8B1F52 v1
This function is indicates simulation mode status to external world. LPHD has simulation status
output but it is not available in ACT, so IEC61850SIM component is added and it is just a placeholder
for simulation status which is configurable in ACT. This simulation status is displayed in LHMI in this
navigation mode Main menu -> Test -> IEC61850 simulation -> IEC61850SIM:1 .
22.12.1.2 Function block GUID-14742551-70C1-4A80-805D-79195A51B4CE v1
IEC61850 SIM
SIM
IE C20000107-1-en.vsdx
22.12.1.3 Signals
Table 938: IEC61850SIM Output signals

SIM BOOLEAN Simulation mode indication
22.12.1.4 Settings
Table 939: IEC61850SIM Non group settings (basic)

AllowSimulation No - - No Allow simulated GOOSE values or
Yes simulated sampled measurand values
22.12.1.5 Monitored Data

Table 940: IEC61850SIM Monitored data

ALLOWSIM BOOLEAN 0=No - Status of AllowSimulation setting
1=Yes
SIM BOOLEAN 0=Inactive - Simulation mode indication
1=Active

Technical manual
1040
Section 23 Remote communication

23.1 Binary signal transfer IP12423-1 v2
M14849-1 v4

Binary signal transfer, BinSignRec1_1
- -
receive BinSignRec1_2
BSR2M_305
BSR2M_312
Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit BSR2M_322
- -
receive BSR2M_306
BSR2M_313
BSR2M_323
Binary signal transfer, BinSignTrans1_1
- -
transmit BinSignTrans1_2
BST2M_305
BST2M_312
Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit BST2M_322
- -
transmit BST2M_306
BST2M_313
BST2M_323
The remote end data communication is used for the transmission of analog values for line differential
protection or for the transmission of only binary signals between IEDs. The binary signals are freely
configurable and can thus be used for any purpose, such as communication scheme related signals,
transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data
Communication Module (LDCM). The LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit/s and 2Mbit/s
communication channels for duplex communication between the IEDs. In 2Mbit/s mode, each LDCM
can send and receive up to 9 analog and up to 192 binary signals simultaneously. In 64kbit/s mode,
the LDCM can be configured to work in either analog mode or binary mode. In analog mode, the IED
can send and receive up to 3 analog signals and up to 8 binary signals. In binary mode, the LDCM
can send and receive only binary data (up to 192 binary signals).
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range, medium range or long range LDCMs.
23.1.3 Signals
GUID-0918C53D-F755-4FA1-BB3C-F672AFC6A7D2 v1
Signals are available in the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) and as hardware channels in
the Application Configuration Tool (ACT).

Technical manual
Table 941: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals

COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMBLKDF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates diff protection is blocked
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
COMALM BOOLEAN Delayed alarm signal for communication failure
BLKDIFF BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted, diff protection is blocked
RED_ACT BOOLEAN Redundant channel active
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
GPSERROR BOOLEAN Problem with GPS synchronization in remote or local end


Technical manual

Table 944: LDCM2M_305 Output signals

ADINV1 BOOLEAN Analog data invalid in remote end
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1, 2M

Technical manual



Technical manual



Technical manual



Technical manual



Technical manual

23.1.4 Settings
Table 950: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)

ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM
Normal
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM
Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM
HighPower
ComAlarmDel 5 - 10000 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication alarm
signal is activated
ComAlrmResDel 5 - 10000 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication alarm
signal is reset

Technical manual

Normal
OutOfService
communication
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM
GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
Master
HighPower
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
signal is activated
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 0 - 500 ms 5 0 Time delay before switching in redundant
channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff

Normal
OutOfService
communication

Technical manual

GPS
Master
HighPower
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
Table 953: LDCM2M_305 Non group settings (basic)

Normal
OutOfService
communication
GPS
Master
HighPower

Technical manual

signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel
use echo synch.
LinkForwarded Off - - Off Link forwarded from other LDCM
LDCM305
LDCM306
LDCM312
LDCM313
LDCM322
LDCM323

Normal
OutOfService
communication
GPS
Master
HighPower
signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel
use echo synch.

Technical manual

LDCM305
LDCM306
LDCM312
LDCM313
LDCM322
LDCM323

Normal
OutOfService
communication
GPS
Master
HighPower
signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel
use echo synch.
LDCM305
LDCM306
LDCM312
LDCM313
LDCM322
LDCM323

Technical manual

Normal
OutOfService
communication
GPS
Master
HighPower
signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel
use echo synch.
LDCM305
LDCM306
LDCM312
LDCM313
LDCM322
LDCM323
RedundantCh Off - - Off Redundant channel enabled
On

Normal
OutOfService
communication
GPS

Technical manual

Master
HighPower
signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel
use echo synch.
LDCM305
LDCM306
LDCM312
LDCM313
LDCM322
LDCM323
On

Normal
OutOfService
communication
GPS
Master
HighPower
signal is activated
signal is reset
channel
redundant channel

Technical manual

use echo synch.
LDCM305
LDCM306
LDCM312
LDCM313
LDCM322
LDCM323
On

Table 959: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data

CommStatus INTEGER 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
COMFAIL BOOLEAN - - Detected error in the differential
communication
NoOfTXD REAL - % Percentage of theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD REAL - % Percentage of theroretical possible
received message
CorrectPktsHW INTEGER - - Nr of correct packets from HW
CrcErrors INTEGER - - Nr of CRC errors detected by HW
C37Errors INTEGER - - Nr of C37 errors detected by HW
Aborts INTEGER - - Nr of HDLC Abort detected by HW
LengthErrors INTEGER - - Nr of message length errors detected by
HW
YellowFlags INTEGER - - Nr of yellow Flags (remote error)
detected by HW
LinkLost INTEGER - - Nr of LinkLost errors detected by HW
SyncLost INTEGER - - Nr of SyncLost errors detected by HW
PPSPulses INTEGER - - Nr of PPS to HW
MissedPackets INTEGER - - Nr of packets lost calculated by BSW

Technical manual

MaxMissedPackets INTEGER - - Max nr of continously lost packets,
calculated by BSW
CorrectPacketsSW INTEGER - - Nr of correct packets from BSW
SeqNrErrors INTEGER - - Nr of sequence number errors
NrOfBlkDiff INTEGER - - Nr of packets that cause block of
diff.prot.
SentPackets INTEGER - - Nr of outgoing packets
SlipErrors INTEGER - - Nr of packets with bit-shift
FlagErrors INTEGER - - Nr of packets with incorrect HDLC
header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
BLKDIFF BOOLEAN - - Link error, values are substituted, diff
protection is blocked
RED_ACT BOOLEAN - - Redundant channel active
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW

Technical manual

diff.prot.
header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW

Technical manual

diff.prot.
header
Table 962: LDCM2M_305 Monitored data

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW

Technical manual

diff.prot.
header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW
diff.prot.

Technical manual

header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW
diff.prot.

Technical manual

header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW
diff.prot.

Technical manual

header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW
diff.prot.

Technical manual

header

1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
communication
transmitted message
received message
HW
detected by HW
calculated by BSW
diff.prot.

Technical manual

header
In 64 kbit mode, communication takes place in standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels.
Communication is two-way, and telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz) to
exchange information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94, and one telegram consists of
start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit
(which is associated with C37.94).
Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag
8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd
Figure 544: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are composed of 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal) as defined in the
HDLC standard. CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address
field in the HDLC frame is not used but, instead, separate addressing is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct
equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix up the messages. Each terminal
in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a
specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away
and not used in the evaluation.
If communication is used for line differential purposes, transmitted data consists of three currents,
clock information, trip, block and alarm signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any
purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values.
If communication is used exclusively for binary signals, full data capacity of the communication
channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.
In 2 Mbit mode, telegrams are still sent using C37.94 but the HDLC part is not used. Instead, all 12
channels of the C37.94 frame are used, and a telegram is sent whenever a sample is available. The
address field is used in the same way as in 64 kbit mode but the CRC field is 32 bits. It carries 9
analog samples and 192 general purpose binary signals.
ADINV
The ADINV(1-9) signals is used to indicate that the corresponding analog channel is invalid from the
source. If the local transmitter is connected to a MU channel and the data from the MU is lost or
invalid, this signal will be set and the remote receiver will mark this channel as invalid in the same
way it would a local MU channel. The actual invalidation of the analog data will be automatic and the
ADINV signal is there for monitoring only. Protection functions using this channel will be blocked in
the same manner as if they were connected to a MU with lost/invalid data.
The ADINV signal will also be set for a channel that is unconnected in the transmitter.

Technical manual
23.2 Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote

end, function block LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit GUID-B057C0DD-4EA8-4F6A-B57C-3395DFB38463 v2
GUID-3387F71E-020E-4556-AA55-8204340EFA47 v2

Transmission of analog data
LDCMTRN - -
from LDCM
LDCMTRN_2M_305
LDCMTRN_2M_306
Transmission of analog data LDCMTRN_2M_312
- -
from LDCM, 2Mbit LDCMTRN_2M_313
LDCMTRN_2M_322
LDCMTRN_2M_323
Receive binary status from LDCMRecBinStat1
- -
remote LDCM LDCMRecBinStat3
Receive binary status from LDCMRecBinStat2 - -
LDCM
LDCM2M_305
Receive binary status from
LDCM2M_312 - -
LDCM, 2Mbit
LDCM2M_322
LDCM2M_306
Receive binary status from
LDCM2M_313 - -
remote LDCM, 2Mbit
LDCM2M_323
GUID-05808CF6-34D6-4C76-A7A2-A26E5A96EC44 v2
LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
Figure 545: LDCMTRN function block

GUID-32BF2B86-4A00-42B5-9945-7C4604B1FAC1 v1
LDCMTRN_2M_30 5
^CH1
^CH2
^CH3
^CH4
^CH5
^CH6
^CH7
^CH8
^CH9
Figure 546: LDCMTRN_2M_305

Technical manual
LDCMTRN_2M_30 6
^CH1
^CH2
^CH3
^CH4
^CH5
^CH6
^CH7
^CH8
^CH9
LDCMTRN_2M_31 2
^CH1
^CH2
^CH3
^CH4
^CH5
^CH6
^CH7
^CH8
^CH9
LDCMTRN_2M_31 3
^CH1
^CH2
^CH3
^CH4
^CH5
^CH6
^CH7
^CH8
^CH9
LDCMTRN_2M_32 2
^CH1
^CH2
^CH3
^CH4
^CH5
^CH6
^CH7
^CH8
^CH9

Technical manual
LDCMTRN_2M_32 3
^CH1
^CH2
^CH3
^CH4
^CH5
^CH6
^CH7
^CH8
^CH9
23.2.3 Signals
Table 968: LDCMTRN Input signals

CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to remote end
Table 969: LDCMTRN_2M_305 Input signals

CH1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit analog group1 line L1 to remote end


Technical manual





Technical manual


Technical manual
1070
Security
Section 24 Security
24.1 Authority check ATHCHCK
GUID-FBEF319B-94E6-41FB-BB9F-D870E0425128 v2

Authority check ATHCHCK - -
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED
are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED and the
PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool.
Figure 552: PCM600 user management tool
24.1.3 Operation principle GUID-B555EDD0-BAF1-4F0E-9162-BDB3A3468CF2 v9
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED
and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 975.

Technical manual
Security
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing
particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
• R= Read
• W= Write
• - = No access rights
Table 975: Pre-defined user types
Access rights System Protection Design User

Guest Super User SPA Guest Operator Engineer Engineer Administrato
r
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings,
limit supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including interlock
trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(I/O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
File loading (database loading - R/W - - - R/W R/W
from XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping - R/W - - - R/W R/W
to XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management – FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management – SPA File Transfer)
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within
PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,
groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be created,
deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In that case, only the
user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See Cyber Security Deployment
Guidelines manual.

Technical manual
Security
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and passwords.

The maximum of characters in a password is 18.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to write
users, created in PCM600, to IED.
SEMOD176296-5 v10
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user
has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, introducing the
password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/Settings /
General Settings/HMI /Screen/Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when
only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 10 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the IED,
then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform an operation
that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user can change
the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After choosing the right
user name, the user must press the “E” key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the
key, the following character will show up: “$”. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are
case sensitive) choose OK and press the key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the
Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the local HMI
returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until
either the user makes it right or presses “Cancel”.
24.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED GUID-1A836989-5D89-4F3D-B3A2-3BABCDFFB440 v3
The user rights can be edited in the IED by using the PCM600 user tool.
One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 976 are created in the
IED, and when creating new users in the CAM server, the predefined roles from Table 977 can be
used.
At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the LHMI and as
Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central Account Management is
activated.
Table 976: Default users
User name User rights

SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users are
defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out disturbances
with third party FTP-client.

Technical manual
Security
Table 977: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8
User roles Role explanation User rights

VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform control
actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED and
also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can deploy
administrator certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights
This User role is vendor specific and not defined in

IEC 62351–8
Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.
The successful activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or remove all
local created users from PCM600.
Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the Central Account Management server
e.g. SDM600. The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the authentication system
even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:
• A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers operating in a hot
standby mode.
• If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica in the database
with selected users. This database is periodically updated with data from the server and used as
fallback if none of the servers are reachable.
• If there is no replication support in the CAM server, then there is a possibility to configure the
emergency account in the IED, which gets activated when CAM server is offline.
Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users that are not
assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are part of replication group
configured in the IED.
All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using secure
communication. Customers are required to generate and distribute certificates during the engineering
process of the substation. These certificates ensure mutual trust between IED and CAM server for
example SDM600.

Technical manual
Security
Table 978: Authority-related IED functions
Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing
ATHCHCK the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the
IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance
management menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN
For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN), Authority Status
(ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to chapter “Basic IED functions” in the
Technical Manual.
24.2 Authority management AUTHMAN
GUID-7925E6A3-301D-44A5-982F-167805EEA473 v1

Authority management AUTHMAN - -
24.2.2 AUTHMAN GUID-AF7EDB44-42AA-4D49-BFA0-DA6A9B43973E v1
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menu log on
time out.
24.2.3 Settings
Table 979: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

MaintMenuEnable Disable - - Enable Maintenance menu enable
Enable
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout
TLSMinVersion 0 - 255 - 1 0 Minimum version of TLS
TLSMaxVersion 0 - 255 - 1 0 Maximum version of TLS

Technical manual
Security
24.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS
GUID-C037D0B0-1AA0-4592-9293-92C7EDED3261 v1

FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -
24.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS GUID-9E64EA68-6FA9-4576-B5E9-92E3CC6AA7FD v5
The FTP client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with TLS. The
automatic negotiation mode is used by the client to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS.
It is only possible to access disturbance records from the IED if FTP without TLS encryption is used.
If clear text FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specific
account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password of this
user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.
Setting FTP to OFF on an access point does not switch off FTP as the service will still be used by
PCM600 and FST. So to completely switch off the port number 21 access the following parameters
must be set to OFF.
• FTP = OFF
• PCMAccess = OFF
• FSTAccess = OFF
24.3.3 Settings
Table 980: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)

SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
PasvPortStart 0 - 65515 - 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV
PasvPortEnd 0 - 65535 - 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV
24.4 Authority status ATHSTAT
GUID-79C63688-4D7D-4954-AC3C-B9484D084F6F v1

Authority status ATHSTAT - -
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.

Technical manual
Security
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
Figure 553: ATHSTAT function block
24.4.4 Signals
Table 981: ATHSTAT Output signals

USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
GUID-87CF079A-64C8-46AE-B7E4-A0B2EEAC92E9 v1
The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized Account
Management enabled.
24.4.5 Settings GUID-ECE18AA9-15CC-4522-AA31-78C4F0F052E4 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the
output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) is
activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT) function block for LON/
SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
24.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events,
generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an
internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.

Technical manual
Security
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
Figure 554: INTERRSIG function block
24.5.3 Signals IP9674-1 v2
Table 982: INTERRSIG Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block
M11401-3 v13
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the Event Viewer in
PCM600.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the self-supervision
function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics /Internal
events or Main menu/Diagnostics /IED status/General . The information from the self-supervision
function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600.

Technical manual
Security
Figure 555: IED general status in local HM

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum of 40
internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.
GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN-US
Figure 556: Self-supervision event list in local HMI

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of an output relay with potential free alarm
contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This contact is closed when the IED
either does not have auxiliary power, or when one or more error conditions are present in the IED (for
example harware error).
Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this function
block are sent as events via IEC 61850 to the station level of the control system. These signals can
also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as
conditions for other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal
Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the INTERRSIG function
block via two outputs TSYNCERR and RTCERR .
24.5.5.1 Internal signals M11401-173 v11
Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal status of the
IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal signals , available on local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General, can be divided into two groups.

Technical manual
Security
• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 983.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware configuration,
see table 984.
Table 983: Self-supervision's standard internal signals
Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
FAIL Internal Fail Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following
status internal signals are active; LMDERROR, WATCHDOG,
APPERROR, RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent
signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the following
Warning warning internal signals are active; RTCERROR,
status IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware error
Clock status clock with the real time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time
Synchronizat synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to
ion status make a time reset.
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do
Execution execution some actions with the application threads. The actions can
Error status be loading of settings or parameters for components,
changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of
application threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not
Error status succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup, for example
DNP3 DNP3 error DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
status configuration error during startup.
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable
Device Error error state.
status
APPERROR Runtime Runtime App This signal will be active if one or more of the application
Application Error threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects.
Error status The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING,
for example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal
changed changed Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal
groups changed Event list if any setting groups are changed.
changed
Table 984: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals
Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Supply
Module Error
status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module Error n = slot number
status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
status

Technical manual
Security
Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere MIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Input Module n = slot number
Error status
SOM SOM-Error Static Out SOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical/C NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
PU Module software error.
Error status
ADM ADM-Error A/D Module ADM31 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status
ADM ADM-Error A/D Module ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status
OEM OEM-Error Optical OEM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Ethernet n = slot number
Module Error
status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Differential n = slot number
Communicati
on Module
Error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM40
Module Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM41
Module Error
status
When settings are changed in the IED, the protection and control applications restart in order to take
effect of the changes. During restart, internal events get generated and Runtime App error will be
displayed. These events are only indications and will be for short duration during the restart.
IED will not be operational during applications restart.
24.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs M11401-136 v7
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with
low amplification and one with high amplification.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two A/D
converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm
will be given for A/D converter failure.

Technical manual
Security
M11963-1 v5
Table 985: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
24.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK GUID-E8A1C33A-DD65-42B5-BA13-CFAE40C2C9AD v2
24.6.1 Functionality GUID-00784FC0-B39D-462D-854B-AAF62626DD0A v3
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and
settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED configuration
changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
24.6.2 Function block GUID-15AA1D42-912E-4085-8166-33FDC327CEB5 v2
CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd
Figure 557: CHNGLCK function block
24.6.3 Signals GUID-1B253577-C81B-40E3-B406-1F6586DCE545 v2
Table 986: CHNGLCK Input signals

LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock
Table 987: CHNGLCK Output signals

ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override
24.6.4 Operation principle GUID-74581AA2-6EB4-4CFA-92DA-90FB89F9A62C v5
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not
involve reconfiguring of the IED:

Technical manual
Security
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated
Change lock functionality can be temporarily disabled/overridden using Maintenance menu.

Maintenance menu/Recovery Menu (Password Protected)/Turn off Change-lock (Temporary).
Turning off the change-lock will override the change lock function until the next reboot of the IED. In
this case, the change lock function cannot be activated, and the Override output will indicate that the
change-lock is overridden.
24.7 Denial of service DOS
24.7.1 Functionality GUID-407250CA-0076-41E1-AD2D-434077AC3F1D v5
The Denial of service functionality limits overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network
traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of
the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be
controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment
connected to the network.
24.7.2 Operation principle GUID-94340D4F-4D32-409B-BA1A-BA49A0C3F297 v6
The denial of service protection is designed to protect the IED from overload when exposed to high
amount of Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise
the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic is quota controlled, so that a too
heavy network load can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
The denial of service functionality in FRONSTATUS, SCHLCCH and RCHLCCH measures the IED
load from communication and, if necessary, limits it from jeopardizing the IED's control and protection
functionality. The function has the following outputs:
• RCHLCCH
• LinkAUp and LinkBUp indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports channel A and
B
• DOSLINKA and DOSLINKB indicates that DOS functionality is active on channel A and
channel B
• DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point
• SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS

Technical manual
Security
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

• DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point
The DOS functionality activates when the inbound traffic rate exceeds 3000 packets
per second.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Section 25 Basic IED functions

25.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for the
synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a control and a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station automation
system and in between sub-stations. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
MicroSCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.
The IED supports SNTPv4 (RFC2030).
SEMOD55141-5 v7
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
• System time
• Synchronization
The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving Time (DST)
for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The Synchronization group
relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources. As well as defining the
synchronization master and accuracy levels specifically for IEC 61850-9-2.
All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/Time .

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
MANUALPID-6638-SETTINGS v1
Table 988: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
SyncLostMode NoBlock - - NoBlock Behavior of dependent protection
Block functions when time synchronization
BlockOnLostUTC quality is inadequate
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
CurrentSyncSource 0 - 16 - 1 - Current synchronization source
SNTPSource 0 - 16 - 1 - The source of the SNTP time
SNTPMaster 0 - 16 - 1 - The IP-adress of the SNTP master
GPSNumberOfSats -1 - 12 - 1 0 GPS satellites used in calculation of time
PTPOwnId 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP own clock identity
Table 989: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 990: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

ServerIP-Add 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address
LocalPort 0 - 65535 - 1 49152 Port number in the IED to communicate
with the SNTP server
Table 991: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

DST Enable Off - - On Enables or disables the use of Daylight
On Saving Time
Table 992: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 993: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 994: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00
Table 995: PTP Non group settings (advanced)

Domain 0 - 255 - 1 0 0 = Default domain, 1-3 = Alternative
domain, 4-127 = User-defined domains,
128-255 = Reserved
Priority1 0 - 255 - 1 128 The clock with the lowest priority 1
becomes the reference clock (Grand
Master)
Priority2 0 - 255 - 1 128 If all the relevant values for selecting the
reference clock are the same for multiple
devices, the clock with the lowest priority
2 is selected as the reference clock
(Grand Master)
25.1.3 Description of SyncLostMode GUID-9BD77B8E-37F2-480F-89D6-9CE251403761 v1
If the time synchronization between the different sources of sampled values are lost, then the
protection function blocking behavior is different based on the parameter SyncLostMode.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
The parameter can have three different values:
• NoBlock
• Block
• BlockOnLostUTC
NoBlock
The protection functions are not blocked due to the lost time synchronization. This is mainly used
when all sample values are produced in one source.
Block
The block can be used if there are several data sources that can be synchronized to each other.
However, the relation to UTC time is not required.
As soon as the protection detects a change or uncertainty in time from a data source, the protections
are blocked. This is detected by the jump in sample count or when the data remains unsynchronized.
When a block occurs, the block stays for an extra blocking time after all the sources are
synchronized again, to secure that the time has propagated to the other sources.
Data stream 1
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Data stream 2
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Data stream 3
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Total protection blocking time
Figure 558: Principle blocking when SyncLostMode is set to block

For more information, refer to section Time synchronization
BlockOnLostUTC
When BlockOnLostUTC is selected, all the data must be synchronized to UTC, to avoid blocking of
the protection functions.
This cannot be used by the process bus sampled values, since IEC 61859-9-2 LE only contains the
information regarding the synchronized or unsynchronized data.
For example, the BlockOnLostUTC can be used for a phasor measurement unit where the data is
compared between different stations.
25.1.4.1 General concepts M11346-77 v1

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Time definitions M11346-80 v3

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is
intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time gained or lost by the
clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) GUID-E2B9E81C-5733-4521-B27F-BF33E05CCFB0 v10

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently from each other
(see Figure 559).
PTP(IEEE 1588)
External Off
synchronization On
sources Time tagging and general synchronization
Slave only
Off
Commu- Protection
LON Events
Time nication and control
SPA regulator functions
Min. pulse
GPS (Setting:
see SW time
SNTP Technical
IEC 103 manual Connected when GPS time is used
for differential protection or when
DNP
PTP is activated or when PMU
IRIG-B report is used
PPS
Synchronization for differential protection

(Echo mode or GPS)
Off Time
GPS regulator HW time
(fast or slow)
IRIG-B
PPS Diff.
A/D Merging
converter commu- units*
nication
*IEC 61850-9-2
Figure 559: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is changed in
the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock, the event is time
tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The hardware clock can thus run
independently.
The echo mode of the line differential protection function is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there
is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
Synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary when GPS or IRIG B 00X
with optical fiber, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The two clock systems are
synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special
feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start-up or at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS
timing. The fast and slow settings are also available on the local HMI.
The hardware and software clocks are not synchronized with each other if a GPS clock is used,
unless PTP (IEEE 1588) or IEEE1344 is used. When the hardware and software clocks are
synchronized with each other, the hwSyncSrc parameter is not used.
SyncLostMode is not required to set as Block/BlockonLostUTC when differential protection is based

on ECHO mode.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the GPS, PTP or IRIG B time signals, the deviation between the
external time system and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new start-up is
also required, for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is > 16 μs, the line differential protection function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock systems.
Time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with big time adjustment steps in the
beginning, and then smaller steps until a time deviation between the GPS time and the differential
time system of < 16 μs has been reached. The protection function is then enabled and the
synchronization remains in fast mode or switches to slow mode depending on the setting.
Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This prevents the hardware
clock to make too big a time steps (> 16 µs) emanating from the requirement of correct timing in the
line differential protection function.
Synchronization principle M11346-83 v4

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A function is
synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
Figure 560: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a
higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A
function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors. This
gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal
clock based on this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
25.1.4.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation M11346-57 v5
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one millisecond. The clock has a
built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2100.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Real-time clock at power off M11346-60 v3

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that will
provide 5 ppm accuracy for at least two days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED
may drift with maximum 0.5 second per day for two days, and after this the time will be lost.
Real-time clock at startup M11346-63 v4

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time
in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off
(will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 2003-01-01. For more information, please refer to
section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and "Binary synchronization example".
Time synchronization startup procedure M11346-66 v10

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS) gives an accurate
time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three following conditions happens with
each of the coming synchronization messages configured as FineSynchSource:
• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset compared
to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, which means,
for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a spike-filter
in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has a large
offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to
a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the clock
jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining
offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of
1000ppm it takes 500 seconds to remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the time. After this
has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than
10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy M11346-93 v7

The rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost (e.g. GPS
lost). In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 2 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the
rate accuracy is approximately 0.2 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant.
Time-out on synchronization sources M11346-96 v3

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time
synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR) that is reported
from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is such that one message can be lost without
getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
25.1.4.3 Synchronization alternatives M11346-3 v7
Four main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The synchronization
message is applied:
• via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time
• as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
• via GPS
• via IRIG-B or PPS
Synchronization via SNTP M11346-33 v9

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP
server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission
time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850
network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for
binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP provides complete time-information and shall normally be used as fine time synch source only.
SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v5

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches or
routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a
real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be
stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant
configuration is not recommended.
The IED supports SNTPv4 (RFC2030).
Synchronization via serial communication module (SLM) M11346-50 v7

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.
• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is, year,
month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The SLM module is located on the first analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS M11346-39 v5

The built-in GPS clock modules receive and decode time information from the global positioning
system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GTM).
Synchronization via binary input M11346-42 v6

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from, for
example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide
source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the
signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical
characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station
master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed
and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the
logical elements and timers available in the IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are
detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
en05000251.vsd
Figure 561: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received
within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute
pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact
bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact
bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms between the two most
adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example M11346-74 v5

An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid binary input is
applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time, and the minute
pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute pulse means that each pulse occurs one minute
after the previous pulse, so the first pulse is not used at all. The second pulse will probably be
rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time, and will reset the time so
that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED
will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup still keeps the time
since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed, for example, for an hour, the internal time will drift
by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is
automatically rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third
pulse will set the time if the time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time if the time offset is
small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If
the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.
Synchronization via IRIG-B module M11346-146 v8

The IRIG-B interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIG-B and PPS.
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in
this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted and the message is
sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the
information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC connector and
one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and
IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where
x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of 0-7.
“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via the
BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the
information must go into the module via the BNC connector.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If
the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has to
be set via PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-
B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains
year information and information of the time-zone.
PPS
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.
The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +/- 2 μs after another PPS
signal. The allowed jitter is <2 μs. If jitter is >2 μs a TSYNCERR signal will be generated.
25.1.4.4 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization GUID-6E384BDB-5598-4108-99B4-0B4A4E1828B2 v5
When process bus communication (IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol) is used, it is essential that the
merging units are synchronized with the hardware time of the IED (see Technical manual, section
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) ). To achieve this, PTP, PPS or IRIG-B can be
used depending of the facilities of the merging unit.
If the merging unit supports PTP, use PTP. If PTP is used in the IED and the merging unit is not PTP
capable, then synchronize the merging unit from the IED via a PPS out from the GTM. If PTP is used
in the IED and the merging unit cannot be synchronized from the IED, then use GPS-based clocks to
provide PTP synch as well as sync to the merging unit.
If synchronization of the IED and the merging unit is based on GPS, set the parameter
SyncLostMode to BlockOnLostUTC in order to provide a block of protection functions whenever the
global common time is lost.
If PTP is not used, use the same synchronization method for the HwSyncSrc as the merging unit
provides. For instance, if the merging unit provides PPS as synchronization, use PPS as HwSyncSrc.
If either PMU or LDCM in GPS-mode is used, that is, the hardware and software clocks are
connected to each other, HwSyncSrc is not used and other means to synchronize the merging unit to
the IED is required. Either FineSyncSource is set to the same source that the merging unit uses, or
the PPS output from the GTM module is used to synchronize the merging unit. If the PPS output from
the GTM module is used to synchronize the merging unit and PTP is not used, the IED does not
know how the merging unit is synchronized and the parameter SyncLostMode must be set to
NoBlock.
If the IED is used together with a merging unit and no time synchronization is
available, for example, in the laboratory test, the IED will synchronize to the SV data
stream. During the re-synchronization, the protection functions will be blocked once
a second for about 45 ms, and this will continue for up to 10 minutes. To avoid this,
configure PTP (IEEE 1588) to On for the access point where the merging unit is
configured.
25.1.4.5 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) GUID-4F2B68B8-CCC8-4173-A644-D1674D3146F8 v4
PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power utility
automation is a synchronization method that differs from SNTP, for instance, by providing much
better accuracy and by being not predefined. By not predefined is meant that it is not mandatory to
have a predefined synchronization tree, as the master (Grand Master) may shift.
Consider instead PTP as a synchronization grouping, i.e. all devices connected to the PTP group will
be synchronized to the same source or, if there is no external source the group will at least maintain
a common time. The group is synchronized by connecting one or more “Grand Master” clocks to it.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
The clocks can be part of the devices in the group or be specialized synchronization devices, as for
instance a GPS clock or similar. If several synchronization devices are connected to the group, the
“Best Master Algorithm” in the PTP protocol will assure that only one is the “Grand Master”. The IED
can act as a synchronization device and supply any synchronization source (like SNTP, SPA) as
clock input, that will synchronize the whole PTP group if there is no better source available in the
group. The IED can be connected to several groups and thereby connect them to each other, by
acting as a “Boundary Clock”. If PTP is “On” on several Access Points, the IED connects the Access
Points via a boundary clock. If PTP is “On” on redundant Access Points, the IED acts as a
“Transparent Clock”.
In a network there may be variety of possible masters that are connected together where the masters
by selection, using the priority of PTP (also called the Best Master Algorithm, or BMC) to determine
which of them that is the best master.
Priority order according to PTP
1. Priority 1
setting for each device, default 128, set to a lower number if this device shall be the Grand
Master.
2. GM class
given from the type of device, for instance “6” for a GPS clock, “7” for a GPS clock that has lost
synch during a hold-over time, “187” for a clock that can also be a slave.
3. GM Accuracy
how accurate the time is as a enumerated value
4. Offset Scaled Variance
calculated value that shows the oscillator quality
5. Priority 2
setting for each device, default 128, set to a lower number if this device is preferred to be the
Grand Master, if Priority 1, GM class, GM accuracy and OffsetScaledVariance are the same for
all devices.
6. Identity, that is the MAC-adress of the port.
MAC address of the access points can be seen in LHMI under the settings of
each access point.
To setup a PTP network with no obvious Grand Master, you simply connect the IEDs to one network
and configure PTP to be “on” on all IEDs. On one IED, the one from which you want to set the time in
the station, you set the Priority2 to 127, instead of default 128. Now, this IED has higher priority than
the rest of the IEDs and will thereby act as “Grand Master”.
PTP is not set from TIMESYNCGEN:1 General, as SNTP is. Instead PTP is set via a parameter of
each Access Point. For more information, refer to section Time synchronization.
It shall be noted that an IED synchronized to local time in a PTP network is seen as
local synchronized, if the grand master is not synchronized. If an IED is the grand
master without any synchronization from somewhere else, then this grand master
IED is seen as not synchronized. This is reflected in the time quality of the events in
IEC 61850 in the field ClockNotSynchronized.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
M12331-1 v9
Table 996: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging accuracy of the synchrophasor data ± 1 µs
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), ± 1.0 ms typically
events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
GUID-8AEB81D0-1731-46DF-A206-D2E758823575 v2
Table 997: Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent Clock
(TC)
Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports
25.2 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1
Use the four different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power system
conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the local HMI or
configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power
system scenarios.
25.2.2 Function block IP9661-1 v1
M12010-3 v3
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
Figure 562: ActiveGroup function block

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
25.2.3 Signals IP14073-1 v2
Table 998: ACTVGRP Input signals

ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
Table 999: ACTVGRP Output signals

GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled
25.2.4 Settings IP11026-1 v2
Table 1000: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6
M12008-8 v11
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one
of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting
group. Eight functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that information on
the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer,
remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding
input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED.
To do this PCM600 must be used.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent
or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group
has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to be activated,
group two will be the one activated.
Every time a setting is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. Activating or
deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this will also cause a pulse
on the SETCHGD output.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch
between.
The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC 61850 are enabled or not. Per
default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low level. If setting
changes via IEC 61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high. The setting changes
over IEC 61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the IEC 61850-8-1 configuration under
Main menu /Configuration /Communication /Station communication /IEC 61850-8-1 /IEC
61850-8-1 . Please refer to documentation for IEC 61850 for further details.
Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to
be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTVGRP
IOx-Bly1
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3 ACTGRP3 GRP3

Æ
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
Æ ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6
Æ ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
Figure 563: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active.
25.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3
When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode is indicated
by a flashing yellow Start LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to block/unblock arbitrarily
selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have their block input
active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is
removed and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and
configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test mode.
TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
Figure 564: TESTMODE function block
25.3.3 Signals IP9680-1 v2
Table 1001: TESTMODE Input signals

IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode
Table 1002: TESTMODE Output signals

TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test blocked
25.3.4 Settings IP11343-1 v2
Table 1003: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
BlockAllFunc Off - - On Block all functions when entering IED
On test mode
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
M12015-4 v11
Set the IED in test mode by
• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated. The
outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the “Test mode: being in On” state. If
the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING
signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Start LED will flash and all functions can be blocked
depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be unblocked
individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
M11828-3 v9
The deblocking operation will reset when exiting the test mode.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be
activated.
If the IED is restarted while set to IED TESTMODE by a binary input all functions will
be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might cause unwanted operations.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is
inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary
input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling
station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning or maintenance
test.
25.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system, not
only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
25.4.2 Settings GUID-3C49A222-FFE4-492B-A96C-9E9965FA2CB4 v2
Table 1004: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name

Technical manual
Basic IED functions

ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
25.5 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2
25.5.1 Functionality GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v10
Product information contains unchangeable data that uniquely identifies the IED.
Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics /IED status/
Product identifiers and under Main menu /Diagnostics/IED Status /Identifiers:
Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu /Diagnostics/IED status /
Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics /IED Status/Identifiers .
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType
Figure 565: IED summary

This information is very helpful when interacting with Hitachi Power grids product support (for
example during repair and maintenance).
25.5.2 Settings GUID-168CD792-8811-43B5-8760-74ED82DE17F7 v5
25.5.3 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v11
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the
case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems
and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They can only be
viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics /IED status/Product
identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL670
• ProductDef

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0

• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production numbers. For
every release number there can be one or more firmware versions depending on the small
issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0
1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware added
to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either changed
or enhanced in the product
• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line
protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
25.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool
(ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get
information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10
Figure 566: SMBI function block

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 1005: SMBI Input signals

BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
Table 1006: SMBI Output signals

BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 566, receives its inputs from the real
(hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT, and makes them available to the
rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole
block, can be given a user defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information
which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/output user
defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.
25.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application Configuration
Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get
information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED configuration.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10
Figure 567: SMBO function block
Table 1007: SMBO Input signals

BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 567, receives logical signal from
the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool
(SMT) or ACT. The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block,
can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be
connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
25.8 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI SEMOD55233-1 v2
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool
(ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). See the Application Manual for information
about how milliamp (mA) inputs from external transducers are physically connected to the MIM board
inputs used in an IED. Via the SMMI, the signals are brought into the IED configuration, for example,
to the input for ambient temperature compensation of the thermal overload function when there is a
need for ambient temperature compensation in the thermal function.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
SMMI
ÂI1 ÂI1
ÂI2 ÂI2
ÂI3 ÂI3
ÂI4 ÂI4
ÂI5 ÂI5
ÂI6 ÂI6
IEC05000440.vsd
Figure 568: SMMI function block
Table 1008: SMMI Input signals

AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
Table 1009: SMMI Output signals

AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 568, receives its inputs from the real
(hardware) mA inputs (the MIM boards) via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them available
to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, outputs, as well
as the whole block, can be given user-defined names which will be represented in SMT and ACT.
The outputs on SMMI can also be connected to the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(MVGAPC) for further use of the mA signals elsewhere in a substation system.
25.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block, analyses the
connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all relevant information from

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence
components and so on. This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this
SMAI block in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).
SEMOD54868-4 v12
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N
Figure 569: SMAI1 function block

Figure 569 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the four task time groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 where:
• n=1 in task group 1

The number of available task time groups depend on product and configuration. Up to four task time
groups are available in a product. The task time defines the execution repetition rate for the task time
groups. The task times valid for a product are found in PCM600, Application configuration tool.
The user should use 0.9 ms task time for connection to PMU functions.
SEMOD54997-4 v11
SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N
Figure 570: SMAI2 function block

Figure 570 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the four task time groups 1, 2, 3 or 4
where:
• n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

The number of available task time groups depend on product and configuration. Up to four task time
groups are available in a product. The task time defines the execution repetition rate for the task time
groups. The task times valid for a product are found in PCM600, Application configuration tool.
The user should use 0.9 ms task time for connection to PMU functions.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 1010: SMAI1 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 1011: SMAI1 Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample
Table 1012: SMAI2 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 1013: SMAI2 Output signals

G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
SEMOD130357-4 v3
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT
reference is then the reference.
Table 1014: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 1015: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 1016: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 1017: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three phases
and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 569 and figure 570. SMAI
outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS
value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all
outputs to value zero if BLOCK is TRUE (1). However, when the disturbance recorder is connected to
the single-phase outputs of SMAI, the sample data to the disturbance recorder will not be blocked.
The disturbance recorder bypasses SMAI to the sample data channels.
System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency settings in
the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input to the SMAI function
means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the four inputs
GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GxN (x = 1-12) is always calculated residual sum
from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant information
about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in
configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if
the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be
connected to AI3P.
25.9.5.1 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5
The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence voltage,
MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the positive sequence

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the frequency output value for 500 ms
and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal value. A signal is available for the SMAI
function to prevent operation due to non-valid frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of
UBase/√3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3,
where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage. Note that
phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2,
L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, the user is
advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage
input as shown in figure 571 to make SMAI calculate a positive sequence voltage.
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N
EC10000060-3-en.vsdx
Figure 571: Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection can be
used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence
voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other information
except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.
25.9.6 SMAI incorrect calculated phase-earth GUID-7AE6FC17-74AA-403B-8559-3B9D6DA1E433 v1
In some configurations SMAI may produce incorrectly calculated phase-earth values, when this is the
case, a hint will be available in LHMI with text as below.
Calculated phase-earth values are used from one or more SMAIs configured for phase-phase inputs,
without connection to N input.
However, this configuration, combined with unbalanced three-phase input, results in incorrect
calculated phase-earth values.
This in turn may result in maloperation of functions connected to SMAIs configured in this way, if the
function uses phase-earth based values.
Further, if SUM3PH is connected to such a SMAI, then its output values will be incorrect, and the
connected functions may maloperate.
To rectify this situation, revise the configuration from this perspective.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
25.10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-phase
analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
3PHSUM
BLOCK SPFCOUT
BLKGR1 AI3P
BLKGR2 AI1
REVROT AI2
^G1AI3P* AI3
^G2AI3P* AI4
Figure 572: 3PHSUM function block
Table 1018: 3PHSUM Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL
Table 1019: 3PHSUM Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks
SEMOD130361-4 v2
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 1020: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
Table 1021: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation
in % of UBase
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for analog
inputs function (SMAI). The BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
25.11 Primary system values PRIMVAL
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Primary system values PRIMVAL - -
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu /Configuration /
Power system / Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.
25.11.3 Settings
Table 1022: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)

Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

Technical manual
IED hardware
Section 26 IED hardware

26.1 Overview IP14270-1 v1
26.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display M15024-3 v6
IEC04000458-2-en.psd
Figure 573: 1/2 19” case with local HMI display.

Technical manual
IED hardware
26.1.2 Case from the front and rear sides IP16286-1 v2
M16105-3 v10
Table 1023: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
Rear position Module

X11 PSM
X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM
X301, X302, X303, X304 SFP
X305 LDCM
X306 LDCM or OEM
X3061, X3062 SFP if OEM is selected
X311: A, B, C, D SLM
X312 LDCM, IRIG-B, GTM
X313 LDCM, IRIG-B, GTM, RS485
X401 TRM
1/1A
2/1B
3/3A
4/3B
5/5A
6/5B
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V5 EN-US

Technical manual
IED hardware
SEMOD111882-4 v8

X11 PSM
X301, X302, X303, X304 SFP
X305 LDCM
X306 LDCM or OEM
X313 LDCM, IRIG-B, GTM, RS485
X401 TRM
1/1A
2/1B
3/3A
4/3B
5/5A
6/5B
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V5 EN-US

Technical manual
IED hardware
SEMOD111884-4 v7

X11 PSM
X301. X302, X303, X304 SFP
X305 LDCM
X306 LDCM or OEM
X313, X322, X323 LDCM, IRIG-B, GTM, RS485
X401 TRM 1
1/1A
2/1B
X411 TRM 2
3/3A
4/3B
5/5A
6/5B
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V5 EN-US

Technical manual
IED hardware
M16106-3 v10

X11 PSM
X31 and X32 etc. to X161 BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or
and X162 MIM
X301, X302, X303, X304 SFP
X305 LDCM
X306 LDCM or OEM
X313 LDCM, IRIG-B, GTM,
RS485
1/1A
X401 TRM
2/1B
3/3A
4/3B
5/5A
6/5B
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V5 EN-US

Technical manual
IED hardware
M16108-3 v10
Table 1027: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots

X11 PSM
X31 and X32 etc. to X131 BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or
and X132 MIM
X301, X302, X303, X304 SFP
X305 LDCM
X306 LDCM or OEM
X313, X322, X323 LDCM, IRIG-B, GTM,
RS485
1/1A
2/1B X401 TRM 1

3/3A
X411 TRM 2
4/3B
5/5A
6/5B
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V5 EN-US
26.2 Hardware modules IP14529-1 v1
26.2.1 Overview M11562-3 v11
Table 1028: Basic modules
Module Description
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary
voltage to all static circuits.
• An internal fail alarm output is available.
Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All information is processed
or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings
and communication. The module provides four SFPs for Ethernet
traffic.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LEDs, an LCD, a push button keyboard
and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal
circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs.

Technical manual
IED hardware
Module Description
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) The module converts the VT and CT analog signals from the TRM
to digital signals processed by the NUM. Carrier for
communication boards.
Note: TRM module is not included in SAM600-IO, so ADM
module is only used for internal communication carrier for IO
modules.
Combined backplane module (CBM) The module has two main purposes: to distribute supply voltages
from the PSM to the other modules and to act as a
communication carrier via its two buses, CompactPCI for fast I/O
and communication and CAN for slow I/O.
Universal backplane module (UBM) The module is used to interconnect the TRM and the ADM. It also
connects the NUM with the LHMI
Table 1029: Application specific modules
Module Description
Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command
outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2
fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal.
short range, medium rang, long range , X.21
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 Used for SPA/LON/DNP3/IEC 60870–5–103 communication.
communication modules (SLM)
Optical Ethernet module (OEM) Module used for Ethernet traffic. It has support for two SFPs.
Optical Ethernet SFP Small form factor pluggable for Ethernet communication
Galvanic RJ45 Ethernet SFP Small form factor pluggable for Ethernet communication
mA input module (MIM) Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated
channels
GPS time synchronization module (GTM) Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization and pulse
per second (PPS) output
Static output module (SOM) Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over output relays
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B) Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-width
modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals and one is
used for optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
26.2.2 Numeric module (NUM) IP14288-1 v2
26.2.2.1 Introduction M12643-3 v5
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module that handles all protection functions and
logic.
For communication with high speed modules, for example analog input modules and high speed
serial interfaces, NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. NUM is a compact PCI system card,
that is, it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
NUM provides up to 4 optical (type LC) or galvanic (type RJ45) Ethernet ports (one basic and three
optional).
Ethernet ports can be configured as four separate or in redundant mode PRP, HSR, or RSTP. The
combination supports two PRP, two HSR networks, or one RSTP network.

Technical manual
IED hardware
The numeric module (NUM) is a high-performance CPU module based on a dual-core processor. It is
6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is achieved via a compact PCI connector
and an euro connector.
The NUM has two PC-MIP expansion slots where mezzanine cards, such as the LDCM and OEM,
can be mounted. It also has four SFP cages for Ethernet communication. Up to four SFP
transceivers for optical 100BASE-FX or galvanic RJ45 100BASE-TX communication can be mounted
in the SFP cages.
Only SFP transceivers approved by Hitachi Power grids (1MRK005500) are

compatible with the SFP cages.
Application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory, and non-volatile RAM is used to
store log data.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor to keep track of the time when the
IED is not energized.
The NUM is passively cooled, which is possible due to its low power dissipation.
26.2.2.3 Technical data SEMOD55319-1 v1
SEMOD55310-2 v15
Table 1030: SFP - Optical ethernet port
Quantity Rated value

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and
redundant links for communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm, 50/125 mm multimode
OM1, OM2, OM3, OM4
Length 2km
Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety
Optical connector Type LC
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
Table 1031: SFP - Galvanic RJ45

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and
redundant links for communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
Type of cable Cat5e FTP
Connector Type RJ45
Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

Technical manual
IED hardware
GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3
Table 1032: NUM: Communication ports
NUM 4 Ethernet ports

1 Basic, 3 Optional
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45
Carrier modules supported OEM, LDCM
26.2.3 Power supply module (PSM) IP15594-1 v1
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between
the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
26.2.3.2 Design IP14278-1 v1
M6377-3 v2
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage
ranges see table 1033. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter
that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.
The DC input is protected against inverse polarity within the rated DC voltage range.
Connection diagram M6377-8 v3
Figure 576: PSM Connection diagram.
26.2.3.3 Technical data SEMOD52801-1 v1
M12286-1 v9
Table 1033: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
Supply interruption bridging time < 50 ms -

Technical manual
IED hardware
GUID-61AA4AEF-D09C-4BA6-9142-B5CA857C0574 v1
Table 1034: IRF - Internal Fail relay output

Max. system voltage 250 V DC
Min. load voltage 24 V DC
Number of outputs 1
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 4A
1.0 s 8A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum
capacitance of 0.2 μF: 20 A
0.2 s 8A
1.0 s
Making capacity for DC with L/R > 10 ms:
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 8A
Making capacity at resistive load
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 8A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A
(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R=100 ms 110 V/0.3 A
Breaking capacity for DC with resistive load 48 V/2 A
110 V/0.5 A
125 V/0.45 A
220 V/0.35 A
250 V/0.3 A
Max. operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000
Max. operations with resistive load 2000
Max. operations with no load 10000
26.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI) SEMOD56218-5 v4
Refer to section Local HMI for information.
26.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM) IP15581-1 v1
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary currents and
voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different
combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Ring lug or compr

Technical Manual, Bay Control REC670 Version 2.2 IEC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual, Bay Control REC670 Version 2.2 IEC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion® 670 SERIES

Bay control REC670

© 2017 - 2021 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved

Section 2 Available functions...................................................................................... 53

Section 3 Analog inputs...............................................................................................69

Section 4 Binary input and output modules.............................................................. 81

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ......................................................83

Bay control REC670 1

Section 6 Wide area measurement system.............................................................. 105

2 Bay control REC670

6.2.7.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels.......................................................136

Section 7 Differential protection............................................................................... 139

Section 8 Impedance protection............................................................................... 145

Section 9 Current protection..................................................................................... 149

Bay control REC670 3

9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ...................................................167

4 Bay control REC670

Bay control REC670 5

9.10.8 Operation principle.......................................................................................................... 240

6 Bay control REC670

9.15.1 Function revision history..................................................................................................264

Bay control REC670 7

9.18.7.1 Fundamental frequency signals behavior during an EF in a high-impedance

Section 10 Voltage protection..................................................................................... 299

8 Bay control REC670

10.3.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 333

Section 11 Unbalance protection................................................................................ 341

Bay control REC670 9

11.3.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 368

Section 12 Frequency protection................................................................................ 393

10 Bay control REC670

12.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 402

Section 13 Multipurpose protection............................................................................415

Section 14 System protection and control.................................................................439

Bay control REC670 11

14.1.7 Filter calculation example................................................................................................443

Section 15 Secondary system supervision................................................................445

12 Bay control REC670

15.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 468

Section 16 Control........................................................................................................ 477

Bay control REC670 13

16.2.6.4 Functional sequence description................................................................................500

14 Bay control REC670

16.3.9.4 Function block............................................................................................................ 547

Bay control REC670 15

16.4.8.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 586

16 Bay control REC670

Section 17 Scheme communication........................................................................... 655

Bay control REC670 17

17.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 656

18 Bay control REC670

Section 18 Logic........................................................................................................... 681

Bay control REC670 19

18.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................................................702

20 Bay control REC670

18.7.7.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 713

Bay control REC670 21

18.8.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT...................................................................... 724

22 Bay control REC670

18.13.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 735

Bay control REC670 23

18.19 Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL...........................................................................749

24 Bay control REC670

18.27.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 757